Narrative and Media PDF

This page intentionally left blank
Narrative and Media
Narrative and Media applies contemporary narrative theory to media texts, including
film, television, radio, advertising and print journalism. Drawing on research in
structuralist and post-structuralist theory, as well as functional grammar and image
analysis, the book explains the narrative techniques that shape media texts and offers
interpretive tools for analysing meaning and ideology. Each section looks at particular
media forms and shows how elements such as chronology, character and focalisation
are realised in specific texts.
As the boundaries between entertainment and information in the mass media con-
tinue to dissolve, understanding the ways in which modes of story-telling are seam-
lessly transferred from one medium to another, and the ideological implications of
these strategies, is an essential aspect of media studies.
Narrative and Media
Helen Fulton
with
Rosemary Huisman
Julian Murphet
Anne Dunn
cambridge university press
Cambridge, New York, Melbourne, Madrid, Cape Town, Singapore, So Paulo
Cambridge University Press

The Edinburgh Building, Cambridge cb2 2ru, UK
Published in the United States of America by Cambridge University Press, New York
www.cambridge.org
Information on this title: www.cambridge.org/9780521617420
Helen Elizabeth Fulton, Rosemary Elizabeth Anne Huisman, Julian Murphet and Anne
Kathleen Mary Dunn 2005
This publication is in copyright. Subject to statutory exception and to the provision of

relevant collective licensing agreements, no reproduction of any part may take place
without the written permission of Cambridge University Press.
First published in print format 2005
isbn-13 978-0-511-13240-7 eBook (EBL)

isbn-10 0-511-13240-9 eBook (EBL)
isbn-13 978-0-521-61742-0 paperback

isbn-10 0-521-61742-1 paperback
Cambridge University Press has no responsibility for the persistence or accuracy of urls
for external or third-party internet websites referred to in this publication, and does not
guarantee that any content on such websites is, or will remain, accurate or appropriate.
Contents
Figures and tables viii

Contributors x
Acknowledgements xi
1 Introduction: the power of narrative

Helen Fulton 1
Part 1 The basics of narrative theory 9

2 Narrative concepts
Rosemary Huisman 11
3 From structuralism to post-structuralism

Rosemary Huisman 28
Part 2 Film as narrative and visual mode 45

4 Stories and plots
Julian Murphet 47
5 Narrative time
Julian Murphet 60
6 Narrative voice
Julian Murphet 73
7 Point of view
Julian Murphet 86
v
vi Contents
8 Novel to film
Helen Fulton 96
9 Film narrative and visual cohesion

Helen Fulton 108
Part 3 Television: narratives and ideology 123

10 The genres of television
Anne Dunn 125
11 Television news as narrative

Anne Dunn 140
12 Aspects of narrative in series and serials

Rosemary Huisman 153
13 Soap operas and sitcoms

Part 4 Radio and print journalism 189

14 Structures of radio drama
Anne Dunn 191
15 Radio news and interviews

Anne Dunn 203
16 Print news as narrative

Helen Fulton 218
17 Analysing the discourse of news

Helen Fulton 245
Part 5 Popular print culture 269

18 Magazine genres
19 Advertising narratives
Contents vii
20 Conclusion: postmodern narrative and media

Helen Fulton 300
Glossary 307
Bibliography 313
Index 320
Figures and tables
Figures
2.1 Peirces triadic understanding of the sign pages 21
2.2 Differences of voice 26
16.1 Media will pay for trial collapse (Guardian (UK),
16 September 2004) 222
16.2 Garcon! Youre slow, surly and at last youve admitted it (Guardian
(UK), 16 September 2004) 227
16.3 Town living in fear over mining deal (Sunday Telegraph (Sydney),
29 August 2004) 235
16.4 Roosters claim NRL minor premiership (Daily Telegraph (Sydney),
6 September 2004) 236
17.1 Americans see war as mistake (Weekly Telegraph (UK),
29 December4 January 2005) 248
17.2 Pregnant women urged to take iodine (Sun-Herald (Sydney),
5 December 2004) 250
17.3 Moving forward . . . riot police charge pro-independence
demonstrators outside the Basque parliament
(Sydney Morning Herald, 12 January 2005) 261
18.1 Cover of Who Weekly, 8 October 2001 282
18.2 Cover of New Idea, 6 October 2001 283
19.1 Advertisement: Giorgio perfume (Australian Womens Weekly,
October 2001, p. 93) 289
19.2 Advertisement: Schwarzkopf Extra Care (Australian Womens
Weekly, October 2001, p. 75) 292
19.3 Advertisement: Chrysler car (Australian Womens Weekly, October
2001, p. 9) 293
viii
Figures and tables ix
Tables
2.1 Cortazzis transcription of the most typical narrative structure 25
3.1 Levi-Strauss: paradigm and syntagm in the myth of Oedipus 34
3.2 Storyline and plotline 37
3.3 Genettes set of categories for analysing narrative 41
8.1 Novel and film 99
9.1 Summary of focalisation 115
9.2 Technical devices 116
9.3 Types of edit 122
15.1 Triple J news opening 210
15.2 Triple M news opening 211
15.3 2UE news opening 212
15.4 2BL 702 news opening 213
17.1 Constructing a public idiom in news journalism 253
Contributors
Helen Fulton has recently been appointed Professor of English at the University
of Wales, Swansea, after teaching for a number of years at the University of Sydney.
Her teaching and research areas include grammar, discourse analysis, narrative
theory and medieval studies.
Rosemary Huisman is Honorary Associate Professor in the Department of
English, University of Sydney, where she was also Head of Semiotics until 2003.
Her research brings together contemporary literary, semiotic and linguistic theory
in the exploration of textual production and interpretation in different media, dis-
courses and genres. A practising poet, she has also produced major publications
on the semiotics of poetry, from Beowulf to contemporary Australian writing.
Julian Murphet lectures in the Department of English, University of Sydney,
where he teaches American literature, film and critical theory. He is the author
of two books on contemporary American literature, and has published widely in
postmodern culture and the interrelations of visual and literary media.
Anne Dunn is Senior Lecturer in the Department of Media and Communications
at the University of Sydney. Before embarking on an academic career, she spent
more than twenty years in commercial and publicly owned media, as a writer,
researcher, journalist, producer, director and manager, including freelance work
with magazines and newspapers. She is the current president of the Australian
and New Zealand Communication Association.
x
Acknowledgements
The authors would like to thank the following people and publications who have
given permission for work to be reproduced in this book: Australian Womens
Weekly; Daily Telegraph (Sydney); Clare Dyer/The Guardian for Media will pay for
trial collapse; Lucy Gough, The Mermaids Tail; New Idea cover of 6 October 2001;
Jon Henley/The Guardian for Garcon! Youre slow, surly and at last youve admit-
ted it; Alec Russell, Americans see war as mistake copyright
C Telegraph Group
Limited 2004; Ben Sills/Reuters for Basque nationalists issue challenge to

Madrid; Sydney Morning Herald; Rhett Watson / Sunday Telegraph (Sydney) for
Town living in fear over mining deal; cover of Who magazine, 8 October 2001,
reproduced with permission of Who magazine, Time Inc.; Miranda Wood for Preg-
nant women urged to take iodine.
xi
Chapter 1
Introduction: the power of narrative
Helen Fulton
In a world dominated by print and electronic media, our sense of reality is increas-
ingly structured by narrative. Feature films and documentaries tell us stories about
ourselves and the world we live in. Television speaks back to us and offers us
reality in the form of hyperbole and parody. Print journalism turns daily life into
a story. Advertisements narrativise our fantasies and desires.
As long as human beings have had the power of speech, they have been speaking
in narratives, goes the theory (OShaughnessy & Stadler 2002: 127). Yet there is
nothing natural or universal about narrative, which is a form of representation.
As such, it is historically and culturally positioned to turn information and events
into structures that are already meaningful to their audiences. Since the media
are now the major controllers of narrative production and consumption in the
Western world, the stories that seem the most natural are the ones to which the
media have accustomed us.
This book is about the ways in which contemporary media structure narrative
and how the processes of production and signification that characterise media nar-
ratives can be theorised. Beginning with a historical survey of narrative theory,
which focuses on structuralism and its post-structuralist responses (chapters 2
and 3), the book then examines film as a major producer of narrative (chap-
ters 4 to 9). These chapters look at the ways narrative elements such as plot,
character, voice and point of view are constructed and manipulated in feature
films to produce different kinds of meanings and to address audiences in specific
ways.
The sections on television (chapters 10 to 13) pick up the concept of genre
and the ways in which television genres are distinguished by aspects of narrative
1
2 Introduction
construction, particularly the uses of space and time. Two chapters on radio
(chapters 14 and 15) emphasise the narrative possibilities of sound, rather than
vision, as a semiotic code in which reality can be constructed. The final sections
(chapters 16 to 19) examine the ways in which information is translated into the
discourses and genres of news and magazines, and the semiotic possibilities of
multimodal texts that use both written language and image.
Many of the concepts and terms appearing in bold type throughout the book are
gathered together into the glossary for reference. Some of these concepts, as well
as ideas and examples, occur more than once in different chapters, often deployed
or theorised in different ways. The idea of genre, for example, is discussed at var-
ious stages in the book as a discursive construct, an industry marketing tool and
an effect of technological strategies. By contextualising narrative within a range
of analytical traditions and practices related to media texts, we hope to max-
imise the possibilities for deconstructing this most pervasive of representational
systems.
The domain of this book is cultural and media theory. Its theoretical approach
is broadly post-structuralist, which understands meaning, or the process of signi-
fication, as socially and culturally produced and situated. Post-structuralism itself
is a set of theories about the relationships between text and meaning; in order to
be realised as a useful analytical system, these theories need to be activated by at
least a basic understanding of linguistic and visual signs. Drawing mainly on the
linguistic theory of Michael Halliday, this book provides a set of techniques and
terms for the semiotic analysis of media texts. At the same time, it offers a con-
sideration of industry-related issues that affect the production and consumption
of media texts.
Semiotics has had a chequered career in the burgeoning field of cultural stud-
ies, to which media studies are normally assigned, or by which they have been
appropriated. The idea of semiotics as a method of analysis is perennially popu-
lar in media and cultural studies, but the large majority of its devotees ignore its
inescapable grounding in language. Routinely reduced to such a vague and over-
simplified form as to be useless, semiotics, fully realised as the study of linguistic
and visual signs positioned in a cultural and historical context, still remains the
only systematic approach to explaining how, rather than just what, texts mean.
If cultural studies is not to disappear into a vacuum of superficial rhetoric and
ambit claims about the hegemonic function of the media, it has to be buttressed
by a theorised approach to language, signification and the production of ideology.
One of the aims of this book is to provide an introduction to such an approach
and to demonstrate its potential for media consumers and practitioners alike.
There are a number of common themes that recur throughout the different
sections of the book and represent the theoretical positioning of its authors. The
first is the idea of narrative as cultural production, something that is deliberately
produced and sold as an economic commodity. The second concerns the audiences
of narrative and how they are positioned as the subjects of story. Finally, the
The power of narrative 3
Barthesian idea of stories as myths we tell about ourselves and our social order,
and how we are positioned ideologically, forms a detectable undercurrent to many
of the chapters. These ideas can be elaborated and summarised briefly here.
Narrative as cultural production
It is a truism, but nevertheless true, that all media have a primarily economic func-
tion. Their job is to produce and disseminate commodities that can be bought
and sold. Even state-owned media, such as the ABC in Australia and the BBC
in Britain, although not dependent on advertising revenue, compete for market
share of audiences to guarantee their funding. They also earn income from sell-
ing programs and associated merchandise such as CDs, DVDs, videos and other
products, including books and clothing, which are related to their broadcast out-
put. Commodification was theorised by Marx, who used the terms use value and
exchange value to distinguish between the function of an object and the value it
acquires as a commodity in the marketplace. In terms of films essential function
as a medium of entertainment, a feature film by an unknown director might have
much the same use value as a movie directed by Francis Ford Coppola, but the
exchange values of the two films will be vastly different. Most media products
have an exchange value disproportionate to their use value because they are not
simply used by audiences (paying and non-paying) but exchanged as commodi-
ties by producers, distributors, advertisers and other kinds of customers in the
media marketplace.
The economic function of the media, to generate profits, undermines the idea
of narrative as some kind of innate or universal structure common to all humanity.
Narrative in the media becomes simply a way of selling something. This means
that the economic structure of media industries determines their output, the kinds
of stories they can tell. The feature film industry makes money from distribution,
box-office sales and sponsorship, increasingly in the form of product placements
as a kind of indirect advertising. Not only did the brand name of Calvin Klein
appear on the visible waistband of Michael J. Foxs underpants in Back to the
Future (1985), but also it then became the subject of an ongoing joke in the film
when his companion assumed this was his own name and began calling him
Calvin. Only money can buy that kind of publicity.
The consequence of this economic structure is that film narratives have to be
commercial; that is, they have to fit a standard pattern and set of expectations,
or what is often termed a genre. Genres themselves are not natural or inevitable,
but have a practical function: to create a market and an audience. Movie reviews,
in print or in TV programs, work to place films into generic categories for
us so that we can decide which ones to see, although our choice is already
restricted by what is available and what producers have decided that we want to
see.
4 Introduction
Generically coded films are not only easier to sell to audiences but are also
easier to associate with merchandise and spin-off products such as books, toys
and clothing. Writing about the Hannibal Lecter films as a franchise, Australian
journalist Sandra Hall said (jokingly, one hopes): We dont yet have a line in
Hannibal steak knives . . . but give him one more film and a cookbook will surely
follow (Sydney Morning Herald, 2627 October 2002). Cross-over films, such as
the Lord of the Rings trilogy, which were produced and edited in such a way as to
fit into both the fantasy and childrens genres, both of which provide lucrative
pathways to related merchandise, are highly prized and much sought-after by
commercial film studios.
Unlike film, commercial television makes its money almost exclusively from
paid advertising in designated and clearly marked ad breaks in the program-
ming. TV programs are therefore designed and generically identified to bring
together mass audiences of particular demographic types, which can then be
sold to advertisers who want to reach such audiences. Since audience sectors
are defined and distinguished on the basis of their assumed VALS (values and
lifestyle), television narratives have to display and reinforce the same sets of VALS
as the desired audience. It is no accident that advertisements for toys and fast
food dominate childrens programs, or that advertisements for gardening products
and funeral homes tend to cluster during traditional detective mystery dramas.
It is not that demographically distinct audiences exist, sitting patiently in their
homes waiting to be addressed, rather that generically coded programs and their
associated advertisements call such audiences into being through their narrative
strategies.
The print media newspapers and magazines are also driven largely by
advertising revenue, including classified advertising. They therefore need to cre-
ate media products that do not simply cater to readers and consumers but
which will attract advertising around, and sometimes into, the stories themselves.
Advertorials embed product promotion within the editorial: that is, the actual
stories, which are visually coded, with large headlines, bylines, columns and pic-
tures, to look like the real content of the newspaper or magazine. Many feature
articles about celebrities and their lifestyles are coded to look like news but are in
fact indirect advertisements for their latest film or book, together with the various
brands of clothing or cosmetics that they apparently use. Special supplements or
weekly regular features, such as good food guides or technology sections, are
included not merely as a service to readers, or even as mechanisms to attract and
retain more readers, but mainly to provide a tailor-made venue for advertisers to
promote specific types of products.
Media narratives do not exist, then, simply to entertain us, the consumer,
to tell us stories in order to amuse us, or to provide us with a service and a
range of choices from which we can make our selection. They are constructed
in order to support the huge business empires that run most of the media out-
lets, geared specifically to creating profits from the commodification of media
products.
Constructing the audience
When we consider the audiences for media texts, it seems obvious that in a literal
sense they are people like us, watching television, going to the movies, buying
newspapers. But from a theoretical perspective, an audience is called into being
by a particular discourse, or interpellated by the text, to use Althussers term. In
other words, an audience doesnt exist until a text addresses it; and by the same
token, texts dont simply address a pre-existing and knowable audience. They
actually construct a virtual audience, defined by Pertti Alasuutari as a discursive
construct produced by a particular analytic gaze (Alasuutari 1999: 6). The virtual
audience is the audience that is sold to advertisers. Whether or not the virtual
audience is then realised as an actual group of consumers who buy the products
is one of the great gambles of the free market.
As actual individuals who use media products, the extent to which we feel our-
selves to be part of an audience depends on whether or not we feel addressed by
a media text. Does it speak to us directly? Does it use a language we recognise as
ours? Do we feel included in the world view and attitudes articulated by the text?
Magazines and television genres, including advertising, use narrative to construct
very distinct audiences, segmented mainly by age and gender, but these are vir-
tual audiences who might not correspond exactly to literal audiences. Editorial
discourses in womens magazines might call up a virtual readership of young
women, while the sexualised discourses of the advertising might speak to a literal
audience of young men.
A literal mass audience is unknowable, beyond small groups of individuals,
and even then empirical and ethnographic studies of audience reception, using
focus groups or real people in their homes, can be made to work only by assuming
that individual readers are fully aware of their reading practices and processes of
signification. On the other hand, by looking at the discursive relationship between
text and constructed audience, it is possible to assess the ideological role of media
narratives in producing the empowered readers that we imagine ourselves to be.
As the audiences for media products, we are discursively positioned by media
texts as sovereign consumers; that is, consumers who have the power to make
our own purchasing decisions and choices, pandered to by a subservient market
eager to win our patronage. This positioning, or subjectivity, is manifested most
clearly in advertising, which tells the same basic story: there is a problem that
can be solved by the product. The problem might be material, such as stains on
our clothing that need to be removed by a stain-remover, or it might be a crisis
of identity, such as the lack of a partner or the onset of middle-age (both to be
controlled with cosmetics or a new car). In all cases, and regardless of the coded
demographic of the advertisement, the audience is positioned as freely choosing
individual consumers, consciously making choices about how to improve their
lives.
Because of the connection between media narratives and economic impera-
tives, most media narratives work persuasively in the same way as advertisements,
6 Introduction
to interpellate the audience as coherent and unified individuals empowered to

make appropriate choices on their own behalf. The crucial factor is freedom, a
concept that regularly occurs in many media narratives: free choice, free competi-
tion, free market and a free subject of discourse who can move directly from sign to
referent, from text to meaning, without pausing for signification. Media texts
therefore appear to be both denotative, offering us a window on reality, and con-
notative, asking us to recognise ourselves as individuals who choose to participate
in a certain lifestyle. But because the reality we are shown is itself constructed,
even the denotative level is also connotative, persuading us that we need to change
in order to match up to the reality around us. From a post-structuralist perspec-
tive, denotation and connotation are effects of discourse, mediating reality in
different ways but both equally detached from it.
Contemporary cultural studies tend to reinforce the ideology of the sovereign
consumer by emphasising the power of the individual to make their own readings
(Fiske 1987: 236). This assumption is based on the theory that individuals repre-
sent a single coherent subjectivity, that they know who they are and can choose
how to respond to a text. This subjectivity is, however, an effect of discourse. We
are discursively encouraged by media texts to think of ourselves as singular, uni-
fied, individual, able to resist dominant or preferred meanings and to negotiate
our own. This is the kind of stable subjectivity constructed for us by most media
narratives, because once placed in this subject position we are ready to be sold
something. It is a position that invites us to read texts superficially, just for enter-
tainment, to enjoy some and reject others without any effort of analysis or inter-
pretation, in order to confirm our status as freely choosing private individuals.
We read media narratives as consumers which is how we have been positioned.
Narrative as myth
Roland Barthes articulated the importance of language in the formation of ideol-

ogy when he described myth as a type of speech . . . a mode of signification,
which he located within semiology, the science of signs (Easthope & McGowan
1992: 14). For Barthes, myths represented a metalanguage, a second-order or
connotative discourse that enables us to speak about the first-order or denotative
level of signification. Myths therefore function as symbolic, ironic or metaphor-
ical commentaries on what we understand to be literal meanings, offering us
alternative readings imbued with ideological flavour. It is easy to see how media
narratives, particularly those of film and television, might operate as myths, the
stories in which we encode truths about ourselves and our society.
From a post-structuralist viewpoint, there is a major theoretical flaw with
much of Barthes early work, and that is his distinction between denotation and
connotation, or first-order and second-order systems of signification. Although it
is undoubtedly logical that one signified can also stand as the signifier of another
sign, this process does not operate merely on two or three levels, but as a chain of
signification limited only by social usage. In other words, there is no denotation
but only connotation, since denotative language appearing objective, unmedi-
ated, reflective is as ideologically positioned as language that we would regard
as highly connotative and subjective. The belief in a denotative level of expression
is itself a piece of ideology.
The Barthesian idea of myth can therefore be reinterpreted simply as narra-
tivised ideology, the formulaic articulation and naturalisation of values, truths and
beliefs. What media narratives achieve is precisely this kind of mythologising, the
presentation of ideological positions as if they were natural and normative. Yet it
is the Barthesian model of the two levels of meaning, the literal and the symbolic,
that structures most media narratives, either by drawing attention to double lay-
ers of meaning, as in feature films, or by an apparent omission of second-order
meaning, as in objective news journalism. In analysing media texts, we need to
interrogate the ideological myths that are told at every level.
The mythical function of most media narratives is to return us to a stable sub-
jectivity, to remind us of who we are and what reality is. Classic Hollywood movies
and realist television dramas reinforce such myths as the existence of innate
morality and gender, the natural opposition between good and bad, and between
male and female, as clearly defined and unproblematic categories. Their narra-
tive structures assert myths, or ideologies, of the episodic nature of life, where nat-
ural or inevitable resolutions are reached and points of closure can be achieved.
News reporting mythologises, and therefore normalises, the existence of univer-
sal truths and an objective reality that can be retrieved and represented without
ideological mediation. By constructing these powerful narratives of who we are,
the media separate us from them, those others who dont share or understand
the stories we know and believe to be true.
Media myths are, by and large, the myths of late capitalism in Western soci-
eties, which function to produce the coherent subjects of capitalist economies. As
subjects, we are prepared to keep working to maintain the status quo of power as
long as we have access to the media products and consumer items that construct
and reinforce our identities. Media narratives tell us stories about who we think
we are, and in so doing they skilfully reproduce the freely choosing consumers of
global capitalism. Only by understanding the mythic nature of these narratives,
constructed in language and image as signifying systems, can we begin to choose
whether to accept the seamless identity laid out for us or to find its contradictions
and resist.
Part 1
The basics of narrative theory
Chapter 2
Narrative concepts
Rosemary Huisman
Narrative is realised in many different media. In this book we look at narratives

in film, in television, in radio and in various media of popular print culture. These
could be called mass media in that all are assumed to be shown or broadcast to
a scattered and diverse audience.
I want to begin here, however, with a narrative in a very different medium: a
handwritten letter from one person to another person. This is a much simpler
textual situation than that of many of the media texts we will later consider,
yet, in an introductory way, we can identify certain features of this letter and its
relation to its social context as exemplifying more general concepts of narrative.
In the comments following the letter, the concepts, when first mentioned, are in
bold. In the latter part of this chapter and in the next, chapter 3, many of these
concepts are more generally described (see also the glossary, at the end of the
book).
Introducing some concepts of narrative
In 1830 Isabella Parry went to live at Port Stephens on the edge of the settled
areas north of Sydney, capital of what was then the British colony of New South
Wales. Isabellas husband Edward had been knighted for his involvement in Arctic
exploration; now he was appointed Commissioner of the Australian Agricultural
Company. Isabellas letters home have been preserved. On 19 December 1831 she
wrote to her mother in England:
11
12 The basics of narrative theory
We have lately experienced another disadvantage of a newly cultivated coun-

try, and have witnessed what I have only heard of before, and read in Coopers
novels I mean the burning of the woods, and it is, indeed, a fearful and extra-
ordinary sight. For the last fortnight, the whole country around has been in a
blaze, and between this place and the Gloucester, a distance of more than seventy
miles, there is scarcely a blade of grass left: it is one continued black plain, and the
stems of the trees are all scorched and blackened. We were in hopes we should
have escaped, near the house, but, after two or three days, we saw there was
but little prospect of our avoiding the general destruction. Just as we were com-
ing home from church, last Sunday, a man came running to say that the fire
had reached his house, and was rapidly approaching our garden. Immediately
all hands were sent off to save the poor garden, and, I am happy to say, suc-
ceeded, though it was only by a few minutes. Edward made them set fire to a
broad space all round, and this was only just completed when the fire reached
the place we had burnt, and, finding no food to supply its flames, turned off in
another direction.
(Clarke & Spender 1992: 45)
What is Isabella doing here? Clearly she is telling her mother a story. She and
her husband have had an actual experience. Now she is telling that experience
in language, the principal semiotic means humans have for signifying meaning.
Because she is in Australia and her mother is in England she uses the written mode
of language. If she and her mother were together she could have told her story in
the spoken mode. But even in speaking directly to someone in the same location,
the story of the experience is obviously not the same thing as the experience
itself; the medium always mediates the message.
Isabella also refers to her experience of other peoples stories of similar events,
from both factual and fictional sources. Longer-term inhabitants of the colony
have told her of their experience of the burning of the woods: in [we] have
witnessed what I have only heard of before, hear implies the spoken mode of
language. And she has also read such stories in Coopers novels. The author
referred to here must be the American James Fenimore Cooper, born in 1789,
whose books, The Pioneers (1822) and The Last of the Mohicans (1826), feature
terrible forest fires, which threaten the small settlements of the American frontier.
(I will return to the mythology purveyed in these novels.)
The novel has been the narrative genre most typically studied in traditional
narrative studies; it is a genre of the discourse of prose fiction or, more generally,
of literary discourse. Isabellas text here is an instance (an instantiation) of the
genre of letter, a genre that can be used in different discourses. Here, writing to her
mother, the discourse is personal, a personal letter (compare a business letter).
Similarly her conversations with other colonists could be classified as personal
discourse, although realised in a different genre (that of conversation) and mode
(the spoken mode). The names we give texts as known objects are usually the
Narrative concepts 13
names of genres: she sent her mother a letter, they were having a conversation,
she had been reading a novel.
A distinction introduced by the French linguist Emile Benveniste was that
between the speaking subject and the subject of speech. The speaking subject
is identified with the producer of the text, while the subject of speech refers to the
first-person pronouns actually in the text, I, we and their oblique cases (me, us
and so on) (Silverman 1983: 4353). When the text is one we understand to be a
narrative, then the producer of that text can be called a narrator. For her letter,
Isabella is both the speaking subject, the narrator, and the subject of speech,
the one to whom the pronouns in the narrative refer. She is a first-person nar-
rator, being one of the characters in her own story. (Characters are sometimes
referred to as narrative existents.) But compare this simple letter with a novel
or the script of a play. Then first-person pronouns, the subject of speech, will be
used in the dialogue of characters to refer to themselves. Moreover, for the novel,
while both the narrator (who tells the narrative) and the author (who writes the
narrative, including the narrators role in it) are speaking subjects, the two can-
not simply be equated (the author Dickens is not Pip, who narrates the story of
Great Expectations). In the play or film, the narrator might be effaced altogether,
or occasionally present (as in the film voice-over). This is a complex area of
narrative theory.
In the letter as we have it, Isabella is the narrator of the story. A story is always
mediated from some perspective, the phenomenon of focalisation. Isabella tells
the story very much from her own perspective so she is the focaliser as well as
the narrator, although frequently signifying herself and her husband as a unified
subject: we is a frequent grammatical subject in her letter. A subtle distinction
here is that Isabella is the narrator in the present of writing her letter, but she
relates the past experience from her perspective on it at that time. Her focalisation
is in the past, her narration is in the present. Literary genres are more likely to
distinguish narrator clearly from focaliser, as when a third-person narrator tells
a story from the perspective of a character.
Temporality is usually seen as an essential ingredient of narrative. In Isabellas
story, we see the importance to her of the temporal organisation of actions or
events. She tells a simple chronological sequence, in which the linguistic sequence
signifies the sequence in which she experienced the events. Time meanings prolif-
erate, realised, for example, in adverbs (lately), in verbal groups (have witnessed,
is, was approaching), in prepositional phrases (for the last fortnight), in a clause
(when the fire reached the place we had burnt). However, all events are not equal
in Isabellas eyes, and it is interesting to see how she paces her narrative so as to
give most prominence to the actions or events that she, as narrator, saw as the cli-
max of her story. Gerard Genette (whose work is discussed further in chapter 3)
used the concept of duration to describe steadiness of speed in the narrative:
the speed of a narrative will be defined by the relationship between a duration
(that of the story, measured in seconds, minutes, hours, days, months, and years)
and a length (that of the text, measured in lines and in pages) (Genette 1980:
878). I find the term pacing helpful to describe relative changes of duration in
the narrative, as exemplified in the following discussion.
In her first sentence, Isabella introduces this story cohesively by implying that
previous stories of colonial life have been told to her mother: another disadvan-
tage one disadvantage in the context of others. She refers to stories heard from
others, novels read, in the past. Her placing of this particular experience in a larger
context of experience is like a chapter in a novel or even an episode in a television
series. The structure of this sentence is unusual. It begins with an evaluation of the
event as a disadvantage (a device that might be intended to promote a particular
emotional context of reception, that of sympathetic anticipation from her mother
reading), tells us that this is Isabellas first direct encounter with the event (the ref-
erence to others stories and novels), only then, finally, tells us what event is being
referred to, and concludes with a strong statement of her emotional response to
seeing the fire, as a general opinion (not it was a fearful sight but it is a fearful
sight). This first sentence is a mini-narrative summary with a delayed climax
what the event was but it has the temporality of Isabellas mental understanding
surrounding the event, not her physical experience of it, for there is no sense of
chronological sequence. The sentence is telling us about Isabellas past mediated
experience (from conversations and novels) and present opinion, not about the
event that takes place in between. In the terminology of linguistic accounts of
narrative structure we could call this the abstract.
Isabellas telling of the particular event begins with the second sentence, and it is
from here that Genettes notion of duration is helpful. The next two sentences (the
orientation) condense time the events and description of the last two weeks are
compacted. The area around is blackened, they lose hope of avoiding destruction
of their own home. Then in the fourth sentence, Isabellas storytelling slows down
to a specific day and time and place (the complication), Just as we were coming
home from church, last Sunday, and the most specific detail of the story is given,
a man came running to say that the fire had reached his house, and was rapidly
approaching our garden. Notice the (past) continuous forms of the verbal groups
(came running, was approaching) the meaning of this verb form is that an
action is in progress, is going on. This is comparable, in verbal terms, to a camera
tracking an action the duration is extended over the action. Note, too, that
Isabella projects the mans speech, although indirectly (direct speech would be: a
man came running to say, The fire has reached my house!). This is the climax
of her tale in a serial cliffhanger (like the old Saturday afternoon film serial or
the contemporary soap opera season) the episode would break off at this point.
Isabella continues her story with the narrative order in the chronological
sequence of events, but in summary (she does not describe each individual action
in the burning of the firebreak) except for the climactic temporal detail. The time
of completing the firebreak and the time of the fire reaching the firebreak are
emphatically equated at a single moment in time: and this [the firebreak] was only
just completed when the fire reached the place we had burnt . . . (the resolution
of the narrative structure). The editors of Life Lines (Clarke & Spender 1992), the
collection in which this extract from Isabella Parrys letter appears, break off the
extract at this point. I imagine Isabellas letter continues, but the editors judged
this extract, as a text, to be a complete narrative episode. This is both because
of the cohesion of the text (it is internally cohesive about the one subject matter,
the fire) and because the text exhibits a recognised narrative structure of abstract
(here including evaluation), orientation, complication and resolution, noticeably
marked by the change of pacing in the narration.
One choice of language particularly marks Isabella as English in her lexicon.
This is her phrase the burning of the woods. In Modern Australian, that could only
be bushfire. Isabella had grown up in England, and came to Australia in 1829,
two years before she wrote this letter. Other visitors of about that time noticed
the local usage. In 1833 W. H. Breton wrote, in Excursions in New South Wales,
The only convenient way of travelling in the bush is on horseback. Bush is the
term commonly used for the country per se: he resides in the Bush, implies that
a person does not reside in, or very near, a town. It also signifies a forest (from the
entry under bush in A Dictionary of Australian Colloquialisms, Wilkes 1978: 65).
James Fenimore Cooper was aware of the difficulties of describing natural
phenomena in the New World to readers in the Old. At the end of chapter 38 of
his novel The Pioneers (1822), he appended the following footnote:
The probability of a fire in the woods similar to that here described has been
questioned. The writer can only say that he once witnessed a fire in another part
of New York that compelled a man to desert his wagon and horses in the highway,
and in which the latter were destroyed. In order to estimate the probability of
such an event, it is necessary to remember the effects of a long drought in that
climate and the abundance of dead wood which is found in a forest like that
described. The fires in the American forests frequently rage to such an extent
as to produce a sensible effect on the atmosphere at a distance of fifty miles.
Houses, barns, and fences are quite commonly swept away in their course.
This is quite an extraordinary intrusion into the narrative diegesis; the novelist
breaks into the fictional world of the novel to give factual information.
Narrative and the structuring of experience
In scholarship since the 1970s, the term narrative has been taken up in various
ways. Some are to do with the detailed examination of the narrative of an individ-
ual text, such as this discussion of Isabella Parrys letter so far. This has been the
traditional focus of literary studies. Some, however, are more concerned with so-
called metanarratives (after the work of Jean-Francois Lyotard 1984), the grand
master stories (I use the patriarchal term deliberately) dominant in a culture.

These are the stories, or myths, through which a culture tells itself its ideology,
its idea of what is natural in its social order. A critique of such narratives (such
as those of class, ethnicity and gender) has been the focus of cultural studies. I
want now to discuss this understanding of narrative both in regard to Isabella
Parrys letter and, at greater length, in regard to the novels of James Fenimore
Cooper. These texts are distant in time from the contemporary media with which
the remainder of this book deals, but not so distant from some myths that still
have contemporary currency.
In the first paragraph of the previous section, I wrote: the story of the experi-
ence is obviously not the same thing as the experience itself; the medium always
mediates the message. But you could also say that your understanding of the expe-
rience itself is structured by the kinds of stories with which you are familiar. For
example, you might not be familiar with the Old English poem Beowulf, in which
a monster Grendel invades a Danish hall to eat warriors, and Isabella Parry did
not know it (the first edition with a Modern English translation appeared in 1837),
yet her choice of language personifies the fire as just such a greedy monster: [the
fire] finding no food to supply its flames, turned off in another direction. Older
than Beowulf, this tale of the monster who comes out of the wilderness to devour
humans in their small civilised settlements resonates with the stories of folk tale,
the sense of precarious social order threatened by natural chaos. In Isabellas
account, notice her phrase newly cultivated country. And it is our garden, the
poor garden, which is threatened by the fire. This is a colonial economy, in which
what is valuable is equated with what has been newly established and controlled.
Moreover this colony, with its convicts and free settlers, has a clearly distin-
guished class structure. The power relation of Sir Edward Parry, Isabellas hus-
band, to others in the situation is clearly told in the choice of language. In all
hands were sent off we see the rhetorical figure of synecdoche (the part for the
whole) in the word hands for people it is indeed as hands that these people
are useful to Isabella and her husband in this crisis. In the passive voice were
sent off, the someone who has sent the people off is not explicit in the grammar,
although from the later causative verbal group, Edward made them set fire to a
broad space . . . we can infer it was Edward, or a deputy representing his power.
Those who give orders and those who are ordered are clearly distinguished in the
narrative when the actions of fighting the fire are told, but, in the fortunate result,
all are conflated into one social unit in the first-person subject of speech: when
the fire reached the place we had burnt.
We can trace similar metanarratives of colonial ideology in the writings of
James Fenimore Cooper and his father, Judge William Cooper. In chapter 2 (To
the frontier) of A Private Life of Henry James, Lyndall Gordon describes the
Cooper familys move into the wilderness of western New York. Judge Cooper,
with (impractical) eighteenth-century ideals of fraternity, established a settlement,
Cooperstown, there. Gordon writes:
American myth took off in this place. There was the myth of an uninhabited
wilderness, though in actual fact the land had been wrested from Iroquois
peoples displaced from hilltop settlements where women had conducted a flour-
ishing agriculture womens work did not impress the invaders as a claim to
land . . . At the heart of the myth of the untrammelled wilderness stalked a
mythical character . . . the wandering backwoodsman who precedes the settlers.
(Gordon 1999: 11)
This is Natty Bumppo, bonded in spirit and the dignity of nature to his red brother,
Chingachgook or Great Sarpent, who both feature in five books of James
Fenimore Cooper, of which the most famous is The Last of the Mohicans.
Gordon continues, On the heels of the lone woodsman comes the practical
man with ready fists in the cause of civilisation the image the Judge projects in
his own story. The latter is A Guide to the Wilderness (1810), which, Gordon says,
tells the primordial frontier story with the unfussed brevity of a man of action,
who wrote fire and fishing tackle were my only means of subsistence . . . In this
way, I explored the country, formed my plans of future settlement and meditated
upon the spot where a place of trade or a village should afterwards be established
(p. 12). But these are not only stories of colonisation. They not only exclude the
indigenous people, they also exclude women. Gordon comments:
These are mens stories. Women are invisible or peripheral, locked in the dom-
inant plot of enterprise and political battle. Beyond that plot, their lives and
feelings are not on record, as though they had no meaning in their own right;
there is not a word on the experience of women in William Coopers account of
his settlement, though without women such a community could not have existed.
(p. 12)
If colonial women like Isabella Parry, say had no narrative existence (were
excluded as speaking subjects or subjects of speech), then it is scarcely surprising
that the Iroquois women with their flourishing agriculture did not constitute a
presence.
Gordons book belongs to a factual genre of narrative, that of biography. In
retrospect, her concern with the metanarratives of patriarchy, as evidenced in the
repression of womens history in the public (published) narratives of colonisation
(even if womens stories continued, like Isabellas, in personal letters), explains
her choice of title for her book. The title A Private Life of Henry James has the
subtitle, Two Women and His Art. The book is not so much about the detailed
everyday activities of James, as one might first assume, as about James interac-
tions with the two women and their involvement with his life, professionally and
personally. The feminist focalisation of Gordons text illuminates how private has
been understood as concerning the female, so that the conventional history of
James tends to repress the contribution of these women. This ideology, in which
public and private have been identified with masculine and feminine respec-
tively, is persistent; we meet it again in the discussion of television narratives in
chapter 13.
Diegesis and mimesis
These concepts are used in overlapping, rather than identical, ways by various the-
orists, beginning with Plato and Aristotle. For Plato, mimesis and diegesis are
two ways of presenting a story (that is, both are within narration). These terms
are credited to Socrates, in the third book of Platos Republic, when Socrates is
talking about two ways of representing speech. With diegesis, the poet himself
is the speaker and does not even attempt to suggest to us that anyone but himself
is speaking. With mimesis, the poet tries to give the illusion that another whom
we might call a character speaks. (T. S. Dorsch (1965: 11) prefers the trans-
lation impersonation to the more usual understanding of imitation.) Mimesis
is etymologically related to the English word mirror: it is as if the character is
reflected directly to us. Thus direct speech is more mimetic, since the characters
exact words are given. In contrast, indirect speech is more diegetic, as we know
the poet or writer is telling us about the characters speech.
For Aristotle, tragic drama is
a representation of an action that is worth serious attention, complete in itself

and of some amplitude; in language, enriched by a variety of artistic devices
appropriate to the several parts of the play; presented in the form of action,
not narration; by means of pity and fear bringing about the purgation of such
emotions . . . the representation is carried out by men performing the actions.
(McQuillan 2000: 40; my italics)
Here Aristotle contrasts the process of telling, the form of narration, with doing,
the form of action. In the drama, as he is describing it, there is no narration
or telling of the action because the actors do the action. Or, to be more precise,
the actors represent the action by performing the action. (Performing is a sim-
ulation of doing.) A fight will be represented by the actors performing fighting.
Speech of the characters will be represented by the actors performing speaking.
The body of the actor becomes the medium of semiotic expression of the charac-
ter. (This is a contentious issue in modern films in relation to the representation of
sexual acts.)
This is mimesis for Aristotle: the Greek word mimesis can be glossed in English
as showing, and the drama on the stage shows us directly the actions and speech
of the characters. The performed drama has a particularly complex relation of
speaking subjects. While Aristotle describes the speaking subject of the actor,
through whose body the subject of speech the first-person pronouns of the
characters speeches are spoken, a modern critical account would also point, at
least, to the effaced speaking subjects of playwright/narrator in telling the story

of the drama. The concept of agency, as discussed for television in chapter 12,
further illustrates the complexity of speaking subjects in the production of media
texts.
For Aristotle, epic has the form of narrative, that is of telling. The narrator tells
us the story or stories (he allows the epic to be longer and episodic, like the Iliad
and Odyssey, compared to the unity of the drama) and also tells us the speech of
characters. Here we recognise Platos distinction between diegesis (poet telling)
and mimesis (poet effacing self behind the direct speech of characters), so the epic
has sometimes been described as a mixed mode both diegetic and mimetic.
This description mixes both Plato and Aristotles understandings of diegesis and
mimesis. (For a subtle reading of Aristotles vocabulary, see Lowe 2000: 613.)
In twentieth-century narratology, diegesis is sometimes used to refer to that
which is told in a novel, for example, to the fictional world, the fictional reality
that is perceived in the telling, the Umwelt of the characters. In traditional nov-
els, an authorial comment might break into this world, disrupting the suspension
of disbelief traditionally ascribed to the absorbed reader of the novel (as in the
example from Coopers novel). However, novels described as postmodern typi-
cally inhibit the readers construal of a realistically coherent diegesis by disrupt-
ing the conventions of coherent character or temporality (for example, Thomas
Pynchons novel, The Crying of Lot 49). Each of the mass media has its own prac-
tices and techniques relevant to diegesis: for example, commercial television, with
its juxtaposition of segments of fictional narrative (the diegesis of series and seri-
als) and segments of advertising (feigning a direct address to the viewer, that is,
mimesis) can be described as inherently postmodern.
Using the noun diegesis and the adjective diegetic Gerard Genette coined an
impressive arsenal of terms. For example, of the Russian-doll structure of narra-
tives within narratives he says:
We will define this difference in level by saying that any event a narrative recounts
is at a diegetic level immediately higher than the level at which the narrative
act producing this narrative is placed. M. de Renoncourts writing of his fic-
tive Memoires is a (literary) act carried out at a first level, which we will call
extradiegetic; the events told in those Memoires (including Des Grieuxs narrat-
ing act) are inside this first narrative, so we will describe them as diegetic or
intradiegetic the events told; the events told in Des Grieuxs narrative, a narrative
in the second degree, we will call metadiegetic.
(Genette 1980: 228; Genettes italics)
This use of diegesis/diegetic ultimately derives from Platos category of the

voice of the teller, the poet. For further examples of compound terms, such as
autodiegetic, see McQuillans glossary of narrative terms (McQuillan 2000: 314
29).
Intertextuality/heteroglossia
The concept of intertextuality/heteroglossia was first described by the Russian

Mikhail Bakhtin, who said famously (in English translation): the word knows
where it has been. He saw interpretation as an interaction between speaker and
listener. What draws their understanding together (a centripetal force) is the
shared verbal situation, which he calls dialogue. On the other hand, what pulls
each back towards an idiosyncratic understanding (a centrifugal force) is the
individuals previous experience of language (heteroglossia). Each speakers pre-
vious experience of the use of the word is different, to a greater or lesser extent,
from that of another speaker (quoted in Clark & Holquist 1984: 2901).
Intertextuality, Julia Kristevas term derived from her reading of Bakhtin, use-
fully describes the echoes, vague or more specific, that the reader/viewer per-
ceives in a media text (Moi 1986: 3561). The very concept of genre refers to a
recognised intertextuality, conventional similarities between different texts. Inter-
textual reference might, however, be a passing similarity; for example, the contexts
in which I had previously met woods rather than bush gave the word an inter-
textual meaning for me, which I described as English. And again television series
have played with intertextuality, for example, introducing into an episode of one
sitcom a character from another sitcom.
Semiotics
We can distinguish two main usages of this term:

1 the study of semiosis (compatible with a post-structuralist understanding)
2 the study of signs (structuralist understanding).
Sense 1 is associated particularly with the work of the American philosopher
Charles Sanders Peirce (18391914). Semiosis is to semiotics as language is to
linguistics: that is, the former is the phenomenon and the latter is the study of the
phenomenon. Semiosis refers to the meaning-making practices of a species; for
humans, language is the most complex vehicle for making (realising) meaning,
but physical gestures, facial expressions, dress, choice of car, brand of beer any
sensible matter (accessible to the senses) or perceivable behaviour can be imbued
with cultural significance.
Sense 2, more appropriately called semiology, is associated with the work
of the French-speaking Swiss linguist, Ferdinand de Saussure (18571913). See
chapter 3 for a discussion of his influence on structuralist narratology.
Peirces triadic understanding of the sign
Except for Umberto Eco, scholars in Europe have been relatively unfamiliar with
this model, yet it is more compatible with recent theories of narrative than the
SIGN
for something to something
(KNOWN) OBJECT INTERPRETANT

Figure 2.1: Pierces triadic understanding of the sign.
Saussurean sign. In its minimal definition, the Peircean sign is anything that
stands for something to something. What the sign stands for is its (known) object;
what it stands to is the interpretant, as illustrated in figure 2.1.
A sign signifies something else (the known object) because this signification
has a meaning (interpretant) that is understood by the interpreter. The Peircean
sign (sometimes called the representamen) is realised in some perceivable vehi-
cle (a linguistic sign like a spoken word, a hand gesture, any physical or virtual
object, such as a photographic image or the digital pattern received on a television
screen). Humans have a capacity for unlimited semiosis because the interpretant
can itself be understood as a sign and then be interpreted in its turn as signifying
another known object. This is the very mechanism of metaphor.
Interpretation takes place within a context (Peirces grounds, rather like
Kristevas intertextuality) of individual subjectivity and cultural conventions,
the semiotic world or Umwelt of the interpreter. Known objects are culturally
known; they may be understood to have an external existence (factual) or to
exist in the cultural world of the imagination (fictional). Nonetheless, the cultural
concepts chair and Hamlet are equally objective, in the sense of being known
objects.
The difficult point here is that although the subjectivity of the interpreter
(his/her performance of cultural experience) is part of the interpretant (an idea, a
mental concept), the known object is outside that subject, is understood to exist
objectively. Yet this objective does not equal external, non-semiotic, whereas
the traditional dualism of subject and object drew a simple line between internal
and external (Deely 1990: 509).
Peirce described three kinds of relation between the sign and its known object:
that of icon, of index and of symbol. These are still culturally understood the icon
to look like its object (compare the image called an ikon in the Russian Orthodox
tradition), the index to be associated with its object (comparable to metonymy),
and the symbol to be an entirely arbitrary association of sign and object, like
the linguistic sign (Chandler 2002: 3842). Accessible introductions to Peirces
thought are difficult to find; for brief comments, a bibliography and a relevant
extract see Innis 1985: 119. (Paul Cobley introduces the Peircean sign in the last
five pages of his book, Narrative (2001: 2238), under the subtitle The future of
the narrative sign.)
Saussures dyadic understanding of the sign
This is the well-known dichotomy of signifier and signified. The signifier cor-
responds to a linguistic vehicle and the signified to the interpretant, in Peirces
terms. Saussure described his linguistics as part of psychology; what he omit-
ted from that dichotomy was any reference to the objective world. Unfortu-
nately, Saussures sign has been used loosely, sometimes as if signified referred
to the object, rather than to the idea. This is rather like nailing the word tree
to a tree! Other dichotomies, such as literal meaning/metaphor or denotation/
connotation, are subject to the same criticism; that is, it is an illusion to claim
that some meanings, described as literal or denotative, have a direct dyadic rela-
tion between signifier and object. Umberto Eco has written: the rose is a flower
but . . ., meaning, but maybe in this context it is not (such as the biblical rose of
Sharon, taken to refer to a woman in the context of The Song of Solomon). Eco
coined the phrase unlimited semiosis to refer to this open-ended possibility of
human interpretation (Eco 1984: 68).
The French theorists Gilles Deleuze and Felix Guattari use the term rhizome
to describe the possibilities of unlimited semiosis. As Eco describes it, quoting
them, a rhizome is a tangle of bulbs and tubers appearing like rats squirming
one on top of the other (Eco 1984: 812). Peirce once wrote that interpreta-
tion continues until the necessity to act. This might be why literary narratives,
understood not to relate to facts, invite or are allowed to provoke more symbolic
interpretation. Conversely, the interpretative mediation (the spin) given events
in factual discourses, such as the narratives of television news, is not always
acknowledged.
Umwelt
The biologist Jakob von Uexkull originally used this term for the environmental
reality for a living organism: that is, it refers to the part of the environment that
is meaningful and effective for a given species. For humans, objective reality is
constituted by the known objects (in Peirces sense) of their cultural Umwelt. There
is no unmediated direct access to a reality external to human semiosis (Deely
1990: 5962). However, if that cultural reality becomes too inconsistent with the
external reality, as Peirce says, reality will have its way with us. The history of
medical practice gives many examples of unfortunate objective practices, such
as bleeding an already weak patient. The Umwelt of a fictional world, as in the
novel, can be referred to as the diegesis of the novel; that is, the world of telling.
Iconography/mise en scene/setting/location
In realist narratives of any media, the mise en scene and iconography are impor-
tant in establishing and/or signifying the historical and social settings and the
geographical location (both factual and fictional: think of the cuts from news-
reader to filmed catastrophe in the evening news, or the on location shots in the
police series The Bill, as the police yet again pound down the outdoor corridors of
the council estates). In the factual situations of a culture, known objects cluster
together. If a producer of a fictional discourse (narratives of prose fiction, drama,
film, television) wants to signify that situation, then a selection of known objects
associated with that situation will be told or shown.
The selection might be minimal; for example, in a play I have seen recently,
Far Away by Caryl Churchill, two characters stand on a bare stage making hats.
They have a hat stand each and an elaborate hat on the stand, which they are
working on, with pins, paint and two spray-gun or stapler-like implements that
hang from the ceiling. The mise en scene (literally, French for put in scene)
establishes the social situation of milliners, those who make hats. There are several
blackouts between short scenes; in each scene, the hat is now more advanced in
preparation: that is, of course, the actual hats have been replaced by stage hands
during the blackout. In terms of the diegesis (the fictional world) of the drama,
the development of the hats tells the passing of time. The hats are ridiculous,
hyperbolic exaggerations of hats.
Audience members, who are listening to the chat between these two workers,
most, I assume, straining to make some sort of cohesive narrative sense, have
already seen a disquieting first act. With so little on the stage, the iconography of
the hats that is, what the hats stand for must be very significant. But what? What
story are we being told, and how do the hats fit in? (After the play, I overheard the
classic remark, What was all that about? so unlimited semiosis can take people
far or nowhere!) I leave you to give your own interpretation. After the exchanges
between the milliners, we then had a long, very long, sequence of people, six at a
time, processing from the left, stopping, and a cow-bell was heard, moving off to
the right. Each person wore an absurd hat we recognised the two our milliners
had been working on, completed and a pair of orange pyjamas. A placard with
a number say 3726 hung around their necks, and their hands were tied.
Rhetorical figures
Traditional rhetoric divided its terms for stylistic features into two: difficult fig-
ures (tropes) and easy figures (also called figures of speech). Easy figures might be,
for example, just the repetition of the same word (repetitio), but difficult figures
were said to alter the meaning of a word and so to require cognitive process-
ing. Synecdoche, metaphor and metonymy (the Greek names) remain the three
most commonly identified tropes. Metaphor depends on one thing representing
another; metonymy uses one thing (smoke) that is associated with another (fire);
synecdoche uses a part of the thing (hand) for the whole (person). It is of course
misleading to talk in terms of thing; using a Peircean understanding of the sign,
we can say that, to an English speaker, a sign (say the word smoke) usually
implies the interpretant/idea (smoke) that signifies the known object (the observ-
able phenomenon). The experience of that observable phenomenon is associated
with the experience of another observable phenomenon, which is signified by the
interpretant/idea (fire); thus the idea (smoke) becomes in turn a sign for another
triadic relation, that to the interpretant/idea (fire) and the known object, the
observable phenomenon. It is true that this is a very long-winded explanation,
but it reminds us that a figure like metaphor or metonymy is not just a relation
of things, or a relation of signifiers (as was sometimes suggested in the early
days of post-structuralism, using the Saussurean term), or even just a relation of
interpretants.
This explanation is not meant to imply that the interpreter solves the trope;
that is, arrives finally at its meaning, the final interpretant. The human capacity
for unlimited semiosis, within the cultural context of the Umwelt, means that
interpretation has no necessary end. Moreover, the possibility for cultural (and
personal) transformation even change in the Umwelt derives in large part
from the possibilities of reinterpreting metanarratives, stories of being, which
have been taken for granted in the dominant cultural ideologies.
Temporality
Temporality has been seen as central to narrative since the time of Aristotle. The
problem is that time is not a singular concept. Structuralist studies, discussed
in chapter 3, assumed that it was a simple chronological sequence in order to
theorise the category of story, events ordered in chronological sequence. How-
ever, there are potentially at least six varieties of temporality. First, there are the
three temporalities of ordinary human experience: sociotemporality (a cultures
understanding of its history and being over time), human mental temporality (the
personal present, which includes memory and prediction this is the temporality
of the first paragraph of Isabella Parrys letter) and organic (living) temporality
(this most closely corresponds to that of the structuralists story). Second, there
are the three temporalities of the non-organic physical world that humans can
come to understand through scientific technology and mathematics: material tem-
porality (that of space/time and gravity), probabilistic temporality (of quantum
theory) and atemporality (of electromagnetic radiation) (Fraser 1999: chapter 2).
Narratives that have been characterised as postmodern typically exploit the non-
human temporalities of probabilistic and atemporal telling (Did that happen?
Who was that? Is that the same character as the one who . . .?). The viewer/readers
traditional expectations of narrative coherence are upset by such temporal dis-
placement.
What is particularly relevant to this book, in its focus on different mass media, is
the way in which the technological and commercial circumstances of production
can affect the temporal structure of the narrative (for example, the non-linear
narratives of television, discussed in chapters 12 and 13).
Narrative structure and linguistics
Narrative is treated as a genre in many linguistic studies and its genre or text type
described in terms of narrative structure. Taken alone, this approach is inadequate
(see Cortazzi 1993: chapter 3), but it can be especially helpful in studying the
pacing (changes of duration) in a text. It works best with oral personal narratives;
William Labov originally described such structures in his study of black youths
stories in Harlem (see especially Labov 1972: chapter 9, The transformation of
experience in narrative syntax). Table 2.1 shows Cortazzis transcription of the
most typical structure (p. 45).
Table 2.1: Cortazzis transcription of the most typical

narrative structure.
STRUCTURE QUESTION
Abstract What was this about?

Orientation Who? When? What? Where?
Complication Then what happened?
Evaluation So what?
Result What finally happened?
Coda (Returns the listener to the
present; for example, Thats it.)
Speech
Speech was an area of close structuralist analysis for the literary narratives of
prose fiction. Boris Uspensky, in his detailed study of Tolstoys novel, War and
Peace, identified four levels of what he called point of view in the novel: that on
the ideological plane, that on the phraseological plane, that on the spatial and
temporal plane, and that on the plane of psychology. Seymour Chatman com-
bined these planes with the speech categories of speech act theory. Genette dif-
ferentiated the speech of narrators and characters under his general category of
Voice.
Drawing on the work of these authors, figure 2.2 is a diagrammatic repre-
sentation of differences of voice, correlated with the narrative roles of author
(production)/implied author (interpretation), narrator and character. In the fig-
ure, tagged refers to an explicit projecting clause, such as she said, she thought,
while free refers to the absence of such a tag. The vertical axis roughly indicates
the position of a speech act on a continuum from diegesis to mimesis in Platos
sense, from telling to showing, which Genette used to indicate closeness or dis-
tance from the narrator. As this is a model for written texts, those fictional texts
DIEGESIS interpersonal:
(Plato) intrusion of I,
telling characterisation of
(narrators implied author
presence most
obvious) outside world of novel experiential:
(ideological)
statements on the
sentences by world interpersonal seems
form as speech etc; estrangement
acts of narrator to psychologically
reader external
inside world of novel simple external
DIEGESIS (Genette) psychologically observation:
internal: he did
omniscient narrator:
Author/ he felt/was ashamed
Implied Narrator *formally the same as
Author (spatio- free indirect thought freeformally as *
(Uspensky: temporal and speech (infer from context)
ideological plane)
plane) indirect
psychologically tagged
internal tagged
(thoughts/feelings)
sentences by direct free
form as speech free formally
acts of characters indirect as*
(phraseological
MIMESIS plane) dialogue
tagged
showing speech
written fiction psychologically monologue
more similar tagged
external direct
to factual use epistolary
written record free
of language journal
Figure 2.2: Differences of voice

that are impersonations of written factual texts (such as a novel written as a

journal or diary or letters) are closest to the mimetic, showing end (Uspensky
1973; Chatman 1975; Genette 1980).
If you look closely at the central area of figure 2.2, you will see that the struc-
turalist distinction between speech acts of narrator and character breaks down
(the dichotomy is deconstructed). The psychologically internal speech act of an
omniscient narrator describing a character (he felt ashamed) looks the same
as (is formally identical to) the free indirect speech or thought (the character
thinks or says he felt ashamed, without a tag). You, the reader, will interpret the
same clause, he felt ashamed, as spoken by the narrator or the character or as
ambiguous on the grounds of your understanding of the previous textual context.
This would be an important topic in a book devoted to literary narrative; Virginia
Woolf, for example, makes particularly complex use of this narrative potential to
blur voices from narrator to character and between characters.
In other media, such as theatre, film and television, where we see characters
speak directly to each other, this verbal device is less relevant (although a char-
acter could report indirectly the speech of another character). The critical focus
in those media shifts to an interest in the ideological plane, an interest in the
world/diegesis of the media text and the implied cultural values of its implied
author/production. This shift in focus, together with the application of concepts
introduced in this chapter, will be discussed with particular reference to film and
television narratives in subsequent chapters.
Conclusion
Narratives in any medium or genre oral or written, novel or letter, film or soap
opera are ways of structuring and representing lived experience. Just as we can
describe experience only through the language we have available to us, so we
make use of existing narrative patterns to structure and make sense of new expe-
riences. Most narrative theorists, from Aristotle onwards, have used concepts of
language to define what narrative is, and the complexities of diegesis and mime-
sis, narrator and focaliser, temporality and chronology, can be interpreted by a
semiotic analysis of signifying elements.
This chapter has begun to draw attention to the limitations of structuralism as a
means of explaining narrative in terms of binary oppositions or levels of construc-
tion (where the underlying structure is privileged over superficial manifestations
of storytelling). We have also suggested that these limitations can be counter-
balanced to some extent by a post-structuralist consideration of the ideological
work performed by narrative. Structuralist narratology and its post-structuralist
critique form the main topic of the next chapter.
Chapter 3
From structuralism to post-structuralism
Rosemary Huisman
Martin McQuillan, editor of The Narrative Reader, describes the usual history of
narrative theory as a story:
Histories of narrative theory tend to follow a familiar pattern . . . The story

goes: In the beginning there was Aristotle who theorised plot, then there
came the novelists who theorised their own plots, then after some false starts
(Propp, Benjamin, Bakhtin) narrative theory really took off with narratology (the
structuralist-led science of narrative). However, like the dinosaurs, narratolo-
gists died out and were replaced by more mobile, covert forms of narrative theory
within a post-structuralist diaspora. Narrative theory now lives on, embedded
in the work and tropes of post-structuralism.
(McQuillan 2000: xi)
In this Darwinian account, McQuillan parodies the oversimplification of the

evolution of narrative theory. The linear storyline is too simple because it assumes
a reductive Enlightenment myth of progress, where what comes after necessar-
ily replaces and is better than what came before. (Conversely, by those critics
who shudder at the word post-structuralist, or its stylistic companion, postmod-
ernist, the same succession of theories can be interpreted as a story of decadence
and decay.)
In this chapter I describe some of the major differences between theories. It is
well to remember that people have different purposes in analysing narrative, and
some theories better suit different purposes. This is particularly so in relation to
the study of commercial media texts, as the discussions in the following chapters
will illustrate.
28
From structuralism to post-structuralism 29
The beginnings of narrative theory
The work of Aristotle (384322 BCE) most relevant to later narrative study is
known as his Poetics (edited in Dorsch, 1965; extract in McQuillan 2000: 3944).
The scope of the Poetics is a study of the kinds of poetry practised by the Greeks:
epic poetry, dramatic poetry and lyric poetry. From chapter 6, Aristotle discusses
tragic drama (which is always written in poetry), and it is this discussion that is
most pertinent to an analysis of narrative.
Aristotle identifies six constituents of tragedy: plot, character, diction, thought,
spectacle and song. It is plot (mythos) that Aristotle sees as the most important. By
plot he means the ordered arrangements of the incidents: that is, the represen-
tation of the action. Character is important, but secondary to plot. For Aristotle,
character motivates the action, so that a character is not just a performed being
but also a being with particular traits essential to the motivation and development
of the plot. Thus brave actions require a character with the trait of bravery. (The
classicist N. J. Lowe (2000: 7) gives a new translation of the sentence in which
mythos/plot is defined in this way.)
Further, says Aristotle, the good plot is well constructed, unified and memo-
rable. And finally the good plot has incidents that are causally related what hap-
pens as a result of something else. The good plot is not just incidents ordered by
chronology, one incident merely happening after another. For a historical exam-
ple, consider the telling of the Arthurian legends by the fifteenth-century English
writer Thomas Malory. His earlier tales of the Knights of the Round Table are
fairly linear, one incident merely following another, but the last Book, of the final
battles between Gawain and Lancelot, and the death of Arthur, has an intricate
weaving of incident, one causing another, towards the final tragic outcome of the
destruction of the Round Table (Vinaver 1977).
Next in McQuillans story of narrative theory come the novelists who theo-
rised their own plots. The early novels, from the eighteenth century and into the
nineteenth century, typically focused on the individual. The kind of theory that
accepts this focus on the individual we might call a humanist theory humanism
being a term often used for social values that emerged after the Renaissance. We
remember the early novels with their titles typically of the individual whose for-
tunes they follow: Samuel Richardsons Clarissa, Henry Fieldings Tom Jones and
so on. The picaresque novel, as exemplified by much of Tom Jones, has a series
of episodes linked in plot only by the presence of the main character. This is an
episodic structure associated with the classical epic, but now one through which
the development of Tom as an individual can be read.
Another novelist whom McQuillan might have had in mind is Laurence Sterne,
in his novel Tristram Shandy. It would be a good idea to look at this novel if only
to decide that the late twentieth-century term postmodern might be the most
accurate description of the style of this eighteenth-century author! Shlovsky, a
member of the same formalist school as Propp, commented, The first impression
upon taking up Sternes Tristram Shandy and beginning to read it is one of chaos
(McQuillan 2000: 637). (Incidentally, I use postmodern as a term of style and
post-structuralism as a term of theory, although postmodern is often used for
either, especially in the USA.) In their works, both Fielding and Sterne at times
speak directly to the reader about the direction or possibilities of their characters
adventures, theorising their own plots.
The development of structuralism
McQuillans next point is what he calls false starts in narrative theory. Im not
sure what he implies by this phrase, unless he means that later scholars did
not continue to develop in the direction of these theories. Of the three he men-
tions, Propp, Benjamin and Bakhtin, the first is always included in introductory
accounts (as below) because his work is part of a school of early twentieth-century
literary study that does influence later narratology. Mikhail Bakhtin (18951975),
Russian like Propp, was mentioned in the previous chapter in relation to inter-
textuality/heteroglossia. (For a helpful introduction to Bakhtins theory of the
novel, see Clark & Holquist 1984: chapter 13.) Finally, Walter Benjamin (1892
1940) wrote (in German, often translating from French) subtle imaginative crit-
icism of the prose fiction of Kafka and Proust; most relevant to the concerns of
this book is his essay, The work of art in the age of mechanical reproduction.
Here is a sample, in which he ponders the context of reception of the mass
audience:
Mechanical reproduction of art changes the reaction of the masses toward art.
The reactionary attitude toward a Picasso painting changes into the progressive
reaction toward a Chaplin movie. The progressive reaction is characterized by
the direct, intimate fusion of visual and emotional enjoyment with the orienta-
tion of the expect. Such fusion is of great social significance. The sharper the
decrease in the social significance of an art form, the sharper the distinction
between criticism and enjoyment by the public. The conventional is uncritically
enjoyed, and the truly new is criticized with aversion. With regard to the screen,
the critical and the receptive attitudes of the public coincide. The decisive rea-
son for this is that individual reactions are predetermined by the mass audience
response they are about to produce, and this is nowhere more pronounced than
in the film. The moment these responses become manifest they control each
other.
(Benjamin 1969: 234)
Vladimir Propp (18951970) was a member of the literary school known as For-
malism, which developed in Russia in the second and third decades of the twen-
tieth century. It was the first school definitely to turn away from the humanist
understanding of narrative. Rather than centre their interest on action or event,
like Aristotle, or the social progress of one character, like the eighteenth-century
novelists, the formalists wanted to identify what formally made a text a literary
text. One important answer for them was defamiliarisation: the literary text delib-
erately using language in such a way as to be unfamiliar, so as to draw attention
to the text itself. (A famous example was Tolstoys use of a horse as narrator in
his novel Kholstomer: The Story of a Horse, published in 1886.) However, in order
to recognise the unfamiliar, they had to know what was familiar, stereotypical,
expected. To explore this issue, Vladimir Propp studied the Russian fairy tale (not
the folk tale, incidentally, although the book of his study is translated into English
as The Morphology of the Folktale).
Propps discovery was that there were thirty-one possible functions for events
in the fairy story. Not every story had every function, but what functions they did
have always came in the same order. Examples are (the Roman numeral indicating
their position in the thirty-one functions): XI The hero leaves home, XVI The hero
and the villain join in direct combat, XXXI The hero is married and ascends the
throne. Propps thirty-one functions, with their invariable sequence, effectively
describe the maximal narrative of the Russian fairy tale. Each function is centred
on one (or more) actions; in this regard Propps analysis is similar to that of
Aristotle, with its insistence that plot was a representation of action.
Character was secondary to plot in Aristotles account, but characterisation
(having the appropriate traits to motivate the plot) was still important. However,
for Propp, in the fairy tale, characters are formal devices required by functions.
The thirty-one functions bring into being seven spheres of action for dramatis
personae, such as the hero, the villain and the donor, someone who provides the
hero with a helpful piece of knowledge or an actual object. The fourth sphere of
action includes both a princess and her father. This is because the princess is
defined so passively, as a sought-after person, that she contributes nothing to the
action. That usually pertains to her father who, for example, assigns difficult tasks.
We can compare this formalist method with the humanist approach to narrative
rather than being centred on the character as an individual, as in the humanist
approach, Propps analysis makes the character a formal necessity of the plot. For
a heroic action to occur, there must be a hero to do it; for the hero to be deceived,
there must be a villain to practise deception.
Propps work was ground-breaking in its time, but very slowly disseminated. It
was published in Russian in 1928 but not translated into French until the late
1950s, when its method was appropriated into French structuralism. English
speakers encountered it even later in that context. It has been quoted in nar-
rative studies ever since, but has considerable limitations from the perspective of
post-structuralist critique. The thirty-one abstracted functions, forming a model
or langue, are not the same as the events of the specific text, the parole. Thus the
same textual event say, the hero receives a ring might be interpreted as having
a different function in different texts: perhaps XII The hero is tested . . . which
prepares the way for his receiving either a magical agent or helper, or XIX The
initial misfortune or lack is liquidated. Each function is a meaning abstracted by

Propp; it is not directly in the words of the text. Thus there is nothing objectively in
the form as formalists would originally have claimed. Langue does not pre-exist
parole, but is simply another example of parole as text. Propp has subjectively
inferred the meanings of the specific events in order to produce his thirty-one
functions. And there is no guarantee that another reader would infer exactly the
same functions. A number of cultural studies theorists reproduce Propps thirty-
one functions and regard them as relevant to the contemporary analysis of popular
culture (Lacey 2000: 4664). I suggest that the method, rather than the content of
the functions, might be helpful for some purposes, such as the study of reiterative
sitcom narratives from the perspective of agency (see chapters 12 and 13). But
bear in mind the criticism by Hernstein Smith, which is discussed below.
We now reach McQuillans non-false start, a flurry of activity: narrative theory
really took off with narratology (the structuralist-led science of narrative). In
his glossary to The Narrative Reader, McQuillan gives the following as the more
specific, historically circumscribed definition of narratology (sense 1): . . . the
structuralist-led theory of narrative which seeks to identify what all, and only, nar-
ratives have in common. Narratology examines the nature, form and function of
narrative across genre and media. By proposing narrative as a[n] object of rigor-
ous scientific inquiry (ology) narratology seeks to produce a comprehensive and
universal narrative grammar. Term first proposed by Todorov (1969) (McQuillan
2000: 324).
In his chronology of narrative theory in the twentieth century, McQuillan
gives 195060 as the beginnings of structuralist narratology and 196070 as its
high point. But these dates refer to work appearing in French. It is not until the
decade 197080 that, as McQuillan puts it, narratology is well established as an
interest in the English-speaking world (McQuillan 2000: 312) and by this time
new intellectual developments are beginning to displace it in the French-speaking
world. Yet to understand later developments it is still necessary to understand
what is being extended, or reacted against.
To understand the basic assumptions of structuralist study of narrative we
must move further back in the century than this history suggests. French struc-
turalism develops from the theories of the French-speaking Swiss linguist Ferdi-
nand de Saussure, who died in 1913. Nineteenth-century linguistics was primarily
descriptive and historical. It focused on the history of an individual language and
its relations with other languages (English with other Germanic languages, or
French with other Romance languages). Saussure, however, wanted to study lan-
guage scientifically, as he understood science. He tried to reconceptualise what
language study could be. His solution was to study language as a structure. To do
this he abstracted from all the different uses of language an underlying system
what he thought of as an understanding of language that was cognitive, psy-
chologically real, to all the speakers of that language, and which enabled them
to speak or write any particular use of the language. (He understood scientific
linguistics to be part of psychology.) He called this underlying structure la langue,
and contrasted it with any of the particular uses of the language by an individual
speaker or writer, which he called la parole. So to produce an instance of la parole,
the speaker/writer had to know la langue, the abstract structure of the language
(Saussure 1966; Culler 1976).
Saussures method for analysing language was essentially dualistic. As
described in the previous chapter, his psychological model of the sign had two
aspects: a linguistic signifier, such as the idea of a spoken word, and a cognitive
signified, a mental concept. Typically he identified dichotomies, such as la langue
and la parole, in which one aspect was more abstract than the other. Features
of the system la langue were to be mentally abstracted, or inferred, by consid-
eration of many examples of la parole; that is, the actual speaking of language.
Another dichotomy, essential to the identification of his sign, was that of paradigm
and syntagm (also called selection and combination). For example, consider the
following two sentences:
1. Saussures sign is dyadic; the interpretative aspect of his sign is known as the
signified.
2. Peirces sign is triadic; the interpretative aspect of his sign is known as the
interpretant.
In each individual sentence, the relation between the words in that sentence is
syntagmatic, one word after another. (The whole sentence could be called a syn-
tagm, a combination of words.) However, by comparing the two sentences, we can
see both similarities and differences. The grammatical structure of each sentence
is identical, but the meanings obviously differ, because sentence 1 has Saussure,
dyadic, signified, in the same places in the structure as sentence 2 has Peirce, tri-
adic, interpretant. The words that can occur at the same point in the structure,
from which you can choose (such as Saussure and Peirce), belong to the same
paradigm. It is obvious that the paradigm is more abstract, because you dont
hear/see it directly, whereas you can see or hear the sequence of words. More
generally, the structuralist paradigm grouped together, under some unifying con-
cept, items from which the speaker/writer chooses one member. For example, the
paradigm colour (unifying concept) includes the items red, green, pink, blue and
so on (see Hodge & Kress 1986 for a discussion of Saussurean dualism).
Saussures university lectures were published posthumously, in 1915. By com-
plicated means, via the Prague school of linguistics (which had itself been
influenced by Russian studies of language, including Formalism), by the 1950s
Saussures understanding of dualisms such as la langue versus la parole had
begun to influence French intellectual thought. This influence was described as
structuralism.
Returning to the work of Propp, we can see how it relates to a structural-
ist understanding of language and text. Propp studied the syntagmatic axis of
the fairy tale, the combination of functions in the sequence of the narrative.
His work is not strictly structuralist, for a fully structuralist account closely
studies the paradigmatic axis as well. In comparison, the analysis of cultural
forms by the anthropologist Claude Levi-Strauss is unambiguously structuralist.
Table 3.1: Levi-Strauss: paradigm and syntagm in the myth of Oedipus.
Paradigm 1 Paradigm 2 Paradigm 3 Paradigm 4
Cadmos seeks his

sister Europa, who
has been ravished
by Zeus
Cadmos kills the
dragon
The Spartoi kill one
another
Labdacos (Laios
father) = lame (?)
Oedipus kills his Laios (Oedipus father)
father Laios = left-sided (?)
Oedipus kills the
Sphinx
Oedipus = swollen-foot
(?)
Oedipus marries his
mother Jocasta
Eteocles kills his
brother Polynices
Antigone buries her
brother Polynices,
despite prohibition
Levi-Strauss published his very influential paper, The structural study of myth
(in French), in 1958 (Levi-Strauss 1977: 20631). The formalists, like Propp,
wanted to identify formal indications of literariness in the literary text, but they
were not concerned with thematic interpretation, the more traditional aesthetic
goal of literary criticism, for they considered it too subjective. However, Levi-
Strauss saw structuralist procedures as a way of being objective, scientific (like
Saussure) in studying the interpretation of myth. He set out to study particular
tellings of a myth (like the particular instances of la parole) to identify a myth
system (like la langue, the language system).
Levi-Strauss takes the narrative syntagm, the sequence of the story of the myth
of Oedipus, and tries out paradigmatic arrangements that will bring together
similar bundles of relation (as he calls paradigms). Table 3.1 is reproduced from
his account (p. 214):
Reading from left to right, line by line, in the usual way is telling the myth:
it gives you the syntagm of the myth system, the order of events in the story.
However, Levi-Strauss claims, reading the vertical columns is understanding the
myth; it enables him to read the paradigmatic structure of relations. For Oedipus,
this structure consists of two sets of dichotomies. The first, between paradigms 1
and 2, have an antithetical relation of meaning: paradigm 1 is concerned with
the over-rating of blood relations, paradigm 2 with the under-rating of blood
relations. The second dichotomy, between paradigms 3 and 4, again has an anti-
thetical relation: paradigm 3 is concerned with the denial of the autochthonous
origin of man (autochthonous = Greek auto, self + kthon, from the earth; that is,
self-generating, without predecessors), whereas paradigm 4 is concerned with the
persistence of the autochthonous origin of man; that is, a repudiation of human
sexual origin. Levi-Strauss then reads the meaning of the myth in the cultures
capacity to reconcile, in the sense of balancing, these contradictory dichotomies.
Essentially, Levi-Strauss sees mythic thought as attempts to overcome contradic-
tions between belief and experience, so that a culture can maintain its beliefs, its
cosmology, even while they are contradicted by experience.
The analysis of the themes of a narrative into binary oppositions, like the anti-
thetical paradigms of Levi-Strausss interpretation, was extensively used in nar-
ratological studies. In the second edition of Reading Television, Fiske and Hartley
still find it a helpful way to understand the ideology of a television series (Fiske &
Hartley 2003: 142). However, the post-structuralist critique of Levi-Strauss, like
that of Propp, points to Levi-Strausss subjective interpretation of the myth in
order to abstract his opposing paradigms. His explanation of paradigms 3 and 4
(which I do not reproduce here; see Levi-Strauss 1977: 215) derives from his disci-
plinary expertise as an anthropologist. Like the expert interpretation of a literary
scholar (such as Genette on Proust) it is suggestive and stimulating, but it cannot
be said to be objectively in the myth.
The French structuralist study of narration, or of narratologies, inspired as it
was by Saussures study of language system rather than language use, and by the
formal analyses of the Russian formalists, typically used discourse only as raw
data from which to infer abstract narrative structures. A glance at structuralist
accounts reveals the diagrams and reductionist figures with which such discus-
sions are illustrated. (For an introductory account, see Rimmon-Kenan 1983:
chapter 2, Story: events.) Consider the work of Tsvetan Todorov, the Bulgar-
ian who first translated Propp into French, and who wrote in French. Todorov
described five points in a narrative structure (note how this is an underlying
structure, like Saussures la langue, abstracted from the telling of any particular
narrative, like Saussures la parole):
a state of equilibrium at the outset situation 1

a disruption of the equilibrium by some action
a recognition that there has been a disruption
an attempt to repair the disruption
a reinstatement of the equilibrium situation 2
(Lacey 2000: 2345, 1012)
(Compare this abstracted structure with the linguist Labovs abstracted narra-
tive structure, described in chapter 2 above.) In some ways, Todorov wanted to
return to generic descriptions similar to those of Aristotle. Aristotle gave a two-
part description of the basic sequence of a narrative: from misery to happiness
or from happiness to misery. Todorovs scheme seems to envisage a three-step
development: from equilibrium to disruption to equilibrium.
In the early 1970s, Todorov was one of those who directly equated the langue
and the parole of Saussure with the study of narrative. They spoke of a narrative
grammar, the abstract system that was a kind of langue of the narrative. This
enabled the specific tellings by the individual who knew the abstract narrative
grammar, which were a kind of parole, like the specific utterances of an individual
who knows the abstract grammar of the language. Various terms became fashion-
able for naming the langue of narrative as contrasted with the parole of narrative.
The terms plot and story are sometimes contrasted in this way. In this usage
story, or the chronological order of events, is an inferred langue of narrative,
inferred on the single grounds of chronological sequence, sequence in physically
experienced time. Plot, in contrast, is used of the narrative sequence in the actual
telling that is, the parole of narrative in which the linear sequence of time may
be disordered for various purposes (for example, the detective story or film, which
typically begins with the discovery of the body, and then reconstructs by telling
or showing earlier events).
The grounds for inferring the story sequence in time are least problematic
when they are causal, rather than merely chronological. In the Western film, we
expect the shot in which the hero and villain draw their guns to precede the shot
in which the villain crumples and falls to the earth while the hero clutches his
bleeding shoulder, and we derive this expectation from our knowledge of cause
and effect in the physical world of time outside language. (In Through the Looking-
Glass Lewis Carroll played with just such expectation in his account of the White
Queen, who surprises Alice because she screams before she pricks her finger.) For
Aristotle, as I have said, a good plot had incidents that were causally related
not merely incidents ordered by chronology, one incident just happening after
another.
Taken over from Russian narrative study into French narrative study was
another influential naming of narrative langue versus narrative parole. This
was a contrast of lhistoire with le discours or, in English, story and dis-
course. Discourse, comparable to la parole, referred to the particular telling
of the story, whereas story, comparable to la langue, referred to what was
common to different tellings of the same story. The vocabulary in this area
can be very confusing. Here are equivalences, with references to meanings
in McQuillans glossary in bold and Bals usage, commented on below, in
parentheses:
r discourse/narrative/recit/sjuzet/(Bal and Rimmon-Kenan text) the particular
telling
r story/lhistoire/fabula/(Aristotle logos meaning 1) (Bal fabula) the events in

chronological order
r plot (Aristotle: mythos, also comparable with discourse) (Bal story) the
causally related order of events in a particular telling.
The most confusing word is perhaps plot as it has an everyday sense of a
summary of the story, whereas in structuralist use it refers to the specific ordering
of the events. In chapter 13, Soap operas and sitcoms, you will see that plotline is
used interchangeably with storyline. Table 3.2 shows the confusion of story(-line)
and plot(-line).
Table 3.2: Storyline and plotline.
Story Storyline
1 = narrative, what is told in full 1 = plotline, one thread (one of many in

the complete narrative) concerning the
same characters and their interaction
centred on a narrative complication.
2 = plot, what is told in summary 2 = story 2 (plot, what is told in summary)
3 = storyline 1
4 = (structuralist use, abstracted) events
in a chronological order, but note Bals
intermediate use
In addition to story and text, Rimmon-Kenan organises her chapters with a

third term, taken from Genette: narration. This refers to the act or process of pro-
duction, both real (the author) and internal to the text (the narrator) (Rimmon-
Kenan 1983: 34). Figure 2.2, Differences of voice, illustrates narration.
Bal is Mieke Bal, writing in Narratology: Introduction to the Theory of Narrative.
Bal makes use of the three levels that are implicit in the structuralist talk of two
sets of dualisms, plot and story, and discourse and story. The most underlying
level of story in the structuralist analysis is the events in chronological order. She
calls this fabula, from the Russian tradition. An intermediate level in which the
events are ordered as they will be in the final narrative, she calls story (i.e., what
has been called plot in the simple dualism). And the actual particular telling
of the ordered events, the discourse, she calls text (Bal 1985, 1997). Ones head
begins to spin! However, in general, those describing a structuralist model of
narrative (like H. Porter Abbott in The Cambridge Introduction to Narrative, 2002)
have found just two levels adequate: an underlying story/fabula, and a surface
telling/discourse/text/sjuzet, in which events might be disordered from the story.
Note those words underlying and surface: such notions are characteristic of
structuralist talk, implying a pre-existing model or structure that has in fact been
retrieved from particular texts.
The post-structuralist critique
I have particularly mentioned the work of Bal because she is one of those many
people who found themselves moving from a structuralist to a post-structuralist
understanding from the 1980s. The first edition of her book, Narratology, appeared
in English in 1985 (she had published in the late 1970s in Dutch). In this first edi-
tion Bal is an avowed structuralist. The second edition, thoroughly revised, came
out in 1997, and it is worth reading at least the preface to see her change in per-
spective. She writes, I was more and more uneasy about the tone of it [the first
edition], the references to being sure and all those remnants of the positivistic
discourse of my training that inhere in structuralist thought. Bal does not reject
the usefulness of structuralist analysis, but she now recognises the contingency,
the particular perspective or purpose, the subjectivity, that any such analysis
takes up.
Mieke Bals later interests also illustrate a general tendency in post-structuralist
work on narrative: she writes in the preface, . . . my recent work has been less
oriented towards literary narrative than to narrative in such diverse domains as
anthropology, visual art, and the critique of scholarship. So McQuillans gen-
eralisation, which I quoted at the beginning of this chapter, Narrative theory
now lives on, embedded in the work and tropes of post-structuralism, doesnt
imply a falling-off of interest in narrative theory. On the contrary, the rele-
vance of narrative theory is now seen in any area of human semiosis; that is,
where humans make meaning (such as in popular culture, as in much of this
book).
From post-structuralist criticisms of structuralist studies of narrative that
Propps functions and Levi-Strausss paradigms were not objectively in the text,
and that Bal herself became uneasy about her positivistic training you might
already have inferred subjectively of course! the post-structuralist perspective.
The word de-construction (it originally had a hyphen), as used by the French
philosopher Jacques Derrida, is frequently associated with post-structuralist talk;
one can (at least) gloss deconstruction as the undoing of the dichotomy of subject
and object, the recognition of the subject in the object. The structure is the object
plus the subjective intelligence of the observer; the structure is a simulacrum of
the object. In other words, the experience and understanding of the observer are
built into the observation. The experience and understanding of the interpreter
are built into the interpretation (Spivak 1976: lvii). Structuralist studies of nar-
rative are certainly useful for gaining insights and making generalisations and
comparisons which is the role of any theory, to give us helpful ways of talking
about an object of study but they do not have the objective status that, in their
heyday, was given to them by structuralist theorists. Remember Peirces under-
standing of the sign, discussed in chapter 2 above. The structuralist objectivity
derived from a simple dualism of external: internal to the observer/interpreter. In
contrast, for Peirce, objectivity is always mediated, the interpreter interpreting
within the semiotic world of his/her Umwelt which, to a greater or lesser extent,
might coincide with external reality.
A helpful example of deconstruction is given by Barbara Hernstein Smith, in her
study of the many versions of Cinderella. Her paper deconstructs the structural-
ist opposition of story and discourse: the notion that there is an objectively gen-
eral underlying story associated with many particular surface discourses/tellings.
From the post-structuralist perspective, the story is not underlying it is just
another version that the teller has told for a particular social purpose. Smith
writes:
Not only will different summaries of the same narrative be produced by people
with different conventions, habits, and models of summarising, but even given
the same conventions, their summaries will be different if the motives and pur-
poses of their summarising are different. Thus one would present a different plot
summary of a given novel if ones motive were to advertise it to potential buyers
or to deplore its sexism to a friend and still different if one were summarising the
novel in the course of presenting a new interpretation of it or of writing a critical
biography of its author. Each of these summaries would simplify the narrative
at a different level of abstraction, and each of them would preserve, omit, link,
isolate, and foreground different features or sets of features in accord with the
particular occasion and purposes of the summarising. It is evident . . . that each
of these summaries would . . . be another version of the novel: an abridged, and
simplified version . . .
(Smith in McQuillan 2000: 141)
Think of the Readers Digest abridged versions of novels, of the comic book ver-
sions of Shakespearean plays . . .
Structuralist studies of narrative, then, focused on the text as an object of study.
Post-structuralist studies, with their awareness of the perspective, the subjectivity
of any interpretation, have paid explicit attention to the subject: that is, the human
being doing the producing or interpreting of narrative. A concern with the subject
has led in much contemporary work to a focus on ideology the ideology of those
producing text and the ideology of those interpreting it, as readers or viewers. A
very influential text of this kind is The Postmodern Condition, by Jean-Francois
Lyotard, which appeared in 1984. In his lengthy gloss on Narrative, McQuillan
gives a comment on Lyotard as item 7:
For Lyotard, narrative is a mode of knowledge . . . Knowledge is articulated and

communicated in society in the form of narratives. Therefore, narratives define
the possibilities of knowledge and, hence, action in any given society. Thus,
narratives are legitimised by the very fact that they exist. A knowledge of the
narratives of a community or society distinguishes an indigenous person from
an outsider.
(McQuillan 2000: 323)
From that last sentence, you could infer why Mieke Bal, in 1997, could say
her study of narrative had moved from a concern with literary texts to include
anthropology.
The French literary and cultural critic Roland Barthes moved from structural-
ist towards post-structuralist practice in his approach to narrative. (His early
paper, Introduction to the structural analysis of narratives, was very influential.
McQuillan 2000: 10914.) He was one of the first to do so. In his early work, in
the 1960s, he drew diagrams of inferred narrative structure and talked of story
and discourse, but in his book S/Z (published in 1970, in French) Barthes makes a
consciously idiosyncratic analysis of a novella by Balzac. Emphasising the contin-
gency of any particular reading of a text, Barthes names five codes with no claim
that these are absolute codes, just ones he finds useful and then exhaustively
discusses his own interpretation of the novella, making explicit the way in which
his own particular experiences and history as a reader are contextualising the nar-
rative for him (that is, giving him a context of reception in which to make sense of
the narrative), so that the text is meaningful for him (Barthes 1974). Describing
Barthes 117 pages (approximately) analysing the thirty-three-page story, Lacey
comments that this is impressive . . . and mad (Lacey 2000: 727).
The advantage of reading such a study as S/Z is that it allows you to follow the
traces of highly informed reading by a very intelligent and very erudite reader
a kind of modelling of imaginative reading, from which, if one is accustomed to
more frugal reading practices, one can learn. The best kind of literary criticism is
exactly like this not telling you how a text is, but modelling for you how it might
be read.
Since 1980, the narrative theory of the French scholar Gerard Genette has
been particularly influential because it is the most thorough attempt we have
to identify, name, and illustrate the basic constituents and techniques of narra-
tive (Jonathan Cullers foreword in Genette 1980: 7). Genettes analytic categories
were derived from his close work on Marcel Prousts novel, La recherche du temps
perdu(In Search of Lost Time). Table 3.3 gives an overview, without detailed terms.
(For a brief discussion, see Cortazzi 1993: 937; see also the section on diegesis
and mimesis in chapter 2 above.)
Because Genettes terms describe features in the text, his theory is in the struc-
turalist tradition. As Culler observes, in his foreword to Genettes most famous
book, Narrative Discourse: An Essay in Method, [This major work] is one of the
central achievements of what was called structuralism. The structuralist study of
literature . . . sought not to interpret literature but to investigate its structures and
devices (Genette 1980: 78). In comparison, traditional readers attempt to inter-
pret literature whereas post-structuralist or postmodern critics attempt to iden-
tify the ideology of the interpreter (whether speaker, writer, listener or reader) or
investigator (another critic or theorist). As the opening paragraphs of this chapter
imply, these three approaches do not form a linear progression, but can coexist
usefully for different purposes, as long as the user recognises the relevance and
Table 3.3: Genettes set of categories for analysing narrative.
TENSE MOOD VOICE
Order Focalisation Narrators

The order of events in the The perspective from Figure 2.2 Speech acts of
narrative compared to which the narrative is narrator
the chronological order told, the one who sees,
of events as opposed to the one
who tells (the narrator).
A refinement of the
traditional concept point
of view (Rimmon-
Kenan, 1983: chapter 6).
Duration Distance Speech
Compares how long a Diegesis and mimesis, as Figure 2.2 Speech acts as
narrator dwells on events indicated on figure 2.2 acts of characters
when telling them in the
narrative with how long
those events might take if
actually experienced.
Frequency
Number of mentions of an
event in the narrative
theoretical implications of all three approaches. For example, Genettes detailed

structuralist study of Proust might enable many readers to develop a more subtle
interpretative response to the complex writing of that author.
At the same time, Genettes comments can have unexpected resonance with
postmodern notions one might have about the kind of media discussed in this
book. For example, [We observe] the increasing discontinuity of the narra-
tive. The Proustian narrative tends to become more and more discontinuous,
syncopated, built of enormous scenes separated by immense gaps, and thus
it tends to deviate more and more from the hypothetical norm of narrative
isochrony (Genette 1980: 93). (Isochrony: a 1:1 duration, or a direct equivalence
between story time and plot time; see Julian Murphets discussion of isochrony
in chapter 5.) The unexpected resonance here is with the commercial televi-
sion production of the soap opera (see chapter 13), except with an inversion of
size and length of time (the soap opera narrative typically cuts from one short
scene to another, each showing what different characters are doing or saying at
much the same time). However, as that chapter elaborates, this is the soap opera
norm, rather than the structuralist notion of the hypothetical norm of narrative
isochrony.
Narrative and time
Despite the differences between various theories described so far, they share a
common feature: they all assume that narrative is somehow about time. In most
accounts of narrative before about 1980, time is assumed to be a meaning through
which narratives are understood to be coherent, but this assumption receives lit-
tle direct attention. In contrast, however, the movement to post-structuralism
(even if not specifically theorised) sees time become the principal focus of nar-
rative study. In his book-length study, H. Porter Abbott asks in his first chapter,
Narrative and life: What does narrative do for us? (The us is human beings.) He
answers many things but that if we had to choose one answer above all others,
the likeliest is that narrative is the principal way in which our species organises its
understanding of time (Abbott 2002: 3). As early as 1983, the publication date in
French (although still trailing the vocabulary of a structuralist scholarly context
remember intertextuality!), Paul Ricoeur writes, on the first page of his massive
three-volume study, Time and Narrative: The world unfolded by every narrative
work is always a temporal world. Or . . . time becomes human time to the extent
that it is organised after the manner of narrative; narrative, in turn, is meaningful
to the extent that it portrays the features of temporal experience (Ricoeur 1984: 3).
The general assumption that narrative is about time might derive, yet again,
from the work of Aristotle. As already described, Aristotle considered the most
important aspect of narrative was plot the ordered arrangements of the inci-
dents and that in the most effective plots these incidents are causally related:
what happens, happens as a result of some previous incident. Now time is of
the essence in causality the cause precedes the effect. The most effective plots
are thus evaluated by a criterion dependent on time meaning relations between
incidents.
Aristotle assumed that less effective plots will also be ordered by time but that
inferior plots will have mere temporal sequence in their incidents. Ideally, these
[plot discoveries or reversals] should develop out of the very structure of the plot,
so that they are the inevitable or probable consequence of what has gone before,
for there is a big difference between what happens as a result of something else and
what merely happens after it (McQuillan 2000: 44). But this confusion between
mere chronological sequence and causal connections is just what can be exploited
to make narrative sense. This confusion is so traditional that it has a medieval
Latin name, post hoc ergo propter hoc. I quote McQuillans glossary:
According to Barthes (reading Aristotle), narrativity is sustained by the confu-

sion between what-comes-after-X and what-is-caused-by-X (e.g. The family left
Glasgow and Jane became sad in which Janes sadness is assumed to derive from
the family leaving Glasgow). Scholasticism identifies such confusion between
chronology and consequence with the Latin tag post hoc ergo propter hoc [after
thing therefore because of thing].
(McQuillan 2000: 326)
In language, this potential confusion is particularly associated with parataxis;

that is, clauses joined by and (sometimes immediately adjacent, without and)
as, for example, in each of the following two sentences:
He fell to the ground and the gun went off.

(He fell to the ground; the gun went off.)
The gun went off and he fell to the ground.

(The gun went off; he fell to the ground.)
For each sentence we assume a different temporal relation between the same
events, and are likely to assume a causal relation in the second sentence (he fell
because he was shot). If, however, the two clauses are joined by a subordinating
conjunction, such as when, which makes the meaning relation explicit, then the
clauses can follow in either order but be understood with the same time meaning
relation:
He fell to the ground when the gun went off.

When the gun went off he fell to the ground.
Note that when has a temporal meaning, but not necessarily a causal one
in narrative context, he might be startled by the explosion rather than wounded.
We are more likely to understand a causal relation from the simple parataxis (the
gun went off and he fell to the ground), although, as always with language, a
particular textual or situational context might suggest another interpretation to
the reader or listener.
Yet this principle of post hoc ergo propter hoc was what early film-makers dis-
covered to be the very stuff of editing to construct a narrative. In 1917 the young
Russian film-maker Lev Kuleshov shot film of two people looking off screen and
then, in quite a different place, he shot film of an electric pylon. Then he edited the
two shots together. Now the people appeared to be looking at the pylon. Kuleshov
was amazed to discover that he had created a new geography, a new place of
action; that is, the narrative coherence perceived in the sequence of shots in film
had created a visual fiction. In a study of narrative composition, Nick Davis com-
ments, Like other early film-makers, Kuleshov seems to have been puzzled and
intrigued by the propensity of shots in juxtaposition to show what had not been
present in the same shots individually (Hawthorn 1985: 25).
In another famous experiment Kuleshov took one close-up of a well-known
actor, then juxtaposed that single shot successively with images of a womans
body lying in a coffin, a bowl of hot soup, a small girl playing with a teddy bear
and so on. Audiences viewing these miniature sequences saw an appropriate
affective response sorrow, hunger, fatherly pride and what have you
registered in the actors facial expression, though this was in fact unchanged
(Davis in Hawthorn 1985: 25). In this second account we see the way a viewer,
in perceiving coherence between the two shots, actually writes in their own life
experience of events and feelings and attributes some psychological state to the
first image of the male actor in order to generate a meaning link between the
successive shots: The man looks sorrowful because he has lost his wife.
Alfred Hitchcock, who studied the early Soviet film-makers closely, even
demonstrated Kuleshovs idea during a 1965 television program, filming him-
self with a suggestive smile, then intercutting the image first with tender-hearted
footage of a mother and a baby, then with a beautiful young woman in a sexy
bikini, winkingly making his point that the order and arrangement of the images
the editing drastically altered the message (McGilligan 2003: 756). Strictly
speaking, what is altered is not the message but the sequence of shots to which
a viewer gives coherence from their own experience. Only a post-structuralist
account one that acknowledges the subject in the object is adequate to describe
the subjectively coherent interpretation a producer or a viewer can make of an
edited film.
Conclusion
The history of narrative theory is itself a narrative told in chronological order,

forming links that are both temporal and causal. Post-structuralism is a neces-
sary consequence of the limitations of structuralist analysis, repositioning the
subject as the producer of meaning in a text. This brief account of the develop-
ment of narrative theory draws attention to the importance of linguistic concepts
to an understanding of narrative structure, starting particularly with Saussures
structuralist opposition between langue and parole, paradigm and syntagm. This
chapter also reiterates the central function of time as a structuring principle in
narrative, one whose meaning is as much a product of subjective interpretation
as any other aspect of narrative.
Part 2
Film as narrative and visual mode
Chapter 4
Stories and plots
Julian Murphet
There are many ways to think about film as a medium; its narrative proper-
ties represent only one component of a very complex whole. For example, it
would be perfectly legitimate to approach film from its technological aspect,
or to consider its function in sustaining a certain political culture, or to con-
centrate on its pictorial aesthetic qualities, or on its musical, rhythmic or chro-
matic properties. Nevertheless, both within the purview of this book, and more
generally in the way we tend to think about and discuss the medium, films are
predominantly considered as narrative forms. Indeed, it would be possible to
contend that film was the dominant narrative medium of the twentieth century;
a fact not without its own interesting history, some of which we will glance at
below.
As a narrative medium, film like other narrative media: epics, novels, dra-
mas, operas and the various media considered in this book has established
many interlocking conventions to make its storytelling comprehensible. Many of
these conventions concern the unique art of editing: the splicing together of dif-
ferent shots to make one coherent narrative whole. But other conventions have
to do with how the image is composed within the frame of any given shot.
Traditionally, these two distinct areas in film aesthetics are known as, respec-
tively, montage and mise en scene. Narrative conventions in the cinema articu-
late these two domains: there are rules for the way shots should be assembled
to provide the greatest narrative efficiency, and rules for the way individual
shots should be composed to direct attention to the relevant narrative infor-
mation. However, in undertaking an investigation of the narrative dimension
47
48 Film as narrative and visual mode
of film, it is arguably best to begin with the raw narrative unit of the medium:
the shot.
Shots as proto-narratives
Films ability to reproduce actions in a photographically realistic space is the most

important property it brings to the telling of stories. In every other medium, a far
greater amount of effort has to be expended to create the illusion of a believable
milieu: words describing places and faces; theatrical sets suggesting Toscas tower
or Elsinore. From the moment of the first short films by the Lumiere brothers,
however, the miraculous narrative advance of the cinema was apparent: there it is,
happening before your eyes. A real train pulls into a real station and stops; a real
factory opens its gates and out pours a real stream of industrial labourers; a man
in a real garden bends over his blocked hose and is sprayed by real water when
his hidden tormentor lifts his foot from the hose. The suspension of disbelief is
immediate; we no longer have to be lulled into a sense of security by an eloquent
narrator, or gradually accept that that prop really is what it purports to be. To be
sure, nothing is as simple as it seems, and no doubt a cultural predisposition to
see flat images in a rectangular space as three dimensional is an advantage in
seeing the real in film; yet, all quibbling aside, the apocryphal stories of the first
viewers of the Lumieres LArrive dun train en gare (1895), rushing away from the
projection in fear for their lives, are true in the sense that they underline this
basic fact film is compellingly realistic, and its shots elicit more immediate
credence than any other narrative medium.
The question is: is LArrive dun train en gare properly narrative? A train pulls
towards us from a distance, and stops, at a station platform where passengers
mill around. This is the establishment of a scene and the completion of an action.
At this very early stage in the development of cinematic narrative, there was no
need for further elaborations of plot; the mere presentation of an uninterrupted
moving visual image was enough. The effect of the Lumieres arrival of the train
suggests that the mechanical succession of briefly illuminated frames, at sixteen or
twenty-four frames per second, can establish a unity of place, a unity of time and
a unity of action (Aristotles three narrative unities) without any formal effort on
the part of the putative storyteller or of the viewer. The train entering the station
happens in a way that mere still photography or painting cannot match and,
more to the point, in a way that verbal narration cannot match either. The action
It is, however, true that since the development of digital visual technology, and especially of digitally
animated feature-length films, the shot as such has ceased to exist as the relevant unit of narrative
analysis. In fact, these films (such as Toy Story and Antz) continue to appear as though they are made
up of shots, because the directors and animators want to adapt the new technology to existing habits
of perception and comprehension, even though the medium itself has transcended the unit of the
shot, and with it the necessity of cutting.
Stories and plots 49
is integrated, seamless, complete, self-contained, repeatable and consistent. The

arrival of the train does not, apparently, have to be narrated; it just happens. It
has become as natural and organic an event as the blowing of wind through the
leaves or the ripple of water on a pond. In this respect, cinema really introduces
a revolution into the art of narrative. It naturalises the conventional; it sidesteps
the inevitably artificial reduction of an action to a sequence of words, and gives us
instead a mesmerising visual unity because the artificiality is purely mechanical,
it announces itself only when the projector breaks down.
So, can we really call the event as represented in this film narrative at all? In
the words of H. Porter Abbott, it will suffice for a narrative: in my view [he says]
the capacity to represent an event, either in words or in some other way, is the key
gift and it produces the building blocks out of which all the more complex forms
are built (Abbott 2002: 12). I agree with this, but I think it pays to differentiate
between such bare events as the arrival of a train at a station and the complex
narrative of The Great Train Robbery (Porter 1903), or Hitchcocks Strangers on a
Train (1951). It is in this respect that I recommend the concept of proto-narrativity:
a proto-narrative represents an event, but is not yet a narrative proper. It might
become one, but only when it is combined with other, connected represented
events. In a proto-narrative some action happens, and this event provides a unit
for larger compositions, as a sentence does in prose, but without requiring the
complex linguistic conventions of prose narrative. You dont seem to have to be
literate in any language to get this seamless action, as you need to be literate to
get the sentence a train pulled into the station; just as you will need to be film
literate to get Strangers on a Train. LArrive offers us a proto-narrative, and it
does so by a calculated act of framing through mise en scene.
For the film is, despite all its appearance of immediacy and absence of conven-
tions, still a deliberately staged, focused and framed episode, with some kind of
author or narrator hovering over it. The imitation of action in film is so power-
fully persuasive, and its modus operandi so purely technical, that the traditional
function of narrator seems severely weakened: who is narrating the trivial arrival
of the train at the station? It seems to be nothing other than a moving slice of real-
ity, unmediated and pure. Nevertheless, this is indeed an illusion. At the very least,
someone has mounted a camera at a specific spot at a specific time to capture a
specific event in a particular way. What if the camera had been pointed at the sky
at this moment, or taken the shot two minutes later, after the train had left? As
well, there really is something like a story here, and arguably one with meanings:
Look, heres a train, on time! Isnt France wonderful? The French trains and the
French cinema are two wonderful, modern things, and see how they go together
so much to enjoy! In a single shot, this is just part of the story being told, by
two brothers who made a fortune out of such simple proto-narratives. The first
business of narrativity in the cinema is framing the event in a shot, and every such
framing is, already, a story of sorts: the minimal but indispensable unit of film
narrative.
Putting shots together
Now, if you want to construct a larger narrative out of several proto-narrative

shots, how are you going to justify the leap between various points of view that
each cut entails? Each shot in the representational cinema has its own perspective,
duration, logic and justification. And each cut radically disrupts this integrity. The
fact that we, today, rarely notice the cut as such (and students often need to be
trained to tell where cuts fall) is a product of intensive conventionalisation, a
testament to the degree to which the radical disruptions of the editorial process
have been naturalised and integrated into our cognisance of filmic narrative form.
To a large extent, the history of narrative film has been one continuous effort to
naturalise its conventions to the degree that we can experience it like a novel or
like a stage play.
How so? Helen Fulton considers the developed conventions of visual cohesion
in film form in part 4 of this book; in this section, I will be approaching films
narrative conventions under the more traditional and literary auspices of plot,
narrative time, voice and point of view. In each case, however, the point is that the
potential for film to elaborate an entirely new perspective on things (a mechanical,
analytical, inhuman perspective) is constrained and curtailed by an overarching
effort to humanise the medium, render it subservient to the rules of human
psychology and causality as these had been canonised by centuries of spoken,
written and enacted narrative forms.
The first impulse [in early cinema] was simply to turn the camera on some
interesting subject, staged or real, and let it run. In terms of structure, the earliest
films . . . are simply brief recordings of entertaining or amusing subjects in which
the camera was made to obey the laws of empirical reality. That is, it was treated
as an unblinking human eye, and there was no concept of editing because reality
cannot be edited by the human eye.
(Cook 1996: 89; my emphasis)
As David Cook here implies, as soon as you introduce the narrative logic of
film construction, and splice two or more shots together, all at once you lose the
comfortable analogy between machine and bodily organ. No matter how hard
you try, in real life it is impossible to see the visual cut from the outside of a train
rushing past, to the inside, where Cary Grant and Eva Marie Saint are sitting
down to lunch in the dining car (in North by Northwest; Hitchcock 1959). This
transition, this editorial cut, is fundamentally inhuman. It suggests that the point
of view of narrative film is radically different from that of all previous media the
immediate leaps one is constantly making from shot to shot have no parallel for
the human eye or any other human sense. It is the manufactured visual experience
of a machine, and if we assume this point of view, then we are in effect identifying
with a piece of technology.
Edited film thus offers the first instance of a properly post-human perspec-
tive, and the remarkable thing has been the degree to which this post-humanism
has been repressed and denied by the dominant forces in film production since
its invention. But always remember: it could have been otherwise. In the Soviet
Union, during the 1920s, many experiments were made to liberate the film
medium from classical modes of narration. The Soviet avant-garde in cinema
realised that film could achieve radically post-human effects, and tried to build
up new laws of construction that would allow the camera, and the process of edit-
ing, a maximum degree of freedom. The apex of this achievement is a film called
Man with a Movie Camera (USSR, Dziga Vertov 1929), which not only allows the
camera to take up an amazing number of inhuman positions on everyday life in
revolutionary Russia but also combines its images in ways that are not tied to any
character other than the camera itself. In this film the machine, the camera, is
the hero, and human beings are only a small part of the world it can perceive: a
world of machines, natural forces, buildings, light and shade, ideas and symbols.
The idea of tying this unprecedented freedom of perception down to something as
tired and conventional as a story was anathema to the films director, who called
himself Dziga Vertov, after the sound made by film passing through the projectors
shutter mechanism. In his wonderful manifesto of 1922, he wrote:
We consider the psychological . . . film-drama weighted down with apparitions

and childhood memories an absurdity.
...
We proclaim the old films, based on the romance, theatrical films and the like,
to be leprous.
Keep away from them!
Keep your eyes off them!
Theyre mortally dangerous!
Contagious!
...
The psychological prevents man from being as precise as a stopwatch; it
interferes with his desire for kinship with the machine.
(Vertov 1984: 57)
This kind of futuristic utopianism, although it provided the blueprint for some
of the most exciting films ever made, was never likely to catch on in the West,
and in the USA especially. There, above all, the dominant domain of the cinema
has ever been the domain of human psychology, human action, human sentiment
and human cliche; in a word, the world of stories. The question is: how did the
US cinema, and all of its imitators, manage to channel a machine-like perspective
on the world into another version of human psychology? How did Hollywood
transform a machinic and technical point of view into a human and narrative
one?
In order to draw crowds, and generate profits, the new medium conformed
to existing ideas about what entertainment and storytelling were. First, this
meant always carefully preparing and planning the story of what would be shot
before the camera began to roll. The act of writing would therefore precede and
determine the process of cinematography, in order to eliminate wasted, random
or unplanned incidents. Second, it meant adapting pre-existent styles of perfor-
mance from the stage to the exigencies of the newer medium. Viewers like to
identify with human beings, and stage acting offered a ready-made model of such
identification; in particular, the stages cult of the star was quickly adapted to the
cinematic medium. Time and again since the heyday of the 1920s, narrative has
proven subordinate to star power in the creation of cinematic product in the USA.
Third, and most importantly, it meant that, in the construction of complex nar-
ratives out of basic shot units, fundamental narrative principles derived from the
long history of narrative form would be applied to the nascent medium. To bor-
row a well-known, if theoretically vulnerable, distinction from narrative theory,
we could say that, in the elaboration of the codes of film narrative, the distinction
between story and plot was of paramount importance in dictating what would
be shot, how it would be shot, and how the shots would be assembled.
Plots and stories
In the world of film studies, the word most often used for the story of a film
is the Greek word for recounted story, diegesis. Narrative film, we might say,
privileges the frame of the diegesis: it fosters, during our viewing experience, the
apprehension of a single, consistent, integral imagined world, in which actions
connect with one another causally, and through which, generally, one central
character makes his or her way from an initial state to a different, final state. The
implied world of the diegesis is most often structured around a major chain
of events, concerning the central character(s), and usually some minor chains
of events connected tangentially to the main line, and it is in order to make this
world clear, apparent and believable that most of the conventions of film narrative
construction were developed. Such an approach to storytelling is entirely derived
from oral, written and performed narrative.
And, as with all other narrative media, it is still convenient to make a distinction
between this implied world of the diegesis and the actual projected celluloid (or
written words, or stage performance) before our eyes and ears. No one would wish
to argue that the world of Bambi (Hand 1942) or Pulp Fiction (Tarantino 1994)
is real; yet the films themselves certainly are, and one of their main effects is to
make it compelling for us to believe in their implied worlds for the duration of any
screening (and, in our private reflections, for any time thereafter). The trick of all
good narrative consists in collapsing this inevitable distinction (artificial presen-
tation, believable diegesis) into the right kind of distance for its implied audience,
and the name most generally given to this trick is plot. Plot is the wherewithal of
narrative construction. It is the higher-order art of selection, combination, exag-

geration, distortion, omission, acceleration, retardation, implication and so on,
whereby a basic story (or chain of events) is restructured to become interesting
and compelling to a certain audience. Pulp Fiction is an excellent example of a film
that deliberately plots its material in unexpected and arresting ways (arranging
incidents out of chronological order; repeating key incidents; adding non-diegetic
elements such as the box drawn by Uma Thurmans fingers when she says square;
and so on) in order to seduce a media-savvy audience into its diegesis while also
keeping an appropriately ironic distance from it. Bambi on the other hand is a
perfect instance of classical narrative form, where the plot never intrudes too
visibly to distract its young viewers from the diegesis, but maintains a quiet grip
on proceedings nevertheless.
Plots and stories, then; but there are stories and there are stories. The story
of such a film as The Usual Suspects (Brian Singer 1995) is relatively dense with
inconsistent information, and its articulation, reconstructed painstakingly from
the plot, is no easy matter. In this regard it is an unusual suspect in the history of
Hollywood film, which relies heavily on legibility and simplicity. Hollywood story
construction, to quote David Bordwell, is premised on very simple laws: causality,
consequence, psychological motivations, the drive toward overcoming obstacles
and achieving goals. Character-centred i.e., personal or psychological causality
is the armature of the classical story (Bordwell, Staiger & Thompson 1985: 13).
To be sure, as Singers film shows, we have evolved since the days of classical cin-
ema proper (the high point of which was probably 1939); yet there is little doubt
that these same laws, suitably modified to a more canny and media-conscious
spectatorship, apply equally well to most Hollywood products today. What has
changed, I feel, is the quality and nature of the plotting. In what remains of this
chapter, I want to focus on three distinct historical examples of Hollywood film,
one classical, one modernist and one postmodernist, to see how film plotting
has altered in response to the evolution of the global filmgoer while persisting in
framing very basic and elemental storylines. These three examples are: The Birth
of a Nation (Griffith 1915), Citizen Kane (Welles 1941) and Memento (Nolan 2000).
No matter how far these films, progressively, get from immediately apparent laws
of psychological cause and effect (to the extent that the last precisely inverts this
order), we can still locate a classical story logic behind each of them.
Classical narration
In The Birth of a Nation, D. W. Griffith, who pioneered so many of the finer details
of narrative construction in his early shorts, and here virtually invented the fea-
ture length film, prioritised strong structural dualisms (North v. South, black v.
white, male and female, blonde and brunette, etc.) in the story material. This
was to make sure that the endurance test of three hours viewing-time was not
made helplessly complicated and alienating for an audience used to quick, five- to
ten-minute presentations. Clear oppositions underlie almost every major scene,

and the stark visual contrast of black and white on monochrome stock was raised
into the films central political, ideological and racial crux. But more importantly
still, he carried his dualistic, melodramatic temperament across into the business
of plot construction and editorial rhythm.
The films opening scenes are a good illustration of the way in which Griffith
would conceive of his plotting in the film as a whole. After a brief, historical pre-
lude (no more than mobile tableaux explained with intertitles), Griffith installs us
spatially in the home and then gardens of the Stoneman household, the Northern
half of his two-family historical romance. There a letter is penned that promises a
visit to the other, Southern family, the Camerons, in Piedmont, Virginia. Griffith
then cuts to Piedmont and to the Camerons out on the porch, receiving the let-
ter. The subsequent scene concerns the arrival of the Stoneman brothers at the
Cameron house. Very crudely, this is a working example of Griffiths method of
fusing shot sequences within an evolving dramatic unity: two distinct locales are
first of all paralleled, then stitched together by revealed diegetic intent (the letter
proposing the visit), and by achieved synthesis (the visit itself), which mingles
elements of both, discrete sets (Stoneman/North; Cameron/South). In this way,
and throughout his landmark film, Griffith canonised certain habits of construc-
tion (of plotting) that laid the foundations for much US film to come. From the
rather simplistic and melodramatic story materials that he took from his source
novel, Dixons The Clansman, Griffith extrapolated a bipolar and coercive editorial
rhythm, predicated on patterns of dualistic alternation, disjunction and synthesis.
This rhythm was called parallel alternate montage, and nowhere is its logic
better witnessed than in the thrilling climax of The Birth of a Nation. Two principal
lines of action, each consisting of two opposed forces, are coordinated and unified
by Griffith in an inspired logic of intercutting and mutual implication. The first
line concerns Ben Cameron at the head of the mounted legion of Night Hawks
(or Ku Klux Klan), riding towards Piedmont to save the town from the outrages of
crazed Negroes and Elsie Stoneman from the lascivious clutches of her fathers
trusted mulatto conspirator, Lynch. Meanwhile, in the words of David Cook, in
the second line of action,
Negro militiamen have discovered the cabin containing Dr Cameron, Margaret

[Cameron], and Phil [Stoneman], and have besieged it with every intention of
murdering its occupants. Shots of this action are now intercut with shots of the
torrential ride of the Klan, Negroes rioting in the streets of Piedmont, and . . .
Lynchs impending rape of Elsie Stoneman; so that we have a suspense-filled,
multi-pronged, last-minute rescue elaborately wrought of four simultaneous
actions converging toward a climax. Griffith heightens the tension of his montage
by decreasing the temporal length of each shot and increasing the tempo of
physical movement as the sequence traces towards its crescendo.
(Cook 1996: 91)
Griffith so orchestrates his material that two distinct stories finally converge
at a single point, at once emphasising the difference between the two series of
events, and demonstrating their ultimate harmony within a higher-level unity
once narrative closure is reached. Griffiths plotting mechanism, which proved to
be so persuasive and influential, has always to do with the restoration of unity,
accord and organic harmony out of alternating rhythms of discord, animosity and
opposition. His legacy, looming so large in the history of US film, is a formidable
formal ideology: the excitement of a threat to order, of difference and dissonance,
will always be contained and becalmed by a flexible organic unity. His plots grip
us with their strong parallelisms and the breathlessness of the accelerating speed
of their cuts, but only to reassure us with their final resolutions.
Classical Hollywood plotting owes much to Griffiths inaugural act in The Birth
of a Nation. The function of a good Hollywood plot is to concentrate the specta-
tors attention on a story with this basic trajectory: a given state of affairs is inter-
rupted by some cut in the real; readjustments and losses occur, but finally a new,
improved state of affairs emerges from the central characters wrestling with that
cut in things (for example, Ben Stonemans invention of the Ku Klux Klan even-
tually overcomes the threat to Southern order and to his own beloved, represented
by black enfranchisement). The cut is usually a villain of some sort, but could
just as well be an impending disaster, a medical emergency, a threat to an expected
union and so on. A Hollywood plot focuses our attention on this story by manipu-
lating our interest and identification through devices I will discuss in chapters 5, 6
and 7 (point of view and voice, above all), but more importantly through coercive
rhythms of construction that automatically guide our sympathies towards im-
perilled situations and characters. Good plotting always emphasises the dark-
ness, power and malignancy of the storys villain, disaster or disorder, and under-
lines the goodness and undeserved suffering of the hero, by cutting back and
forth between the two fields of action in such a way as to underscore this dual-
ism as an opposition, a Manichean struggle between right and wrong, good and
bad. The good is always a human (or humanised) character, an individual self,
struggling to survive and do the right thing in adverse circumstances; the bad
is whatever threatens the personal integrity and security of this self. Classical
plotting privileges this simplification of the world through not-so-subtle patterns
of rhythmic organisation, tonal accentuation, musical accompaniment, colour
and field dynamics that have become all but invisible to us during a century of
familiarisation and habituation.
Modernist narration
What cultural history knows as modernism was the first great movement to ques-
tion these habits of viewing installed by classical narrative form. This question-
ing went ahead on two fronts, both at the level of the story material itself and,
more importantly, at the level of its organisation, its plotting. In fact, however,
as far as the US cinema is concerned, the first aspect of this modernist desta-
bilisation of classical norms really could not take root. It took the European
modernists (such film-makers as Godard, Resnais, Bergman, Rossellini and so
on) to dismantle the hegemonic story regime of cause-and-effect psychological
determinism emanating from Hollywood. By filming stories predicated on polit-
ical causation, collective social dialectics, the impossibility of a single point of
view, and spiritual profundities, the Europeans effectively launched a wholly dif-
ferent type of cinema, often in a kind of loving opposition to the dominant US
films. In the USA itself, it was much harder to make the break from classical story
structure; what did emerge, however, most unexpectedly, and as though in antici-
pation of the revolution that would finally take place in US films thirty years later,
was one work that broke free from the dominant Griffith-style plotting of Holly-
wood cinema and cleared an effective space of resistance. That film was Citizen
Kane.
Citizen Kane is not particularly remarkable for its story. As in many another
exemplary fictional biopic, Kane tells the story of one mans vaulting ambition
and its destructive consequences for his personal integrity and those around him.
It situates cause and effect strictly within the domain of human psychological
motivation (except for the social cause of the 1930s Depression), and focuses on
a very limited cast of interrelated characters, in a few major spaces (the Inquirer
office, the Kane household, Susans apartment, Xanadu and so on). There is noth-
ing path-breaking about any of this. What has made Kane the most revered film
in US cinema history is its plotting, the art of its construction.
Borrowing its form loosely from the generic field of detective fiction, Kane splits
its story materials into two distinctive, if overlapping diegeses: the seventy-five-
year life of Charles Foster Kane, up to and including his death, and the subsequent
week-long journalistic investigation into his final words. This second diegetic
frame provides the rationale for the organisation of the first frame, which is the
story proper: the story of Kanes life. In this sense, it makes some sense to speak
of the faceless reporter Thompson as the plotter of the primary story material,
just as a detective is the plotter of his investigation of a crime. The plot comes
after the story and arranges its pertinent details into some arresting order. Citizen
Kane makes an issue out of its own plotting: Thompson is sent on his quest for
Rosebud because the first plotted version of Kanes story the News on the
March newsreel is felt to be defective and incomplete. Rawlson and his team
of editors and journalists feel that the story could be better told; the story of the
newsreel is tired and uninteresting. So, what Thompson is effectively told to do,
under the guise of a search for more story information, is come up with a better
way to plot a seventy-five-year life in a five-minute newsreel (or a two-hour film,
which is what we see).
A good way to think about the convenient but controversial analytic distinction
between story and plot is in terms of necessity and contingency: story is what
has to happen, the incontrovertible sequence of events that gives the narrative its
identity (for example, Casablanca would not be Casablanca if Ilsa stayed with Rick
at the end). Plot, however, is the domain of choices and alternative possibilities in
the way that that necessary material is presented. The thing to remember about
all plots is that they could have been done differently. One of the delightful aspects
of Citizen Kane is its tongue-in-cheek flirtation with this fact. Early on, Thompson
pays Kanes widow, Susan Alexander Kane, his first visit in the hunt for Rosebud.
It makes good professional sense to go straight to the woman who shared many of
Kanes late years in the search for clues. However, Susans homodiegetic narration
of the final part of the story near the films beginning would ruin the aesthetic
orchestration of the narrative that Orson Welles had in mind: after the trial run of
the newsreel, a loosely chronological retelling of the life, from boyhood, through
early adulthood, middle age and old age.
So, in order to stall this part of the story, Welles makes sure that Susan is
hopelessly drunk with grief at the bar, unable to answer Thompsons questions.
Thompson therefore has to go to the Thatcher diaries first, and has to visit
Bernstein and Leland before he can return to Susan, who is at last in a position
to answer his queries. In this way, Welles has dangled before us an alternative
plot, which would have begun with Susan, then taken an altogether different path
through the story material, perhaps strictly retrogressive. Such an alternative plot
would not have altered any of the primary story material but would radically have
affected its emotional valency and meaning in the telling: if the snowbound boy
Kane, shouting The Union forever!, were left until near the films end, the affec-
tive power of the Rosebud revelation would be severely diminished. Similarly, if
the jaded and increasingly monstrous Kane of the Leland section were to precede
the jubilant and visionary Kane of the Bernstein section, the significance of either
section would be altered: it is harder to mourn the depleted enthusiast if we do
not yet know that he existed.
In these and other ways, Kane encourages us pace the Griffith-style of
film-making to imagine alternative plots, to try our hand, even, at playing
director. It is a film that foregrounds the constructedness of its plot, its contin-
gency and openness to variable constructions, above all by granting us a surrogate
viewer/director in Thompson, whose haphazard quest through thickets of tonally
and factually inconsistent material mirrors both our own and that of the director,
who, like Thompson, is obliged to put things into some order, if not the order.
Postmodern narration
Christopher Nolans Memento (2000) is a dazzling display of postmodern plotting.

Eschewing the modernist regard for synthetic totalities, as much as the classical
regard for dualisms and organic rhythms, Nolans film makes a virtue of its own
insular epistemology and inverts the very structure of chronology. We experience
the narration from the point of view of a character, Leonard Shelby, who suf-
fers from short-term memory loss, and to accentuate the fact that Shelby cannot
remember anything for longer than ten minutes, Nolan has constructed his nar-
rative segments (his scenes) in reverse order. Beginning, literally, at the end (and
in a sequence shown in reverse), the film is then plotted such that each successive
scene occurs (in story time) just before the previous scene. We could represent
this in the following way:
Memento
Story: A B C D E . . . V W X Y Z.
Plot: Z Y X W V . . . E D C B A.
This is not literally the plot of Memento, however, for strewn between several
of these scenes are snippets of another scene, shot in black and white, in which
Shelby tells someone over the telephone the sad story of Sammy, another char-
acter who suffers from short-term memory loss. These scene fragments are filmed
in the proper chronological order, but are taken from a scene that precedes the
rest of the story and, crucially enough, are finally revealed to be the back story
about Shelby himself (who is exposed to have been Sammy).
Here, we can see that the story itself, and its inclusion of the characterological
detail of short-term memory loss, amounts to little more than what the struc-
turalists called a motivation of the device. Nolan clearly wanted to make a
movie backwards, and the memory loss merely provides him with a narrative
excuse to do just that. The fact that so much of Mementos narrative informa-
tion depends upon Shelbys writing (tattoos, graffiti, commentary, dossiers) and
Polaroid photography, further emphasises the films status as a reflection on nar-
rative, rather than simply a narrative itself Nolan wants us to think about how we
employ verbal and visual techniques to make our lives coherent and meaningful,
in ways that are little more than fictional, rather than give way to the sheer flux of
being.
Through its ingenious plotting, Memento manages both to enthral us with an
essential film noir mystery (Who is Shelby? What are his real motivations?) thus
remaining in the territory of classical story cause and effect logic and to make us
question that logic and our dependency on it in a world full of fabricated images,
messages and identities. The radical inversion of story and plot sequencing might
also make us question this very distinction. For, if we were to write Memento
forwards if we were to plot the story material in its correct chronological
order (which we can do on DVD) what would emerge from this process would
be unrecognisable as Memento. That is to say, the identity of the narrative would
be so radically transformed; the suspense so thoroughly destroyed; the mystery
traduced; the motivation banal; the device of memory loss incomprehensible
that we would in effect have a completely different film, even though the shots
were the same and the story material identical.
Conclusion
And is not this the case, ultimately, for every film? I suggested above that plot
is the arena of narrative choice, of contingency, whereas story was the world of
necessity. But in every achieved narration, contingency becomes necessity the
final cut is what the film is. It might help us analytically to make these distinc-
tions and separate story from plot to aid our understanding of how narrative
functions, but the case of Memento, and of Kane, and of Birth of a Nation, make it
perfectly clear: the plot is the story. A Citizen Kane in which we began with Susans
story and worked backward to Thatchers would not be Orson Welles Citizen Kane;
it would be a very different narrative with very different meanings and implica-
tions. A Memento in which the whole story ran forward instead of backward is
not a film we would even want to watch; from it, all the magic of the film would
have evaporated; it would be banal and uninteresting. This is as much as to say,
echoing a phrase by Peter Brooks, that we read for the plot (Brooks 1992), not
for the story; or rather, to repeat what I have just said, the story is the plot. We
are interested and gripped not by the constituent elements of the story, in their
ideal order and transparent set of relations, but by the way in which this order
and these relations are gradually and teasingly revealed through the narration.
Abstracted from their plot, the story elements are about as interesting as names
in a telephone book; immersed into their narrative setting, these elements can be
as surprising as the revelation that Sammy is Shelby, or as moving as when we
learn that the dying words of one of the worlds wealthiest men is the name of a
poor childs sleigh.
Chapter 5
Narrative time
Julian Murphet
To begin with the very obvious, all storytelling is necessarily extended in time:
narrative is a temporal mode. To tell a story is to articulate represented events in
a sequence, putting one thing after another, drawing causal connections between
them, until we have moved (as Aristotle said) from beginning, to middle, to end.
And this takes time; it occupies and could even be said to flesh out time. Narrative
has generally been thought of as a pleasurable way of spending time, or filling it,
and from time to time we are even conscious of going to the movies to kill time.
From the moment our caregivers start telling us bedtime stories, we are woven
into narrative textures and use these textures to orient us in our daily experience of
time. The fact is that our very notion of time, the way we represent it intimately to
ourselves, is entirely bound up with the forms of narrative to which we have been
exposed. Try to imagine your own personal history outside some kind of narrative
shape; the closest you can get is a set of simultaneously juxtaposed images, from
which precisely the element of time is missing. Narrative is the medium in which
we think time, although it might as well be said that time itself, if we can imagine
it outside human consciousness, has nothing narrative about it. You might say
that narrative is the sense organ we have collectively evolved to detect and record
the passing of time and, like all sense organs, it is highly selective and restricted
in what it perceives of the real world.
Like theatre, dance and music, film is a medium that works through time. This
does not mean that it is inherently a narrative medium, just as neither music nor
dance is inherently narrative, but it does predispose the film medium to narrative
uses. Whether or not any film text is recognisably a narrative one, it is always, to
use a phrase coined by the great Russian film-maker Andrei Tarkovsky, sculpted
60
Narrative time 61
in time (Tarkovsky 1986). This beautiful image brings to light the inextricable
blending of temporal and spatial elements in film; Tarkovsky rightly suggests that,
unlike literary narrative, which is entirely linguistic and in some sense immaterial,
film has an ineluctable material and spatial dimension: the shots on celluloid
strips; the mechanism that passes them over the lens of the projector; the light
that casts its shadows on to the screen and our eyes; the illusion of real space.
These elements sculpt the time that we experience in film, moulding our sense
of pace, duration, continuity and temporal sweep.
Story time, plot time, screen time
Recall the distinction made in chapter 4 between story and plot despite under-
standable misgivings, this division has been useful in orienting the study of nar-
rative texts. And as far as the temporal dimension of texts is concerned, there
is a logical and convenient distinction to be made between the time of the story
and the time of the plot. The time of the story would be the period covered by
all of the events narrated during the film, including (if it is mentioned or implied
to be important) the birth of the lead character, and all the key events that have
shaped her life as we see it enacted before us. Remember that the story itself is
a rather ideal phenomenon. We never get it, directly, as such; it is something we
construct during the narration, filling in gaps as we go, and we can never finish
this task until all the pieces have been supplied. The story has a temporal order
all its own, which corresponds more or less to our conventional understanding
of time in the world; a series of connected events organised around a few major
transformations, which begins at a certain point, carries through its middle and
arrives finally at its end. Often this story time is marked by days, months, years
and then hours, minutes and even seconds, to make it easier for us to reconstruct
its original and sequential occurrence.
Nevertheless, it is not the story that we are presented with, it is the plot itself,
which has played with and distorted the time of the story to suit its own ends. It is
plot time with which we are confronted, and this has a logic that often flies in the
face of our conventional understanding of time in the world. Not only can plot
time be out of order (arranged in a non-chronological sequence) but also it can
slow itself down to an unworldly crawl, or accelerate to a frantic blur, or even skip
years altogether without a word. So, if story time appears to obey our everyday
sense of time as a series of moments succeeding one another in an irreversible
order, then plot time obeys only its own sense of what is most appropriate for
the increase of pleasure and the maximisation of aesthetic effects. The clearest
and most often cited illustration of this difference is the time taken by a detective
to unearth all the clues and piece together the crime (plot time) and the time of
both the crime itself and its subsequent investigation (story time). Plot time is
thus almost always shorter than story time.
Furthermore, we should add to this convenient distinction a third dimension of

narrative time in the cinema: the time of the actual presentation, or screen time.
Film is distinct from previous narrative media in that the speed of its projection
is mechanically fixed. Oral and written narratives are clearly highly flexible in the
speed of their delivery, whereas theatrical forms are less flexible but are certainly
open to wide variations in the pace of their presentation. As the first narrative
medium of the mechanical age, film has a rigidly determined time of presenta-
tion: owing to the standardised mechanism of projection, no matter where you
see Rashomon or Citizen Kane, you will be seeing it, literally, for exactly the same
period, down to the last half a second (allowing for some speed variation in trans-
fers to video, and of course the dead time of commercial interruptions on televi-
sion). This fact has meant that screen time is a very significant factor at the level
of film production. Literally every second counts, as it were, and costs a great deal
of money; so film-makers have mastered the art of timing as no previous group of
storytellers ever had to. Alfred Hitchcock was famous for knowing exactly, to the
order of fractions of a second, how long to hold a shot before cutting, and this
was in large part owing to the enormous pressure on each of his productions to
make every second of screen time pay.
So, with this initial tripartite conception of narrative time in film (story time,
plot time and screen time), we can now begin to enquire how films manage to
exploit each level, and the relations between them, for a range of effects. It is
only insofar as there are dynamic relations between these three levels that time
becomes interesting in film. The actual machinery of film-making is stupid as
regards time: the apparatus records and projects time mechanically, most often
at twenty-four frames per second. The optical illusion on which film depends
means that the raw experience of watching film is not all that different from just
keeping your eyes open. To illustrate this, it is worth considering the experimental
films of Andy Warhol, who turned the banality of films mechanical relationship to
time into an aesthetic modus operandi. In such films as Sleep (1963; 321 minutes
of a man sleeping) and Empire (1964; 485 minutes of the Empire State Build-
ing on a single day), Warhol simply allows his camera to record the passing of
time. Of course things happen in Empire (clouds pass, the day darkens, shadows
lengthen . . .), but none of this could be described as eventful. Empire is a non-
narrative film (there is no story and no plot; this is the kind of film that directly
calls these categories into question) whose screen time is inflated into a numbing
end in itself.
Such an extreme serves to mark a horizon beyond which human tolerance
probably does not extend: generally we do not go to the cinema to experience screen
time but, strictly, to forget it. In the earliest of films, this could be guaranteed by
the extraordinary novelty of witnessing a banal, everyday event projected on to a
screen. The arrival of a train at a provincial station, or the exodus of workers from
a factory, has for us some of the intolerability of a Warhol epic; but for the first
spectators, the mesmerising fact of such an events projection, of moving pictures,
Narrative time 63
overwhelmed the experience of screen time. Since that moment, however, a more
sophisticated set of relations between the three orders of time introduced above
has had to be developed to make the passing of ninety or 120 minutes a more
compelling experience than watching paint dry.
Unique speeds
Before getting to the formal analysis of variable narrative speeds, it is worth-

while to draw attention to certain technical properties of the medium that make
for aesthetic distortions of temporality, even before narrative intrudes. Our film
viewing over many years has familiarised us with the following phenomena: the
slow-motion shot, the accelerated shot and the freeze frame. Each of these effects
is the product of a discrepancy between the screen time of a given event or image
and its diegetic temporality the time it would really take in the implied world of
the narrative. And each conveys different affective and psychological information
about the narrators (or film-makers) intention towards the content of the shot.
Stanley Kubricks Full Metal Jacket (1987) includes a scene in which Gunnery
Sergeant Hartman is shot by Private Gomer Pyle. At the point of impact, Kubrick
slows down the shot to draw out the immensity of the moment in existential terms
for all concerned: the victim, the perpetrator and the witness (Private Joker) all
feel the event as radically outside the experience of normal time, and so do we.
Godfrey Reggios Koyaanisqatsi (1983) and Powaqqatsi (1988) are non-narrative
films, but they employ extensive use of slow-motion and accelerated shots. By
slowing down the projected shots of threshing rituals or mining practices in Third
and Fourth World nations, Reggio seeks to dignify the labour of his filmed sub-
jects. Projected in real time (that is, the speed at which it was filmed), the episode
in the open-cast gold mine in Powaqqatsi might stress the ant-like and inhuman
quality of the labour, but decelerated to the glacial speed at which it is screened in
the film, the labour assumes colossal and tragic proportions; the anonymity and
degradation of these workers becomes heroic and moving. In some of the sections
devoted to the hectic and wasteful life of the postmodern city, however, Reggio
speeds up his shots, precisely to emphasise the mass and insect-like conditions of
urban life today. These accelerated shots dehumanise the Western, white peoples,
even as the slow-motion shots humanised the darker, Southern peoples in the
films. Such effective use of the variations between screen and story time in film
draws on a century of such experiments, although these effects are rarely used
well in narrative cinema, either because they look cliched and crass or because
they draw undue attention to the cinematic apparatus and to the conventionality
of the presentation.
The freeze frame is a very special case, virtually impossible in any other
medium, where screen time becomes infinitely greater than story time. At the
end of the first scene of Martin Scorseses King of Comedy (1983), after Rupert
Pupkin has saved Jerry Langford from his adoring fans and bundled them both
into the waiting car, the film suddenly stops when a flash from a camera outside
lights up the interior of the car. It is at this moment that Scorsese rolls his titles.
The effect is startling: the frenetic action ceases, calm descends over the screen;
but it is a calm filled with something like comic dread. Caught in the flashlight
of a deranged adulation, star and fan together occupy a complex space that they
will both dance across for the rest of the film: who is the king of comedy? Who
has control? What events will be precipitated by this encounter? The freeze frame
allows these questions to emerge from the arrested situation, as no other narrative
device could. The end of Francois Truffauts Les Quatre cent coups (1959) is justly
famous for freezing the image of young Antoine escaping his school, and leav-
ing it at that. By terminating the narrative before any neat conclusion could be
imposed on it, Truffaut has kept a door open for Antoines freedom; by terminating
the film on a freeze frame of his ecstatic face, Truffaut does more: he immortalises
Antoines freedom. It is no longer a narrative option, it is an aesthetic fact, which
will live forever as art.
Duration
These are some medium-specific examples of narrative relations of duration;

that is, relations of speed between the three orders of narrative film time. To
describe these complex relations of speed, it will be useful to introduce some
critical concepts first pressed into service by the French theorist Gerard Genette.
First we will consider the difference between isochronic and anisochronic film
texts, and then, under the umbrella of this latter term, we will turn to the variable
speeds of narration in the distinct categories of the scene, the summary, the
ellipsis and the pause (Genette 1980: 86112).
Any film text in which the story time exactly equalled the plot time and both
were the same as the screen time would be what Genette calls an isochronic
text. In the isochronic text, plot and story time would perfectly overlap, and the
speed of narration would be absolutely constant and identical to the velocity of
real time. There would be no acceleration or elimination of unnecessary details;
nor would there be any interpolated background information. There would be
just the steady flow of all relevant events at an even, unexpurgated pace. Do any
such films actually exist? At first glance, we might think that Alfred Hitchcocks
1948 film, Rope, qualifies as an isochronic film. It is composed of what appears
to be a single, continuous shot, and the action of the film takes exactly as long
to occur on the screen as it would in real life it is apparently a case of a film
whose story, plot and screen times are perfectly equal.
But this is not the case: every time a character speaks of an event that happened
before the scene takes place, the story of the film immediately exceeds its plot
length and screen duration. Insofar as any information about the prior relations
Narrative time 65
between the two young men and the Jimmy Stewart character is crucial to an
understanding of their motivations in the film (and the time of that relation
stretches back months and even years into the past), the time of the story dwarfs
that of the plot. What we have in Rope is isochrony of plot and screen time, but
not of plot and story time. It is always worth remembering that the master text
of so much Western culture, Sophocles Oedipus Rex, unfolds before us much as
Rope does: in a continuous present tense, where things happen without apparent
editing; yet much of what happens is that information about the past is uncovered
that needs to be told within the narration. Aristotles famous unity of plot basically
means an isochrony between the time of the plot and the time of the presentation;
it does not mean that story time should be equal to either of these. Indeed, the
purely isochronic film text is a kind of hypothetical limit, which would look
something like an Andy Warhol film.
Almost all films are therefore anisochronic, and manipulate the relations
between plot and story time in various ways. Films necessarily vary the speed
of their delivery according to aesthetic criteria and in the interests of plot devel-
opment. It would be quite useless in a detective film to dwell in a monotonous
tempo on all the minute-to-minute actions of Sherlock Holmes; useless, because it
would mire the viewer in a morass of unnecessary detail, banality and tedium. As
the adage in Hollywood has it, Cut to the chase. We want to know what Holmes
discovers, what he deduces from his discoveries and what he does about them;
along the way, we might happen to find him bantering with Watson or snuffing
cocaine, but these moments are important usually for their contrastive nature.
The rhythm of the delivery is carefully judged to create the maximum impression
of both believability and efficiency. Thus the speed of the text varies according to
the specific arc of its plot, the way it allows us to discover its underlying story in
the most pleasurable way.
Still, it is worth stating that, in cinema, the pleasure of looking at things can be
substituted for traditional narrative devices to an extent probably not present in
any other narrative medium. Experiments with narrative speed are not always and
everywhere necessary. Part of the pleasure of a film such as La regle du jeu (Jean
Renoir 1939) consists in simply gazing into the deep spaces of the big house; to
derive this pleasure, we require the narrative pace to slacken and give way, which
it accordingly does. Citizen Kane (Orson Welles 1941) is hardly an isochronic text:
its experiments with narrative time are some of the most radical ever tried in a
commercial film. But there are key moments when this text, like most others,
tends asymptotically towards the condition of pure isochrony: the conversation
between Leland and Kane after the election debacle, the scene in which Kane tears
apart Susans room at Xanadu, the conversation between Kane and Susan in the
enormous parlour, and so on. In these scenes, the duration of the telling matches
the duration of the story events. The principle here is realism, and Genette is
right to say that, in almost every realist text, the scenes the set pieces in which
characters actually relate to each other in conversational real time aspire
towards the state of isochrony. It is in the spaces around the scenes in the
setting-up, the transitions, the explanations, the descriptions and so on that
narrative speed picks up or becomes retarded.
Getting between scenes requires variations in narrative speed. However, even
within scenes, strange things can happen to narrative time. One possibility is that
a cut puts us slightly back in story time, either to increase tension or to help the
viewer orient herself, or for other aesthetic effects. In many early films, you will
find that one shot in which a character closes a door is followed by another in
which the door is still closing. This is what we would call today bad editing: a con-
tinuity error. But things are not always so simple. In Sergei Eisensteins Battleship
Potemkin (1925) there is a scene in which a sailor, disgusted with cleaning up
unsoiled dishes, smashes a plate against a table-top. Only, this simple action is
made up of many short, differently angled shots; and in the montage of the scene,
it seems to happen many times, in a rapid pulse of succession. Eisenstein shakes
us out of our simple habits of perception, both to convey an impression of pure
muscular dynamism and to suggest much larger, allegorical dimensions for the
action of smashing a plate. At the comic end of the spectrum, Monty Python and
the Holy Grail (Gilliam & Jones 1975) features a sequence in which Sir Lancelot
is approaching Swamp Castle. The music and the galloping action accentuate the
heroism of his quest to rescue an imprisoned maiden, and to increase the drama
still further, the editing mimics many an adventure movie in cutting between long
shots of Lancelots approach and reaction shots of the castle guards. Each time
we cut back to Lancelot, we see him further back than he was at the end of the last
shot of his charge; narrative time is stretched out in a mockery of film suspense
until, out of nowhere, the brave knight is pell-mell among the guard, running
them through with his sword.
More often, what happens in cinema is that we simply cut from one scene to
another, eliminating dead time. This is what Genette called a narrative ellipsis: a
radical reduction of plot time to an absolute zero, while the intervening story time
can be anything up to several millennia. The most extreme and exciting example
of this in commercial cinema is the moment in Stanley Kubricks 2001: A Space
Odyssey (1968) when the shot of a bone hurled into the air by a Neanderthal is
followed by the shot of a spacecraft drifting slowly through the void: here a few
million years of story time are radically compressed into a single narrative cut.
Ellipses are rife throughout Citizen Kane, and we need only mention the great
moment when the scene of Kane, Leland and Bernstein huddled in front of the
window of the Chronicle, which ends with a close-up of the photograph of the
Chronicle personnel, is magically succeeded by an identical shot of the same men
now posing for a picture as the staff of the Inquirer. An indefinite number of
years has intervened, probably something like six or seven, during which time,
the ellipsis silently tells us, the Inquirer has supplanted the Chronicle as the citys
premier journal and Kane has bought up the latters staff. It is a perfectly eco-
nomical ellipsis, using identical framings to condense years of story time into a
Narrative time 67
single cut. The art, as so often in film storytelling, is one of economy: expressing
the greatest possible amount of information in the least possible time, without
losing the audience for a moment. These famous cuts are testimony to the artistic
genius that has evolved to do precisely that in the commercial cinema.
Next down the scale of narrative tempo is what Genette describes as the sum-
mary; the speed of which we can describe by saying that, in it, story time is
significantly greater than plot time. In a conventional summary, rather than just
omitting all the detail as in an ellipsis, a brief survey of typical events over a con-
siderable period of time is condensed into a few robust passages. A summary is, in
Genettes words, the narration in a few paragraphs or a few pages of several days,
months, or years of experience, without details of action or speech (Genette 1980:
9596). Here again, story time is vastly more extensive than narrative time, but not
to the point of infinity, as in an ellipsis. Nineteenth-century novels are full of sum-
mary passages. Indeed, although scenes might enjoy the quantitative supremacy
in classic realist fiction, summaries are if anything more typical of such texts
as those of Dickens, George Eliot, Thomas Hardy and Balzac. Summaries were,
until the various revolutions of the twentieth century, the most usual transition
between two scenes, and thus the connective tissue par excellence of novelistic
narrative, whose fundamental rhythm is defined by the alternation of summary
and scene (Genette 1980: 97).
How do summaries work in film? Citizen Kane contains many of them, and
they all take the form of what we call a montage. We will look a little later
at the remarkable pastiche of a newsreel near the beginning, the News on the
March montage, which is a summary, in advance, of the entire narrative of Kanes
life. There are other summaries as well: for example, the summary of Kanes
encounters with Thatcher, taken from the Thatcher diaries, which elegantly allows
Kane to grow from mere boy to successful young man in a matter of seconds, and
the summary of Susans bored obsession with jigsaw puzzles. But by far the most
extraordinary of the summaries in this film is the legendary sequence describing
the marriage of Charlie Kane to Emily Norton. This too is a montage, a collation
of short clips, all set around the breakfast table in the Kane household where,
over what must be a number of years, the marriage declines from rapturous love
into silent mutual contempt. It is a textbook illustration of how to do a summary
in the medium of film, and that might well be what is most modernist about it. It
takes what elsewhere would have been a simple, humble transitional device and
transforms it into an end in itself, advertising its own technical brilliance at the
same time as it performs a humdrum operation between major scenes.
Finally, Genette proposes a fourth category of narrative tempo: the descriptive
pause. This, the slowest of narrative durations, is the other extreme from the ellip-
sis, which is the fastest. Here, it is story time that reduces to a zero and narrative
time that dilates to unpredictable lengths. In a novel and indeed in all verbal
storytelling it is occasionally incumbent upon the narrator to suspend proceed-
ings altogether so that he or she can spend some time describing the situation at
hand: be it the room, the dress, the weather, the avenue, the state of play or what
have you. Such descriptions are not strictly necessary to narrative development,
but they lend a considerable air of authenticity, atmosphere and detail to a nar-
rative, and became particularly indispensable in the eighteenth and nineteenth
centuries for filling pages in those voluminous triple-decker novels.
The remarkable thing about narratives transition to the medium of film is that,
to a most extraordinary degree, the descriptive pause becomes an irrelevancy.
The medium is so visually rich and every shot contains so much descriptive
information (with the kind of immediacy the older realist novelists would surely
have relished: a picture tells a thousand words) that it is generally no longer
necessary to have a camera pan around a room before the action can take place
in it: we can have the room described to us at the same time as we watch
the action unfolding in it. Action and description have become fused. You can
see how difficult, indeed impossible, this is for a novelist. The novelist has to be
extremely selective and careful about what she tells us about the environment
of an action or scene, and she has to deliver this information in the absence or
suspension of the action itself; it makes for a lot of hard work and tough aesthetic
decisions about relevancy, tempo and economy. Yet, with the simple act of rolling
a motion picture camera, all the essential descriptive information merges into a
visual synthesis with the scene itself. Thus the speed of filmic narration is vastly
quicker than novelistic narrative because the only substantial tempo of classical
narrative that is slower than isochronic parity, the descriptive pause, is more or
less redundant.
Nevertheless, the cinema has not been able to avoid description altogether.
There is usually what is called an establishing shot at the beginning of each
major scene, a long-distance shot that situates the action in a knowable environ-
ment; this shot is a pretty familiar cinematic version of the novelistic descriptive
pause. But more importantly, even while it might have discovered a miraculous
economy towards objective description, film is radically impoverished when it
comes to the description of emotional or psychological states. The moving pic-
ture is not (or not obviously; we will consider this further in chapters 6 and 7)
a subjective medium. Films exceed the theatres capacity to describe affective
states by virtue of their discovery of the close up, where the actors face can be
witnessed at such proximity that any reasonably familiar emotion can be seen
writ large upon its sensitive surface; but when it comes to complex moral, psycho-
logical or philosophical states, films have most often had to resort to the clumsy
descriptive pause of the voice-over.
Citizen Kane of course employs quite a few descriptive pauses, from the opening
camera crawl over the fence at Xanadu towards the window over Kanes death-
bed, through the trick shot that descends through the skylight of the nightclub
where Susan sings, to the elaborate final crane shot of the abandoned detritus of
the Kane fortune, which finally discovers the snow sled for us, just as it is being
burned. These are classic cinematic descriptions and again, typically, they make
Narrative time 69
a virtue of necessity and foreground their own formal elegance. But when it comes
to describing emotional complexes, Kane is quite subtle; most of its effects in this
regard are generated out of the device of having five separate sources of narra-
tion, each with a subjective spin on events. Thus, in their respective dialogues
with the faceless Thompson, the narrators manage to impart crucial psychologi-
cal descriptions of Kane, themselves and others. I will mention only two of these.
When, at the end of her section, Susan is told by Thompson, All the same, I feel
kinda sorry for Mr Kane, she snaps right back at him: Dont you think I do? It is
a confession that changes the entire complexion of her story and adds a pathos
otherwise swamped by her inebriated egotism. Earlier, during Mr Bernsteins nar-
ration, the ageing chairman of the board indulges in a retrospective narrative
about his youth; it is what Genette would call an extradiegetic narrative with
no bearing on anything but Bernsteins own character and generous heart. He
describes a girl he saw only once, long ago, on a passing ferry, and declares, Ill
bet a day hasnt gone by since that I havent thought of that girl. This functions as
a glorious descriptive pause about the inner life of Kanes irrepressible yes-man.
Order
The next set of relations between the time of narration and story time to be con-
sidered is that of order in a way the most obvious and objectively verifiable tem-
poral relation between narration and story. Actually, rather few narratives strictly
adopt the same order of events as the story itself. The idea, in most cases, is to play
around with the order of story events in a variety of ways, to increase pleasure
and heighten the epistemological impact of certain items of information. Genette
insists that we begin by accepting the notion of anachrony. This concept covers
every instance in the text that makes for a discrepancy between story sequence
and plot sequence; or, as he puts it, various types of discordance between the two
orderings of story and narrative (Genette 1980: 36). Beginning with this general
concept, Genette goes on to outline the two major species of anachrony, prolepsis
and analepsis.
Prolepsis, the rarer of these two species, refers to any narrative manoeuvre
that consists of narrating or evoking in advance an event that will take place later
(Genette 1980: 40). I want to suggest that we can read the opening of Citizen Kane
(that is, everything before our immersion in Thatchers diaries) as an extended
prolepsis. Strictly, however, this is not true: this is actually the films present tense,
which begins with Kanes death. Nevertheless, functionally, the opening sequences
have the effect of proleptic anticipation of the end of the films main story: the
life of Charles Foster Kane. The first thing to happen is Kanes death, and this is
immediately followed by a mock newsreel that proceeds to outline all the major
incidents in the protagonists life; a series of rapid-fire prolepses to help us find
our way through the various narrative versions of that life to come. Kane is born
poor, inherits the worlds third-richest gold mine, interests himself in the Inquirer,
becomes the first yellow journalist, controls a media empire, marries a presidents
niece, has an affair with a singer, runs for office, fails, divorces, remarries, launches
a singing career, builds a colossal mansion, divorces again and dies. This is the
entire story of the films central narrative. Why does Welles want to employ this
device of prolepsis so richly and disconcertingly, and give it all away, spoiling the
element of suspense (although he retains that element for the Rosebud mystery
story)?
There are several possible answers to this question. First, perhaps Welles recog-
nised that suspense is a rather vulgar narrative ploy and that there are other, more
worthwhile reasons for wanting to watch a film like this for instance, the interest
is much more in the polyphony of voices that attempt to tell the story of this text
than in the story itself. Citizen Kane is an exercise in ambiguity and relativity; it
is less about the life of Charles Foster Kane than it is about a multiplicity of
viewpoints on that life, all coloured by personal interests and tonalities. Second,
in a sense everyone in 1941 knew the story of Citizen Kane already: it was essen-
tially a thinly veiled version of the life of Americas first media baron, William
Randolph Hearst. As such, it was more or less in the public domain already, and
the device of telling the entire story at the beginning serves more to authenticate
the deja-vu nature or already-knownness of that story than to reveal something
secretive in advance. But perhaps most importantly, for all the narrative ingenuity
and radicalism of this film, Citizen Kane is less concerned with that aspect of itself
than it is with its own sense of style.
So much for prolepsis, although it is worth bearing in mind that the various
film genres employ what we might want to call virtual prolepses, and that a musi-
cal score in a movie can use certain motifs as musical prolepses. In a traditional
Western, the very appearance of an unshaven, black-garbed, cigarette-smoking
ruffian virtually ensures his eventual demise at the hands of the hero, or, in a
contemporary horror film, there is almost no doubt that the first defeat of the
monster or psycho-killer will have to be repeated by a second, authentic killing.
Genres function according to their satisfaction of expectations that they them-
selves install in us, and, often enough, those expectations are met so precisely
that to speak of generic virtual prolepses is not unreasonable. As for music, the
application of a certain repeated minor-key motif to a hospitalised child in a
movie more or less writes his death certificate, and so on: prolepses can happen
via suggestion and iconic symbolism as well as by direct representation.
By far the most common type of anachrony is the type known as analepsis.
An analepsis is a violation of the temporal order of a story that narrates for us
something that has happened before the given moment we have reached in the
story. Owing to the hegemony of film in the twentieth century, we have commonly
come to call these narrative incidents flashbacks. And flashbacks are everywhere;
they are part of the bread-and-butter technical arsenal of every storyteller. Tracing
the Western narrative tradition, for conveniences sake, back to Homer, already
Narrative time 71
there the analepsis is not merely an occasional device but is elevated to a supreme
level of structural importance: mention a hero, a warrior of any worth, and Homer
will fill you in on his back story. Structural analepsis is part of the genetic code of
the Western narrative tradition, and there is scarcely a tale told that does not use
it in some degree.
From the archetypal flashback Rick Blaine has in Casablanca (Curtiz 1942) of
his glory days with Ilsa Lund in Paris before the Germans invaded, to the remark-
able film Memento (Nolan 2000), which is composed entirely of scenes presented
in the reverse order of their story sequence, analepsis runs right through film
history. Why is it such a common feature? First, analepsis can increase the dra-
matic impact of a revelation about the past by leaving it to a moment when it
is particularly pertinent: we find out about Ricks romantic past only when the
narrative urgency of the Laszlos escape elevates it to a matter of major com-
plication. Second, an analepsis can cast a different light on a character that the
present circumstances of the story do not permit: Rick is a very different man
in free Paris from the man he is in Vichy Casablanca; without the flashback, we
would not otherwise know that he is capable of smiling and laughing. Third, an
analepsis can restore to present memory what might have been forgotten in the
long duration of a narrative. And so on.
To reverse what I had previously suggested, in Citizen Kane, the Charles Foster
Kane story is, in one critical respect, entirely analeptic. Since Kanes first action
is to die, everything about him that follows is a series of flashbacks to his life.
It could be said that, in a sense, the film is both proleptic and analeptic at once.
What Orson Welles has done is to create a very complicated filmic tense, where
the present-tense narrative, Thompsons quest for Rosebud, is actually a cipher
and a red herring: it is not even the equivalent of a detective storys present tense,
because the mystery is essentially banal and meaningless. Rather, the films story
as such is the Kane story and the nature of its telling by various of its participants.
So that we are obliged to occupy a very curious position, in which the present is
drained of all its intensity, and the past assumes the magnitude of genuine reality.
This effect is entirely typical of Welles work, and it warrants closer study. Suffice
it to say that a film composed almost entirely of analepses can nevertheless be felt
to have the immediacy and open-endedness of the present tense.
Frequency
The third and last of Genettes major temporal categories in narrative is frequency.
In certain narratives, it is of the utmost importance how often this or that event
is represented, and, most often, repetitions of narrative actions and events are
motivated in the plot by differences in point of view, which we will consider in
chapter 7. Akira Kurosawas Rashomon (1950) repeats the same event although
precisely what that event is is the question of the film from three different
perspectives, in order to explore the subjectivity of competing truth claims. In

many films, certain events are not exactly repeated but are meant to be typical
of a particular character, and so recur. It is vital that we know that Rick does not
drink with his customers in Casablanca in order that his violation of this rule for
Ilsa assumes its proper importance. Therefore the non-event of his drinking with
customers is repeated in the plot before Ilsas arrival. In Gus Van Sants My Own
Private Idaho (1991), River Phoenix repeatedly falls asleep in narcoleptic seizures
to underline his disconnection from narrative agency.
Repetition works in various ways in the film medium, and perhaps the most
outstanding instance of it in US cinema is Welles shooting of an identical event
in Citizen Kane (Susans premiere in the opera Salammbo) from two entirely dif-
ferent perspectives: first, the vantage point of Leland, looking down bored from
the box, and second, that of Susan herself, from the stage, strutting in anxious
dread before an invisible and hostile house. Here, by repeating the event, Welles is
able to demonstrate radically disjunct perspectives on it and open the medium to
relativity. In some films, repetition is elevated into an end in itself. In Francis Cop-
polas masterpiece, The Conversation (1974), Gene Hackmans Harry Caul plays a
recorded conversation over and over again, filtering it of all imperfections, until
he can deliver the finished recording to his clients: each repetition gets Caul one
step closer to his final version, revealing nuances to his attentive ear. Probably no
film has devoted so much of its narrative time to a repeated episode, although
Harold Ramis Groundhog Day (1993) takes repetition as a metaphor for everyday
life in the USA and milks the device for every drop of comic life that it offers.
Conclusion
Narrative is the way in which we organise both time and space in relation to each
other. As a multimodal form, film is able to create the possibility of multiple tem-
poral and spatial zones whose relativities become meaningful during the course
of the viewing. In order to see how the timespace mechanism works in indi-
vidual films, we can use the concepts of story time, plot time and screen time
to locate ourselves in the filmic chronology. Duration, as a means of controlling
pace and significance, positions events and characters within the spectrum of our
attention, giving them more or less time to be noticed by us, while the order and
frequency of events controls the way in which information is measured out to us
and, to some extent, how we might react to it. Through these manipulations of
narrative time, film overcomes the limitations of its essential linearity to suggest
the semantic and symbolic possibilities of multiple chronologies.
Chapter 6
Narrative voice
Julian Murphet
The relations between narration proper and the points of view of the characters
being narrated are every bit as complex as the relations between story time and
plot time. In any narrative form, there is a spectrum of what we can call dis-
tances between a narrators voice and the mental and sensory states of his or
her characters: from alpine and godlike superiority, through gradations of nearer
proximity and outright identity to the point where the characters know more than
the narrator. This spectrum of relations clearly hinges on a question of apparent
knowledge, although we also know that, in some ultimate sense, the film knows
itself throughout; it produces various narrators to tantalise us with their different
degrees of knowledge.
Consider for a moment the intricate patterns of knowing and unknowing in
Brian Singers Usual Suspects (1995). One principal narrator, Verbal Kint, spins
a dizzying yarn to one principal narratee, Dave Kujan. Internal to Kints story, var-
ious other narrators tell their stories (Keaton, Kobayashi and so on). Meanwhile,
external to it, Kujan interrupts with his own versions of some events, while a sur-
vivor of a mysterious waterfront atrocity is telling, in Turkish, the story of seeing
Keyser Soze. By interlacing these distinct voices, Singer achieves a formidable
density of narrative texture and moreover works towards his astonishing final
revelation: that Kint is himself Keyser Soze, and that almost everything he has
been telling Kujan (and us) is a welter of lies, fiction and misrepresentation. Here,
the narrative voice of Kint knows everything but has told us, effectively, nothing.
Visually, we have been seeing everything from the point of view of Kujan, who
hears Kints voice and translates it into the moving images on the screen. We take
away the single solace of knowing who Kint is, just as he disappears from the
73
narrative net. The larger question remains: who is telling the story of Kint and
Kujan? What is the narrating instance of the film itself, at a higher narrative level
than that of these diegetic interlocutions?
Written and filmed voices
This example brings to light some differences between traditional oral and writ-
ten narrative forms and film narrative, which arise principally over the place of
the narrating instance. There seems relatively little difficulty in accepting that a
character speaking in a film functions as a narrator in much the same way as a
character speaking in a novel does. However, what about the higher-order narra-
tor within whose voice all these lesser voices are orchestrated? A novels narrating
instance is that variable but omnipresent voice that, throughout, mediates the
panoply of other voices; it is the voice that describes a room, introduces a char-
acter, expatiates on a relation. Broadly speaking, in the cinema, it is the camera
that mutely does all this for us.
Consider some of the complexities of approaching the narrating instance of
Alfred Hitchcocks film, Rebecca (1940). First, we are called upon to enter the
narrative through the explicit, almost hypnotic voice of Joan Fontaine, who tells
us of a dream she had of Manderley, and whom we accept is playing a fictional
character who had a dream of Manderley. Add to this already complex voice the
declared fact that this film is based upon a novel by Daphne du Maurier, whose
title flashes up imperiously in the opening credit sequence: so that we have to read
the voice of the films prologue and narration throughout as in some sense du
Mauriers as well. And then, of course, the overriding knowledge for us that this is
a Hitchcock movie and that therefore the voice of Alfred Hitchcock, the recently
transplanted Englishman in America, will have to be figured into the equation.
And quickly many more voices come rushing in for consideration: the voices
of Philip MacDonald and Michael Hogan, just two of the men who collaborated
on the adaptation of du Mauriers novel; the voice of Franz Waxman, whose
romantic score underlines Fontaines voice-over; the voice of Lyle Wheeler, the
man who built the model of Manderley that we see during the voice-over; and
of course the voice of George Barnes, the director of photography, who literally
produced the shots. But this strange, hybridised polyphony of voices is not really
one of which most of us are aware when watching Rebecca. Our awareness, even
of Fontaines narrating function, dwindles immediately the plot is underway, and
we are caught in the middle of the action. And this is a very different experience
from that of reading du Mauriers novel, when the voice of the narrator is never
out of our heads.
In watching films, we are only rarely aware of being told something by a human
being. Generally, if we are aware of any kind of medium of the message of a film,
it is the mechanical medium itself: the apparatus of camera, celluloid, projector,
Narrative voice 75
genre, technology, all of which join together into some utterly impersonal and
subjectless machine. When we are sitting in the cinema, or at home, watching the
latest Jackie Chan movie, it scarcely occurs to us to ask: who is narrating this? We
know we are being told a story, and we might even know that there is a director
and a screenwriter (although we almost certainly cannot remember their names),
but it doesnt seem to make much sense to make a link between these two orders
of knowledge. If we think of the director or screenwriter at all in the viewing
of a Jackie Chan movie, it is probably only as functionaries hired to supply a
certain coherence to the succession of action sequences that are the real point of
the film. It is the machine that tells us the story: the machine of the genre and
of the industry itself, which supplies narratives the way the automobile industry
supplies cars.
This kind of experience of narrative in the cinema a kind of generic, industrial,
machine-like experience has long been a constitutive part of going to the movies.
And this seriously undermines the putative presence of a narrative voice in much
commercial film. Narration in the commercial cinema consists of broadly recog-
nisable and repetitive patterns of presentation: a privileging of the rules of visual
coherence Helen Fulton will be exploring in chapters 8 and 9; simple plots with
clear oppositions; no attention drawn to the apparatus itself; an erasure of any
overt stylisation; a pretence to objectivity and anonymity of voice. The whole idea
of enjoying film directors as sources of expressiveness in the cinema has histori-
cally been a minority experience, confined largely to intellectuals and cineastes.
The rather different idea of enjoying a film for its efficiency and effectiveness
of narration, its voice or style as such, is less rare, but still on the margins of
cinema-going experience, and reserved for very particular kinds of film. By and
large, for most movie-going people around the world, film is a narrative medium
without a narrator.
It is important to emphasise, in this respect, the radical distinction between
film as a narrative medium and any of the language-based forms of narrative.
In a novel, a long poem, a fire-side story or a verbal drama, the fact that what is
being presented to us comes in the form of words makes it almost natural that we
should posit a human consciousness as an agency behind the narration. Narration
and narrator suggest each other and support one another in the verbal narrative
forms even if we recognise, as we must, that every narrator in a literary text is
a construction. Construction or not, we consumers of verbal narratives generally
enjoy those occasions when someone seems to be revealing him- or herself like
Oz behind the surface of the narration. Why is this? Why isnt our experience of
verbal narratives the same kind of impersonal, machine-like experience as audio-
visual narratives in the cinema? It is because we all use language every day and
are ourselves constantly occupied in the business of telling stories, to one another
and to ourselves. We recognise the activity as our own, and wherever we see this
activity taking place, we tend to assume that someone more or less like ourselves
is taking responsibility for it.
Until such time as carrying digital video cameras around with us everywhere
and making instant visual representations to tell our stories is as natural to us
as speaking sentences, this will not be the case for visual narratives. Films and
videos do not appear to come to us from a narrator because we do not produce
our own narratives in this medium or at least most of us do not. It still appears
to us as a specialist and industrial activity most of us would have only a very
dim idea of how James Cameron told us the story of the Titanic using extremely
complex digital effects (in fact I daresay even James Cameron probably has a very
dim idea of how he did so). We could not frame our own narratives in that way, the
way we can all probably tell a version of the Titanic story off the top of our heads
in language or even, at a stretch, act it out using our bodies. The film version
seems highly technical and depends upon massive hardware beyond the reach of
all but the wealthiest. There is a vast economic gap between the producers and the
consumers of film narrative, and until the day when this gap narrows to the point
where we can all happily narrate using audio-visual technology, we will always
be in a relatively passive and subservient position vis-a-vis that technology.
So we tend not to recognise a narrator in commercial cinema. And indeed
much of the narrative power of the cinema depends upon the erasure of a subject
position from the narrative. Narrative cinema strives to be overpowering in its
diegetic realisation: it overwhelms us with realistic visual information, kinetic
energy, sound and the rapid pulses of frequent cutting. And none of these effects
seems to flow from a human subject. They come from the system, the indus-
try, Hollywood. Hollywood has evolved a form of storytelling that depends on
remarkably old-fashioned plot devices and narrative structures, but without the
humanising element that made those structures breathe in the older forms. And
for want of a better term, we had better think about this humanising element of
narration, that aspect of narration that seems to proceed directly from a human
consciousness, in terms of the grammatical category of voice.
When we say that a narrative text has a voice, all we really mean is that it
proceeds from a narrator and that that narrator imparts some of his or her own
personality to the narrative. Another way of saying this is that narrative texts
are generally accented and located in some way. But to arrive at some concep-
tion of what this means, we have first to define what we mean by narrator as
opposed to author. This distinction is as old and fundamental as the hills, but a
little amplification cannot hurt. The author of a text is, of course, that historical,
real-life agent responsible for producing the text: the person who physically wrote
it. The narrator, on the other hand, is the consciousness we can detect internal
to the text, who from time to time puts a spin on the narrative and offers value
judgements and sympathies as a supplement to the story. This consciousness is a
It might be the case that, as digital visual technology and mobile phones become more and more
tightly integrated, wealthy citizens of the First World will indeed communicate through moving
pictures. The speed of technological developments is rapidly calling all of our habits and codes of
communication into question.
Narrative voice 77
construction: it is produced in literature through language, more or less deliber-

ately through a series of aesthetic decisions by the author, and cannot be simply
identified with that person. In films, too, the sense of a consciousness hovering
over The Godfather (Coppola 1972) or Kill Bill: Vol. 1 (Tarantino 2003) is an effect
of highlighting certain habits of storytelling Coppolas narrator is an amalgam
of certain lenses, certain colours, certain rhythms of editorial composition that
tends towards a nostalgic realism; Tarantinos is a choppier, more frenetic and
stylistically variegated narrator, who is recognisable through habits of excess
and stylistic flamboyance. In every case, the narrator is a property of the text, not
the other way around it is something, rather like the story itself, that we induce
and put together from the narrative discourse before us.
Person and temporal location
We can analyse voice in the cinema through a variety of coordinates. First, per-
son: narrators can be broadly in the first-person voice or the third-person voice.
Even in literature, however, these distinctions are not as important as they might
first seem to be. The same voice can be detected across these grammatical bound-
aries, and there is virtually no sustained first-person narration that is not, also
and even predominantly, a third-person narration. Anyone who talked exclusively
about themselves would not be a very interesting narrator. And, at the same time,
even when writing strictly in the third person, there are ways of registering a
very particular narrative consciousness without the literal use of I. But the term
first-person narrative covers all those texts, including Rebecca, where there is a
subjective I who from time to time takes up a first-person account of his or her
actions and thoughts. And a third-person narrative is one where this grammat-
ical figure, the I, is absent. Second-person narratives are extremely rare in film
and not very effective.
The second coordinate to consider is temporal location. It matters very much
whether the voice of the narrative comes after, is simultaneous with or (very rarely)
comes before the events of the story being narrated (or, another possibility, com-
bines present and past-tense narration in new permutations). It matters because
this position of the narrative voice in time, the equivalent of a grammatical tense,
greatly affects our understanding of the story. Basically, there are four types of
narrating relative to temporal position:
1 subsequent (past-tense, classical)
2 prior (predictive, future-tense)
3 simultaneous (present-tense), and
4 interpolated (inserted past-tense amid present-tense action).
Most commonly, of course, the narrative voice is positioned at a temporal point
sometime after the cessation of the main events of the story: the voice can tell us
the story because the story is essentially finished, and we can accept the authority
of the voice because of this expiration of the events and thus their inaccessibility
to us. The voice, in a typical past-tense narration, is our only access to knowledge
of the events it narrates. Indeed, logically, in literature this is the only narrating
type that makes any real sense, since we cannot picture how a present-tense narra-
tive (at least, in its first-person variety) could actually come to be written unless it
is only about interior moods, and predictive or prophetic, future-tense narration
is surely unreliable unless it comes from God Himself. Only subsequent narra-
tion fulfils the realistic expectations of readers, and this is why most novels and
stories continue to be written in this tense. Not in film, however, which, even when
prefaced by some attestation to its already having happened, appears always to
unfold in real time, just as events do in the theatre: so an interesting point is that
if the subsequent tense is the most typical temporal location of literary narrative
voice then the simultaneous tense is the most typical temporal location of filmic
narrative voice.
Let us think for a moment about David Finchers 1999 film, Fight Club. Here,
we enter the diegesis very much through the voice of Edward Nortons nameless
narrator, who spins us his story about looking for authenticity in ritualised forms
of violence. Although the voice-over, when it intrudes, is couched in the past tense,
the compelling power of cinematic visualisation cancels that pastness and irre-
sistibly transforms the tale into a present-tense narration. This greatly enhances
the power of the final realisation that the narrator and Tyler Durden (Brad Pitt) are
one and the same person. Although they are played by different actors, and inter-
relate like other characters in the film, we buy the fact of their identity because
the voice in which their story is presented is subjective and (functionally) present
tense and the present tense of this subjectivity is precisely one in denial of his
being a split personality. Told in the past tense, this revelation would have been
felt as a cheat the narrator would have known all along, and would have been
misleading us; whereas the immediacy of filmic narration means that we identify
spontaneously with Nortons limited field of knowledge and accept this sudden
reversal of narrative fortune for Brad Pitts character. Fincher has used a formal
property of the film medium to counteract a potential formal embarrassment in
his narrative.
The anterior or prior tense is properly rare in film narrative because in giving
things away it destroys some of Hollywoods favourite effects: mystery, suspense
and surprise. More importantly, perhaps, this tense raises very interesting prob-
lems about agency and free will, both of which are sacred to Hollywood models
of psychological causality. The witches in Shakespeares Macbeth make various
future-tense narrative propositions about the Scottish laird, demonstrating the
degree to which narrative prediction might actually shape subsequent events. Is
it the case that Macbeth does what he does because he is told the prophecy?
Or that he simply fulfils his objective fate, to which the witches have divine
access? This question is properly undecidable and suggests that the prior tense
enjoys some very intriguing narrative possibilities, many of which are anathema to
Narrative voice 79
classical Hollywood narration. Still, whenever a soothsayer or prophet appears in

a film, it is almost invariably the case, as in for example The Matrix (1999), that
what he or she says will come to pass, in some manner. Hence the prophetic mode
has not vanished from contemporary narrative; instead, it seems stronger than
ever. What this means vis-a-vis Hollywoods tendency to privilege psychological
causality has yet to be determined.
Diegetic location
The third coordinate of narrative voice is that of diegetic location. Narrators can
be internal to the diegetic world of the text; for instance, the narrator of The Great
Gatsby, Nick Carraway, is a character in the story itself, but one with the added
responsibility of telling it all from his own perspective. The same is obviously
true of our principal narrator in Rebecca, the nameless character who speaks to
us in the beginning about her dream of Manderley, and who occupies a chief
place in the narrative. This is what Genette would call a homodiegetic narrator:
a narrator involved in what is being narrated. Clearly, we also recognise this type
of narrator from Fight Club, Memento and The Usual Suspects; it is a frequently
employed narrative location, for the simple reason that it tends to grip spectators
attention more immediately. The fact that a narrator participates and is interested
in the narrative, by virtue of his or her direct implication in its unfolding (at both
levels), seems to impel us more effectively into the implied world of the diegesis.
But there are potential drawbacks as well, such as the high risks involved in
both Fight Club and The Usual Suspects risks deriving from these narrators
limited knowledge and our perplexed relation to it. A film in which a homodiegetic
narrator is exposed as having misled us can be very dissatisfying. For example,
early reactions to Wienes Das Kabinett des Doktor Caligari (1920), which turns on
an ultimate revelation that the homodiegetic narrator is a madman in an asylum
undergoing treatment for pathological delusions, were extremely negative. We
tend to be intolerant towards stories that end by saying, It was only a dream
which is effectively what both Fight Club and The Usual Suspects do. It is a miracle
of narrative style that in both cases we are not turned off.
When we think of narrative voice in film, we tend to think of the voices of
homodiegetic character narrators who literally speak to us as the film unfolds.
An excellent example of voice-over narration is the film Sunset Boulevard, which
is narrated to us, in a more sustained way than usual, by a very world-weary
and jaded Hollywood screenwriter. (By the end of the film, we realise why he is
quite so world-weary. He is the dead man we see floating in the pool just after
the title sequence.) If we look carefully at the films opening as an illustration of
narrative voice in the cinema, what we see is a complex articulation of different
registers. First, visually, we have two camera shots: one long, mobile tracking
shot, which gets us from Sunset Boulevard to the swarming police and journalist
activity, then to the swimming pool itself; followed by another, extremely unusual
static shot upwards from the bottom of the swimming pool, with the dead man at
the centre of the frame. Viewed silently, this transition suggests a narrative voice
predisposed towards shocking denouements, abrupt shifts in shot register and the
cynical urbanity of a violent society. There is a florid rhetoric of the image here:
from fluid to static, from long to three-quarter shot, from horizontal to vertical
line, from bustle to rigor mortis.
But the addition of the soundtrack amplifies all of this with the fatality and
cynical ironies of the film noir voice-over: it is a voice inherited directly from
the radio serials of the 1930s and 1940s and the Black Mask pulp fiction of the
1920s. This literal voice also implies the addition of a subsequent narrative tense
to the immediate, simultaneous tense on the visual track. Thus a very strange
vocal position is implied; what we are seeing has already happened. When, by
the end of the film, we learn that the narrator is no other than the dead man
himself, this voice is elevated to an even further level of distinction: it is the voice
of the dead, the ghostly revenant, who always speaks from a position of justice
and retribution.
On the other hand, narrators can be external to the world of the text. Most novels
are narrated by an omniscient narrator who seems to know everything about the
inner and outer lives of the characters and the whole world that they inhabit.
This kind of narrator does not belong to that world, and is called extradiegetic.
Stanley Kubricks Dr Strangelove, or How I Learned to Stop Worrying and Love the
Bomb (1963) begins with a voice-over narrator of this sort, describing the flotilla
of Cold War bombers and their fail-safe positions as a prelude to the war story
that unfolds. The extradiegetic voice is characterised by a cold, objective and
disinterested view of the mechanics of geopolitics a tonality that we come to
associate with the films narration as a whole. Martin Scorseses adaptation of
Edith Whartons Age of Innocence (1993) has an extradiegetic narrator Joanne
Woodward as an intermittent presence throughout, intervening to clarify the
scrupulously gradated moral hierarchy of the social milieu of New York. In this
case, the voice is highly ironic, and charged with a melancholic fatalism that,
again, carries over into the way we hear the voice of the films narration, even
when the narrator is not speaking.
In either case, the fact is that the voice-overs give way to other cinematic means
of storytelling: cinematography, mise en scene, montage, production design, plot
construction, performance styles and so on, all of which are bound together
by a stylistic consistency. Kubricks film, although it ceases to be literally nar-
rated after the first few minutes, nevertheless has a voice, a recognisably cyni-
cal, chilly, distant and mordantly amused satirical mode of presentation that is
consistent throughout the film. At no point does Kubrick allow for any sentimen-
tality, any affective immersion in his characters lives; his three parallel lines of
action harmonise by way of an equivalent misanthropy; the clinical precision of
the cinematography, its meticulously focused close-ups of machines and objects,
and symmetrically framed long shots of spaces, remove us from the realm of
Narrative voice 81
psychology; throughout, the ticking clock of the bombers missions and of the
terrifying Doomsday Device hangs over the narrative as a palpable dread; and the
thematic accent on the inhuman machinery of codes, communications, represen-
tation, war and annihilation drains the narrative of any human intentionality. In
these and other associated ways, the narrative voice of Dr Strangelove is iden-
tifiable, although we are speaking of voice very loosely and analogously here;
it remains a good way of conceiving of the narrative unity of a films obviously
very scattered mode of production (hundreds of cast and crew members, thou-
sands of shots, several weeks of shooting time, months of post-production and so
on). The narrative voice is that associated set of stylistic decisions which allows
this heteroclite and unpredictable mode of production to be consumed as one,
unified, two-hour narrative experience. Wherever it is located, homo- or extra-
diegetically, the voice locates us in the implied diegetic world, luring us into it by
eliminating, as far as possible, discrepancies of style, tone or mood.
Narrative presence
Narrative voice is the accumulated presence of markers such as those we identified

in Dr Strangelove, in any narrative text it is all those moments where some kind of
identity peeks out from behind the curtains of representation and declares itself.
And we can now turn to the fourth consideration about narrative voice: namely,
the issue of narrative presence. The narratologist Rimmon-Kenan has suggested
a six-stage growth chart of degrees of narrative presence (Rimmon-Kenan 1983):
Least narrative presence, or voice

1 description of settings
2 identification of characters
3 temporal summaries
4 definition of characters
5 reports of what characters did not think or say
6 commentary interpretation, judgement, generalisation.
Most narrative presence, or voice
This graded scale can aptly be applied to literary narrative, but is there really such
a spectrum of presence in film narrative voice? The cinema seems to do the first
two stages automatically, and we saw in the previous chapters how stage 3 could
be achieved. But it is when we get to stages 4, 5 and 6 that the voice of a film
narrative usually cedes to the homodiegetic narration of some character within
the world of the text one character will describe another, indulge in a voice-over
soliloquy or pass some kind of judgement on the proceedings of the narrative.
One particularly galling instance of this last device is a scene at the end of Brian
De Palmas misjudged adaptation, The Bonfire of the Vanities (1990), in which a
judge (Morgan Freeman) summarises and adjudges every participant in the films
action. What galls here is the sense that what Freeman is saying is exactly what the
films implied narrator wants to say, and this unwonted identity of homodiegetic
and extradiegetic voice falls utterly flat. The very fact of the inhumanity of the
cinematic apparatus tends internally to bear down upon and flatten any attempt
to humanise its mode of articulation. And yet films do comment on and appraise
their own contents, and do so constantly; how is it that this maximal zone of
narrative presence is indicated and felt in the cinematic text?
There is a host of devices for registering narratorial interpretation and judge-
ment in film narrative. We can only touch on a few of these here, but these exam-
ples should suggest and call to mind a slew of other, similar techniques for making
an interpretive, if invisible and silent, narrative voice palpable. Sergei Eisenstein,
one of the cinemas greatest rhetoricians, worked arduously towards a specifi-
cally cinematic mode of commentary on the action of his films, because he wanted
them to teach revolutionary lessons. To this end, he theorised a device he called
the montage of attractions. At the end of his film Strike (1924), he offered a scene
in which an armed troop of police massacres a defenceless and hungry mass
of industrial strikers and their families; in order to comment on this atrocity, he
intercut graphic shots of cattle being slaughtered in an abattoir. This kind of blunt
cinematic metaphor worked effectively (in 1924) to pass judgement on the pro-
ceedings: one was left in no doubt as to what the narrator thought about police
butchery since precisely that (police butchery) was the thought produced by
the montage. However, this kind of effect had a limited period of effectiveness; the
crude splicing of two distinct objects or phenomena in an instant visual metaphor
rapidly became hackneyed. Other, equally grandiose modes of cinematic rhetoric
could be achieved at the level of mise en scene. If we want to know what the narra-
tor of Ivan the Terrible, Part One (Eisenstein 1945) thinks about Ivans relation to
his people its mixture of tyranny and care we need only examine the famous
final shot of the film, which juxtaposes Ivans extraordinarily angled and fore-
grounded silhouette with the twisting line of approaching subjects massing to his
defence in the far background. This extreme contrast of lines and of scale, held
for the duration of a long shot, forcefully comments on what would otherwise be
a simple narrative fact needless to say, such effects are derived almost entirely
from the history of Western painting.
Less aggressive means of commentary have also been developed. Music is often
employed to pass judgement on the action on the visual track: from the crudity of
character-based Wagnerian leitmotifs to the dialectical and contrapuntal use of
music in the films of Jean-Luc Godard, music is a very useful non-verbal way of
guiding, or challenging, an audiences identification with the moral interpretations
of the films implied narrator. Effects of lighting and of colour also frequently
make interpretive glosses on what appears on the screen. The colour palette of
Andrei Zvyagintsevs Vozvrashcheniye (The Return, 2003) is subdued into a vir-
tual monochrome, making patent the narrators dispassionate and emotionally
drained voice at the level of chromatic tonality; whereas, at the other extreme,
the work of Christopher Doyle and Zhang Yimou on Ying xiong (Hero, 2002)
Narrative voice 83
transformed the legendary tale of dynastic China into a colour tone-poem, with
each vivid hue (orange, red, blue, green and so on) becoming a virtual charac-
ter in the diegesis here, chromatic formalism supplies a dense mythic tone to
the narrative voice. Horror films tend to be shot in a lot of darkness, giving the
voice of their narration a sepulchral and malevolent tonality; musicals tend to
be bright and airy, thus eliminating negativity from the implied commentary on
what transpires. And so on. From these few and bare examples, a range of other,
similar effects can be induced, all of which manage to create a degree of rich nar-
rative presence in a films unfolding. Although we tend not to read these effects
as transparently as we do the overt verbal commentary of a literary narrator, there
is no question that the film medium has discovered a wide variety of means for
the subjectification of the narrating instance, the voice in which any particular
story is told.
Author or narrator?
It is interesting to ask to what extent such narrative voices are or are not related to
the authors who are ultimately responsible for producing them. Some theorists
have argued that there must be an intermediate category between the textual
narrator (a property of the text) and the textual author (the actual living being(s)
who made it). This intermediate category would be that of the implied author.
Once you have seen the whole of a series of films by a director, be it Nicholas
Ray or Akira Kurosawa or James Cameron or any other, you have already begun
to develop a rather complicated image of any one of them. You might be able to
identify the specific narrators of Rashomon, The Seven Samurai and Ran (three
Kurosawa films), each of which is a different construction for the purposes of
that specific film; but also you might be able to identify, among all of the films,
an abiding set of narrative concerns, recurrent patterns, obsessions, formal turns
and so on, which add up to something more than a narrator. But neither is this
the author. Youve never met Akira Kurosawa, and you never will; you have no
access to him as a biographical personality.
But, somewhere between this man and the individual narrators of his films,
there is what we call an implied author: the image we have of Kurosawa, some-
thing we strive to define and defend in our essays, against other versions of the
implied Kurosawa made by other readers and critics. And it might well be that
what we mean by narrative voice is as much a property of this larger, more
general figure as it is of specific textual narrators. There are similarities of voice
between these narrators, and there is an overarching satisfaction in turning to
other texts by this implied author and discovering in them some of the same
vocal qualities we recognise and value from other texts. And this is, interestingly,
one of the few defensible ways of identifying narrative voices in the cinema:
not so much through specific film narrations as through career-long habits of
presentation and expression that, in retrospect, can be shown to have had a kind
of expressive consistency. This is what the movement known as auteur theory
was all about; taking the lifetimes work of a director working in various, unre-
lated genres and identifying a peculiar mode of film discourse, a voice, working
behind and on the surface of all of the separate films.
Citizen Kane is an excellent example of a film narrative composed of multiple
homodiegetic narratives, each of which is associated with a particular voice that
we hear, connected to a body that we see; and in the end, all four are couched
within the extradiegetic, silent narrative voice of some implied narrator above
and beyond the limited points of view of the characters. Thompsons various inter-
views, with Bernstein, Leland, Susan Alexander and Raymond the butler, and
his consultation of the Thatcher diaries, construct a patchwork quilt of reminis-
cences, all shot through with the subject positions and narrative voices of his
various interviewees. But the question is: once the initial set-up, the direct, inter-
view situation with Thompson, has been passed through, does each of the five
narrators really have his or her own voice in the section of the film that tells
his or her story? For instance, take the example of the breakfast-table montage
sequence. The segment begins and ends with a shot of Jed Leland in the nursing
home, musing about Emily Norton and her marriage to Kane; thus it is entirely
framed by a specific, elderly, nostalgic and somewhat cynical narrative voice.
But once we are into the montage proper, and the direct narrative voice has died
away, does the visual language of the framing and editing carry on the same voice,
or construct a rather different one? The question is virtually impossible to answer:
the point is that, by framing the montage sequence with two bookends of direct
narratorial voice, Orson Welles has created the impression that the breakfast-table
sequence is a visual surrogate for Lelands voice even though he could never
actually have witnessed any of the scenes we see. The double irony of the scene
is that not only is Leland not directly narrating it for us in anything other than a
virtual sense but also all of the incidents summarised in it must ultimately have
depended on Kanes narration of them to Leland in the first place. The narrating
instance is thus incredibly complex at this point; what we get is:
Orson Welles directing . . .

Thompsons interview version of . . .
Lelands narrative of . . .
Kanes narrative of . . .
his marriage to Emily Norton.
Only the very top level, the level of Welles direction, is specifically filmic and
visual. And the final question is, of course, how we can justifiably posit such a
narrator in images and shots? We are given some licence by the title sequence at
the beginning and the credit sequence at the end, two extradiegetic references to
an implied author, named Orson Welles, whom Citizen Kane is ostensibly by. And
Narrative voice 85
then, too, our attention is definitely being drawn here, as in most scenes in the film,
to an irrepressible, virtuosic presence, whose flamboyant sense of style exceeds
the bare necessities of pure narrative logic; and what is narrative voice but this
addition of a something extra, above and beyond the simple needs of narrative
reason, a signature of narratorial activity, judgement, style and ideology, bound
up in the narration itself? We have seen this in Dr Strangelove, and I think we see it
all over Citizen Kane, and over Rebecca as well: the imprints of an organisational,
playful and manipulative hand on a medium not tied to the linguistic medium.
Conclusion
Whatever the complexities of the more obvious forms of homodiegetic narrative

voice in Kane and the cinema at large (use of voice-overs especially), it seems that
there is also, if not always, something like a metadiegetic narratorial voice at work
in film as well. It might not be recognisably present in Jackie Chan movies, but it
is arguably there in films by Welles, Hitchcock and many others who tried to turn
cinema into an authorial medium, despite its industrial mode of production. But
perhaps a better way of phrasing this is to suggest that we adapt Rimmon-Kenans
table of degrees of narrative presence to film narration as well: the average Holly-
wood movie exists on the same vocal level as Ernest Hemingways texts do (that
is, refining itself out of existence, not commenting, seeking to vanish from con-
sciousness), while the more assertive directors achieve more of the commentary
and judgement that we associate with a George Eliot type of narrator.
Chapter 7
Point of view
Julian Murphet
In previous chapters I have mentioned an important difference between narra-

tives executed through language and those executed through film. We can identify
readily with verbal narratives because they occur in the very medium in which
we ourselves think and speak. When J. D. Salingers narrator in The Catcher in the
Rye writes, I sat in the chair for a while and smoked a couple of cigarettes . . .
Boy, I felt miserable. I felt so depressed, you cant imagine (Salinger 1994: 89), the
ease of our identification is directly related to the fact that this is exactly how we
might describe ourselves. In the case of film, however, we are presented with the
products of a technology that is not intrinsic to our comportment in the world.
We neither think nor, normally, communicate in celluloid, video or digital imag-
ing. The animated spectacle of a cowboy-doll and a toy space ranger wrestling
under the wheels of a semi-trailer in Toy Story (Lasseter 1995) is not a narrative
sequence we would be able to execute ourselves; as soon as we represent it, it has
entered the realm of language. I have suggested that, to the extent that we are com-
pelled to identify with filmic narratives, we are in fact identifying with a series of
machines. In some, experimental films, such as Michael Snows La Region centrale
(1971), this strange, android identification is explicitly acknowledged we find
ourselves embroiled in the free-wheeling perceptual field of a mechanised camera.
In such films, our point of view on the world is profoundly and openly techno-
logical; alienation from a humanist perspective is one of the points of this kind
of work. By and large, however, this becoming machine of our cinematic spec-
tatorship is repressed and translated into a human perspective by a host of con-
ventions designed to comfort and flatter us rather than jolt us out of our routine
behaviour.
86
Point of view 87
In this chapter, we examine how mainstream cinema developed means for

encouraging our belief that what we see projected on the screen is a matter of
human psychology, human desires and human sense perception. In the language
of narratology, what we will be asking is: how is it that film narratives are focalised
such that they resemble novelistic and theatrical representations? What specific
technical devices have allowed film narratives to project their worlds through the
imagined eyes and thoughts of their characters?
Identification, projection
The first point to make is that there seems to be a very basic psychological urge to
project ones own desires into the visually compelling spectacles of film narrative;
almost despite ones higher intellectual functions, one is predisposed to mistake
film images for ones own mental images. It has been universally observed that,
once the basic conventions have been mastered, virtually everyone automatically
identifies with the actions of a films central characters and assumes their motiva-
tions as ones own. This process of identification has been analysed by many critics
and scholars, perhaps none more memorably than Christian Metz, who compared
the cinema screen to the field of dream, and analysed the infantile pleasures of
sheer looking involved in film spectatorship (Metz 1982). The primordial wish
of pleasurable looking in the cinema is to recognise oneself on the screen, to see
anthropomorphic images of the human form, and either assume the identity of
those images or consume them as a kind of fuel for ones self-image.
Following Metz, we might wish to speculate on the fundamentally scopophilic
(gaze-loving) nature of all film-going and issue some strong critical cautions about
what is at stake in such immediate and overpowering psychological investment.
Laura Mulvey, in a landmark essay, explored the dependence of identification in
the cinema on preexisting patterns of fascination already at work within the indi-
vidual subject and the social formations that have molded him (Mulvey 1992:
9634). Specifically, she demonstrated the clear continuity between the patriar-
chal unconscious and the basic operation of film as a medium: commercial film
clearly has privileged a male gaze and has produced a great many scenes whose
basic logic is the pleasure of looking at a womans body image.
It could be argued that, to the extent that there must be a girl in all films follow-
ing the classical Hollywood format, all Hollywood film is predicated parasitically
on womans to-be-looked-at-ness (Mulvey 1992: 967). Thus, the process of iden-
tifying with cinematic narratives can be said to implicate the viewer all the more
deeply in his or her own social and psychological constructedness by archaic
patriarchal patterns of perception. The most important technical requirement of
this kind of identification is that the cinematic apparatus (the technology required
to keep the illusion in place, and all its social institutions and conventions) does
not announce itself, remains hidden, erased from the visual and auditory domain.
In all of this, narrative per se in film is far less important in securing effects of
identification than it is in the verbal media. We identify willy-nilly with the pro-
jected images, owing to primary processes of psychological construction and what
Jacques Lacan called the Imaginary. Narrative devices merely extend and per-
fect what is already a potent absorption of the viewer in the image-field itself, as
though its point of view were his or her own.
Scopophilia
David Lynchs film, Blue Velvet, is a powerful meditation on the relation between
cinematic spectatorship and compulsive looking, or scopophilia (as are other
notable films, not least Peeping Tom and Psycho). Cinema has been described
as essentially pornographic (Jameson 1992) and, to that extent, Blue Velvet is a
very useful guide to the disturbing relations between our habits of identification
in film, the often violent or exploitative nature of its contents, and the vanishing
mediator of the cinematic apparatus itself. As suggested above, in conventional
narrative film, it is of paramount importance that the camera, the celluloid, the
projector and all the other equipment that go together to make the spectacle disap-
pear from view and from consciousness. The technological apparatus is eliminated
from the very perceptual field it enables. At the same time, we can say that this
apparatus is retained, subliminally, as a kind of prophylactic barrier between us
and the latent trauma in what we see. The camera vanishes, but is preserved as a
kind of existential guarantee, both that the spectacle on show is a production and
that we ourselves will not be caught watching it. The apparatus is, in this sense, a
double barrier between the viewer and the viewed; a barrier all the more effective
in being imperceptible.
The great central scene in Blue Velvet concerns a young amateur sleuth, Jeffrey
Beaumont, who has broken into an exotic singers apartment to gather clues con-
nected to a case he has stumbled across. While he is there, the woman (Dorothy
Valens) returns from her nightclub, and he is obliged to slip into her closet, from
which hidden vantage point he watches her undress. During this part of the scene,
Lynch has the camera literally adopt Jeffreys optical perspective, and cuts between
point of view shots through the closet slats and close-ups of his fascinated face.
Here, we are presented with a perfect initial analogue for the process of cinematic
spectatorship and identification: slipping into a dark space, we guiltlessly peer
at a displayed body. The closet door, with its one-way louvred vision, is a fitting
symbol of the cinematic apparatus. What we identify with in this part of the
scene is Jeffreys invisible position of scopic power; his power to gaze without
being seen. The correlative of this power is precisely the spectacle of the disrob-
ing woman, the object of the gaze par excellence. In this pure model of cinematic
voyeurism, the subject of the gaze is an invisible masculinity; its object is an
all-too-visible femininity. The process of identification is an assumption of this
Point of view 89
subject-object, masculine-feminine complex, a weave of desiring pulsions and

attractors.
The greatness of the scene, however, is what follows this set-up. Before Jeffrey or
we know what is happening, Dorothy Valens has opened the closet and exposed
the lurking voyeur. At knifepoint, she forces him to kneel, then to strip naked.
His own, hitherto secret desire is turned directly back upon him, as she kisses
his penis and stabs him in the cheek simultaneously with the command Dont
look at me! Here, all at once, Lynch has exposed and traumatised the inherent
libidinalism, the essential pornography of the cinematic gaze. The voyeurs zone
of invisible security is ruptured; the hoarded, closeted desire is loosed into the
space of the spectacle; the object-woman claims the desire to look, and the power
of the phallic blade, as her own. With whom do we identify now? As before,
surely, with Jeffrey; yet this identification has entered the realm of dread. From
the comfortable squirm of potential discovery, to the full glare of exposure, the
godhead of scopophilic power is radically dismantled: Dont look at me! We find
ourselves looking up into the shuddering face of the naked youth instead, from
the hungry eyes of Mrs Valens; and everything changes.
Focalisation
All of which is meant to demonstrate that there are very complicated ethical issues
in the process of cinematic identification, of looking in the dark at bodily images
that do not look back. With that said, however, it clearly remains to analyse the
technical and formal mechanisms whereby effects of identification are secured in
the film medium. Focalisation is the anchoring of narrative discourse to a specific
subject position in the story: the projection of a diegesis through the interested
point of view of a given character. To a large extent, the question of identification
in the cinema is the question of point of view and focalisation. Narrative point of
view need not be fixed, either to one spot or to one character focalisation can and
often does shift all around its diegetic world, like a spotlight travelling around a
stage, highlighting first this actor, then that one; first this prop, then that one. But
insofar as a narrative becomes fixed to one position or another, even as it roams, it
has been focalised. If, however, the narrating instance is one that does not attach
itself to a character within the world of the text, or is extradiegetic, the prob-
lem of focalisation does not arise. Who is the extradiegetic narrator, and where
does he or she stand? These are questions only of voice. Focalisation becomes
an issue when we shift into the diegetic world and begin to have our percep-
tions and thoughts shaped by the characters who attract and direct narrative
discourse.
Memento is a clear example of a film relying strictly on a fixed focalisation: for
the duration of the film, we never leave Leonard Shelbys point of view. This is a
crucial component of the films meaning, for if we were to leave that very narrow
range of narratorial knowledge for even an instant, the plot would collapse and
the power of the final revelation be seriously diminished. The Usual Suspects,
like most films, employs what should be called variable focalisation because
the focal point shifts between several different characters, even if one dominates
the whole. And this is also the case of Hitchcocks Rebecca: although it appears to
be a fixed focalisation, in fact the focal point shifts from Joan Fontaines character
to Maxim de Winter towards the end of the film. One further species of focalisation
is the class of multiple focalisation, where different points of view narrate the same
story events. The two most famous examples of this are Robert Brownings long
poem The Ring and the Book, which presents multiple eye-witness accounts of the
same criminal case, and Akira Kurosawas film Rashomon, which does the same
sort of thing. On the surface, it might seem as though Citizen Kane is an example of
multiple focalisation rather than variable focalisation, but because in fact the
various narrators take on different periods in Kanes life, rather than telling it all
individually, it does not fully attain to this category.
To begin with only the most obvious device for focalising narrative in the cin-
ema, first-person voice-over (a vestige of older or parallel media, like the radio
and illustrated lecture) saturates the image in the peculiar intonations, grain and
psychology of a given characters voice. Voice-overs are essentially rather easy
and cheap means of identification since all they really require is a simultaneity
of sound and image, but they remain effective because they offer a non-strenuous
way of humanising the film image. This, ironically enough, is precisely why the
Directors Cut of Ridley Scotts Blade Runner (1997) is so superior to the origi-
nal cinema-release version of 1982: by eliminating the derivative 1940s, noir-style
voice-over of Harrison Ford that heavily focalises the original, Scott achieves a
relative de-subjectification of the films point of view it is this that increases
our suspicion that Dekker is after all not a human at all but an android like the
ones he hunts down. It is not that we fail to identify with Dekker (identification
is secured by other means) but that we no longer do so as deeply as we did, and
this is better for the narrative.
Close-up
There is, however, a more visual formal feature of the cinema that allows for a
remarkable and unprecedented degree of identification with a character and
this is, of course, the facial close-up. A close-up literally fills the screen with the
details of a face: the subtle expression of the eyes, the cast of the mouth, the
furrows on the brow and so on. Film was the first narrative medium in which this
degree of intimacy with the face of another became possible. We can think about
the close-up as a device for focalising two kinds of experience: perception and
emotion. In terms of focalised perceptions, the close-up plays a very useful role.
By intercutting objective perceptions of objects and spaces with close-ups of a
Point of view 91
characters face, a new kind of focalisation is made possible: not direct focalisation
or strict optical point of view (POV) shots, but what I want to call associative
focalisation. We associate the filmed perceptions with the face we see in successive
shots. They fuse and form a single, complex image in the mind. Whenever we
watch a close-up of a face followed by a close-up of an object, we are seeing the
object as it were through the eyes of the face. The name for this editorial trick in
the cinema is the eye-line match.
In terms of affections, of feelings and emotional states, the close-up plays an
even greater role. In fact there are few representational devices as powerful as the
film close-up for recording emotional states in their extensive physical detail. We
are easily focalised by a character whom we see up close in a state of grief, panic,
hunger, hilarity or whatever. Hitchcock makes great use of this in Rebecca, as
close-up after close-up shows the increase in nervous tension, fear and humil-
iation on Joan Fontaines face. Two of the most powerful moments of focali-
sation in the film happen when Fontaines face turns from anxious but expec-
tant joy to crushed embarrassment and pain, on both occasions when Maxim
doesnt respond well to what she is wearing. Another is when we see her about
to faint in the courtroom: we get an extreme close-up of her eyes, glazed over by
a gauze on the lens, conveying the effect of her own dizziness, even as we look
at her.
An interesting point about this boundary between associative and affective
focalisation is that it is a very blurred one. In one of the most famous psycholog-
ical experiments ever conducted in the medium, Lev Kuleshov spliced close-up
shots of the face of Mozhukhin, a famous Russian actor, with several different
shots: a bowl of soup, a teddy bear, a young girl and a childs coffin. In each
case, the audience read the emotions on the face of the actor as direct reactions
to the other shots: he was hungry, aroused, amused, saddened. Of course, the
irony was that the shots of Mozhukhins face were identical. Here, the associative
power of editing had exceeded the direct, iconic power of the affection image in
the close-up. The point is that, with some clever combination of the two, effects
not too far removed from the free indirect discourse of a Henry James can be
achieved.
When filming Rebecca, Hitchcock made a very interesting decision about the
way to film Mrs Danvers. In an interview, he put it this way:
Mrs Danvers was almost never seen walking and was rarely shown in motion.
If she entered a room in which the heroine was, what happened is that the girl
suddenly heard a sound and there was the ever-present Mrs Danvers, standing
perfectly still by her side. In this way the whole situation was projected from the
heroines point of view; she never knew when Mrs Danvers might turn up, and
this, in itself, was terrifying. To have shown Mrs Danvers walking about would
have been to humanize her.
(Truffaut 1985: 12930)
It is not that Mrs Danvers really was a kind of ever-present ghost; it is that, com-
bined with the distressed close-ups of Joan Fontaines face, and with the constant
framing of Danvers looming over Fontaines seated figure at a table, the always
unexpected appearance of Danvers was the final touch in Hitchcocks establish-
ment of a closed psychological space in the film. Danvers is seen not objectively
but as Fontaine sees her. And she would not be as frightening as she is without
the nervous close-ups of Fontaine to underline our fear.
Optical POV
Another technique for focalising film narrative on a specific subject position is of

course to shoot the film as if from the point of view of a character, taking literally
the comparison of the camera with a human eye. Many films have attempted this
effect of perceptual subjectivity from time to time, as part of the overall narrative
structure, but very few have tried it throughout a film. The first classic example
of such an attempt is the 1946 film, Lady in the Lake (Montgomery 1947); almost
the entire film is shot as if from the eyes of the character Philip Marlowe. Shots
like this are called optical point of view or POV shots, and their combination
with a voice-over narration might be thought to effect a pretty comprehensive
focalisation of the narrative. But the irony is that identification does not work so
happily with a consistency of literal camera POV. For some strange psychological
reason, it is the case that the unrelenting optical point of view of a character
alienates us as often as it draws us in: the simple fact is that a machine lens and
an organic lens are two very different phenomena, and any time a mechanical
lens is pretending to have a body, it can easily seem ridiculous.
In Rebecca, the optical POV shot is not often used, but when it is, it is especially
effective. The first view we have of Maxim, standing precariously at the top of a
cliff outside Monte Carlo, is from the POV of Fontaine, whom we have not even
seen yet, only heard. The first appearance of Mrs Danvers, a haunting, sudden
close-up, is again framed as a POV shot. But perhaps the most extraordinary POV
shot in the film comes towards the end, at the very moment when Maxim is telling
the story of Rebeccas final minutes in the cottage. So caught up is Fontaines
character in the narrative she has been waiting such a long time to hear that we
move from a close-up of her face to a POV shot that looks around the interior
of the cottage as though Rebecca were still there, moving about the way Maxim
is describing her actions. At the centre of the frame is an absence, an absence
that moves: we are asked to adopt the extreme psychological state of Fontaines
character and project the most beautiful creature we have ever seen into this
space. We inhabit the POV of the nameless narrator, whose compulsive wish to
see and compare herself to the dead Rebecca is most eloquently expressed in these
vacant shots from her desperate perspective.
Point of view 93
Synthesis and limitation
Altogether, Rebecca is a remarkable exercise in film focalisation. We begin in the

narrators dream space another very effective means of establishing imaginative
identification. Our first view of Manderley, of the gates and the drive and the great
house itself, is entirely from the position of the narrators nocturnal dreams of the
past. The voice-over that accompanies these shots is measured and hypnotic and
focalised very particularly: Last night I dreamed of Manderley again . . . I looked
upon a desolate shell with no whisper of the past about its staring walls . . . We can
never go back to Manderley again, but sometimes, in my dreams, I do go back,
to the strange days of my life, which began for me in the south of France . . . By
the end of this voice-over, which is the last such intrusion in the film, we know
several things about our narrator: she no longer lives at Manderley, she often
dreams of it, she is involved with another (she speaks of a we), and her life,
described as strange, effectively began where we finally see her, screaming NO!
at Laurence Olivier leaning over a precipice. Combined with the visual message
of the dream flashback, we know that this house exerts considerable pressure on
her unconscious, and we are about to find out why.
For most of the rest of the film, until the revelation scene in the beach cottage,
this focalisation is preserved intact. Most of the drama of the film depends upon a
very limited range of narrative information: Joan Fontaine does not know the real
story of Rebecca. With her, and solely from her point of view, we piece together
select pieces of evidence and come to the same conclusion she does: that her new
husband is still madly in love with his dead wife. The whole narrative logic of
the film depends upon this repression of the POVs of other characters. Everyone
else of any significance in the film Maxim, Frank Crawley, Jack Favell, Beatrice
and Giles, the dread Mrs Danvers, even old Loony Ben everyone else knows the
truth: that Rebecca was a promiscuous and unfaithful sexual predator whom her
husband despised and almost killed. In being focalised by the nameless narrator,
we too are forced to adopt this extremely limited narrative range, and the effect is
to say the least exasperating. When Beatrice turns conspiratorially to Fontaine
after lunch and says, Oh, but you know the whole story, of course, the immediate
response is that, no, she doesnt; but if this character had any gumption, and any
class, she would ask! She doesnt. She surmises and hypothesises, but will never
act like the mistress of the house and simply press for information. Her passivity
and gaucherie are very annoying, and not only for us but for her narrator as well.
Thus, although we are for a large part of the film exclusively focalised by one of
the dimmest characters in film history, there exists a latent tension between this
focal lens and the invisible, meta-diegetic narrator who is presenting her POV
for us. For brevitys sake, we will call this invisible narrator Alfred Hitchcock
(of course, he isnt totally invisible, and he makes his patented cameo when Jack
Favell is making his trunk call to Danvers from London). To give you a sense of
what I mean, here is another excerpt from the interview of Hitchcock by Francois
Truffaut, on the subject of Rebecca:
HITCHCOCK: Its not a Hitchcock picture; its a novelette, really. The story is
old-fashioned; there was a whole school of feminine literature at the period, and
though Im not against it, the fact is that the story is lacking in humour . . .
TRUFFAUT: . . . youve said that the picture is lacking in humour, but my guess
would be that you must have had some fun with the scenario, because its actually
the story of a girl who makes one blunder after another . . . I couldnt help
imagining the working sessions between you and your scriptwriter: Now, this
is the scene of the meal. Shall we have her drop her fork or will she upset her
glass? Lets have her break the plate . . .
HITCHCOCK: Thats quite true; it did happen that way and we had a good deal
of fun with it.
(Truffaut 1985: 1301)
This suggests some very interesting narrative dynamics between the narrative
focal lens and the invisible hand of the film narrator. Hitchcock simply does not
like his diegetic narrator; so he will signpost this exasperation not by breaking
the focalisation (if he did this, the narrative would unravel) but by torturing his
narrator, playing sadistic games with her, even as she maintains a tight grip on
the narrative reins. Throughout the film, she is dismissively referred to as a child;
she bites her nails when out for a drive with Maxim, and is reproved for it. When
she sits down to a table in the restaurant at Monte, she knocks over a vase of
flowers; when she sits down to her desk in the morning room, she breaks the china
Cupid and hides the shards; when she is confronted by the breakfast service at
Manderley, she doesnt dare eat lest she embarrass herself further; her sketches are
bad and uninteresting; when she walks with Maxim, she insists on going directly
to the cottage that is most traumatic to him; when she dresses for dinner, she
looks ridiculous; and so on. There is a long chain of explicit humiliations and
faux pas, which we are invited sadistically to enjoy as the compensation for so
little narrative information.
In other films, the exploration of point of view is more fluid and provocative
than it is in the narrow narrative world of Rebecca. One of the more fascinat-
ing films of recent years has returned to the film-length optical POV, in a single
unbroken shot, and the dream space of a first-person fixed focaliser, to meditate
profoundly on the relationship between image and memory, narrative and history.
This is Alexander Sokurovs film Russian Ark (2002).
Russian Ark seriously challenges the naive presupposition that a consistent
identification of the camera with a single characterological perspective leads to
a similar psychological identification between the viewer and that character. In
fact, quite to the contrary, what we find in this film is that, far from identifying
with the nameless first-person drifter through the Hermitage, we are evacuated
Point of view 95
through his eyes into the space itself, to be focalised by any number of faces
drifting past us. In the exquisite ball sequence, for instance, it is not the narrator
we find ourselves focalised by (indeed, he has precisely fallen silent and withdrawn
into a purely receptive state), but the French diplomat, the short, fair-haired young
officer, the conductor, the lady in white, the spy and so forth, in the order in which
they appear before us and conduct us through the dance. Despite being rigorously
shot from the optical POV of the narrator, it is this literal focaliser who vanishes
from the psychological, affective and physical milieu, liberating us to assume the
perspective and desires of these virtually random others, in what amounts to a
gaseous deconstruction of any singular or consistent narratological frame.
Once again, this powerfully demonstrates the critical function of the close-up
and medium shot as focalising devices in film narrative. Precisely insofar as the
optical first-person point of view effectively erases the explicit focaliser from the
visual field, he or she fails to engage the viewer in anything other than a literal way.
What happens instead is that the faces and three-quarter bodies that occupy the
visual field of the narrator assume disproportionate focalising functions. Sokurov
makes this explicit throughout his film by splitting the narrator function in two:
the nameless first-person narrator/dreamer and his companion figure, the French
diplomat, whose constant and riveting visual presence (his towering height; the
leanness of his frame, darkness of his clothes and expressiveness of his face in
close-up and three-quarter shots) becomes a surrogate for the invisible narrator,
despite the fact that they are in constant dispute over most of the issues the film
raises. The narrator and the diplomat are worlds apart psychologically, emotion-
ally and intellectually; yet owing to the fact that one is embodied and the other is
not (is just an eye and a voice), they become a complex whole, a pseudo-couple,
which allegorises the dialectic the film most wants to represent: between the im-
perial visibility of European culture and the elusiveness of the Russian soul,
existing in its shadow.
Conclusion
Most cinema claims us not through the cold mechanical eye of the camera but
through the sensitive faces of others registered in its visual field. Whether those
faces are the exquisitely and relentlessly studied expressions of Falconetti in Carl
Dreyers La Passion de Jeanne dArc (1928) or the digitally animated visages of
Docter, Silverman and Unkrichs inhuman comedy Monsters, Inc. (2001), we are
focalised less by the literal point of view of the camera on the diegetic world
than we are by these expressive windows into the psychological life of sentient
and affective beings. More than a century of mechanically reproduced machine
art has not diminished the extraordinary hold on our imaginary lives of faces and
the souls they appear to manifest.
Chapter 8
Novel to film
Helen Fulton
The process of reworking a written text, such as a novel, into an image-based text,
such as a film, reveals the different narrative conventions of the two media. In
this chapter, I am primarily interested in the ways in which the narrative conven-
tions and techniques of film work to create meanings, so that a novel and its film
adaptation, although clearly related, tend to have different themes and goals. I
will be referring mainly to two films, The English Patient (written and directed by
Anthony Minghella, 1996) and The Lord of the Rings: The Fellowship of the Ring
(directed by Peter Jackson, screenplay by Frances Walsh, 2001), and the corre-
sponding novels, The English Patient by Michael Ondaatje (1992) and The Lord of
the Rings, Part 1: The Fellowship of the Ring by J. R. R. Tolkien (1949).
Issues of adaptation
The novelist John Irving, who wrote the screenplay for the film The Cider House
Rules based on his own novel, has said, Even when you dont have to lose much
in an adaptation from book to screen, you always lose something. Screenwriters
learn to compensate for what theyve lost . . . In an adaptation, you cant be too
literally wedded to the novel. You have to take advantage of what a film can do
(Guardian, 28 January 2005, Friday Review, p. 11).
What Irving is getting at here is that the process of film adaptation, like the
process of linguistic translation, is itself a creative act of authorship that results
not in a variant version but in a distinctively original text. The opening scene of
a novel, for example, might not be the best opening scene for a film of that novel,
96
Novel to film 97
which has to draw the viewing audience immediately into the location, the time
setting and the fictional world of the protagonists, so the screenwriter has to find
another way in, often by inventing a scene. The film of The English Patient opens
with the desert rescue of Almasy from his burning plane, showing us his terrible
injuries. This scene introduces us to the main character and how he came to be
cared for by Hana in the Italian villa, linking the two main strands of the film,
the desert and the villa. Michael Ondaatjes novel, The English Patient, opens with
Hana in the villa and takes us through a series of brief scenes alternating between
the desert rescue and the villa, but the physical landscapes and appearance of
each locale, so striking a feature of the film, are marginalised in the novel. Instead,
each scene reveals a little bit more to us about these two characters, their states of
mind and, most significantly, those cultural and discursive points of reference
what Pierre Bourdieu calls habitus (Bourdieu 1979) that define and distinguish
them.
Such a process of adaptation confirms that the narrative modes of novel and
film operate according to different logics of storytelling. And the existence of these
different logics, each appropriate to its own mode and context, reminds us that
there is no natural or obvious way of telling a story. How a story is told depends
not only on cultural and linguistic conventions but also on the parameters of the
specific medium through which it is articulated. Dudley Andrew suggests that the
analysis of adaptation . . . must point to the achievement of equivalent narrative
units in the absolutely different semiotic systems of film and language (Andrew
2000: 34), but I would argue that it is not possible to construct equivalent narrative
units in the different media, since each operates according to its own narrative
logic. In this chapter, I am concerned not so much with the actual processes by
which a novel is turned into a film as with the narrative conventions of film and
how they create meanings that might differ from those of the preceding novel.
Narrative theory has traditionally dealt with written texts, occasionally with
oral texts, such as folk tales (as in Propps schematic theory), and assumptions
about what narrative is have therefore been based on these particular kinds of
storytelling modes. In analysing filmic narrative, we need to rethink the estab-
lished conventions of narrative. For example, the process of editing is crucial in
constructing the narrative sequence of a film, whose individual shots are rarely
filmed in sequence. The directors cut, which restores scenes omitted from the
commercial version, the collections of extra scenes marketed on DVDs and the
Oscar awards for best editor all draw our attention to the role of the editor and
the significance of the editorial process in movie-making.
But this process of editing, of cutting and pasting, refocusing dialogue, reorder-
ing scenes, which is often just as significant in the crafting of a novel, and which
might be done by professional editors as well as by authors, is almost entirely
elided from analytical accounts of narrative structure. Debates about different
manuscript versions of texts, such as the many emendations and print versions
of James Joyces novel Ulysses, centre on the issue of authenticating the original
version of the text, a debate that never happens in relation to differently edited
versions of the same film. Critical analysis of a novel seeks a single, coherent and
uniquely gifted authorial voice, such as that of J. R. R. Tolkien in Lord of the
Rings, echoes of whose scholarly institutionalised persona are readily retrievable
from his writings. Although early film criticism modelled the director on the lit-
erary author as the auteur, the single gifted originator of the text, more recent
criticism (not to mention industry reward systems) acknowledges the multivocal
perspective of film, shared among writers, directors, editors and even actors.
A theory of narrative based on an assumption of univocal, singular, coherent
authorship is inevitably different from one based on an assumption of multivocal
shared authorship. As Robert B. Ray has put it, Fearful of seeing literatures
narrative role usurped by the movies, and under the sway of New Criticisms
religious reverence for serious art . . . critics typically used adaptation study
to shore up literatures crumbling walls (Ray 2000: 46). A post-structuralist view
of film narrative, on the other hand, acknowledges the decentring of authorial
responsibility that in turn decentres meaning. Such a model of authorship, with
its implications of editorial and directorial interventions and the likelihood of
multiple versions with no original text, has to frame our expectations of what
filmic narrative is and how it operates.
It is also important to remember that both novel and film can do things that
the other cannot or, as Seymour Chatman put it, What novels can do that films
cant (and vice versa) (Chatman 1980). A novel mainly tells, through diegesis; a
film mainly shows, through mimesis. So in relation to character and motivation,
for example, a novel can explain, through an omniscient narrator, why charac-
ters perform certain actions, and even what they are thinking and feeling while
they are doing them. A film can show characters performing actions, but cannot
easily comment on those actions from an external perspective, except through an
interventionist device such as voice-over. These differences in the modes of rep-
resentation effectively produce two quite different texts, undermining the hier-
archy of original novel and secondary film, or what Imelda Whelehan calls the
unconscious prioritising of the fictional origin over the resulting film (Cartmell &
Whelehan 1999: 3). The structuralist view of adaptation, in which novel and film
are regarded as having the same underlying story (or langue) realised in different
plots (or paroles) (McFarlane 1996: 23), is unable to explain the discursive and
semiotic strategies by which the two texts are related and yet quite distinct.
In terms of focalisation the perspective from which events are narrated a
film has less control than a novel over different viewpoints. A third-person exter-
nal narrator in a novel can give the viewpoints of several characters during a
single event. In a film, we do not always know how characters interpret events,
whose viewpoint is privileged or what their inner thoughts are. Film characters
are always in front of a camera; they have only public personae, they are never
alone. The only external narrator is the camera, which represents the viewpoint
of the director, the cinematographer and the editor as well.
Novel to film 99
Table 8.1: Novel and film.
NOVEL FILM
FIELD Structure story Structure story

Description of settings Mise en scene, sound
Transitivity Composition and vectors
TENOR Characters (motivated) Characters (public)
Focalisation Focalisation
Modality Camera techniques
MODE Chronology plot Chronology plot
Chapters Shots, sequences
Verbal cohesion Continuity editing, sound
We can summarise the narrative features of novel and film in table 8.1, which
compares aspects of the two modes of storytelling. Those aspects of filmic narra-
tive listed in the right-hand column are discussed in this chapter and chapter 9.
Structure: field and mode
The strategies for constructing a coherent visual world within which a film can
be read as real and meaningful can be expressed as aspects of field, tenor and
mode (Halliday 1978: 110; see also Rosemary Huismans chapter 12 in this book).
The field of subject matter is created diegetically through action, mise en scene
and sound, as well as through the structuring of the story, the basic sequence of
narrative events. The tenor, the range of social relations and attitudes constructed
by the narrative, is expressed diegetically through dialogue between characters,
and visually, or mimetically, by means of camera techniques and focalisation. The
mode, the textual means by which a message is organised into a coherent whole, is
achieved by the construction of plot in scenes and sequences, editing and various
technical applications of camera and sound.
As a mode of representation, film typically has a fairly simple structure, consist-
ing of a linear progression made up of individual shots organised into sequences
of juxtaposed images. A novel, on the other hand, could have a considerably more
complex narrative structure than a film, which has to be followed at one sit-
ting by a viewing audience. The field of a film, the subject matter and content,
is therefore presented in a particular mode or style of organisation, laid out
along a linear time frame. The mode of description characteristic of novels is
replaced by the mode of visual and auditory signifiers that create the field of
the film.
Seymour Chatman argues that a dual time frame the distinction between
chronological story and reordered plot (or discourse as Chatman calls it) is a
fundamental property of narrative found in both novel and film (Chatman 1978).
This distinction, however, can be made in relation to all kinds of utterances, not
just narratives, since the disjunction between the chronology of an event and the
manner of its telling is a function of representation. Like other kinds of struc-
turalist binaries, notably langue and parole, this distinction is also problematic
because of the difficulty of drawing an absolute line between what is story and
what is plot.
Many screenwriters adapting a screenplay from a novel break the narrative
down into what they see as the essential chronological elements of the story
before reordering them into a plot. However, there is no single story (or langue)
lying behind or beneath all versions of a text that will then yield multiple plots
(or paroles), depending on the writer. Just as a langue is socially defined and con-
structed within discourse, and is therefore as unstable and plural as a parole, so
the story of a novel or film can be reconstructed differently by different inter-
preters. Events that might seem an essential part of the story to one interpreter
could be omitted or abbreviated or assimilated into other events by another inter-
preter working within a different cultural framework or with a different purpose
(Smith 1980).
Rather than considering films such as The Lord of the Rings: The Fellowship of
the Ring and The English Patient as versions of the respective novels of the same
names, we need to read their textual logic, the ways in which field, tenor and mode
construct meaning, in terms of the specific mode of film. The story of a film, that
is, the chronological summary of events, can be retheorised as its field, that is,
the semantic content and subject matter. The concept of plot, as the particular
ordering of events in a specific text, can be retheorised as an aspect of mode, the
way in which the elements of a narrative are organised into a coherent chain of
events.
The field of a film which events and locations are actually shown tends to be
much simpler than the field of a preceding novel. At the same time, the mode
the way in which the events are selected and ordered inevitably differs quite
markedly between novel and film because of the different demands of the two
media. The novel The English Patient layers multiple locations and time frames
into an intricate pattern that works at both horizontal and vertical levels, disman-
tling any easy distinction between field and mode, or indeed between story and
plot. Instead, the reader is challenged to decipher the events of the book just as
Hana tries to decipher Almasys copy of Herodotus into which he has pasted all
the fragments of his life, in random order.
To make the film version of 1996, the director and screenwriter, Anthony
Minghella, working to the demands of the mainstream commercial movie indus-
try, used aspects of the field and techniques of filmic mode to create a clear
distinction between story and plot. He stripped out many of the scenes from the
novel and reordered the remaining events into three main narrative sequences,
one set in the present, in the villa where the English patient lies dying, one set in
Novel to film 101
the past, tracing the love affair between Almasy and Katharine, and a third cen-
tred around the figure of Caravaggio that brings past and present together into a
disturbing continuum.
In the film The Lord of the Rings: The Fellowship of the Ring there is only one
main storyline, or semantic field, whereas the novel has several. Some have been
left out entirely, such as the Tom Bombadil episode; others have been abbreviated
or incorporated into the main narrative, such as Gandalfs story of Saruman, told
by him as a flashback in the novel but featured as part of the main action in the
film. The main effect of these changes is to remove many of the novels fields,
and therefore its themes, and replace them with other preoccupations generated
by the film. Novel and film, while drawing on some of the same semantic fields,
conform to different narrative logics, or modes, and therefore construct different
meanings.
The novel is structured as two books, with most of the first set in the Shire
and leading up to the meeting with Strider towards the end of Book 1. Much
of Book 1 consists of folklore, genealogy, self-contained stories and narratives of
past adventures, forming a rich texture that works to suggest the totality of life
in the Shire, with its own distinctive history, geography and world view. Tolkiens
career as an academic medievalist has clearly influenced his creation of a lost
society whose reality belongs to the past and can be reconstructed only through
its surviving texts.
Book 2 of the novel focuses on the adventures of the fellowship of the ring,
but here again there are interspersed accounts of the history and politics of the
warring groups. Many of these accounts are delivered by characters in direct
speech, rather than by the narrator, such as Gloins tale of Saurons threat (Book 2,
chapter 2), drawing attention to the orality of knowledge and memory in this
created world. This kind of textuality the back stories, the distinction between
orality and literacy, the detailed construction of an entire culture, with its own
history and beliefs is necessarily absent from the film version.
The film is structured as a typical adventure movie, in the form of a journey
or quest. After a relatively brief introductory section, the main content of the film
follows the journey of the band of heroes. The Proppian structure of the hero-
quest, elaborated by Joseph Campbell in The Hero with a Thousand Faces (1949),
and taken up by such directors as George Lucas (writer and director of the Star
Wars series, 1977 to the present) and Steven Spielberg (director of the Indiana
Jones series, 198189, co-written by George Lucas and Philip Kaufman), has been
foregrounded as the main structuring device of the film. The various back stories
are either omitted, abbreviated, brought in to the main action or summarised
as voice-overs, clearing the way for a central narrative structure with a strong
forward propulsion provided by the motif of the quest.
The choice of episodes taken from the novel depends largely on whether they
can be shaped into distinct sequences that have a clear time frame and carry the
action of the story forward. The linear structure of film, as part of its mode,
also demands points of climax that are clearly signposted. Typically, Hollywood
movies (made according to a defined set of technical and aesthetic conventions by
studios for maximum commercial profit) infix two points of climax at intervals of
roughly a third of the running time. The first point of climax is left only partially
resolved, generating a renewed development of the plot, while the second resolves
the main issues and leads to the end of the film.
Because the novel of The Lord of the Rings: The Fellowship of the Ring is organ-
ised as a multilayering of numerous tales and anecdotes, there are many points
of climax, often based around the deaths or woundings of major characters. The
loss of Gandalf on the bridge of Khazad-dum, for example, forming the climac-
tic moment of Book 2, chapter 5, is one of a series of such moments that often
prefigure the end of a chapter. This pacing of the classic adventure novel, as a set
of chapters ending with a suspenseful cliffhanger, owes a great deal to popular
cultural forms, particularly the serialised magazine and comic story, a format that
reappeared in the television age with the weekly serial, both drama and soap opera,
where each episode ends on an unresolved moment of suspense (see Rosemary
Huisman in chapter 12).
In the film, the points of climax are provided by the two set-piece battle scenes,
which are characteristic devices of action movies. The different pacing of the
novel and the film, produced partly by the number and placement of the points
of climax, directs us to the main message or theme of each text, alerting us to
what is significant and what are the major issues and generators of tension. A
further indicator of meaning is provided by the point of closure, that moment in
a narrative when the story can end only in one way, when other possibilities are
closed off. According to Martin McQuillan, All narratives end, but not all provide
closure (McQuillan 2000: 324), and, in the case of such serial texts as The Lord of
the Rings (novels and films), we might expect the point of closure to be withheld
until the very last text in the series. Yet as stand-alone texts, each novel and film
does not simply end but has its own point of closure that works to inform us of
the major ideological preoccupations of the text.
In the novel The Lord of the Rings: The Fellowship of the Ring the point of closure
is Frodos realisation (in Book 2, chapter 10) that he must go on alone. Putting
on the ring, he has a vision of such terrible war and destruction that, when he
manages to remove the ring, his mind is made up: he must break up the fellowship
and continue alone:
Frodo rose to his feet. A great weariness was on him, but his will was firm and
his heart lighter. He spoke aloud to himself. I will do now what I must, he said.
This at least is plain: the evil of the Ring is already at work even in the Company,
and the Ring must leave them before it does more harm. I will go alone. Some I
cannot trust, and those I can trust are too dear to me . . . I will go alone. At once.
(The Fellowship of the Ring, Book 2, chapter 10)
Novel to film 103
With this resolution of Frodos dilemma, the book can come to an end, prefig-
uring a new stage of the journey to be continued in the next book. This moment
of closure draws attention to the casting of Frodo in the role of the ordinary hero,
the individual who, faced with unexpected dangers, performs as a hero without
consciously inhabiting the persona. Tolkiens model of the everyday hero was
drawn not from medieval literature and folklore, in which heroes tend to be over-
determined and instantly recognisable, but from the men of his own day who
had fought in two world wars and shown exceptional courage and fortitude. In
the character of Frodo, Tolkien idealises the heroic possibilities of the ordinary
man, the innate skills of leadership that reside in some and not in others, regard-
less of social class. At the same time he re-erects the class-based structure of
officers and men in his portrayal of the relationship between Frodo and his
friends, Sam, Merry and Pippin. Sam, in particular, is constructed as the per-
fect batman, loyal, sensible, cautious, ready to follow his leader unquestioningly
despite personal misgivings. Although Frodo has determined to journey on alone,
we are not surprised that the novel ends with Sam firmly accompanying him.
In the film version, the point of closure is an incident that does not occur in the
novel, namely the temptation of Aragorn. This scene confirms the positioning of
Aragorn, rather than Frodo, as the filmic hero and naturalised leader of the quest.
Frodo is the ordinary person selected by fate to do a difficult job; Aragorn is the
traditional hero of medieval literature. Like Arthur, he is aristocratic, a trained
warrior, leader of an army, destined to rule. The economics of commercial cinema
dictate that an action movie must have a personable action hero. Frodo cannot be
transformed into such a hero without losing his essential otherness, so Aragorn is
elevated into a larger and more prominent role. The temptation of the hero is a
conventional motif of hero cycles ranging from Jesus to Lancelot, and the location
of Aragorn in this context works to affirm his heroic status. To bring the film to
a dramatic end, the episodes of the attack of the Orcs and the death of Boromir
are moved from their place at the beginning of Part 2 of the novel sequence, The
Two Towers, to provide a conventional ending for an action film. Aragorns hand-
to-hand combat with the Orc reinforces his heroic status and centrality to the
world of the film (as opposed to that of the novel), while the deathbed confession
of Boromir again recalls the chivalric behaviour of medieval knights.
We can see a significant difference in the points of closure occurring in The
English Patient as novel and film. The film, as a commercial vehicle, is firmly
structured into one of the major genres of Hollywood film; that is, romance. Its
point of closure, one of the signposts that tells us it is a romance, is the death
of Katharine and Almasys return for her body, accompanied by soaring music
and dramatic visuals of the orange desert and the white robes flowing around
Katharines body. The ending comes with the death of Almasy himself, having
relived the contours of the desert and the love affair that took place within it. The
novel, however, eludes a simple generic categorisation. It is more open-ended,
finishing on a final leap in the chronology with Kip and Hana separately thinking
back to the villa ten years after the war. The point of closure is Hiroshima, marking
the end of the war and the end of Kips belief in the British Empire and the values
that sustained him during the war. It is at that point that he sees through what
Bronwen Thomas has called the mirage of cultural imperialism (Thomas 2000:
208). The novel, then, is marked not simply as a romance like the commercial
vehicle of the film but as a rumination on some of the larger themes of twentieth-
century life, such as war, memory and identity.
Points of climax, moments of resolution, the point of closure and the ordering
of events therefore tell us how to read a text and to recognise its preoccupations.
By selecting particular events the field and arranging them into coherent
sequences marked by points of climax and closure the mode each of these
films creates a very different fictional world from that of the corresponding novels.
The different points of closure determine what each text is about and how we are
to read it: the ordinary heroism of Frodo and the idea of essential goodness and
evil in the novel are submerged beneath the commercial fantasy of the action hero
in the film, the superman who can win wars and save civilisation.
Setting
Where the filmic action takes place is an important aspect of the field, structuring
our sense of the reality of the film and our expectations of what might occur in it.
Setting can be considered to comprise location, encompassing particular physical
and geographical sites, and mise en scene. This term, used in both theatre and film,
describes the immediate surroundings and composition of individual shots in a
film, and provides a visual realisation of what in a novel is usually described in
words. The various settings of a film help to achieve a seamless fictional world
through a powerfully iconic visual medium.
Each mise en scene, which normally lasts through a sequence of shots (although
an effect of dramatic or comedic pace can be achieved by cutting rapidly back-
wards and forwards between different mises en scene), comprises a physical loca-
tion, interior or exterior, costumes and props. It also includes those elements that
will be picked up by the camera as the shot is filmed: the bits of business, or spe-
cific actions performed by the characters in the shot, the lighting and the colour
(Nelmes 1996: 934).
We can also include the specific composition of each shot: where the characters
and props or physical objects are positioned and their relationship to each other.
The spatiality of the mise en scene, allowing a number of people and objects to
be seen in the same shot, provides an important site of signification: what we are
supposed to notice first and how we are to rank the visual items in order of sig-
nificance has to be carefully controlled through composition, lighting and focus
(McFarlane 1996: 278). A symmetrical composition, with characters positioned
Novel to film 105
equidistantly from each other or lined up with specific props, can suggest for-
mality or romantic fantasy, as in musicals. Asymmetrical arrangements tend to
look less posed and therefore more realistic, as if we are observing people as they
would normally behave.
The actual or imaginary lines that connect the characters and objects such as
Almasy watching Katharines arrival by plane, or Gandalf on the bridge of Khazad-
dum are the narrative vectors that literally point to the main participants of
the action and show us how they are connected (Kress & van Leeuwen 1996: 56
8). These vectors are the visual equivalent of grammatical transitivity in verbal
language, the arrangements of participants in clauses that indicate who is doing
what to whom (and sometimes how and why) (Fowler 1996: 22032; Goatly 2000:
5965).
In Tolkiens Lord of the Rings, Gandalfs power is indicated by his relation to the
bridge, which he cracks with one blow of his staff: At that moment, Gandalf lifted
his staff, and crying aloud he smote the bridge before him (Book 2, chapter 5).
In both verbal processes, lifted and smote, Gandalf is the agent exercising
power over the goals, staff and bridge. In the visual mise en scene of the film,
Gandalfs location on the bridge, and the vectors departing from Gandalf towards
the bridge and the staff, convey the same relationship of power between agent and
goal.
In Ondaatjes English Patient, Almasy describes being part of a group of men
who see Katharine arrive with Geoffrey Clifton, her husband: He sat in his two-
seater plane and we walked towards him from the base camp. He stood up in
the cockpit and poured a drink out of his flask. His new wife sat beside him . . .
I watched the friendly uncertainty scattered across his wifes face, her lionlike
hair when she pulled off the leather helmet (p. 142). The transitivity patterns
place Clifton at the centre of the action, the alpha male who owns his wife as he
owns his plane. He sits in his plane, stands up in the (gendered) cockpit, pours
a drink from his flask, while the others walk towards him, drawn towards him
as a focal point. Katharine, described pedantically and jealously by Almasy as
his [i.e. Cliftons] new wife merely sits beside him. Almasy himself is the watcher,
observing without acting. In the film version of this scene, a similar set of relations
between the characters is conveyed by the mise en scene. When Cliftons plane has
landed, we see Almasy standing apart from the others, watching from a distance,
with a reactional vector line implied between his vision and the plane. But he is
also wearing sunglasses, hiding his eyes, and he has emerged from the seat of a
car so that the door cuts across his body, forming a physical vector between him
and the others, visually indicating his isolation and his initial hostility towards
Clifton and his wife.
Through the manipulation of mises en scene, different hierarchies, different
worlds and different realities can be conveyed. In The Lord of the Rings: The
Fellowship of the Ring, the hatching of the Orcs in Isengard takes place in a diabolic
orange glow. The world of Saruman, by contrast, is depicted in shades of grey and
black, colours that are cold and suggestive of evil. Much of the journey takes place
in settings that are dark, with vertical vectors of trees, mountains or rocks, and
made of hard-edged stony surfaces. The contrast with the early scenes set in the
Shire, where the colours and lighting are strong and bright, the vector lines are
low and horizontal, and the surface textures of grass and crops are soft, helps
us to realise the sacrifice that Frodo and his friends have made in undertaking
the quest. It also creates the reality that there are two different kinds of world,
the good and the evil, that these worlds are easily distinguishable and that we
therefore have a choice about which we inhabit.
I have already identified three main narrative sequences in the film of The
English Patient Almasy and Hana in the villa, the love story in the desert and
the story of Caravaggio and these three threads are intertwined and yet clearly
distinguished by the use of different and instantly recognisable key settings. The
world of the villa is revealed to us throughout the film as bare, crumbling, over-
grown, bathed in cool shades of red and blue. Hana and the other characters
around her wear wartime clothing, uniforms or cheap utilitarian dresses and
sturdy shoes. The shots are mostly interior, suggesting domesticity but also con-
finement and loss of autonomy. The props are mainly domestic, or connected
with Hanas task of nursing the English patient, but there are occasional and sig-
nificant interruptions of such objects as the piano and the wall painting, and the
book of Herodotus, which all suggest the remnants of a lost culture. In the setting
of the villa, we see that this is what Western culture has come to, the old world
of Europe broken down by war and neglect.
The desert scenes, on the other hand, are huge, open, airy and exotically other.
The orange colours of the desert merge with the wide blue of the sky and the dun
colours of the desert clothing. The costumes of the Westerners, expensive tailor-
made clothing specially adapted for desert living, mark their difference from the
native Africans on the expedition, while their props their tents, maps, jeeps,
planes and cameras indicate the technological mastery of the West over the
uncivilised East. Most of Caravaggios story is shown to us in scenes bathed in
bright white light, bleached of colour, suggesting their location in the past but
also their dreamlike quality, as if their reality is unreliable and deceptive. This is
one of the ways in which Caravaggio is presented to us as enigmatic, not entirely
trustworthy, his motives obscure.
Through these different settings and mises en scene, the cultures of East and
West are constructed as entirely different, in fact quite oppositional, with no con-
ceivable point of contact except through the Western technology of mapping,
which is a form of cultural appropriation. In the novel, however, villa and desert
are less clearly distinguished, rarely described in detail, but merely suggested in
occasional images of rooms and gardens, spaces and caves. Less significant in the
novel, which interrogates people rather than places, the settings constantly spill
into each other, merging in Almasys mind as he gradually recalls the last years of
his life, the war, the desert expeditions and his relationship with Katharine.
Novel to film 107
In the novel, Almasy explicitly rejects a cultural appropriation of the desert

and defends the scientific curiosity that brought him and his friends to the desert:
We seemed to be interested only in things that could not be bought and sold,
of no interest to the outside world (p. 143), an image that connects us at once
to the life of the villa, similarly enclosed and of no interest to the outside world.
By separating the two locations into visually distinctive settings, the film breaks
apart what was in the novel a narrative continuity, from villa to desert and back
again. By setting East against West, the film forces Almasy to be one or the other,
and he is positioned as a Westerner. Yet in the novel, Almasys identity and his
own self-definition are a central mystery, and one that is never properly solved, an
area of obscurity that highlights the dislocation of war, the artificiality of national
boundaries and the problematic issues of cultural and national identity as the
main themes of the narrative.
Setting, in the form of location and mise en scene, is therefore another site of
meaning in film, determining how we see events and the kinds of reality that
are created for us. Although the semantic fields of novel and film are similar, the
ways in which they are realised visually in the film construct experiential mean-
ings that belong to a quite different kind of narrative, a Westernised romance that
positions the East as other. In the novel, East and West are almost indistinguish-
able, blending into each other, as ideological halves of the same whole.
Conclusion
The process of adapting a novel into a film demonstrates the limitations of a struc-
turalist understanding of narrative as divisible into story and plot. The story
that seems to underpin both a novel and its filmic version has to be reduced to
such bare bones to fit both texts that it becomes little more than a statement of
genre and a recognition of character. At the same time, the manifestation of plot
in each version is realised in such different semiotic forms that it is almost impos-
sible to think of the two texts as being in any way the same. The privileging of the
authorised text, the novel written by a single known author, over the multimodal
team-produced work, as most films are, overestimates the coherence of the author
as subject and underestimates the complexity of meaning available through the
narrative logic of film.
Chapter 9
Film narrative and visual cohesion
Helen Fulton
In the previous chapter, I discussed ways in which the structures of film narrative
are able to create meanings, themes and concerns that could be different from
those expressed in a corresponding novel. In this chapter, further examples from
the two films The Lord of the Rings: The Fellowship of the Ring and The English
Patient will focus mainly on tenor and mode and how they are realised in film,
particularly through sound, character, focalisation and cohesion. By examining
the technical production of these effects, we can see how they provide complex
sites of signification for viewing audiences.
Sound
The sound of a film is one of its most versatile signifiers, since it contributes to
field, tenor and mode as a powerful creator of meaning, mood and textuality.
Diegetic sounds are those that belong to the on-screen reality, able to be heard
by the characters on screen, such as dialogue, sound effects (the striking of the
staff on the bridge) and ambient noise (the noise of the sandstorm in the desert).
Non-diegetic sounds come from outside the filmic world, and are not heard by
the characters. These conventionally include soundtrack music and voice-overs.
While dialogue clearly contributes to the tenor of a film, as the main means
by which relations between characters and their attitudes to each other are con-
structed, sound effects and ambient noise, over-determined by technology, help
to construct the semantic field. In the mines of Moria, the arrival of the Balrog,
the fire demon, is announced with stomping and growling and the noise of fire
108
Film narrative and visual cohesion 109
and flames, preparing us as well as the characters in the film for the worst, and
reminding us of the vulnerability of the heroes. Like the Balrog, the sinister Black
Riders are heard before they are seen, and we know from the sound effects that
they will appear on horseback. By contrast, the soothing sounds of elven music
emanating from Rivendell reassure us that this is a welcoming place where no
dangers await.
Voice-over is used in both films to indicate viewpoint (an aspect of tenor) and
to move the film through long periods of time. The early history of the Shire
and the finding of the Ring are told at the beginning of The Lord of the Rings:
The Fellowship of the Ring in the form of a voice-over by Galadriel who, as an
immortal elf, might be supposed to know everything that had happened in the
past. Non-diegetic music is particularly significant in The English Patient, such as
the scene of Almasys removal of Katharines body from the Cave of Swimmers,
referred to in chapter 8. Earlier in the film, when Almasy and Katharine are flying
above the desert in different planes, the diegetic noise of the planes is replaced
by a non-diegetic soundtrack of orchestral music, which suggests an emotional
connection between the two characters despite their physical separation, and
which also addresses us, the viewing audience, directly in a shared space outside
the diegesis.
Sound is also significant as an element of narrative cohesion, helping to link
scenes together or, alternatively, to mark a sudden change of location or mood. At
one point in The English Patient, Hana is playing hopscotch outside in the garden
in the dark, and the noise of her jumping feet is picked up on the soundtrack
and blended in to the noise of drumbeats in the desert, heard by Almasy in his
memory, and this sound, gradually predominating, leads us in to the next scene
of Katharine in the desert telling the story of Candaules and Gyges. The merging
of sounds made by Hana into sounds associated with Katharine indicates both
the differences between these two women and their connection in Almasys life.
Characters
The characters of a film, as in a novel, form part of the field but also contribute to
the tenor, the interpersonal function of the text, through their interactions and
dialogue. Any representation of individuals in the form of fictionalised charac-
ters rests on a theory, however unconscious, of individualism. In many novels,
the motivation and emotions of characters are described by the narrative voice,
whether by the narrator or by one of the characters themselves. They are there-
fore constructed as having an inner life that is essentially their own and under
their own control, suggesting that such characters are theorised as the unique
individual of liberal humanist philosophy who precedes the social formation and
exists separately from it. This is the kind of individual imagined by Tolkien in his
representation of Frodo, for example:
He sat down upon the stone and cupped his chin in his hands, staring eastwards
but seeing little with his eyes. All that had happened since Bilbo left the Shire
was passing through his mind, and he recalled and pondered everything that he
could remember of Gandalfs words. Time went on, and still he was no nearer to
a choice.
(Book 2, chapter 10)
Frodo is positioned outside the social order, thinking about his current situation
as if from the outside, with his power of thought limited only by his memory, and
his course of action determined by his own choice.
In film, however, internal motivations and emotions have to be conveyed exter-
nally and visually, through gesture and expression, or directly through dialogue.
Characters in film therefore take on a more public and social aspect, embedded
in the social order rather than operating outside it. They are in fact positioned
as social subjects, constructed through discourse. The filmic mode of represent-
ing individuals suggests a theory of individualism in which individuals are types
rather than uniquely different, and their behaviour can be explained in terms of
their social context and positioning. The filmic character, in other words, tends
more towards the post-structuralist concept of the individual, compared to the
liberal humanist characters found in the realistic novel.
Filmic characters also have considerably less dialogue than their novelistic
counterparts. The reality of a film partly depends on short scenes and brief
exchanges that get straight to the point, setting a brisk pace that keeps view-
ers alert. The character of Boromir, for example, has a lot more to say in Tolkiens
novel than he does in the film version, and is our main source of information
about the different peoples of the fantasy world, such as elves, half-elves, wizards
and so on. Not only do we find out more about Boromir as a character from these
accounts (as part of the tenor of the novel) but we are also given a semantic field,
the sense of political complexity in the fantasy world, which is elided from the
film, where politics are reduced to heroes and villains. Boromirs stories enable
us to read the novel allegorically, as a comment on postWorld War II Europe,
yet it is virtually impossible to read the film as any kind of political allegory or
commentary on contemporary events.
In the adaptation of novel to film, a certain amount of character reassignment
is inevitable. Both narrative and economic imperatives are at work here, since
both the story and the budget have to be kept simple. But more subtle forces are
also at work in the commercial movie industry, such as the need to foreground
celebrity actors and to tailor a film to meet the conventions of a recognisable
and successful genre. In Tolkiens novel, Frodo is rescued by Legolas, but in the
film, it is Arwen who rescues him, providing an opportunity to foreground one of
the films most bankable actors (Liv Ullmann). The lack of female characters in
Tolkiens novel has had to be redressed in the film by giving those few characters
bigger parts, not from any feminist scruples but in order to give the film a greater
box-office appeal. At the same time, the character of Aragorn has been given a
considerably expanded role in the film, replacing Frodo as the main hero of the
narrative. If Frodo were the hero, the film would resemble the genre of childrens
fantasy movie, reducing its potential audience. With Aragorn as the hero, played
by a lesser-known but visually striking actor and buttressed by impressive digital
effects, the film becomes an action movie with all the potential profits associated
with that genre.
Focalisation
Focalisation refers to the viewpoint or perspective from which the narration is

told, positioning narrative voices, who may or may not be characters in the story,
in relation to events and to each other. We can therefore regard focalisation as an
aspect of tenor in a text; that is, a way of constructing interpersonal meanings
that indicate relations and attitudes among the participants inside and outside the
narrative events. The camera, standing in for the external third-person narrator of
a novel, conveys the modality of what is being shown and what is being exchanged
between the characters; that is, the extent to which the various propositions and
events appear to be truthful and certain, and how we might evaluate them (Kress
& van Leeuwen 1996: 15980).
The usefulness of the term focalisation, developed by Genette and subse-
quently taken over by a number of narrative theorists (Genette 1980; Bal 1983,
1997), in relation to the visual aspect of movie texts has been debated by vari-
ous theorists. Lowe asserts that the proper usage of the term is confined to the
spoken and written word, and prefers the term viewpoint or point of view as
the more traditional and inclusive usage (Lowe 2000: 46 n. 15). Griffith, on the
other hand, rejects the virtual equation of the camera with the point of view as
too simplistic (Griffith 1997: 47). Toolan suggests orientation as a usefully wider,
less visual, term than focalisation (Toolan 1991: 68). With regard to film and other
visual media such as television, the term focalisation is useful in reminding us
that there are both focalisers, those participants who see what is going on, and
focalised, those participants (people or objects) who are seen.
Julian Murphet has already touched on some aspects of focalisation in
chapter 7, defining it as the anchoring of narrative discourse to a specific sub-
ject position in the story. Murphet follows Rimmon-Kenan in distinguishing
between focalisation, or seeing, and narration, or speaking, as separate activi-
ties (Rimmon-Kenan 1983: 713). Writing specifically about film, Murphet defines
focalisation as an aspect of diegesis what is going on in the filmic world and
narrative voice as a description of where the narrator is located, either inside or
outside the filmic world.
Both aspects of narrative can be described by collating the different focalising
positions and types of focalisers with the location of the narrative voice in relation
to the diegesis; that is, the telling of the story. An extradiegetic narrator is speak-
ing to us outside the events of the story, whereas a homodiegetic narrator is a
character within the story whose narration is normally marked as direct speech.
A heterodiegetic narration is a story within a story, an event outside the diegesis
that is told by a character within the diegesis.
So when Gandalf tells Frodo about the magic rings (Book 1, chapter 2), he is
functioning as a homodiegetic narrator, one who speaks as a character within
the story, and who is therefore positioned as more or less knowledgeable and
empowered in relation to other characters. Striders account of Beren and Luthien
(Book 1, chapter 11) positions him as a heterodiegetic narrator; that is, as a charac-
ter in the story who is recounting another story that is outside the main narrative.
This is also the focalisation of Katharine in The English Patient when she reads the
story from Herodotus of Candaules and Gyges (pp. 2324), observed by Almasy
as the internal focaliser and first-person narrator. His observation of her, as the
unintended audience, puts him in the viewing position of Gyges and therefore
draws out the prophetic significance of the classical story.
These three narrative positions extradiegetic, homodiegetic, heterodiegetic
can be realised through a number of focalising strategies. An extradiegetic nar-
rator can see the story from an external or internal position. The third-person
narrator of The English Patient is situated outside the diegesis and yet adopts
an internal perspective that is able to reveal information, thoughts and emotions
available only to characters in the story. This is the omniscient narrator of fiction,
constructed in this scene describing Caravaggio: Caravaggio enters the library. He
has been spending most afternoons there. As always, books are mystical creatures
to him. He plucks one out and opens it to the title page. He is in the room about
five minutes before he hears a slight groan (p. 81). Although the narrator is extra-
diegetic, the narrative voice has its own view of the action, its own focalisation.
The narrator sees Caravaggio entering the library, notices the way he plucks
one of the books from the shelf, and is aware of how many minutes have passed,
even though Caravaggio is alone in the room. This is the focalisation through
which we, the reader, make our assessment of Caravaggio. It is also a privileged,
or first-order, focalisation since the narrator has access to knowledge not shared
by others. At the same time, the narrator constructs a second-order internal focal-
isation emanating from Caravaggio himself. We are told that books are mystical
creatures to him and that he hears a slight groan, as if it is only by chance that
Caravaggio is not telling us these things himself.
Tolkien often adopts a similar kind of extradiegetic internal focalisation in The
Lord of the Rings: The Fellowship of the Ring, commenting on the concerns and
fears of many of the characters, such as the extract about Frodo quoted above.
But he also assumes at times an extradiegetic external focalisation, notably in
the Prologue, where his ethnographic description of the various hobbit peoples
positions him, and us, outside their world, explicitly denying any special claims
to inside information about them. Although extradiegetic narration is typically

in the third person, it can also be in the first person, as it is in much of The
English Patient. The different facets of Almasy suggested by his various epithets
the English patient, Almasy, the dying man, the surveyor are also conveyed
through the different focalisations through which he narrates his story. He can be
either an external or an internal focaliser, speaking in either the first or the third
person, and occasionally both at once (When Almasy was like this we usually
dispersed, but this was Madoxs last night in Cairo and we stayed, p. 244). He
positions himself sometimes extradiegetically, sometimes homodiegetically, when
he speaks to Hana or Caravaggio in first-person direct speech, and sometimes
heterodiegetically.
This range of focalisations, along with the points of view of the other characters,
illustrate the possibilities both of variable focalisation, where different events
are seen from different viewpoints, and mulitiple focalisation, where the same
event is shown from different perspectives. The death of Katharine in the Cave of
Swimmers is described twice by the extradiegetic narrator, once from Katharines
point of view (She had dragged herself into a corner, had wrapped herself tight
in the parachute material . . . She would have hated to die without a name,
p. 170), and once from Almasys (On the floor of the Cave of Swimmers, after her
husband had crashed their plane, he had cut open and stretched out the parachute
she had been carrying, p. 248). Later, Almasy is narrating the event in the first
person, telling both us and Caravaggio about the physical contacts between the
lovers, almost their last: I pulled her out of the plane Clifton had called Rupert
and carried her up into the rock caves. Into the Cave of Swimmers . . . (p. 257).
The extradiegetic narration describes Katharines focalisation and then Almasys
actions, practical and controlled, while Almasys own version draws on memory
and intimacy to give a different account of what happened.
While the extradiegetic narration of Tolkiens novel offers a fixed focalisation,
supported by a range of variable focalisations situated homodiegetically, the vari-
able and multiple focalisations of The English Patient construct a rich texture of
interpersonal meaning. As readers we become aware that constructing the events
of the past is contingent on memory and that all knowledge is partial and ideologi-
cally positioned. At the same time, we are presented with a theory of the individual
as unstable, incoherent and discursively produced. The focalising strategies that
produce this type of individual in Ondaatjes novel contrast with the fixed nar-
rative perspectives of Tolkiens novel, which result in the creation of seamless,
coherent and stable identities.
Narrative subtleties of this kind, involving a variety of narrative voices posi-
tioned differently within the narrative and outside it, create a hierarchy of focali-
sations that is replicated in the medium of film through a variety of camera tech-
niques. The camera is the extradiegetic narrator, located externally as an invisible
narrator but also able to suggest internal focalisations through camera angles and
mises en scene as well as the actual speech and action of characters. In both the
films, focalisation is variable, following the perspectives of a number of different
characters in speech as well as visually. Multiple focalisation is realised by differ-
ent camera angles, which position us to see the action from a number of different
viewpoints. In the scene from The English Patient where Katharine recites the story
of Candaules and Gyges to the circle of listening men, the camera seems to spy
on Katharine from the darkness beyond the audience, tracking around the back
of the scene, with Katharine facing almost straight to camera. The camera does
not simply represent the internal focalisation of Almasy, who is shown watching
Katharine covertly; it also acts as an external voyeur on our behalf, allowing us
to watch as Katharine unwittingly reveals herself like Candaules wife.
In this sequence, then, the camera is the focaliser, constructing interpersonal
meanings about the relationship between Almasy and Katharine. She is lit by
firelight and facing straight ahead, revealed to the watchers and hiding nothing.
Almasy is shown in profile and in shadow, positioned in front of her as audience
and watcher. The scene is shot mainly in distance or middle-distance, indicating
the reserve between them, the fact that they do not know each other very well,
while the close-up of Cliftons face, brightly lit by the fire, beaming and proud,
suggests the confidence of his ownership of Katharine and his absolute igno-
rance of what is about to happen. Almasy and Katharine do not appear in shot
together until the final scene of the sequence, alerting us to the inevitability of their
love affair. The use of colour and lighting in this sequence conveys the different
shades of modality. The dim lighting and shadows created by the fire reduce the
modality the assertion of truth so that we are not sure exactly what we are
being told or whose authority is privileged. Katharines uncertainty and Almasys
confusion, already indicated through their body language, are also enhanced visu-
ally by the uncertain light. On the other hand, Cliftons brightly lit face conveys a
high modality, giving us a high level of certainty and confidence about the mean-
ing of this shot: it conveys, without any doubt, Cliftons clear belief that his wife
is devoted to him.
The various kinds of focalisation can be summarised in relation to the
diegetic positioning of the narrative voice, as in table 9.1, which draws partly
on McQuillans definitions (McQuillan 2000).
Camera techniques
Ways in which the film camera is used to create particular shots, along with related
technical elements such as colour and lighting, are another aspect of the tenor of
a film. Camera techniques communicate interpersonal meanings to the audience
that tell us something about how we should read the individual characters, and
about the social relationships operating between them. The use of a handheld
camera, for example, rather than a fixed camera, creates a sense that the viewpoint
Table 9.1: Summary of focalisation.
Homodiegetic Heterodiegetic
Extradiegetic narration narration
narration (outside (character in (extradiegetic story
Focalisation the diegesis) diegesis) told within diegesis)
External External third First-person Character located

Observation of person narration; narration externally to
characters, no camera in film; extradiegetic story
privileged documentary
knowledge voice-over
Internal Omniscient third First person direct Character located
Perspective of person narrator; speech; handheld internally to
characters is known film voice-over; camera extradiegetic story
straight to
camera
narration
Fixed Single narrator or First person One character
Events seen from fixed camera narration; narrating an
one perspective privileging of one extradiegetic story
viewpoint
Variable More than one Viewpoints of A number of
different events narrative voice or different extradiegetic
seen from different camera angle characters are stories recounted
perspectives foregrounded by different
characters
Multiple Different narrative Several characters Different characters
Same event seen voices give versions of narrate same
from different represented; same event extradiegetic story
perspectives same filmic event
repeated from
different angles
is located within the diegesis and is giving us an internal perspective on the action,
one that is therefore more authentic, but less privileged and authoritative, than
an externally located viewpoint.
Both The English Patient and The Lord of the Rings: The Fellowship of the Rings,
as films, are made in the style of Hollywood realism, which aims to create a
seamless visual reality in which the audience is virtually unaware of the camera,
lighting and other technical devices by which this reality has been created. Never-
theless, our understanding of the interpersonal meanings the ways in which
the characters relate to each other and how we might respond to them, and of
mood what attitude the characters have towards their own behaviour and that
Table 9.2: Technical devices.
Signifier Signified
Camera angle High (looking up) Power, authority

Low (looking down) Disempowerment
Eye-level Equality
Camera distance Big close-up Emotion, internal focalisation
Close-up Intimacy, internal focalisation
Medium shot Involvement, internal
focalisation
Long shot Distance, context, external
focalisation
Lens Wide angle Dramatic emphasis
Normal Diegetic reality
Telephoto Voyeurism
Camera movement Pan (camera rotates on fixed Context, external focalisation
point)
Tracking (camera runs on track Involvement, pace, internal
parallel to action) focalisation
Tilt (following movement up Effect of movement drama or
and down) humour
Crane (high shot moving quickly Entrance to or withdrawal from
to or from subject) diegesis
Handheld Participation in diegesis, point of
view
Zoom in Surveillance, external
focalisation
Zoom out Relation of subject to context
Focus Sharp focus Diegetic reality; anticipation
Soft focus Interpersonal function; mood
Selective focus Significance; privileging
Lighting High key High modality; positive mood
Low key Low modality; uncertainty;
negative mood
Back lighting Interpersonal function; high
value
Fill (closest to natural light) Diegetic reality
of others is produced through a range of technical signifiers whose meanings

have become conventional within mainstream cinema.
I have summarised these meanings in table 9.2, using categories drawn from
Selby and Cowdery (1995) and Lacey (1998). Some of these technical signifiers,
such as camera angle and distance, are aspects of focalisation, indicating where
the camera is located and how it is related to the participants in the shot. Others
are related to modality. It should be remembered that the meanings signified by

various types of shot and camera angle and so on can vary considerably, depending
on aspects of the field, or context, and of the tenor or interpersonal relationship
constructed between the characters in the film. In addition, many directors and
editors consciously subvert the conventional meanings of technical signifiers to
achieve a particular mood or set of attitudes between characters, and between
the viewer and the characters. As Rosemary Huisman points out in chapter 12,
equating a particular technical strategy with one specific meaning (high camera
angle signifies power and so on) is essentially a structuralist manoeuvre.
Cohesion
The term cohesion refers to the way in which a text is organised so that its various
elements hang together to form a complete event. It is an aspect of mode, the way
in which a text is delivered to its audience in terms of verbal and/or visual style, aes-
thetic, organisation and medium. Cohesion, among other aspects of mode, con-
structs textual meanings through which we understand what kind of text we are
consuming, what conventions are governing it and how we should approach it.
Different kinds of texts can be distinguished by their levels of cohesion. Real-
istic texts, such as narratives, or texts that present an argument, tend to be highly
cohesive, organised as a seamless and complete sequence in which the logics of
time and place are clearly explained. Non-realistic texts, such as some types of
poetry or advertising, or those referred to as postmodern texts, are often char-
acterised by their lack of cohesion, so that the reader or viewer is forced to make
connections, often without any authoritative voice or viewpoint to suggest the
right way to read the text. In advertisements, the use of logos, slogans, brand
names and images draw on intertextual meanings that point us fairly directly
to the right meaning of the text, even if there are few cohesive devices in the
language itself. Such a film as Mulholland Drive, on the other hand, offers very
little cohesion between sequences, settings or characters, provoking the audience
into piecing the film together in whatever way makes sense to them. Whereas a
realistic or highly cohesive text tends to direct the reader or viewer to a single
dominant reading, a postmodern text tends to produce multiple readings, none
of which is necessarily wrong. This is one of the reasons why postmodernism,
as an aesthetic, is regarded by some as a democratic style that does not close off
alternative readings but rather invites them.
Strategies of cohesion in written texts include repetition of words, replacement
of one word by another (such as a noun with a pronoun, or one word with a
synonymous word or phrase), conjunctive devices expressing time, causation and
so on, deictics indicating time and place, collocations of words suggesting the
same context or environment, and ellipses, where an absent item can be supplied
by the reader. We can see some of these strategies operating in this extract from
Tolkiens Lord of the Rings: The Fellowship of the Ring, a novel written in a highly
cohesive style that partly helps to explain its enormous popularity with readers:
Soon after six oclock the five hobbits were ready to start. Fatty Bolger was still
yawning. They stole quietly out of the house. Merry went in front leading a laden
pony, and took his way along a path that went through a spinney behind the
house, and then cut across several fields. The leaves of trees were glistening, and
every twig was dripping; the grass was grey with cold dew. Everything was still,
and far-away noises seemed near and clear: fowls chattering in a yard, someone
closing a door of a distant house.
(Book 1, chapter 6)
Each sentence draws the reader on to the next one by a variety of cohesive links.
The five hobbits in the first sentence encompass Fatty Bolger, they and Merry
in the subsequent sentences. The phrase and then cut across contains the con-
junction then and an ellipsis, referring back to path, which unites both clauses.
The noun phrases way, path, spinney, house and fields form a collocation
that traces Merrys journey, enabling us to follow him as he goes. The landscape
terms spinney and fields overlap with another collocation in the next sentence,
leaves, trees, twig and grass, creating a unified rural context through which
the hobbits are travelling. References to glistening, dripping and dew suggest
the watery nature of the landscape, enhancing its uniformity. The noun phrase
everything refers back to the entire landscape that has been described, while far-
away noises refer forward to the chattering fowls and the closing door. The final
phrase, distant house, is linked semantically not only to far-away but also to
the word house at the beginning of the paragraph, suggesting that the travellers
have left their own house, and other houses, back in the distance as they move
forward through the landscape.
The effect of this high level of cohesion is to locate the reader very securely in the
diegesis of the story, to create a level of expectation that the narrative is logical and
that, even if the actual events are magical and supernatural, the created world of
the story is consistent and believable. Cohesion in Ondaatjes English Patient is, by
contrast, less pronounced. Sequences of actions performed by a single character,
such as Hana, provide moments of cohesive logic that are then interrupted or
interspersed with non-cohesive references to other times, places, people. As a
result of this mode of storytelling, the reader has to work a bit harder to maintain
a sense of a logical and uniform fictional space, to balance the various times and
locations and work out which world we are in from a minimum of verbal cues.
Our sense of belonging in these fictional worlds is therefore as contingent and
unstable as that of Hana, Kip and the English patient.
The film versions of both novels, however, are in the same mode of Holly-
wood realism, which specifically works to create a seamless and coherent fic-
tional world. The strategies of visual cohesion include mise en scene, sound and
camera techniques, which have been described above. The three narrative spaces
of Minghellas English Patient the villa, the desert and Cairo are distinguished
and identified by clear signifiers of colour, lighting and mise en scene, but we
are drawn from one to the other almost imperceptibly through various techni-
cal devices. At one point, an outline of the mountain deserts dissolves into the
contours of the sheets on the English patients bed; a close-up shot of the orange-
brown cover of Herodotus in the villa prepares us for the change to the orange-
brown colours of the desert; the sound of Hanas feet playing hopscotch turns into
the sound of drumbeats in the desert; the voices of Hana and Katharine alternate
during the story of Candaules and Gyges; voice-overs by Almasy and Caravaggio
carry us over from one location to another.
Editing
Perhaps the most significant strategy of visual cohesion in film is that of continuity
editing. Whereas a novel operates on a number of levels and over a number of
time periods, a film has to be structured as a series of shots, which are then edited
into sequences. A shot is defined by a change in camera angle, or the length of
time between the starting and stopping of the camera, which can be less than a
minute or the length of an entire film (as in The Russian Ark, 2002). The point
about shots is that each one represents real time, so that the length of each shot
and the way in which they are edited into sequences determine the pacing and
chronology of the film, the screen time. The arrangement of shots and sequences
creates the plot, shaping and controlling the way in which story information
(the field) is told.
According to David Cook, modern continuity editing began early in the twen-
tieth century, when [film-makers] realised that action could be made to seem
continuous from shot to shot and, conversely, that two or more shots could be
made to express a single unit of meaning (Cook 1996: 25). The practices of conti-
nuity editing work to create a coherent and stable visual space in which the viewer
feels securely engaged and able to move easily from one mise en scene to another
without any disorienting breaks in the diegesis. This style of editing, commonly
used to achieve the mode of Hollywood realism, is only one of a number of edit-
ing styles and can be subverted in various ways for example, by the use of very
long shots, as in Robert Altmans movie, The Player, the use of high-speed pans
in a number of comedy films or the intrusion of digital effects, as in The Matrix
series which often results in more stylised and technically effective films, but
also in less realistic narratives.
The conventional practices of continuity editing, described in detail by
Bordwell and Thompson (1979: 2339), can be summarised as follows.
Establishing shot
An establishing shot is normally a long shot that enables viewers to orient them-
selves at the beginning of a sequence, to observe the location of various characters
and objects and get some sense of where the action is located: town or country,
suburb or city, economically privileged or deprived, and so on. We then read sub-
sequent shots in relation to the establishing shot and assume a spatial relationship
between all the shots in the sequence, until a different establishing shot is used.
Towards the beginning of the film of The Lord of the Rings: The Fellowship of the
Ring we see an establishing shot of the Shire and of Bilbos house; there is a shot
of Gandalf outside the house, and then of him coming into the house. Exterior
and interior locations, separate sets and technical creations, are made to appear
as part of the same reality.
Re-establishing shot
A re-establishing shot tends to be another long or wide shot, reorienting the viewer
to the broader context after a series of medium or close-up shots, for example
during a dialogue. Re-establishing shots also make us aware of the movements of
characters towards or away from each other.
The 180-degree rule
According to the convention of the 180-degree rule, the camera stays on one side
of an imaginary axis of action running across the screen, from one side to the
other. The axis is suggested in the establishing shot, and functions to prevent the
audience becoming confused as to where exactly characters are located in relation
to each other; crossing the axis can also create effects of drama or suspense. In
The Lord of the Rings, Arwen is chased on horseback by a group of Riders, with
the chase moving across the screen from left to right. We can see that Arwen is
ahead, on the right of the screen, and the Riders are following her, to the left. But
then the shot changes, and the axis has been crossed, so that Arwen is now on the
left of the screen, apparently heading in the opposite direction, while the Riders
are to her right. Because of skilful editing, we keep up with the action, and the
breaking of the rule serves to enhance the drama and confusion of the chase.
The thirty-degree rule
When the camera changes position between one shot and the next, the change
will appear to the viewer as a sudden jump unless the angle of movement is fairly
large. The convention is that the camera must move by an angle of at least thirty
degrees in relation to the subject in order to avoid a rupturing of the diegesis to
the watching audience. So, for example, the camera might show a full-face close-
up, followed by a shot of the same face in profile. If the angle of change were any
less, the viewer would not be able to accommodate it but would perceive it as a
staccato jump in the film.
Eye-line match
When we see Almasy watching something in the distance from his car, then see a
shot of Katharine alighting from the plane, these two shots are held together by the
assumed match between Almasys eye-line and the object of his gaze. In practice,
these two shots might have been filmed at different times, perhaps on different
days. But the effect of the editing is to imply simultaneity and a cause-and-effect
relationship. Almasy is looking, and this is what he is seeing.
Shot/reverse shot
The camera cuts between each end of the 180-degree axis, showing first one end
and then the other, while staying on the same side of the axis and at a similar
angle to it. This effect is often used in dialogues, where first one interlocutor and
then the other is shown. Again, the logistics of filming often require dialogue to
be filmed in two halves, with each actor speaking all their lines separately, and the
scene cut together into alternate shots of each speaker shot and reverse shot
at the editing stage.
Cut on action
In one shot in The English Patient, we see Katharine in the middle distance, alight-
ing from the plane. This action is then cut, and in another shot we see her in a
medium shot standing in the shade of the tent among the group of explorers. The
action that must have taken place between these two shots of climbing down
from the plane and walking across the runway into the shade is not shown, has
been elided, yet it is easily reconstructed in the minds of the audience, who do
not pause to wonder how Katharine could have got to the tent so quickly. Just as
readers can supply the elided word or phrase in a cohesive passage of writing, so
the viewing audience can supply the missing action, assisted by the 180-degree
rule and the continuity of the mise en scene.
We can see, then, that the way in which shots are edited together, creating juxta-
positions suggestive of spatial and temporal consistency and of cause and effect,
constitutes a mode of visual storytelling that is highly cohesive and therefore
extremely persuasive. The functions of this kind of editing are:
r to create visual continuity or contrast among a range of visual signifiers, such
as brightness, colour, patterns, shapes, volume, depth, movement, stillness and
so on;
r to create pace through combinations of shots of different lengths, with long shots
allowing for more real time, and shorter shots making time seem to pass more
rapidly;
r to create temporal relationships, indicating how much time is supposed to have
passed;
Table 9.3: Types of edit.
Signifier Signified
Cut Clean break between one shot and Pace, realism

the next
Fade-out Scene fades to black Time passing; ending of sequence or
film
Fade-in Scene appears out of black Beginning; coming to consciousness
Dissolve First shot is briefly superimposted Mood; interpersonal relations;
over a second shot memory
Wipe Second shot is pulled horizontally or Abrupt change of location; parallel
vertically across the first like a blind storylines; humour
r to create spatial relationships, indicating where characters are located in relation

to each other and to specific contexts.
Different types of edit, from a technical perspective, also work to convey a
range of interpersonal meanings that help the audience to take up an appropriate
attitude or set of expectations in relation to the diegesis and the characters within
it. The five major types of edit are described in table 9.3, with a reminder that
these signifiers have a range of signifieds beyond those indicated.
Conclusion
Editorial conventions, along with camera techniques and sound, constitute the
mode of filmic narrative, creating textual meanings, and contributing to the tenor
of the filmic text: the range of interpersonal meanings that suggests mood, attitude
and social relations. These conventions work to dematerialise the technical pro-
cesses of film-making and to create a seamless visual diegesis that seems almost
inseparable from reality. The essential artifice of film-making is naturalised into
a viewing experience that draws the audience into a highly believable world. By
these processes of naturalisation, the fantasy world of the Shire seems as real as
Egypt and Italy during World War II. Yet both these fields of action are as fantas-
tical as each other; both are the constructed products of a professional and highly
technologised industry.
Part 3
Television: narratives and ideology
Chapter 10
The genres of television
Anne Dunn
Each medium develops its own ways of telling stories. These different ways of
telling stories encompass the devices of the plot, the technical aspects of the
medium, and the codes and conventions of types of stories. Another way of putting
this, which employs terms you will have encountered in earlier chapters, is that
different media allow different possibilities of diegesis (telling the story) and
mimesis (performance) and the relation between the two. Whether as readers
(audiences) of texts or as producers of them, we recognise these combinations
and categorise them, in order to advise or predict what kind of story this is going
to be.
These categories of story may be identified as genres (the French word for
types or kinds). On the one hand, genres can be seen as offering an important
way of framing texts that assists comprehension. Genre knowledge orientates
competent readers towards appropriate attitudes, assumptions and expectations
about a text, which are useful in making sense of it. On the other hand, genres
may be seen ideologically, as constraining interpretation, as limiting the available
meanings of the text. What is a genre? Texts concerned with the study of tele-
vision, such as Williams (1990), Tulloch (2000) or Creeber (2001), offer genres
(or forms, as Williams calls them) of television program, such as news, drama,
variety, sport, advertising, cop series, soap opera, documentary, cartoons, situa-
tion comedy, childrens television and popular entertainment. Some of these are
broken down still further by Creeber (2001). Documentary, for example, includes
fly-on-the-wall documentary, docusoaps and reality TV, while popular entertain-
ment encompasses debate, quiz show, the celebrity talk show, the confessional
talk show and daytime TV.
125
126 Television: narratives and ideology
Lacey (2000: 133ff) suggests that a genre will have specific textual features, or
is a way of organising the elements within the text, and that this is what enables us
to recognise a text as falling into a particular genre or generic type. The elements
organised by genre include narrative, setting, types of characters, style, visual and
aural signs (or iconography), mode of address and even (especially in cinema)
the stars, associated with the particular genre. Expanding each of these textual
features or elements in turn, first, there are generic narrative structures in the
sense that they identify a text (a novel, a film or a television program) as belonging
to a particular genre. We recognise this in part through familiar plot structures
or devices, predictable situations, conflicts and resolutions. Note that these are
particular elements of the wider topic of narrative analysis (the topic of this book),
which are applicable to genre study. Diverse genres can share the structure of the
classic Hollywood narrative, and the narrative conventions of one genre might
not be too dissimilar to that of another; but there will be variations identifiable
as belonging in particular genres.
The geographical and historical setting of a film can be immediately indica-
tive of genre: prohibition-era and Chicago together suggest the classic American
gangster movie, for example. Across texts of the same genre, we will find simi-
lar characterisation. The types of characters (including stereotypes), their roles,
behaviour, goals and problems will to some extent fit predictable patterns (which
is not to say these predictions may not be confounded in the world of the text
indeed that may be part of the pleasure it gives us). Certain genres, such as film
noir, are associated with an identifiable style; that is, conventional filmic tech-
niques of lighting, sound, camera work and editing. This is not the same as the
stock of visual and aural images or iconography used by a generic text. Iconogra-
phy is a term that can include elements of the mise en scene, such as objects in the
scene, or costume, or even the performers themselves (who can become icons
or stars). In the 1980s and 1990s, if a film starred Sylvester Stallone, for exam-
ple, the audience would expect a particular type of action movie; if the star were
Harrison Ford, however, audience expectations might be somewhat different.
The use of stars in television does not work quite the same way as in cinema,
but makes a point true for both media: that genre is also a way of organising
elements in order to market the film or program to an audience. One of the ways
it does this is through generic modes of address (Livingstone 1994: 249). The
mode of address refers to the way a text positions the audience or constructs
an ideal audience, usually in terms of age, gender or ethnicity (factors known
collectively as demographics). It is a key element of genre, especially when genre
is considered as central to the industrial context of the media.
The discussion of genre so far in this chapter draws on definitions developed
predominantly in relation to novel and cinema texts, and much of it is also rele-
vant to the use of genre in thinking about television. You might have noticed that
the discussion used such terms as familiar, predictable and identifiable. There
are two reasons for this: the first is that genre is used by the media industries
The genres of television 127
as a way of identifying texts for audiences, as a marketing tool, and this impor-
tant aspect of genre will be taken up later. The second is a philosophical ques-
tion begged by defining genre in terms of what the audience already knows. The
question is: which came first, the genre or the texts taken to identify the genre?
It can be illustrated by asking how you would define, say, a television sitcom,
without there already being programs (which you have seen) that are defined as
sitcoms.
The difference is between genre as an ideal type, made up of certain elements
against which we compare particular texts (for example, a film in which people
burst into song in the middle of the story has one element that matches up with the
group of elements that together identify the genre musical), and genre empirically
defined by examination of numbers of individual texts (all musicals examined have
people bursting into song as one of a number of elements they have in common)
(Lacey 2000: 11112; Hansen et al. 1998: 166). The problem with ideal types is that
they tend to specify what a genre should be rather than what is actually found
in media texts, and this points to another question: where does one genre end
and another begin? Are Dennis Potters ground-breaking television serials Pennies
From Heaven (1978) and The Singing Detective (1986) musicals? They offer such
a mix of both narrative and generic references as to defy easy classification; they
overlap the genres of comedy, musical and drama. Genre divisions cannot be too
fixed but must accommodate developments; hence the recognition of so-called
hybrid genres, such as some reality TV programs (whether reality TV is itself a
new genre is another question and not easy to answer since there is much diversity
within the group of programs labelled this way).
A related question to that of genre definition is how useful is the concept of
genre in the critical analysis of texts. If texts are classified into genres by elements
such as those listed above that is, defined by the differences in their genres
then where can we go from there, once we have said, Theyre different genres,
therefore they are different? It is a circular argument, which seems to be a critical
dead end. Lacey (2000) and Hansen et al. (1998) have offered the consolation that
genre is a commonsense concept, understood and used by both consumers and
producers of media, who can generally agree on some shared assumptions as a
starting point for classifying media texts (although of course not all audiences
can be assumed to be equally familiar with all genres).
The extent to which this tendency to classify is a fundamental aspect (Neale
in Creeber 2001: 1) of the way we understand texts of all kinds should be reason
enough for the academic study of genre. If it is to move beyond commonsense
understanding, however, genre analysis must move beyond merely identifying and
classifying media texts. One way it can do this is through deeper and more detailed
considerations of the symbolic and technical elements of genres, the relationships
between them and their history and development. Another approach and both
can be used together is to look at the ways in which genre is situated in soci-
ety and culture, paying attention to the relationships between audience, industry
and genre. All the questions raised in this section serve to demonstrate the multi-
dimensional nature of genre itself: its numerous aspects, the numerous meanings
it can have, and the numerous analytic uses to which it can be put (Neale in Cree-
ber 2001: 3). It is particularly important to keep this polysemy and the plasticity
of genre in mind, when it comes to the critical analysis of television, as a medium
and as an industrial system. Before moving on to a more detailed consideration
of the idea of genre in television, the next section of this chapter provides context
through a brief consideration of how narrative works in television in relation to
the idea of genre.
Television, narrative and genre
Television has to work harder than cinema to keep its audience. Movie audiences
make the effort to go out of their homes to the theatre and buy their ticket. They
sit in the darkened space, visually and aurally dominated by the screen and sur-
round sound. Their expectations are higher of film than of television, both of the
production values and that they will have a more intense experience than when
watching television. Television is literally part of the furniture and is consumed
in a domestic setting, subject to interruptions, some of which the commercial
breaks are scheduled. Until very recently television has appeared to be free,
and its always available and easy to switch on or off or over (to another channel).
The viewer can exercise control over such aspects of television reception as the
audio, unlike cinema. All these things affect the ways genre and narrative have
developed in television.
When the new medium of television began, the ways it could tell stories were not
initially seen as deriving from film but from radio and theatre (and, in relation to
news, from newspaper journalism). Television cameras were fixed and heavy, so
there was a tendency to place them directly in front of the action; in other words,
the point of view of an audience in a theatre. Like radio, television programs had to
be broadcast live (there was no videotape until the 1960s). Producers quickly
realised they could appropriate radio program formats and present them more
compellingly on television, with the addition of the visual sense. Comedy, quizzes
and drama, the soap opera in particular, rapidly began appearing on television
and dwindled on radio. Established radio stars, such as Bob Dyer and his Pick-
a-Box quiz show, which began in 1948 on Australian commercial radio, simply
moved their program over to television, which Pick-a-Box did, moving to ATN7 in
Sydney and Melbournes GTV9 in 1957.
In radio, the primary code is talk; so generic programs, such as quiz shows
or plays, can be introduced as such by an announcer telling the listener exactly
how to classify what they are about to hear (Good evening. Now its time for the
Tuesday play). In television, there have to be visual as well as aural markers to
identify each genre. Genre in television is complicated, moreover, by the concept
of format. A format in television can refer both to the kind of program being made
and to the medium in which it is made, such as film or videotape. In its former
sense, a format is also a commodity, in that it can be bought and sold between
one television network and another. Many popular programs such as quiz shows
and reality TV shows are made to formats designed by one person or a team and
sold to a number of production outlets who realise the format in a variety of ways,
depending on local audiences and conditions.
The use of the word format also alerts us to the routine and formulaic nature of
much television output; something that genre analysis also illustrates. For exam-
ple, The Singing Detective, referred to earlier as difficult to classify generically
because of its mixture of textual features, can without ambiguity be put into the
industry format or narrative genre of serial; that is, it was broadcast as a six-
part mini-series, with a storyline that continued from one weeks episode to the
next. The structural complexity of the narrative, it has been argued, could have
made the serial form the perfect vehicle to carry it (Creeber 2001: 37), because
the audience was brought back each week hoping for further elucidation of its
mysteries.
Once pre-recording on film or videotape, and therefore editing, were possible,
television producers quickly realised that the narrative visual codes of Hollywood
cinema editing also known as continuity editing could be applied in the new
medium. The demands on the television industry to keep the audiences attention
tend to produce certain kinds of narrative form, however, which were not neces-
sarily of the classic Hollywood model. The classic Hollywood model emphasises
cause and effect that is, a series of incidents that will be presented as connected
in some way often by means of the post hoc ergo propter hoc fallacy (from the
Latin phrase, meaning after this therefore because of this), whereby actions that
follow one another sequentially are perceived by viewers to be in a causal rela-
tionship. For example, if in one shot we see a man with a knife in his hand, then
in the next shot we see another person with a knife wound, we are likely to read
the sequence as that the wound was caused by the knife-wielding man.
Ideologically, the classic Hollywood narrative model emphasises individuality;
that is, individuals not nations or communities or systems are responsible for
what happens in the story. The narrative is centred on individual psychological
causes: decisions, choices and personal traits of character. According to structural
narrative theories, such as that of Todorov, often the story gets underway because
the central character wants or needs something; in other words, they have a goal
or series of goals. But then a disruption, problem or conflict arises, and so the
character must change something in order to attain his or her goal. The Holly-
wood narrative model also emphasises closure. The film doesnt just stop it
ends and ends in ways that either satisfy or cheat the viewers expectations. At
the end of a classic Hollywood narrative, however changed by his or her expe-
riences, the character does reach the goal. Most such narratives display strong
closure.
However, most of the television narrative fiction we see today does not use this
classic Hollywood mode of narration or, at least, not all of its elements. We
have come to expect that television narrative will give us multiple story threads,
temporary or partial resolutions, or none at all. John Ellis in Visible Fictions (1992)
calls the basic unit of narrative organisation on television the segment. A segment
is a coherent group of sounds and images, of relatively short duration that needs
to be accompanied by other similar such segments (Ellis 1992: 116). A segment
could thus be a single TV news story, a commercial, a title sequence or the story
action in that part of a program that occurs between one commercial break and
the next. Each segment demonstrates an internal coherence, but might not be
connected directly to the next. The other characteristic of the television medium
is that, even if pre-recorded, it appears to be happening in the here and now.
Certain genres, especially news, use textual features that emphasise that they are
live, and this is explored in chapter 11.
Ellis argues that the characteristic broadcast TV forms of the segment and the
series, and the pervasive sense of the TV image as live have created a particular,
specific mode of narrative: that of the open-ended format (Ellis 1992: 145). The
open-ended format provides thesis and antithesis but not necessarily synthesis.
Instead the audience is offered a continuous refiguration of events (Ellis 1992:
147). Ellis suggests that the fictional forms of narration on television have a strong
relationship to the non-fictional forms, citing the news bulletin as the first true
use of the open-ended series format . . . endlessly updating events and never syn-
thesising them (Ellis 1992: 145) and this is something chapter 11 also takes up.
The segmentation that characterises television narration arises in part from the
domestic setting in which television is viewed, which makes it eminently inter-
ruptible. Commercial television is regularly interrupted by the ad breaks; pub-
lic service television by program promotions and station identification. It can
be argued therefore that the television narrative has developed its segmented,
episodic nature in response to the institutional character of the medium and the
cultural setting in which it is used.
Genres of television
If the economics, circumstances of reception and signifying system of television

demand interruption they also demand continuation; what Raymond Williams
calls the flow (Williams 1990: 89) of images that appear to be in real time.
Although there is some argument as to what exactly Williams meant by flow,
like genre it is a very useful commonsense term. Intuitively, we recognise that
viewers experience television as a flow; that is, as a singular, continuous, live expe-
rience; Williams cites the way we still speak of watching television as an activity
in itself, without need to refer to the specific program(s) we have chosen to watch
(or not chosen the couch potato phenomenon is well known and widespread).
He describes the conventional way television organises its segmented, loosely knit
narratives, the combination of interruption and continuation, as combining flow
and segmentation to create a sense of continuity, despite the actual discontinuity
of its elements.
A brief description of a typical television sequence illustrates the combination.
It might (to take an arbitrary starting point) begin with a commercial break part
way through a program. The individual advertisements (segments) may be of
durations between fifteen seconds and almost a minute. The break will typically
finish with a promotion for the forthcoming program, possibly even a short trailer
of it (especially if it is a movie), then perhaps a station identification of some kind.
The program resumes, to be interrupted again between seven and eleven minutes
later (more or less, depending on country) by another commercial or promotional
sequence of items. There is no obvious connection between these individual items,
yet an experienced viewer follows the transitions without difficulty, because he or
she immediately identifies the generic features of each segment, distinguishing
between advertisement, program promotion, station identification and the pro-
gram itself, yet also experiencing the whole sequence as the continuous audio-
visual experience of watching television.
The process is made more coherent by skilful presentation; that is, by the delib-
erate selection (by television programmers) of advertisements that are thought to
appeal to the kind of people seen as most likely to be watching the particular
program. In recent years, advertisers have created television advertisements to
look and sound like the program in which theyre to be placed. An example is
an episode of the British sitcom Teachers (broadcast on Channel 4, 28 October
2004), which featured advertisements for a Toyota car, the Rav4. The car is mar-
keted in Britain to younger male adults, a demographic that also both appears
in and watches the program. Each advertisement was very short, and in each the
car was depicted as an unruly pupil in a school, being given orders by a teacher
figure. The humour was very much in the style of the programs comedy, and even
the look of the advertisements contrived to match the visual style of the program,
using similar school sets and predominant blues and greys.
The original genres of television, from the 1950s, developed strong conven-
tions, adopted and adapted from radio and other media, making it a relatively
simple matter for new programs to be marketed in ways that identified them
for viewers as of a type. The concept of genre thus serves both producers (stan-
dardisation for production and marketing purposes) and audiences (recognition
and accessibility). The genres that developed initially were those that had proved
popular with radio listeners and were responded to with pleasure by television
audiences as well, such as the situation comedy (sitcom), soap opera, variety
and quiz shows. The segmentation demanded by the new medium also suited a
distinction that was not in itself novel, but which proved very suitable to tele-
vision and which television developed, between the series and serial. The follow-
ing section describes narrative distinctions between series and serial, but in an
ideal way, since in relation to the television medium many programs today, espe-
cially but not exclusively fictional ones, show overlap between or a mix of the two
formats.
In a series, each episode features the same characters and settings but is gen-
erally self-contained. There tends to be a greater emphasis on character than in
film, but less on cause and effect as a means of progressing the narrative. In nar-
rative terms, each program ends where it began, so that it can begin again from
the same point of equilibrium the following week. After the first few episodes of a
series there is usually no need to re-establish the initial situation at the beginning;
the audience is assumed to be familiar with the equilibrium. At the end of each
episode, characters and settings are restored, ready to face next weeks episode,
without any apparent memory of what has gone before. This is especially true of
the classic television genre of the police series or cop show, which quickly became
and has remained very popular.
A serial also features the same cast of characters in each episode and there
might be multiple plotlines, but there is one continuous metanarrative, which pro-
gresses from each one of a finite number of episodes to the next, typically through
a succession of cliffhanger endings in individual episodes, towards closure in the
final episode. The serial is a long-established narrative form. Nineteenth-century
novels those of Charles Dickens, for example were serialised in newspapers.
Cinema serials, especially for children to watch on Saturday mornings, thus bring-
ing an audience regularly to the cinema, were very popular in Britain and Australia
by and throughout the 1950s (and killed by television). The classic television
serial as defined here appears only in limited guises today, generally as costume
or period drama, such as the BBC adaptations of novels, such as Pride and Prej-
udice and Middlemarch, or as a mini-series (as the industry confusingly names
it) of two to six episodes (as opposed to the standard television industry season,
for a series or serial, of thirteen episodes).
Serials represent a risk to producers precisely because you must watch all the
episodes in order to follow the story. The story demands audience loyalty to every
episode. That can be both a strength and a weakness. Any drama is expensive to
produce, so if the ratings are low, a lot of money is lost. This is one reason the
mini-series (usually in fact a short serial of two to six parts) was developed, to
reduce the risk. The advantage of the classic series (with its self-contained stories
in each episode, as opposed to the continuing story in a serial) is that it can
have both a loyal, watch-every-week audience and a floating audience, who only
watches sometimes. Long-running serials have been overtaken by soap operas,
which remain open-ended, with only a number of small endings within the larger
situation but no resolution.
The television genres of series and serial, soap opera and sitcom, are the sub-
ject of chapters 12 and 13 so they will not be discussed in greater detail here.
However, it could be argued that since the 1990s almost all of televisions fictional
genres (and some of its factual ones, in the case of the so-called reality TV shows)
have been affected by the soap opera form of the serial; hence the earlier claim
that the generic distinction between series and serial is now largely a historical
one.
A television genre example: the police series
An example of this transformation is the British television police series The Bill.
In its early years (it began in 1984), The Bill depicted the work of a group of
police officers at the fictional Sunhill police station in London. Although there
was some attention to the private lives of the individual officers and the rela-
tionships between them, the emphasis each week was on one or more plotlines
concerning a crime or crimes. In this respect, The Bill began by following a long
tradition of British television drama based on police procedure, including Dixon
of Dock Green, which began on BBC Television in 1955 and ran until 1976, Z
Cars (BBC, 196278) and Softly, Softly (also made in the 1970s). Over time and
as producers changed, The Bill featured more continuing stories, sometimes con-
tinued over months, about the individual characters. Eventually even the crimes
involved Sunhills officers, with the death of a young female officer at the hands
of a serial killer and the kidnap of the chief inspectors daughter. This serialisa-
tion of The Bill saw its generic conventions move closer to those of soap opera
and away from those of the police procedural drama series. The Bill built its
large audience in part by combining the mix of repetition and anticipation (Dyer
1997: 14) that characterises seriality, with the conventions of the police series
genre.
It also illustrates the way in which the genre divisions of television are more per-
meable than those of other media forms. Television programs from the late 1960s
onwards appropriated conventions from other genres or made intertextual refer-
ences in order to signify something about the program; to give it greater authority
perhaps, by reference to the genres of factual programs, such as news, current
affairs and documentary. It can be seen from this that there are ideological effects
of television genre, to the extent that genre conventions naturalise or normalise
certain ways of seeing the world, and provide limits to the interpretive context
available to the audience and the meaning potential of a given text (Hartley in
OSullivan et al. 1994: 128). Changes over time to police dramas on television
can illustrate the extent to which the ideology of television genre can change in
response to social and cultural change. Lacey (2000: 22934), Cooke (2001: 1923)
and, from a somewhat different position, Tulloch (2000: 3355) have all traced this
change with reference to British television police shows, showing how the genre
has adapted to changing audience (and academic) knowledge about and attitudes
towards the police in society. For example, as the public became aware of vari-
ous wrongdoings by police, from racism to criminal corruption, so such shows as
The Sweeney in the 1970s and subsequently and much more disturbingly Law
and Order and Cops accommodated bad behaviour by the police characters in the
programs.
There are two kinds of narrative structure in police series. The first is the kind
that focuses on one central detective character or a small group, no more than
three. Examples include Morse and Taggart and The Sweeney in the UK and, in the
USA, Kojak, Starsky and Hutch, Cagney and Lacey and so on. This kind of narra-
tive structure is sometimes called centred biography (Selby & Cowdery 1995: 83).
The second narrative structure focuses on the team. Apart from The Bill, other
examples include Hill Street Blues (USA), Blue Heelers, Water Rats (Australia)
and so on. The men and women who work at Sunhill Police Station are presented
week after week in The Bill as a kind of extended family. This format is known
as decentred biography. Attention can focus on different individuals each week.
There might be storylines that are not resolved within single episodes but, in a
way that characterises the serial or the soap opera form of serial, are carried and
progressed through several episodes.
Hurd (1981) has used the structuralist approach of Levi-Strauss to identify
seven binary oppositions that together (he argues) underlie all police shows:
1 police v. crime
2 law v. rule
3 professionalism v. organisation
4 authority v. bureaucracy
5 intuition v. technology
6 masses v. intellectuals
7 comradeship v. rank.
The next section uses Hurds seven generic oppositions in relation to an
episode of The Bill (see also Lacey 2000: 1647, who does a similar analysis in
relation to the American police series NYPD Blue). This is not by any means
the only way to use the concept of genre to analyse television (see Tulloch
2000 for an approach that combines genre and audience analysis), and, as
Rosemary Huisman has outlined in chapter 3, the structuralist notion of a pre-
existing underlying model is theoretically problematic. Nevertheless, a structural-
ist approach can help to illuminate ways in which generic elements activate a
narrative.
The episode of The Bill analysed here (dating from 2001) begins with Detective
Sergeant Don Beech, then a regular cast member, apparently off duty, arriving
at what turns out to be an illegal poker game. In the opening sequence the two
apparently unrelated narrative strands open up simultaneously, run in parallel and
then converge around a point of decision for Don Beech. The sequence ends with
Don making what has been signalled to the audience as apparently the morally
wrong decision, in a symbolic act of taking the card of a man we know to be a
villain, Howard Fallon. From this point on, the narrative follows what happens
to Don, rather than following the second narrative. Various twists appear in the
story, and character-based tensions are re-established from earlier episodes, such
as an antagonistic relationship between Don and another detective, Geoff. At the

end of this episode Don has taken money from Howard Fallon, putting himself
further into the villains power.
This episode of a series also demonstrates elements of the serial; that is, there
are continuing storylines from one episode to the next (but no overarching narra-
tive heading for a final conclusion), and The Bill offers narrative development of
these over time. Not every episode returns to all of these continuing storylines, and
some are not resolved. In the episode that follows this one, Don Beechs mobile
phone number is discovered in the notebook of a girl found murdered, provid-
ing an undercover detective, Claire Stanton, who has been investigating Beech,
with evidence for the first time that he might be directly involved in something
illegal. Claires superiors in the undercover operation order her to get closer to
another detective at Sunhill, John Boulton, because they believe he might also
be involved. The complication is that Claire had earlier broken off an affair with
Boulton; when she makes overtures to him, after her earlier rejection, he finds this
very hard to deal with. If this seems to be verging on the soap opera, it is. As with
all soap opera, knowledge of this back story can add immensely to the pleasure
of watching The Bill for its fans; and the need to know the back story has become
increasingly important to The Bill, emphasising its soap opera style of seriality.
As the earlier discussion of series and serial made clear, a viewer does not have
to know the back story to follow an individual episode of a series, whereas with a
serial proper the viewer needs to come in at or near the first episode and return
each week.
The episode just described can be analysed in terms of Hurds (1981) seven
oppositions, as follows:
1 Police v. crime
Police series tend to concentrate on the role of the police in catching criminals,
not on their role in containing dissent in political demonstrations, for example.
The Bills storyline about Don Beech, focusing on internal corruption in the police
force, is an exception to this norm in some respects, yet will end after many
episodes in the (apparent) death of Beech.
2 Law v. rule
Law v. rule is an ends-versus-means opposition. The law embodies justice and

as such overrides the rules and regulations the police must operate under; so
these rules get broken in order that justice can be done the end justifies the
means. Examples of this include searching a villains premises without getting
a warrant, extracting information in an interview without the tape being turned
on, harassing or even assaulting someone in order to force them to admit to
wrongdoing. Needless to say, it is not acceptable for a villain to do this in the
way that Howard Fallon blackmails Don Beech with his participation in the illegal
poker game.
3 Professionalism v. organisation
The police at the sharp end or front line of policing are presented as professionals
who might be hampered by the organisation men usually desk-bound senior
officers who are more preoccupied with maintaining their own position in the
hierarchy. In the world of The Bill, Chief Superintendent Brownlow is regularly
presented as concerned about his own reputation and his career position in ways
that interfere with the professional police be they detective or uniformed
getting on with the job.
4 Authority v. bureaucracy
Related to the above, the opposition of authority v. bureaucracy gives authority to

professionals. They earn it by doing the job of crime detection and solving crimes
well. This kind of authority is opposed to bureaucratic authority, which is granted
by the hierarchy but is not earned on the streets.
5 Intuition v. technology
The opposition of intuition v. technology is about the role of the hunch or

intuitive and experiential knowledge in police series, as opposed to forensic evi-
dence. In many episodes of such a series as The Bill, a character will just know
who the guilty party is, by virtue of accumulated experience and their instinc-
tive knowledge, but will lack sufficient evidence for proof. This can produce a
dramatic irony whereby a known villain nonetheless gets away with his or her
crime (although in a police series the same character might be caught in a later
episode).
6 Masses v. intellectuals
The working police officer is a man or woman of common sense, not an intel-
lectual, but is often shown to be smarter than the so-called experts. This tension
is present in many episodes of The Bill. In one example, which also relates to
the previous opposition, a woman with expertise in listening devices is brought
in to help solve a crime, but the new bugging device fails to work at the crucial
moment and good old-fashioned policing has to save the day. The detective series
Cracker, which had a criminal psychologist as its hero, is an exception to this rule
(the detective or crime series is identified by some theorists as a separate genre
from the police series see Cooke 2001: 22). This opposition is one that might
be changing for police series like The Bill that try to reflect some of the reality
of contemporary policing, which is that more and more police are recruited as
university graduates.
7 Comradeship v. rank
Comradeship v. rank is a very strong opposition in The Bill and indeed most police
series. Rank does not impress our heroes; the most important relationships are
defined by mutual respect. In the episode of The Bill following the one described,
Don Beech is shown to abuse this relationship between peers by lying to another
detective and asking him to conceal evidence in a murder enquiry. This opposition
can be used to set up tensions between characters within storylines.
These oppositions are useful both in identifying the genre and where a particular
example might have innovated or broken the formula. As with narrative, if one side
of the opposition is privileged, the effect is ideological. There is a relative lack of
representation of the other side of the story: repressive policing, corrupt policing,
wrongful arrest and conviction, deaths in custody, the effects on policing of poorly
educated and prejudiced police officers, and indeed of the whole police culture of
mateship, sexism, racism, antipathy to technology and anti-intellectualism. These
things are seldom explored by TV police drama series. Some go part of the way,
such as the Prime Suspect serials or Between the Lines, which was actually about
the internal investigation of police. There is far less social consensus than there
was in the decade following the end of World War II, when the parochial and
reassuring (Cooke 2001: 19) Dixon of Dock Green emerged. That era found it very
difficult to deal with the idea of the bent or dishonest copper. By now we are
used to such depictions; nonetheless, the police are still framed as the heroes,
protecting society from a descent into chaos. Police shows like The Bill purport
to reflect reality. In its early years at any rate, The Bill was reputedly popular
viewing with serving members of the British police; just as in the USA, real New
York city police officers were said to enjoy NYPD Blue, and in Australia the police
series Blue Heelers is apparently regularly watched by many police officers. Police
series have also been credited with boosting recruitment. Most such series are
extensively researched before and during their production run; writers go out in
police cars, and the production often retains the services of an adviser who is or
recently has been a member of the police.
The series relies on combining repetition and innovation; we know that each
week there will be a new problem confronting the characters but it will be the
same kind of problem, depending on the genre. In the police series, the problem
is the fight against crime. And this problem is never-ending, even though each
week society is protected and the status quo maintained by the forces of law
and order (Cooke 2001: 19). Narrative resolution takes place at the level of inci-
dent. This is quite different, as Ellis (1992) points out, from the use of repetition
and innovation in film. For example, in a movie Western (a genre that has been
completely replaced by the cop show on television), there will be a resolution to

the problem of lawlessness, within the world of the story. The television form is
much more open-ended. Because of this repetition and open-endedness, televi-
sion, whether series or serial, has a different ideology from that of the cinematic
film: it normalises the central problematic of the program. In the world of The Bill,
racism, poverty and dysfunctional families are everyday phenomena, but crime
is an intrusion, an upset. Although, for example, racism is presented, it is not
offered as an explanation for crime, which is committed by individuals who must
take responsibility for their actions.
In the relationship between genre and ideology it can be argued that genres
adapt to hegemonic changes the way a dominant ideology secures consent to
its world view, but has to keep on securing it in the face of oppositional forces.
So if the dominant representation of the police force gets out of step with the
consensual view of it, then the genre must adapt. At the industry level this is called
giving the viewing public what it wants or what will be popular with audiences.
At the level of ideology it is interpreted as helping to create a new consensus or
dominant ideology. In this way, genres act to articulate, in a very powerful way,
what Roland Barthes calls the myths of society.
Conclusion
There is no agreed list of television genres and, as we have seen, television plays
fast and loose with genre boundaries, embracing the hybrid genre (the medico-
legal series, for example, such as MDA in Australia) and self-reflexively referencing
other genres. Nonetheless, genre is still a much-used concept in relation to tele-
vision, by audiences and by the television industry, even if they might not use
the word itself. In marketing terms, genre is a way of distinguishing between
programs for audiences; it is also a way of branding broadcast channels (in
Australia, for example, the commercial Channel 10 sells itself to a younger demo-
graphic through its programming of reality TV shows, soap operas, comedy and
satirical programs, all with youthful casts). It is a way of identifying whole TV
channels, some of which are named by genre: the movie channel, the comedy
channel, music television (MTV) and so on.
The overlapping and hybrid nature of genre on television has been entrenched
by technological changes in the distribution of television and in its consump-
tion. The multi-channel environment in combination with the remote control,
enabling constant zapping from channel to channel and program to program,
has produced extensive and sophisticated genre-recognition skills in audiences.
For example, the British program Green Wing (Channel 4, 2003) is at one level a
situation comedy set in a hospital. However, it plays with the genres of medical
or hospital drama, soap opera and sketch comedy in ways that are very pleasur-
able for the audience, because it invites delighted recognition of its intertextual
references. Equally, the referencing of the soap opera genre by a police series, in
The Bill, can work to attract a new and younger viewing audience, augmenting the
older, welded-on viewers of the program. Turner (2001: 6) suggests that the direct
response audiences make to television programs, through ratings or by contact-
ing the stations, leads in turn to faster reactions by producers than is possible in
other media, such as the novel or film. Television producers adjust programs in
response to audience feedback in ways that might change the format, creating
new or hybridised genres.
Chapter 11
Television news as narrative
Anne Dunn
I think that the same process is involved in the construction of any event televi-
sually . . . You constantly draw on the inventory of discourses which have been
established over time. I think in that sense we make an absolutely too simple and
false distinction between narratives about the real and the narratives of fiction.
(Stuart Hall 1983)
Recognition of a text as belonging to a particular genre can help readers (listeners,

viewers) make judgements about the reality status of the text, most fundamen-
tally whether it is fictional or non-fictional. News is a very recognisable non-fiction
genre. That it is non-fiction does not mean it will not use narrative, however,
despite the fact that we might associate narrative (storytelling) with the imagined
and invented. Television news is not only a popular source of information but also
it enjoys a high degree of credibility. Public opinion polls and ratings surveys have
shown that since the 1990s television news has become both the primary and the
most believed source of news for a majority of viewers, in countries such as the
USA, the UK and Australia.
This reflects the phenomenon referred to in chapter 10, observed by Ellis (1992)
and Williams (1990), that television images appear to be really happening in
the present moment. The characteristic visual and audio codes and narrative
structures of television news work together to construct such news values as truth
and balance, as well as to convey authority and immediacy. It is important to
realise that news comprises a set of formal conventions of representation and
narration that together shape a view of reality, and television news is one of the
most conventionalised formats of the medium (that is what makes it so easy to
140
Television news as narrative 141
recognise). Another way of putting this, in semiotic terms, is to say that TV news
employs a restricted repertoire of codes (Bignell 1997: 110). Television news is
also privileged in the view of reality it offers, precisely because it is so strongly
associated, both historically and formally, with truth-telling. As a result, it has
been claimed that the form of news is inseparable from popular understandings
of social reality (Baym 2004: 280).
News, however, is not unmediated reality (although it is about the real), but is
constructed through processes of editorial selection as well as through its visual
and audio elements. This does not mean that it is invention, bias or falsehood;
rather, that a particular reality, affected by cultural, historical and economic fac-
tors, is created and normalised by television news. In the process an ideology
is inevitably manufactured and promulgated. Ideology is used here in the sense
of culturally specific beliefs about the world that are seen as unremarkable and
are taken for granted. The widespread acceptance of televised news as offering
the only reality, however, is under challenge. Satellites, multiple channels and the
Internet mean that audiences are no longer confined to their local TV news, but
can choose from news services that might have originally been made for a very
different audience with a very different ideology. Conflicting ideologies can pro-
duce or offer the possibility of multiple perspectives on a given news story. This
has emerged very clearly in the war on terrorism waged by the USA and its allies
since September 11, 2001. Western television news audiences and journalists
could not help but see stark differences between the ways in which the offensives
in Afghanistan and then Iraq were reported by their national media and by the
Arab-language channel Al Jazeera.
This chapter will examine the ways in which television news gives shape to
narratives of the real. It does so not only through its textual features but also
via what are called news values; that is, the professional values that journal-
ists employ in gathering, selecting, writing and presenting the news. In order
for an occurrence to qualify as newsworthy, it must meet a number of jour-
nalistic criteria, such as timeliness (it is new) or currency (it is already in the
news). It must be perceived as having impact or significance on people and their
lives, and the greater the proximity to the intended audience, the more likely
the occurrence is to be newsworthy. Bad news (conflict, tragedy, natural disas-
ter) is always good news, especially if it is unexpected or contains irony. Certain
people are always news, either because they have a lot of power (presidents
and prime ministers) or influence (captains of industry) or simply celebrity. A
final reason for a story being considered newsworthy is that it concerns matters
of human interest. This kind of news tends to be about particular individuals,
families or groups, who are Unknowns, rather than the Knowns, who tend to
dominate the top stories in any news bulletin (Gans 1979). The difference is that
the Knowns make news just by being who they are and doing what they do,
whereas the Unknowns make news by doing (or having done to them) something
extraordinary.
The existence of news values pre-dates television, deriving from newspapers,

but they still influence television journalism. The industrial and economic organ-
isation of the television industry has also affected television news in particular
ways. Television is a competitive industry, and its networks and production com-
panies survive only if they can attract and hold viewers and advertisers (even
publicly funded television services, such as the Australian or British broadcast-
ing corporations the ABC and BBC must attract audiences to justify how
they spend taxpayers money). In addition, television as we noted in the previ-
ous chapter is usually watched in private, domestic space under circumstances
subject to regular interruption.
These institutional factors have combined to make television itself essentially
an entertainment medium. News has also come to have a particular role in the
television schedule, managing audience patterns of viewing; the theory being that
if the channel can attract a large audience for the early evening bulletin, most or
many of these viewers will stay with the same channel for the programs that follow
(although this is not as certain as it was, affected by the advent of the remote
control and multi-channel television). The nature of television as a medium of
relaxation and entertainment affects television news in a way that contrasts with
newspapers, with the result that television news has been described as more eager
to please its viewers than a newspaper such as the Australian or the Washington
Post is to please its readers (Hallin 1993: 91).
One powerful way of keeping audience attention is to employ narrative tech-
niques, to tell a good story. Just as in the 1940s the cinema newsreels borrowed the
visual codes of the films they accompanied, so from the 1960s onwards commer-
cial television news in particular borrowed the narrative structures of prime-time,
entertainment programming. Between that era and the present day, there have
been changes in society and culture, inevitably including changes in the form of
news. A central change in television news since the 1970s is a marked emphasis
on the visual codes of the television medium. This appreciation of the televisual
includes a greater privileging of narrative and the journalists work of narration
(Baym 2004: 284).
The inverted pyramid and the rise of objectivity

in news journalism
The early days of broadcast news (on radio) relied on newspaper journalism, both
as a source and as a structural technique; there is more about this in chapter 15,
which deals specifically with radio news. The public service broadcasters in
Australia and the UK, and the big national networks in the USA, inherited in
their news journalism the professional values of objectivity and impartiality. To
some extent these values are also a matter of regulation as, in some countries,
there are rules specifying that broadcast news must be balanced and objective.
These values are considered of special importance in so-called hard news.

Hard news reports on politics, economics, the doings of the powerful and inter-
national affairs in other words, on those aspects of a nations public life that are
considered to have the greatest influence on the lives of its citizens. It is contrasted
with soft news, which is about human interest, about celebrity, crime, the small-
scale and domestic. Soft news has long been written in a style that uses narrative
devices, but hard news, in newspaper writing, developed something called the
inverted pyramid. This refers to a structure also called lead-and-body, in which
the most important information in the story is summarised in the lead sentence.
Standard practice is to include in the lead sentence the answers to at least three
or four classic news questions, the five Ws: who, what, when, where and why.
The rest of the information follows in the body of the story, in descending order
of importance. The criteria that determine most important reflect the news val-
ues described earlier, such as timeliness, prominence, consequence, proximity,
conflict and so on, which readers are assumed to share with journalists, and are
therefore held to be the most salient points of information.
A range of explanations has been offered for the development of this structure,
which arose in US newspaper journalism in the nineteenth century and is still
taught to journalism students today. It has the advantage that it can be quickly
and easily cut from the bottom, making it easier for an editor if there is not
enough room on the page or time in a broadcast bulletin to run the full story.
Pottker (2003) has suggested five explanations for the development and persis-
tence of the inverted pyramid. The first is technological, holding that it developed
in the early and unreliable days of telegraphy, and the inverted pyramid ensured
that at least the most important information was more likely to get through.
The second, political argument is that the inverted pyramid developed during the
American Civil War in the early 1860s, and served to cloak government views in its
apparently objective construction. By placing its most important messages in the
summary lead, the government ensured that the public received those messages
first and saw them as most important. Journalists today still rely heavily on gov-
ernment sources and, significantly, public relations organisations often emulate
the inverted pyramid style in their media releases, so this political explanation
might still be relevant.
In a third theory, the pyramid style is thought to have been spread by the expan-
sion of education and decline in illiteracy in the late nineteenth-century USA. This
in turn, goes the argument, produced a change in the expectations and skills of
both journalists and the public that demanded a more concise and quickly com-
prehended style. The fourth explanation is economic. The rise of cheap news-
papers, the so-called penny press, commercialised newspaper production and
introduced greater competition. The succinctness of the inverted pyramid style
saved expensive distribution costs (the electric telegraph charged by the word),
and led to the rise of such news agencies as Associated Press, which was founded in
1848. The need to appeal to as wide a readership as possible, in order to maximise
profits, also meant the news agencies used a deliberately objective reporting of
the news, in order not to alienate any particular political opinion. Pottkers own
theory is that the persistence of the pyramid form is owing to its communicative
success; that is, the story is more easily and quickly grasped by readers. This might
be true for newspapers but is not necessarily so in the very different medium of
television.
This is illustrated by the work of another news theorist, Norwegian academic
Espen Ytreberg (2001), who contrasts the inverted pyramid with the use of nar-
rative structures in television news. He does so in the context of the controversy
caused by the increased use of narrative techniques in the television newsroom
of the Norwegian public service broadcaster, NRK. He describes a process that
occurred in the late 1980s and early 1990s, based on technological and format
changes to NRK TV news. Reporters began to use a technique that foregrounded
television images, rather than the words of the voice-over report. Ytreberg clas-
sifies the old and the new approaches as the information tradition and the
communication tradition respectively (Ytreberg 2001: 3623).
The information tradition placed more importance on the inverted pyramid
construction of news writing, emphasising factual information and analysis based
on the facts. The usurping communication tradition had audience attention and
comprehension as its primary goal, being more concerned with relating the news
in a way that was engaging and easy to understand (Ytreberg 2001: 363). The dif-
ferences apparently caused open animosity in the NRK News Department between
the adherents of the two approaches, with each attacking the journalistic integrity
of the other. The old guard accused the image school of tampering with journal-
ists integrity and credibility, while the new approach criticised the word school
for promoting officiousness and a generally backward attitude. At the heart of
the difference, Ytreberg believes, was a move to replace the long-held journalistic
ideals of detachment and objectivity with a notion of engaged journalism. The
reporter in this view is emphatically a storyteller, albeit not of fiction, and the
engagement is with the audience, in ways that change the relationship between
news and audiences.
The main reason the change caused such concern was that the develop-
ment of the inverted pyramid construction of news stories is associated with
the rise of objectivity as a primary value, accompanying the professionalisation
of journalism, in the late nineteenth century (the first journalism handbook,
published in the USA in 1894, mentions the inverted pyramid structure as an
example of how to write a well-constructed news story). US television news,
however, has favoured the narrative approach since at least the 1960s, without
seeing it as necessarily a threat to news values. Former NBC executive Reuven
Frank, in a 1963 memo to his staff (quoted in Epstein 2000: 45), wrote, Every
news story should, without any sacrifice of probity or responsibility, display the
attributes of fiction, of drama. It should have structure and conflict, problem
and denouement, rising action and falling action, a beginning, a middle and
an end. These are not only the essentials of drama; they are the essentials of
narrative.
News story and narrative theory
In the language of news journalism a story is a factual account or report. Clearly,

story in the journalistic sense is crucially different from story in its fictional senses.
These true stories of news are not classical narratives. Classical or Hollywood
narrative as it is applied to film and television is characterised by a number of
features that are notably absent from traditionally constructed, inverted pyramid
news stories; in particular, these are:
r sequential development
r cause-effect relationships
r a double chronology of narrated time and the time of the events narrated
r resolution
r closure.
At the least, narrative to be so defined must demonstrate what Ytreberg (after
Branigan 1992) calls a focused chain or connected sequence of events, linked
together through a process of transformation (Ytreberg 2001: 360).
Langer (1998) illustrates ways that certain stories found in television news have
long included at least some elements of the classic narrative models of Propp and
Todorov, summarised here by Lacey (2000: 48) as a circular process of stages in
the story:
r equilibrium through
r disequilibrium and
r opposition
r a quest for help or attempt to repair the disruption and finally the part most
often missing from the news
r the achievement of a new equilibrium, or closure.
Langer specifically addresses the human interest and other news stories often
classified as soft news. The use of narrative structures and devices has been
acceptable in the case of stories of that kind for longer than in the case of so-
called hard news: the political and economic stories that tend to lead a bulletin.
The pattern of the binary oppositions identified by Levi-Strauss as paradigmatic
in narrative is very readily found in television and radio news stories, and not
only those that fall into Langers other news. Binary oppositions can be seen
in the routine use of conflict to frame stories and as part of the tendency of
news to personalise issues, groups and events as heroes or villains. Such narrative
oppositions as Left v. Right or East v. West continue to appear in news stories in
all media.
It is argued, especially by those who are concerned by the use of a narra-
tive model in hard news stories, that a narrative approach has the effect of
personalising and depoliticising them. Issues and processes are minimised and
elided; individuals are located as the agents and recipients of actions. This, the
argument goes, can result in what has been called the tabloidisation of the news
(Langer 1998). A narrative model also allows more attitude to be expressed: eval-
uations of behaviour and outcomes are coded into the narrative structure. Using
the narrative model for some items therefore can have the effect of positioning
the information model as objective and neutral by comparison. The information
model of hard news journalism purports not to be concerned with emotional
effect, moral judgement or how the story ends.
As was described in chapter 10, Ellis (1992) has argued that television has devel-
oped a specific narrative mode; what he calls the open-ended format. Recall Ellis
argument that fictional forms of television have borrowed their narrative struc-
ture from the non-fictional forms, citing the television news bulletin as the first
true use of the open-ended series format . . . endlessly updating events and never
synthesising them (Ellis 1992: 145). In this definition, the television news bulletin,
as a program, has always used an open-ended narrative form. His other argument
you might remember about television narrative is its segmented, episodic nature.
In a television news bulletin, each story might be called a segment, and each nor-
mally demonstrates an internal coherence, but might not be connected at all to
the next. As soon as a connection is constructed between stories, however, the
news begins to demonstrate that form of simple narrative that Branigan calls
a focused chain, provided some consideration of motives or intentions is part
of the connection made. Even without explicit links between news items, their
arrangement in a sequence within a single news bulletin constructs an implied
connection that directs the way audiences read each item.
The television medium, with both images and sound, potentially contains both
a video narrative structure and an audio narrative structure. Some genres of tele-
vision might place more importance on one than the other. For example, in that
part of a television news bulletin in which the newsreader talks to camera, the
audio tells the story while the video shows a talking head. However, the visual is
obviously so central to television that this situation audio carrying the dominant
meaning is both rare and usually brief. The news reports themselves, which the
newsreader introduces, will carry elaborated video narratives but minimal audio
narratives. Even in a studio-based discussion program, considerable thought will
be given to the visual design of the set, and the director will change the shot fre-
quently, making an effort to capture the changing expressions of the participants
in order to enliven the visual structure of the program.
A recognisable feature of broadcast news has been present since the advent of
the film newsreel: the voice-over narrator. The extradiegetic narrator of television
and radio news reports that is, the newsreader or reporter, who are not part of the
story may be described as a dramatised narrator, in the sense that he or she is a
character through whom the narration passes (Lacey 2000: 109). But in order to
satisfy the claims of news to truth and objectivity, a newsreader must be a reliable
narrator. This is especially important in television as the connection between

the voice-over and the images is traditionally rather loose and associational in
television news (Ytreberg 2001: 360). The reporter in the news report continues
to be represented as an authoritative and reliable narrator. The reporter is equally
a dramatised narrator who, unlike the newsreader, could at times be diegetic
(that is, part of the narrated story), more so than in the past but still relatively
rarely (in reports from scenes of war or political demonstrations, for example).
Nonetheless, in cases when this happens, the story is moving out of the objectivism
of the inverted pyramid and into the narrative world.
While Ytreberg is writing about a case in television, the same transitions are
observable across the mass media globally, in a climate of deregulation and
increased competition for audiences. One example of narrative and genre change
is the blurring of form and content between news and not-news. Newspapers have
introduced more feature and human interest material on to the front page, the tra-
ditional site of hard news stories, and lifestyle supplements have proliferated.
Television news might so far have retained the traditional half-hour or one-hour
early evening bulletin, but the content mix has altered, in some cases to the point
where the traditional mainstays of federal politics and national economics are
little more than passing references, or are presented as personalised into human
interest angles on government decisions, for example, where once the human
interest angle would have been supplementary to the straight news presentation
of the story. Journalists and others have expressed concern about these changes
to the nature of news, using terms such as tabloidisation or dumbing down of
the news. According to this argument, the changes represent a decline in quality,
owing to the neglect or ignorance of central news values, values that in turn, it is
argued, are aspects of the maintenance of a healthy public sphere (Langer 1998;
Baker 1999). Some media analysts contest this view in terms similar to the image
school journalists in the NRK newsroom. Lumby and ONeil, for example, assert
that these developments are part of a dissolution of a prescriptive, rigid, social
and cultural hierarchy of media values (Lumby & ONeil 1994: 154).
Analysing narrative techniques in television news
The form of television news is characterised by conventional techniques for estab-

lishing the immediacy, the reality (as in, this is the way things are) and the objec-
tivity of the news. From the opening sequence of the bulletin, we can observe
and analyse these techniques. In most developed countries, a nightly television
newscast will begin in a highly recognisable way. The opening sequence can be
For a discussion of the transition from objective to interpretive reporting on the Sydney Morning
Herald newspaper, see David McKnight, Facts versus stories: From objective to interpretive report-
ing, Media International Australia 99 (May 2001), 4958.
interpreted not only as a call to attention but also as an interruption to the flow
of entertainment programming. It will usually be characterised by computer-
animated titles in bright colours and sharply ascending fanfare-like theme music
(trumpets are typical) (Allen 1999: 99). The music and colours serve to estab-
lish urgency and immediacy, as part of the authoritativeness of news. Opening
sequences also use visual symbols, to situate the news in time and space. Symbols
such as a revolving globe or a ticking clock are signs both of the comprehensive-
ness and immediacy of the news. Australias Channel 9 6pm news bulletin uses
an animated pan (camera movement) over a world map, coming to rest over
Australia and clearly recognisable features of the city skyline to situate it in the
world, in the nation and in the city of Sydney. The choice of opening images can
also signify authority more directly, as when the British News at Ten includes Big
Ben, the symbol of the British Houses of Parliament, in its opening titles. Over
these iconic images, and as the fanfare fades, we very often hear headlines: brief
summaries or indications of the news to come, sometimes phrased to intrigue
rather than give the story away, and always announced with breathless urgency.
Typically the whole opening sequence ends in the professional space of the studio:
a pristine place of hard, polished surfaces with their connotations of efficiency
and objectivity (Allen 1999: 99).
In the studio we find the newsreader(s), usually behind desks, formally dressed
and with a not unfriendly but essentially business-like manner. Using two news-
readers makes mood transitions easier to effect, between serious and lighter items,
as one can hand over to the other. In Western nations, if there are two newsread-
ers, one will usually be an older, white male and the other a younger (but not
too young) and attractive female; together they can both establish authority and
credibility (through sobriety of appearance, manner and tone) and provide view-
ers with someone appealing to look at. The mode of address of the newsreader
plays an important part in conveying that the news is bringing viewers what really
happened today. Newsreaders use direct and dialogic address, speaking straight
to camera, apparently talking to each viewer, which is rare in non-factual forms
of television. It creates the impression of a dialogue with the viewer and might
begin with a personalised form of address such as Good evening. The effects
are to reinforce the co-presence of the newsreaders with viewers and to create a
fictive we (Allen 1999: 100).
The dialogic relationship is not necessarily equal, in the sense that the news-
reader (and reporters) are presented as having information that we, the viewers,
do not have but which we should want, because it is important. This is signified by
the professional manner and speech of the newsreaders; they rarely use the first
person, their vocal delivery is studiedly neutral, and they do not gesture as one
might in a conversation between peers. The mode of address, plus the relations
of co-presence, encourage the audiences complicity. As a result the newsreader
can be seen as speaking to us and for us, with the implication that we are part
of a consensus (and equally, not they, so there are inferred others). Sometimes
the newsreaders have been introduced by name in the voice-over of the opening
sequence; however it is conveyed, viewers know who they are, and television sta-
tion advertising emphasises the authority and credibility of its news services by
association with established newsreaders. In Australia in the late 1990s, the com-
mercial Channel 9 used Brian told me as the slogan to advertise its evening news
bulletin, which was for a long time presented by veteran newsreader Brian Hen-
derson. In sum, television news is structured and organised in ways that encourage
viewers to reciprocate the news values of the bulletins. Headlines initiate this by
using a strategy of visualising the scripted words to the effect of see for yourself,
creating an obvious significance for the events and an obviousness about how to
understand them. This is an example, in semiotic terms, of the image as indexical
truth.
Following the opening sequence, the bulletin normally consists of a sequence
of news stories, which can take a number of forms. The simplest is a straight
read (also called a reader) with the newsreader talking to camera, usually with
a graphic displayed behind his or her shoulder. Much more common, especially
on smaller news services that do not have many of their own correspondents but
rely on agency footage, is the live voice-over or LVO. This consists of a filmed
and edited news report, with a voice-over read by the newsreader (who might
or might not have written the script). The most elaborated form of news story,
and most highly developed as narrative form, is the package. Packages are stories
introduced by a newsreader but then presented by a reporter. This is done mostly
in voice-over; that is, with the reporters voice heard over visual images selected to
make sense with the words. Note that the intention is to create meaning through
the combination of script and images, not to match words to pictures exactly.
Thus, pictures that symbolise what is being talked about, and might have been
chosen from the news library, not shot especially, are often used in television news
stories. One effect of this kind of selection can be to perpetuate stereotypes. For
example, examination of the use of library footage in Australian television news
revealed the repeated use of images of Aboriginal people, showing them as sitting
and drinking under trees or on pavements (Putnis 1994).
Packages also usually contain actuality or sound bites, in which some signifi-
cant actor in the story is shown talking; and a stand up or piece to camera (PTC)
in which the reporter talks directly to camera and therefore to the viewer. When,
as very often happens, the PTC is the final segment of the report, the journalist
might either sign off (Peter Cave, ABC News) or throw back to the newsreader
in the studio with a phrase like Now, back to you Jim, talking to the newsreader
rather than viewers, and linking his or her presence with that of the newsreaders.
The latter is more often, but not necessarily, used when there has been a live
cross to the reporter at the scene, and the live cross is another form of news story.
Once confined to genuinely breaking and significant news events, the live cross
has been more frequently and gratuitously used, as satellite links, mobile satellite
up-linking vehicles and lightweight broadcast equipment have become available
and affordable. This is because the live cross so powerfully signifies the key news
values of immediacy, reality and authority.
Baym (2004) draws attention to the role of the package in television news
in terms of a distinction between what he terms mimetic and diegetic images
in television news. Mimetic stories appear as unmediated, directly apparent,
whereas diegetic stories are overtly mediated, constructed for audience appreci-
ation (Baym 2004: 286). Research by Baym suggests that there has been a steady
movement from the mimetic to the diegetic in the images employed by television
news since the 1970s or 1980s. He studied the ways in which network news in the
USA covered the crisis in the Nixon presidency brought about by Watergate in
197374 and the impeachment of President Bill Clinton in 1998. He found that,
between the Watergate coverage of the mid-1970s and the Clinton story, although
the average length of the news packages was much the same, the number of
visual images in each nearly doubled while the length of each image halved. This
illustrates a considerable change of pace between the older and the more recent
bulletins. It also suggests much quicker cutting between shots. Overall, the effect
in the later coverage is more cinematic and less traditionally journalistic; that
is, there is a move away from the linear and chronological assemblage of words
and pictures towards a more symbolic reliance on images to produce narrative
meaning.
Bayms findings in relation to the use of images of each president illustrate
the point very clearly. In the Watergate coverage, relatively few moving pictures
of President Nixon were used (only nine out of 513 shots were of Nixon; Baym
2004: 285). But in the Clinton coverage there were five times as many images of
the president. Moreover, the shots used of Nixon were all long or medium shots;
none was in close-up. Clinton, however, was shown in close-up (his face filling
the frame) or big close-up (from just below the hairline to the bottom of the
chin) in 17 per cent of the presidential pictures. This reflects cultural changes
in the boundaries between public and private, a breaking down of the kind of
convention that prohibited journalists from showing leading public figures up
close and personal; that is, in an intimate, even invasive, way. The effect is also to
make the coverage of Clinton much less dispassionate, much more judgemental,
in visual terms than that of Nixon.
Baym also found other differences, in the use of camera motion and editing
styles, which show that by the late 1990s television news was using more diegetic
narrative techniques and symbolic representation, in contrast with the mimetic
and indexical approaches of two decades earlier. These terms indexical and
symbolic are derived from the work of Charles Peirce (the father of modern
semiotics), who identified three types of sign in terms of their perceived relation-
ship to external referents: the icon, or a near approximation of an object (as in a
photograph); the index, or a metonymic representation of a referent (such as bro-
ken glass on the road indicating a car accident); and the symbol, or an arbitrary
and conventional indication of a referent (as in a linguistic sign).
The images of the real produced by the mimetic mode of visual representa-
tion, in which news footage appears to reflect reality, offering us a window on
the world, are iconic and indexical. They provide direct evidence, through iconic
signs, of what is actually there while also working as metonyms, or selected items
that represent a bigger picture. The symbolic images used by diegetic stories, on
the other hand, are not anchored to the real but produce meanings by the context
in which they are seen and by their juxtapositions. Baym gives the example of
one shot of Clinton beginning with a close-up of a portrait of George Washington,
the US president credited with having said, I cannot tell a lie. The camera then
zooms out to reveal President Clinton, whose problem with the truth was by then
a central topic in the news, speaking at a podium (Baym 2004: 291). The meaning
is obvious but is also clearly constructed; this is not just the facts, the claim of
traditional journalism. It also makes a much more televisual use of the medium.
A similar process is at work in the use of actuality or sound bites. The two
terms are used equivalently but suggest the difference that has emerged between
television news techniques of the early 1970s and today. Actuality suggests that
viewers are hearing and seeing what actually happened. Sound bite suggests not
the whole meal but an edited portion. Baym found that sound bites were longer
in the Watergate coverage, and the decreasing length of sound bites has been well
documented. He found too that the use of sound bites in the Clinton story was
more likely to be characterised by the editing together, or linking, of several very
short grabs of sound. Just as the use of montage has the effect of rendering time
meaningless (the images might come from different times, and are assembled
in a non-linear way), so the montage of sound bites reveal[s] a shift . . . away
from the ideal of the stenographer and toward a narrative device more complex,
because it takes bits of the actual from the whole and reassembles them within
the narrative (Baym 2004: 290).
Conclusion
Television news uses conventions of narration and representation to shape the

real. Those conventions reflect the nature of television as an audio-visual medium,
its institutional aspects, and the values and assumptions of journalism. From
the typographic paradigm (Baym 2004: 285) of newspaper journalism, with its
emphasis on the pyramid structure and on language (words) to present evidence,
contemporary television news has moved to a televisual structure, which empha-
sises the visual and the assemblage of images and sound. Other techniques
and codes work to authorise the news and its narratives, including the news-
readers manner, appearance and mode of address, and the professionalism of
the studio environment. The televisual paradigm could undermine the credibility
and authority of the news, because it moves from indexical representations to
symbolic ones, from what is to what may be (Baym 2004: 296).
While most news journalists remain committed to a model of journalism

which . . . assigns to the journalist the relatively passive role of transmitting
information to the public (Hallin 1993: 47), the increasingly cinematic use of
the television medium is problematic in news because it compromises its truth
claims. Moreover, the growth of reality TV and the use of news and documentary
techniques in such programs further undermine the distinctiveness of the form
of television news and therefore its authority. What this chapter has illustrated is
the potential of narrative to work in different ways and take different forms. In
the case of television news, changes to the narrative form of news might now be
challenging its role in informing people about the world and its versions of the
real.
Chapter 12
Aspects of narrative in series and serials
Rosemary Huisman
One understanding of postmodern style is that of fragmentation. What is frag-

mented, broken up, will depend on what is usually understood to have coherence
in a particular medium and discourse. In poetry a postmodern style can be read
as a dispersal of the unified persona of the traditional lyric; in prose fiction, such
as the novel, it could be an incoherence of character, event or setting. (Is that the
same character? Has this event already happened? I dont understand!)
The Hollywood tradition of film narrative has on the whole pursued the
tight coherence of the nineteenth-century classic realist novel (the American
D. W. Griffith, producer and director of the much-studied 1915 film, The Birth
of a Nation, was said to have been very influenced by Dickens novel structure). In
comparison, the smaller European markets have allowed more aesthetic freedom.
European films offer examples of narrative disruption from the earliest period,
from the surreal distortion of setting in the German film The Cabinet of Dr Caligari
(1919) to the ambiguity of character and event in the French film, Last Year at
Marienbad (1961). For film, greater aesthetic freedom, relative to economic con-
straints, can favour experimentation, including various types of fragmentation.
But in contrast, for television, it is the very economic constraints within which
it is produced that oblige the television product to be fragmented in particular
ways. These ways have led to the series and the serial being the dominant modes
of narration in television.
Series and serials
The following definitions are derived from the glossary of the Archival Moving
Image Materials of the United States Library of Congress:
153
A television series is a group of programs created or adapted for television broad-

cast with a common series title, usually related to one another in subject or
otherwise. Often, television series appear once a week during a prescribed time
slot; however, they may appear with more or less frequency. Television series are
usually created to be open-ended, not with a predetermined number of episodes.
In a fiction series, the programs typically share the same characters and basic
theme.
(www.itsmarc.com/crs/arch0391.htm; viewed 6 November 2004)
A series can be on any subject matter, fiction or non-fiction, such as the series
Walking with Dinosaurs, or the various history series on Britain, World War II and
so on. Fictional series typically introduce and complete a new story of events in
one episode, although various threads or storylines, such as relationships between
the regular characters, can develop from one episode to the next. Think of Friends
or Ally McBeal, for example.
A television serial is a group of programs with a storyline continued from
episode to episode (www.itsmarc.com/crs/arch0946.htm; viewed 6 November
2004). The Archival Moving Image Materials resource tells us that film serials
had been very popular (The serial engaged audience interest in a hero or hero-
ine whose exploits reached an unresolved crisis at the end of each episode), but
their production ceased in the early 1950s, just as television sets became more
widely available. This suggests the role in popular entertainment that television
was beginning to assume.
The film serial typically had a finite number of episodes, and featured television
serials can similarly have a finite number; in any one of its three seasons, the serial
24 (2003), in which each hourly episode was equated with an hour of real time
for the characters, had surprise! twenty-four episodes. However, a feature
of television serials, which derived from radio serials, is the development of the
open-ended serial, which will go on for as long as audience interest and advertising
support endure. This is characteristic of the genre of soap operas, discussed in
chapter 13.
A program can change its nature over time. Early episodes of the British police
drama, The Bill, belonged to a series. Each episode had a self-contained plot,
often one serious storyline and one more humorous one (an element of the sitcom
genre), and by the end of the episode each new storyline was complete: the crime
solved, the kitten found. As Anne Dunn has shown (in chapter 10), the emphasis
in these earlier episodes was on the actions of the police; the characterisation
of individual police remained fairly static. More recent episodes have developed
storylines concerning the personal lives of the police: romantic triangles, ani-
mosity between individuals and so on (plot elements more associated with the
soap opera genre). This focus led to more storyline continuity between episodes,
with the romantic triangle storyline, continuing from one episode to the next,
Aspects of narrative in series and serials 155
becoming as prominent as the solving crime storyline, complete in one episode.

In a further development of The Bill, a limited number of episodes can become
a full serial, with interwoven storylines (for example, a sequence of six episodes
centred both on the pursuit of a serial rapist and on the place of a policewoman
in a traditional male police culture).
Models of communication
An old-fashioned model of communication simply described a sender who sent

a message to an addressee (listener or reader). Michael Reddy called this the
conduit model because it assumed that language is a kind of conduit, or container,
through which information or meaning is passed from one person to another. In
fact, all that is passed from one person to another is a signal (the vehicle of a
Peircean sign) a disturbance of air waves or marks on the page or digital dots
on a screen that signifies a meaning to the sender (is understood as a sign that
implies an interpretant that signifies a known object) according to their particular
context of production, and which might or might not signify a meaning to the
addressee: have you travelled in a country where you do not speak the language?
And if the signal is interpreted as meaningful, that interpretation might or might
not be similar to that intended by the sender (Reddy 1979: 284324).
The addressee interprets according to their context of reception; in personal
encounters, to the extent that the social knowledge and experience of the sender
and addressee overlap, communication is reasonably successful, although we can
never be sure we have understood whats in the other persons mind (as the
conduit model assumed). But with mass media, such as television, the commu-
nication model becomes even more complex. The sender we might now call the
agency and that agency is itself complex, made up of a collaboration of many
contributors, with varying degrees of power over the final product, the program.
The addressee is now the audience but this is a twofold concept. There is the
audience that the agency projects, the one it would like to attract: I will call this
the illocutionary audience (appropriating the term illocution from speech act
theory, where it denotes the intended meaning of the speaker). The other audi-
ence is the actual audience who chooses to watch the program: I will call this the
perlocutionary audience (again, perlocution is the term from speech act the-
ory for the meaning that the listener takes up). Members of the perlocutionary
audience do not of course necessarily take up the same or similar interpretation.
Some film analysis would use the term speaking subject for both agency and
perlocutionary audience those who produce meaning or those who interpret
it so media texts have a proliferation of speaking subjects. (The term spoken
subject is then apt for the illocutionary audience the position of interpretation
prepared or projected by the producers of a media text.)
Finally there is the signal itself, the media text of a program, such as an episode
of a series or serial, which is created and broadcast. Its producers will try to give it
characteristics that satisfy economically proven criteria, but there is no guarantee
of audience response. Remember, the meaning is understood by the viewer in their
own context of reception there is no meaning in the signal itself. Moreover, as
N. J. Lowe points out,
when we watch a film or a television program, we are processing not one nar-
rative track but two. There is the visual text on the screen, and there is the
soundtrack separately assembled, often by different people, and lovingly pasted
together to create the impression of unity, but it is our reading of the film that
actually connects and collates the two.
(Lowe 2000: 25)
Agency: the contexts of production
Agency refers to one causing an action, here the production of a media text for
television. But this agency is complex as it includes the collaboration of many
individuals. It is impossible to identify an agent in the way we are accustomed
to do, for example, in the author of the traditional novel (although, even with
the novel, the contribution of a good editor can be very important, even if not
acknowledged). In all this variety, there are two dimensions of agency that must
be taken into account: first, the agency as creative activity and, second, the agency
as a television company or organisation.
The agency as creative activity includes the scriptwriter(s), director, photog-
raphers, actors, editors and so on all those concerned with directly producing
the television program we eventually see. Most of the credits at the beginning or
end of a program acknowledge people involved in creative agency. The agency as
a television company or organisation is depicted by the very first and very last
shots of a program, which identify the company in image and language for
example, for the series Seinfeld, the first credit is the familiar Columbia image of
the woman holding a torch aloft, just as an MGM production has the roaring lion
or a Paramount production the mountain with stars above. As the second-last
credit for Seinfeld we see the words A West/Schapiro Production in association
with, followed by the final credit, Castle Rock Entertainment, with the image
associated with that company, a lighthouse and its sweeping beam. Presumably
these are the smaller companies to which the larger Columbia company contracts
the production of this particular program.
The agency of the television company encompasses both how it is organised
internally and how it is governed externally by rules and laws, such as the reg-
ulations of government bodies that control the media. This television company
agency is the primary agency, in that the pressures, both internal and external,
generated and experienced by the company will be the context within which
the other agency, of creative activity, can take place. Thus it is no accident that
the first and/or last credits of a program describe this agency the position in the
program sequence symbolises the companys dominant enclosure of the creative
activity.
To repeat: agency in the production of television texts is complex. The list
of credits on a television program shows how many individuals are involved in
production decisions and actions. I noted the credits for an episode of the comedy
series Seinfeld (that is, the credits for creative agency, in between the company
identifiers previously mentioned). If you saw any episodes of this show, youll
know it was relatively simple a good script, four regular actors, all very good
comedians, and a few star guests so if anything this is a more limited list than
more complicated productions would require. Of course, the same person may
perform more than one of these functions:
Credits at the beginning of the episode one name for each function, unless otherwise
indicated:
In separate sequence, the names of the four regular actors, then
Producer
Supervising producer
Executive producer
Created by (two)
Written by
Directed by
Credits at the end

Executive producer (not the same as the executive producer at the beginning)
Executive producers (two)
Producer (not the same as the producer at the beginning)
Co-producer
Story editor
Program consultant
Line producer
Associate producer
Guest starring (three)
Also starring (two)
Production designer
Unit production manager/first assistant director
Second assistant director
Casting by (a company/agency name)
Director of photography
Music by
Edited by
Production coordinator
Script supervisor
Production mixer
Set decorator
Property master
Costume supervisor
Key grip
Online editor
Colourist
Technical coordinator
Camera operators (three)
Production accountant
Assistant accountant
Make-up (two)
Hair stylists (two)
Writers assistants (two)
Assistant to the producer
Production assistants (two)
Executive in charge of production
What this list demonstrates is that creative agency by which meanings are made
is complex and multivocal in television texts, involving far more than the writers
(or authors) themselves.
Heres one writer commenting on the experience of writing for a television
series:
The tube is death on writers. Especially television series work. It rots talent at
an astounding rate . . . the real culprit is the demand for speed and repetition.
Youre writing as part of a team often with five or six other writers. And youre
labouring within strict formulas for the shows characters and plots. Its like
making Pintos at the Ford plant; you stamp out the body [with lots of help] and
somebody else puts in the headlight. And youre doing it fast: 14 days is luxury
for about 45 pages of dialogue.
(www.pubinfo.vcu.edu/artweb/playwriting; viewed 6 September 2002)
This context of situation is very different from that assumed in a romantic

understanding of the writer as an inspired novelist (or poet), where narrative
coherence in the production of the text is assumed to derive from the authors
individual identity. The coherence in production in a media text written in these
circumstances will typically derive not from any individual, but from the collective
agreement by the different writers in following conventions already established
for this series or serial, for example in genre and characterisation.
The online Wikipedia entry for Television program has an illuminating account
of the standard procedure for shows on network television in the United States.
Here is a summary (the italics are in the entry):
r The show creator comes up with the idea for a series. The idea includes the
concept, the characters, perhaps some crew, perhaps some big-name actors.
r The creator pitches the idea to different television networks.
r An interested network orders a pilot (a prototype first episode of the series).
r The structure and team of the whole series is put together to create the pilot.
r The network likes the pilot, it picks up the show, it orders a run of episodes (the
network doesnt like the pilot, it passes; the creator shops the pilot around to
other networks).
r The show hires a stable of writers; they might write in parallel (one writer on
the first episode, another on the second and so on) or they might work as a
team (as in the disgruntled quote given above). Sometimes [writers] develop
story ideas individually, and pitch them to the shows creator, who then folds
them together into a script and rewrites them.
r The executive producer (often the creator) picks crew and cast (subject to
approval by the network), approves and often writes series plots, sometimes
writes and directs major episodes. Other subordinate producers, variously
named, ensure that the show works smoothly.
r The written script must be turned into film, with both language and image.
This is the directors job: deciding how to stage scenes, where to place cameras,
perhaps to coach actors. A director is appointed for each episode.
r A director of photography controls the lighting and takes care of making the
show look good.
r An editor cuts the different pieces of film together, adds music, puts the whole
show together with titles and so on. (http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Television
series; 12 October 2004)
Obviously, a media text produced through the interaction of so many people
will be very expensive, as will a film. However, films sell seats to individuals,
but commercial television sells viewers to advertisers. If the series can attract
a large viewing audience, then advertisers will want to buy time during its
episodes, and the television station showing it can charge a premium rate dur-
ing its time slot. If the series is not successful, and therefore cancelled, the net-
work has not only lost money in its development but also still has to gamble on
bankrolling new pitches. So narrative in television series and serials will be
very different from that in texts of print culture and in film, as economic factors
place three (at least) constraints on television narrative from the perspective of
agency:
r the risk of investing leads to a conservative attitude to creative production, with
great reliance on narrative conventions already established as successful; the
latter also facilitates the preparation of scripts by teams, rather than individual
authors;
r the structure of the narrative of the individual program episode has to accom-
modate the interpolation of advertising texts within the episode as it goes to
air;
r television narratives will preferably be open-ended (resist closure) and repeti-
tive so that, if successful, they can be continued.
The perlocutionary (actual) audience
As described above, the commercial television company must regularly interrupt

a fictional narrative to broadcast advertisements. For example, for three half-hour
episodes of the sitcom series Seinfeld, I noted that the sitcom content in fact took
just over an hour; that is, about ten minutes of each half-hour episode one-third
of the viewing time had been taken up with advertisements.
Viewers know or at least feel that the more popular the program, the more it
is fragmented by advertisements and the more advertisements are in each adver-
tising segment. In an episode of the popular action serial 24, shown from 8.30pm
to 9.30pm, I counted five sequences of advertisements between program seg-
ments, and in each sequence there were ten or eleven different advertisements for
a diverse list of products. This diversity reflects the networks assumption that
mid-evening is a prime time for advertising to the widest demographic of viewers.
For example, the 9pm advertisement segment contained advertisements for: All
Saints (a television network series), Oz lotto (lottery), Triple X (film), Mitsubishi
(car company), HCF (health insurance company), Claratyne (hay fever product), a
job search agency, SPC baked beans, a home loan company, Optus mobile phones
and Marshall Law (a network series).
Why does the television viewer tolerate this fragmented narrative? In fact, it
is generally compatible with the context of reception in which television is usu-
ally experienced, that is, a private home. This is a very different context from the
experience of film in the cinema, where the viewer has paid to sit (quietly! other
patrons hope) in the dark in a public space. For television, viewing is likely to
be interrupted by various domestic demands and behaviour: the phone call, the
break for preparing food, the calls of nature. Viewers channel-surf, leave a pro-
gram and perhaps return. More recently, viewers have had the capacity to tape
programs and view them later, fast-forwarding over the advertising segments. Cur-
rent developments in digital technology are increasingly empowering viewers to
select when and how they watch programs.
Non-commercial stations, such as the ABC in Australia and the BBC in
Britain, transmit a television narrative continuously (although increasingly, adver-
tisements for the ABCs own programs and bookshop products are scheduled
between completed programs or episodes). Noticeably, the non-commercial chan-
nels feature short, two- to six-part serials, whose scripts often originate in nov-
els (typically historical or crime). This construction makes different demands
on the viewer, who must commit continuous time to viewing in a way more
comparable to the readers committing continuous time to the reading of a
novel.
The illocutionary (assumed or projected) audience
The principal concern of the television network or station is: how can we attract
the audience which will attract advertisers to us? Television and advertising com-
panies know there is not one homogeneous audience but the possibility of vari-
ous audiences and various responses. Obviously advertising companies will do
audience (market) research before doing the creative design for a particular con-
sumer product. However, in commercial television (as for magazines, discussed
in chapter 18), what is advertising and what is editorial seep into each others
area: in order to attract and maintain a high advertising revenue, a station needs
to broadcast programs that appeal to an audience similar to that wanted by major
advertising sponsors. To do this they need to ask, at least: what is the nature of
the target audience, and what is the audience positioning strategy?
Studies of the target audience can be demographic or psychographic. The for-
mer is the familiar segmenting of the population primarily by occupation, which is
assumed to relate to spending power; thus the highest category is senior manage-
rial, administrative or professional, while the second lowest is semi-skilled and
unskilled manual workers. In Australia, for example, the non-commercial ABC
and the multilingual SBS are usually said to attract a demographic with higher
levels of education and so in higher-level occupations, while the commercial sta-
tions appeal to a wider cross-section of the community, and have larger audiences
overall.
The ABCs original charter with public funding was to provide news, current
affairs, comment and culture; every so often a new general manager tries to
extend the demographic appeal and compete with the commercial channels for
viewers. This socially admirable intent is a goal not necessarily compatible with
the ABCs traditionally strong orientation to information as well as entertainment
and its tendency to be more innovative in encouraging those with creative agency.
The looser link with market pressures does help to explain the more variable
spread of media texts, including series and serials, presented on the ABC and
SBS, both those locally commissioned and those purchased from elsewhere. In a
loose generalisation, one could say the ABC purchases more programs from the
BBC in the UK, the commercial channels purchase more programs from the USA,
while SBS shows programs, especially films, from many non-English-speaking
countries, with English subtitles. (Commercial stations have a practical difficulty
in buying BBC rather than American sitcoms; BBC sitcoms are made half an hour
long, whereas a commercial sitcom is about twenty-two minutes long, allowing
for the inclusion of advertising segments in the scheduled half hour.)
The second kind of audience analysis, the study of psychographic variables,

has become more popular in recent years. Here the population is segmented by
lifestyle aspirations. Theories of identity are important in this kind of analysis: the
idea is that an individual with a dominant psychovariable of one kind will identify
more readily with a television advertisement or program which represents or
endorses that category. If you have watched episodes of the Australian soap opera
Home and Away, you might decide, as I did, that its target audience is adolescents
in secondary school, with experience principally limited to that of family and local
community (as indeed its title declares). On the other hand, the American serial 24
was targeted at a wider range of audience identification, with principal characters
who were young and middle-aged, white and black, with strong female roles,
although centred on the traditional white male character, Jack Bauer. And finally,
the series Sex and the City, with its focus on female sex and fashion, targeted the
post-adolescent urban female consumer. The mode of address of each program is
tailored to fit the illocutionary (assumed) audience: characters are given dialogue
which is assumed to be that with which such an audience can identify (both in
subject matter of interest and in realistic interaction between characters).
The programming schedule of the three programs just mentioned, in 2002
in Sydney, Australia, indicates the target audience judgement of the television
channel: 7 to 7.30pm every evening for Home and Away (a similar demographic
can catch the soap Neighbours on a rival channel in the previous half hour), prime
time 8.30pm to 9.30pm for 24 (twice a week in the early episodes to hook viewers,
once a week thereafter), and once a week, a two-hour slot from 9.30pm to 11.30pm
for two episodes of Sex and the City, the first a new episode, the second a repeat
for recent converts or addicts.
Another way to identify the likely target audience of a program is to take note
of the advertisements filmed in its breaks the advertisements and the program
(the network hopes) are aimed at the same target audience. An example of the
number and diversity of advertisements aimed at a wide demographic viewing in
prime time was given above for the serial 24.
In trying to position the audience, those with agency are most directly trying
to act upon the perceptions of the viewer. Audience positioning can refer just to
the physical construction of the media text by those with creative agency. In film
studies, the term spoken subject is sometimes used for the position of the cam-
era, the viewing position prepared for the individual viewer. But by metaphorical
extension, the term spoken subject can also be used of the ideological position
prepared for the viewer. (Typically, commercial agency favours the ideological sta-
tus quo, since in a society that perceives itself as stable, commercial stability is
more favoured.) Modes of address can serve this ideological purpose. As Sonia
M. Livingstone has written: texts attempt to position readers as particular kinds
of subjects through particular modes of address (Livingstone 1994: 249).
But a viewer can be compliant or resistant. I was a resistant viewer of the
following: in the Home and Away episodes I watched, the mother appeared to
me to be a classic pour-oil-on-troubled-waters stereotype, trying to placate a

troubled adolescent daughter and a belligerent and irrational father. To explore
my response, I made a quick analysis of the mothers dialogue in two sequential
scenes (the husband or daughter speak between the numbered utterances):
(With husband, in house)

1 Cant you go a bit easier on her? You know what shes going through.
2 The way youre acting, youre going to drive her further away.
3 I know she put us through hell in the last few weeks, but that doesnt mean
she deserves to go through hell. Our daughters in pain, Rhys. At least try to
understand that.
(With daughter, in backyard)

1 Oh, sweetheart.
2 Your dad doesnt mean to be so hard on you hes just hes just finding it
difficult seeing you this unhappy.
3 Oh, I know it doesnt feel like it now, but you will feel good about yourself
again without Kane. I want you to make a deal with me OK? I want you to
write down all the good things that happened to you during the day, and at the
end of the day I want you to count them all up. Please, Kirsty. There are good
things in your life right here and now. You just have to be on the lookout for
them. I bet you wont be able to count them on one hand.
Ive italicised each instance of the mother as grammatical subject. In each of

the six examples the associated verb realises a mental process (two I know, three
I want and one I bet; that is, I imagine), but there are no verbs of material
processes of action. So in the social world projected by her speech, the mother
thinks but does not act at all. Her language choice is placatory: with her daughter
she tactfully avoids the power role of direct commands not Write down all the
good things . . ., but I want you to write down . . . and her one direct command
to her husband is that he attempt a mental process, try to understand. The very
script in these two scenes inscribes a particular ideology of family values: the
mother as thinking of the needs of others but not effective in initiating her own
actions.
Effective, efficient such terms seem to be important in the ideology of power
relations portrayed on television. George Gerbner made an interesting early analy-
sis of violence in television narratives. (His studies, published in 1970, are
described in Fiske and Hartley 2003: 1521.) Gerbner concluded that heroes and
villains were more or less equally violent, but that heroes were more efficiently
violent. (They were also more physically attractive.) Cool efficiency, and, to a
lesser extent, manliness and youth, appear to be the chief correlates of success
and virtue in a fairly impersonal self-seeking and specialised structure of violent
action (Fiske & Hartley 2003: 19).
The relevance of this to ideology is that Gerbner does not see violence on tele-
vision as a direct representation of the extent and nature of violence itself in
society, but rather as a symbolic representation of the value-structure of society:
violence . . . is used in the pursuit of the socially validated ends of power, money
or duty . . . So despite its obvious connection with power or dominance over
others, it is not the dominance of one personality over another, but of one social
role over another social role. It is linked to socio-centrality, in that the victims
are likely to belong to less esteemed groups, defined in terms of age, class, gender
and race, and the successful aggressors are likely to be young, white, male and
middle-class or unclassifiable. Violence is not in itself seen as good or evil, but
when correlated with efficiency it is esteemed, for efficiency is a key socio-central
value in a competitive society.
(Fiske & Hartley 2003: 1920)
It is worth remembering that this study was carried out before 1970, and we need
to consider whether its conclusions are still relevant.
The media text series and serials
At the end of the section on agency, I described three characteristics of television

narrative that economic constraints frequently would impose. These are:
r the risk of investing leads to a conservative attitude to creative production,
with great reliance on narrative conventions already established as successful
(narrative repetition within the episode);
r the structure of the narrative of the individual program episode has to accom-
modate the interpolation of advertising texts within the episode as it goes to
air (narrative segmentation);
r series and serials will preferably resist closure and be open-ended; for budgetary
reasons the company prefers to find a successful formula for a program, then
repeat that formula (narrative repetition between episodes).
Given the circumscriptions described above, the production of narrative coher-
ence in a television program is a conscious construction, and therefore explicit
and established codes of television production are likely to be followed and
repeated. These codes will include:
r an ideology (an assumed understanding of social values)
r an established television genre or text type
r the typical field, tenor and mode of that genre (see below)
r conventional narrative deployment of character, action, dialogue, setting/
location, mise en scene/iconography
r the use of technical conventions of televisual construction
r the use of recognised units of televisual text construction in editing.
The next chapter will make a more detailed study of ideology and narrative
deployment in relation to the genre of sitcom (an example of a series) and the
genre of soap opera (an example of a serial). Here we consider the analysis of
genre in terms of field, tenor and mode and, more briefly, the codes of tech-
nical construction and the units of televisual text construction for television
narrative.
Genre: field, tenor and mode
A genre is a recognised text type. The financial constraints within which televi-
sion texts are produced promote a structuralist understanding of texts, including
narrative texts, by producers. This refers to the attempt to define and reproduce
the characteristics of previously successful texts. Whether or not producers have
much insight into their own ideology of production (apart from a general sense of
being conservative, not rocking the boat), they will be very clear on the category
of text the genre, that they want to produce. Chapter 10 discussed genres of
television. Here I elaborate on the description of genres in terms of field, tenor
and mode as a way of structuring our analysis of genre. These terms are derived
from a model of the context of situation, as used in systemic functional linguistics
(Halliday & Hasan 1985: 1214; Halliday 1978: 1425).
Field can have two dimensions. The first is the field of social action. For nar-
ration in television, these are (in Aristotles sense) the two social acts of telling
(diegesis) and showing (mimesis). The viewer is shown characters doing actions,
and shown interactions between characters, including conversations. But who
shows? Watching a game of football as you sit in the grandstand is not the same
as watching a game of football being broadcast on television. The latter has cam-
era angles chosen and is broken into the usual segments for advertisements; real
time is stopped for replays of highlights, even during the first transmission. The
football game is being structured to fit the exigencies of television production.
All images seen on television are mediated, even if the agency of that mediation
appears effaced. Even more patently, a fictional narrative, such as a sitcom or soap
opera, is structured; the apparent showing of the characters and events effaces
the narrator, who tells what is shown. The possible effects of this effacement
will be discussed later.
The second dimension of field is that of subject matter. This is the one we
readily understand, and is the usual content of television program guides. Here is
an extract from a soap magazine section, Your complete guide to whats coming
up, for the soap opera Days of Our Lives. It is headed Dream Cheater: Carrie
gets emotional as she and Austin are about to make love. The next day Austin
says they can wait until theyre ready to try for a family. As he watches her sleep,
she dreams of making love to Mike instead of her husband. (TV Soap (Australia),
12 August 2002, p. 33.)
Tenor refers to social relations and social attitudes. We can describe a tenor
in relation to each field. The first dimension of field, that of social action, for
narrative media texts such as the sitcom and soap opera, was telling, includ-
ing effaced telling. (In print culture narratives, such as the novel, this tenor is
usually realised by a clause choice of the declarative mood in statements.) The
tenor in relation to this field is the relation between the producer of the sit-
com or soap opera and the audience. Complications multiply! I spoke of the
illocutionary audience the one the producers aim to attract using the results
of market research. So the illocutionary tenor is the relationship the producers
aim to achieve between the television network agency and the target viewing
audience; it is a power relation of teller and projected compliant viewer. The
perlocutionary tenor will of course refer to any relationship a viewer actually
interprets.
Again, it is easier to describe the tenor of the second-order field, the subject
matter of the fictional world (the diegesis in Genettes sense), since this refers to
the social relations between the characters and their attitudes to what is going
on, as revealed both in their dialogue and actions, and the social roles assigned
to them. However, the postmodern stylistic features of television narrative (its
segmented and non-linear features), together with its usual private context of
reception, work to undermine (deconstruct) this nice opposition of tenor asso-
ciated with the first-order field and tenor associated with the second-order field.
Television has been described as having permeable diegetic boundaries: that is,
the boundaries between the first-order world of the viewer and the second-order
world depicted on the television screen (whether in a segment of narrative fiction
or a segment of advertising) can become blurred. In the fiction, the characters
address each other; in the advertising, the speakers usually appear directly to
address the viewer (as newsreaders always appear to do).
This discussion of tenor highlights an important difference between television
and film, which has been described as oral interaction versus gaze. One online
account of television narrative puts it like this:
TV presents itself as discourse (acknowledging speaker and listener) rather than

as story/history (which hides the source of enunciation so that it seems to happen
all by itself), and all of its stories are framed by its superdiscourse of scheduling.
This discursivity mimics oral culture, yet structures it into a rigid form. It also
works to draw us into the industrys presentation of social meanings and to
present them as a consensus. Through the device of direct address, an illusion
of actual contact is created which works in TVs interest and promotes certain
ideologies. But just as cinema only presents the illusion of history (it does really
have a source and is artificially created), TV gives only the illusion of discourse
(we dont see the real source and it isnt real conversation).
(www.brown.edu/Departments/MCM/courses/MC11/outline/
TV narrative outline.htm; 14 October 2004)
This aspect of television, that much of it is scripted and produced to be presented

as interactive conversation, is a feature of mode, the organisation of the message.
The mode is designed to promote the conflation of viewers world and viewed
world and the identification of the viewer with the values assumed in the tele-
vision product (both narrative and advertisement). The British sitcom, The Royle
Family, depicting the family slumped on the sofa in front of the telly, comment-
ing occasionally on the program as they munched or scratched, beautifully (or
horribly) played with the mirroring of mimesis and the telling of diegesis which
world (viewer and viewed) was the reflection of which world?
So, finally, mode. Mode refers to the organisation of the message so that it is
coherent with its context. Here is an example from spoken language: if you and
I had been talking about sitcoms in general, I might then say: Yes, one sitcom
I guess everyone liked must be Fawlty Towers. On the other hand, if we had
already been talking about Fawlty Towers, and you asked what genre I thought
it was, I might say, Oh, I think its a sitcom. In both examples what we were
already talking about (sitcom in the first example, it for Fawlty Towers in the
second) comes earlier in my statement, whereas the words for the new information
(Fawlty Towers in the first example, sitcom in the second) comes at the end of
my statement. The subject matter is similar in both my sentences, but theyre
differently organised so as to be coherent with our previous conversation. Given
the fragmentation of the television text, the role of the editor is very important
in organising the mode of the completed program shots to scene, scenes to
segment, then segment to episode (these are units of narrative editing, discussed
later). The repetition of features from episode to episode of the same series also
constitutes a feature of mode. (It is not the features themselves but the fact of
their repetition that links the programs.)
Generic expectations
A genre can be defined in terms of different likely configurations of field, tenor

and mode, sometimes through the dominance of one or more of these parameters.
Fictional series can usually be differentiated by their subject matter or field: a
police drama, hospital drama, the inhabitants of a country town, of an urban
street. However, the genre of sitcom is primarily defined through its tenor in
relation to the first-order field, the effect on the viewer as its very name (short
for situation comedy) tells us, it is designed to make its audience laugh, or at least
amuse them. The sitcom can therefore have a wide variety of subject matter. (With
a quite opposite emotional colour, the film genre of film noir is also understood
primarily through its tenor.) And some genres are noticeably defined by their
mode, the organisation of their structure: the musical is a traditional example.
The term categorisation is sometimes used to refer to the prior experience of
media texts a viewer is assumed to have. This previous experience, it is assumed,
has led the viewer to have certain expectations about media texts, including that
media texts fall into certain categories with fairly predictable characteristics. The
usual term for a recognisable media text type is genre, for example, the soap opera
genre. So if a viewer is told in pre-advertising that a particular new program is
a soap opera then the viewer will bring generic expectations to that program.
They will, for example, be very surprised if the episodes turn out to be about a
lone mans courageous battle to climb a lonely mountain: that is, about a single
individual struggling with nature rather than a social group agonising about their
relationships. Again, if the program does in fact turn out to have a soap opera
subject matter (field) but its camera shots are mostly long shots, with very few
close-ups of the face, the technical construction of the program will be generically
unusual, and the new viewer will probably find it a rather unsatisfactory program
in terms of usual generic expectations, because of the reduced visual intimacy
with the characters (the expected tenor).
From the point of view of agency, you can see that the choice of genre will have
been determined by the results of audience analysis in relation to the purpose of
the television network a genre that market research has shown is attractive to
the demographic and/or psychographic profile of the desired audience. You can
also see why the two agencies might pull in different directions here: the cre-
ative agency scriptwriter, director, costume designer and so on might push
towards innovation and aesthetic originality, wanting to rework generic conven-
tions, whereas the very predictability of the genre serves the agency of the tele-
vision company. If all goes well, what worked last year will work this year. The
company agency, you might say, is best served by a fixed or structuralist approach
to narrative and genre: these are the narrative features of a soap, a sitcom, a cop
show/police drama now go off and produce another one to the structuralist for-
mula. In contrast, the creative agency might incline more to a post-structuralist
perspective: let us deconstruct the past narrative structure of the genre, confound
the narrative expectations. In some ways, for example, the storyline of 24 tried
occasionally to do that shockingly unpredictable events have occurred but at
the same time the conventional ideology of the political thriller remains undis-
turbed, realised in a narrative in which the ultimate success of the hero brings
closure. Compare the ideological subversion of the plot of one late Agatha Christie
detective story, Cat among the Pigeons, in which the narrator of the novel turns
out to be the murderer. At the time that novel appeared, critical response ranged
from indignant to outraged!
Construction: technical codes
The technical conventions of televisual construction relate to the technology used

in filming the program: conventions of camera work, of lighting and colour, of
sound-recording. A list of the technical codes of visual construction could include
shot size, camera angle, lens type, composition, focus, lighting codes and colour.
Particular techniques are assumed to signify a particular meaning to the illocu-
tionary (assumed) audience, but it is a structuralist assumption to relate a choice
of technique directly to a particular interpretation. There is no guarantee that the
viewer (a member of the perlocutionary audience) will take up this interpreta-
tion, although the more literate (the more experienced) viewers are in televisual
conventions, the more likely they are to read the technical codes in a socially
conventional way.
r The shot-size is associated with the continuum private/public the close-up is
more intimate or more emotional than the more distant shot.
r The camera angle is associated with the continuum authority/weakness the
camera looking up at the object gives the object a looming aspect.
r The lens type can give a dramatic effect (wide angle), an everyday effect (nor-
mal) or a voyeuristic effect (telephoto).
r A symmetrical composition seems calm, a static composition seems to lack
conflict, while a dynamic composition signifies (it is assumed) disturbance and
disorientation.
r Soft focus is romantic.
r High key lighting signifies happiness, low key a sombre mood, high contrast in
lighting is dramatic, low contrast is realistic, documentary.
r Colour signifies optimism, passion, agitation with warm colours (yellow, red,
orange, brown), pessimism, calmness, reason with cool colours (blue, green,
purple, grey). (I have taken many of these terms from table 3.1 in Selby and
Cowdery 1995: 57, although I do not reproduce their Saussurean terminology.)
All the significations conventionally associated with the technical codes are
realisations of tenor: that is, interpreted as interpersonal meanings of social
relations and attitude. They do not tell us what the narrative is about, but
they are intended to suggest an attitude to the narrative. Remember, we cannot
at all assume that the perlocutionary audience will understand the technical
construction in these ways, but such codes would be part of studying televi-
sion camera techniques. And since particular genres might be characteristi-
cally realised by certain tenors, it is unsurprising that the camera techniques
taken to signify those tenors might become associated with certain genres. At
the same time, television genres are very permeable, so an action drama serial
like 24 nevertheless includes sequences of soap-like emotional focus, produced
through the technical close-ups on faces, which are thought to signify emotional
intensity.
Construction: units of narrative editing
In descending order of temporal duration (viewing time), we can identify tele-

visual units of text construction as
r the series or serial

r the episode
r the segment
r the scene
r the shot.
The shot is the time in which one camera angle is held on the object. The
camera can zoom in or pull back (a zoom shot); the camera itself can move
while focused on the object (a tracking shot) or it can move so as to follow a
moving object or obtain a panoramic shot (a pan shot). Shots must be edited
into a scene, and there are practical constraints on the number of shots. For
example, the BBC writersroom guidelines say, If you are writing a comedy to be
shot entirely on location, then try to avoid complicated set-ups. Studio shows use
four or five cameras. Location shows use one, and every angle has to be covered.
Look analytically at a sequence . . . and see how many shots go to make it up.
(www.bbc.co.uk/writersroom/writing/tvcomedy.shtml; 13 October 2004)
The scene is a sequence of shots in the same location. Conventionally, it signifies
a continuous action; a change in space or time means a change of scene. Scenes
must be edited into the segment. The segment is a sequence of scenes, which
is delimited by advertisements, making the segment the quintessential unit for
commercial television. For narratives produced for non-commercial television,
the segment is not marked externally by advertisements. It is recognised, in pro-
duction or reception, by the internal coherence of its field staying with the same
topic or same characters, for example, rather like a paragraph in a printed text.
If there is a scheduled break in narrative transmission for some reason, the break
will be after a segment. Segments are edited into an episode. The episode is a
sequence of segments, into which the television network can interpose advertise-
ments. The series or serial will repeat basic features in each episode.
You already see the work that the viewer has to do, in order to interpret a coher-
ent narrative from this edited sequence, with its segmented transmission inter-
rupted by advertisements. This narrative ability with television input is learned
from experience, and is a skill comparable to the narrative literacy learned from
reading novels.
Any analysis of television narrative should pay particular attention to the seg-
ment, since it is one of the important ways in which television differs from film.
A segment does not need linear development. Each segment must be entertain-
ing on its own, almost a mini-episode; otherwise the viewer might not bother to
come back after the commercial break, or might have surfed to another chan-
nel with more interesting material. For series and serials this leads to a pastiche
model of narration, a very postmodern characteristic, in which several storylines,
centred on different characters and events, are juxtaposed, rather than one prin-
cipal storyline followed. (In this television is noticeably different from film, in
which a more linear development facilitates the focus on one heros progress.)
In each segment each of these storylines will receive some but not a great deal of
attention. The action serial 24 did this noticeably, moving several storylines for-
ward a little in each segment.
Soap opera is generically concerned more with characters reactions to events
rather than with the events themselves, so it might not move any storyline for-
ward at all in any one segment. Each scene in the segment, typically the inter-
action of two characters, can reiterate (show again) the characters feelings
towards an already told event (or, in infinite regress, towards another characters
attitude towards an already told event).
Conclusion
This chapter has defined series and serials in terms of producers, theorised as
agents, and audiences, theorised as perlocutionary (actual) and illocutionary
(assumed or brought into being by the text). Interactions of agents and audiences
are closely related to the construction of genre, identified by aspects of field,
tenor and mode. Deployed in various ways, these in turn produce the generic
expectations that we use to categorise and decode new programs. The technical
codes of television narrative not only structure programs in familiar ways but also
work to naturalise or critique social relations and attitudes. Moving on from these
general points about series and serials, the next chapter will explore the particular
structures and techniques that define soap operas and sitcoms as generic types of
television narration.
Chapter 13
Soap operas and sitcoms
Rosemary Huisman
Ideology
In chapter 2 I introduced the concept of the Umwelt, to describe human under-

standing of reality, the objective world (in a Peircean sense) of experience and
imagination. The term ideology is variously used, but here it is used to mean the
perspectives that a person takes up towards his or her Umwelt, the ethical values
that seem unproblematic, unarguable, objectively natural in her or his world.
In A Policemans Lot, chapter 12 of their book, Reading Television, John Fiske
and John Hartley discuss the ideology of several police series of the 1970s: A Man
Called Ironside, The Sweeney, Starsky and Hutch. I quote their specific comments
on Ironside to exemplify the general concept of ideology in the sense above:
Ironsides team is presented as a harmonious society part hunting party out of

American mythology, part microcosm of Western class structures. But in terms
of the way this society is presented in the series itself, Ironsides team derive
their satisfying meaning not only from their metonymic reference but also by
binary opposition to each other:
male: female
white: black
cerebral: physical
age: youth.
The left-hand set of terms show the esteemed or dominant values of this series.
It is interesting to notice how the integration of these values into a harmonious
society is presented as natural, and this offers us a graphic example of what
172
Soap operas and sitcoms 173
Barthes terms the ex-nominating process that operates in the ideology of our
society. The structure of these relationships is never foregrounded for inspection
or criticism, but appears as the natural order, and as such does not require any
conscious statement it does not need to be named (Barthes 1973, pp. 138
41). Hence any contradictions in this structure, as for instance between the
subordinate characters function (to relate to each other and to Ironside as a
harmonious society) and their jobs (to do menial, unpleasant or delegated tasks),
are simply never shown as contradictions. Only an aberrant decoding by the
audience will bring them out, if the audiences view of social relations does not
fit that of the series.
(Fiske & Hartley 2003: 1423)
By metonymic reference, the authors mean that a feature assigned to a character

could remind the audience of a more general social role, function, relationship or
status. Note the possibility of aberrant decoding this is aberrant from the pro-
ducers point of view, of course. Members of the perlocutionary (actual) audience
might interpret their Umwelt from the perspective of an ideology different from
that encouraged by the producers.
The binary oppositions that Fiske and Hartley read in Ironside are a classic
structuralist way of understanding interpretation; compare Levi-Strauss
analysis of myth, discussed in chapter 3. Nevertheless, such reductive accounts
can be particularly helpful for analysing television series and serials, given the
template of repeated narrative features that is explicitly used for scripting indi-
vidual episodes. Different members of the audience could be aberrant from
each other, differing in their view of social relations and so diverging in their
responses to a media text. In What makes viewers diverge when interpreting
narrative?, Daniel Chandler adapts information from Sonia M. Livingstones
book (1990a, chapter 7) and article (1990b) on television audience interpretation
(www.aber.ac.uk/media/Modules/TF33120; 4 September 2002: lecture topic 8).
Sixty-six regular viewers (forty-two female, twenty-four male) of the British soap
opera, Coronation Street, completed a questionnaire about a storyline that had
developed over several months. I quote the storyline summary:
Susan Barlow, the 21-year-old daughter of Ken Barlow by his first marriage,
returned to the Street to live with her father and his new wife, Deirdre Barlow.
Susan began a romance with Mike Baldwin, a local factory owner much older
than her [sic]. Ken opposed the marriage of Susan and Mike because of Mikes
adulterous affair with Deirdre a few years before (of which Susan was initially
ignorant). Ken was persuaded to attend the wedding at the last minute, thus
atoning for his neglect of Susan when she was a child.
The questionnaire included attitude statements for agreement or disagreement;

the responses were analysed by cluster analysis, which identifies groups of similar
responses. This gave four clusters, which Livingstone labelled Cynics, Negotiated
cynics, Romantics and Negotiated romantics. I paraphrase the gloss for each
of these interpretative positions:
r Cynics: were most strongly on Kens side and against the couple; felt that Ken
had acted reasonably and had been right to oppose the marriage. Didnt think
Susan and Mikes marriage would last. Were particularly critical of Susan; she
wanted Mike for his money and success and as a father figure.
r Negotiated cynics: were similar to the cynics, broadly favouring Ken and dis-
liking Susan and Mike. However, did not agree that Ken should have been so
strongly opposed to the marriage. Were less inclined to question the strength
of feelings between Mike and Susan, and were less critical of Susan.
r Romantics: were the ones most strongly against Ken and in favour of the couple.
Saw Ken as unreasonable, vindictive and possessive. Believed that Susan and
Mike were right for each other and that the marriage would last.
r Negotiated romantics: basically agreed with the romantics, but also believed
that Susan and Mike might not really be in love, that there might be some truth
in the father figure explanation, and that the couple would be likely to face
some problems.
Livingstones research on sociological and demographic factors suggested that
Identification was very significant in Character Evaluation and Perspective-
Taking/Sympathy, and hence to interpretation. Identification refers to whether
viewers identified with/saw themselves as similar to a character. Character
Evaluation refers to a viewers positive or negative evaluation of a character.
Perspective-Taking/Sympathy refers to the extent to which viewers perceived the
narrative sympathetically from a particular characters viewpoint. So those in the
cynical clusters saw themselves as more like Ken (than those in the romantic
clusters) and liked Ken more (those in the romantic clusters didnt like Ken at
all!). The cynics sympathised with Ken more whereas the negotiated cynics could
also see Susans point of view, possibly because they are mainly women. How-
ever, Livingstone noted that overall, gender and interpretation were not clearly
related: women did not especially side with Susan. What has been labelled iden-
tification, I suggest, could also be called ideological recognition as it correlates
with the value judgements and interpretative orientation of the viewer.
The sitcom genre: ideology
The Wikipedia definition is as follows: a sitcom or situation comedy is a genre

of comedy performance devised for radio but today typically found on television.
Sitcoms usually consist of recurring characters in a format in which there are
one or more humorous story lines centred around a common environment, such
as a family home or workplace (http://en.wikipedia.org.wiki/Situation comedy;
viewed 12 September 2004).
The situation comedy is the most numerous narrative genre on television. The
situation is the regular situation in which the permanent characters find them-
selves; it provides the context in each episode for fresh storylines with visiting
characters. As the word comedy implies, the sitcom should contain humour,
should make us laugh (canned laughter is sometimes used, to give the impression
of a performance in front of a live audience). However, the characterisation and
setting can vary from cheerfully superficial to a more complex and darker social
setting.
Richard F. Taflinger has written a book-length study of the (American) sit-
com and made it available on the web (www.wsu.edu:8080/taflinge/sitcom.html;
viewed 19 October 2004). Taflinger divides this large genre into three distinct types
or subgenres of sitcom: what he calls the action comedy, the domestic comedy
and the dramatic comedy. The action comedy is the most numerous; its empha-
sis is on verbal and physical action. He cites I Love Lucy, Bewitched, Gilligans
Island and McHales Navy. The domestic comedy has a wider variety of events
and involves more people. He cites The Brady Bunch, Roseanne and The Cosby
Show. Its emphasis is more on the characters and their growth and development,
and almost invariably set in and around a family unit. This subject matter eas-
ily lends itself to soap-type treatment, later discussed. The dramatic comedy is
the least common. M*A*S*H would be a good example: the series on a medical
unit treating American soldiers in the Korean War of the 1950s. The narrative
theme such as the horrors of war of a dramatic comedy is not humorous but
the comic intensification in the portrayal of characters provides a kind of black
humour.
Taflinger published his online book in 1996. We can already chart some devel-
opments in sitcom subject matter that extend beyond that time. The sitcom Sein-
feld (the series was actually entitled The Seinfield Chronicles) was one of the
most successful series of the 1990s. Its pilot episode ran in July 1989, in its
first season in 1990 there were four episodes, in its second season (January to
June 1991) twelve episodes then its third through to ninth seasons each ran
the full American television season from August/September to May, with twenty-
one to twenty-four episodes. The last episode was broadcast in May 1998. (These
dates are for its scheduling in the USA.) Seinfield actually ceased when its cre-
ator and principal character, Jerry Seinfeld, decided to stop producing it, not
because audiences or sponsors had fallen away. Of Taflingers three subgenres,
the term domestic comedy seems most relevant, but the domestic situation was
that of three friends and a neighbour (Kramer), all much the same age. It wasnt
the mother, father and children of the nuclear family. The cramped apartment
of single urban dwellers, rather than the family home with gatherings in the
spacious kitchen, was the domestic setting. (You can find a great deal of infor-
mation on popular sitcoms on the web; for an interesting paper on Seinfeld
see http://web.mit.edu/mr mole/www/seinfeld.pdf; viewed 19 October 2004,
unattributed.)
The other most successful American sitcom of recent years must be Friends.
The pilot ran in September 1994, and the series began its first season immediately
a week later, running the full season of twenty-four episodes. The tenth and final
season aired the last episode in June 2004. Again, Friends was a domestic comedy
in that the characters lived together or close by, and incessantly talked about each
others everyday successes and failures but, like Seinfeld, the characters were of
the same generation, not members of a nuclear family, like The Brady Bunch.
Although each episode began in the local coffee shop, the urban apartments of
young singles were the usual location.
Sex and the City took this transition a step further: again, there was a group of
friends sharing each others lives, but the comedy scarcely derived from tradi-
tionally domestic situations. (This series first aired in the USA in June 1998; in
its sixth and final season its last episodes went to air in February 2004.) Moreover,
in this sitcom the location itself, New York, almost becomes a character in the
sitcom (it is after all in the title) as the friends meet in named restaurants, go to
specific art gallery openings and buy clothes or wedding presents in well-known
fashionable stores. The James Bond novels by Ian Fleming were noted for their
naming of consumer goods a prestigious brand of drink, of car. Similarly, in Sex
and the City, the choice of shoes, for example, went beyond the usual iconography
of signifying a social type to an identifiable brand, a narrative existent in its own
presence. Whether the viewer identified with a capitalist consumer ideology or
took the series as a parody of such a value system is up to her (the target audience
member is presumably a her).
Television is a conservative medium, but changes in society inevitably produce
ideological changes in television production. We can certainly see such changes in
the US domestic sitcom since the 1990s, as the domestic situation of many of its
targeted audience moved outside the traditional nuclear family of husband, wife
and children, out of the large family home into the small urban apartment, and out
of the anxieties and pleasures experienced through the different power relations
between those of different ages in the family into the anxieties and pleasures
experienced in interacting with ones contemporaries.
What new pleasures await us (and do they tell us anything about changes
in contemporary society)? Many new shows introduced in the 2004 US season
have crashed and burnt, but the two most successful, shown on American ABC,
are Desperate Housewives and Lost. The former takes a campy comedic look at
the secret lives of sexually frustrated wives (it sounds soapy but is described
as a series). Lost is about 48 strangers who survive a horrific plane crash
only to be stranded on a desert island with some gnarly creatures. It sounds
like a fictional version of reality TV survivor programs. Perhaps Housewives is
Friends and Sex and the City now married and suburban (from Josh Grossberg at
http://primetimetv.about.com; viewed 26 October 2004).
The sitcom appears to have begun in the USA (the first perhaps in 1947), but a
large number of sitcoms have been produced in Britain and have a more varied
selection of basic situations than are covered by Taflingers three-part analysis of

US subgenres. An excellent web facility is at www.british-sitcom.co.uk/list.shtml
(viewed 17 October 2004), which has an alphabetical listing of more than 800
British sitcoms, together with a shorter list of the top 50 shows and access
from the lists to many specific program details. A glance down the lists reveals
the variety and originality of many of these series. The British sitcom differs
from the US sitcom in its deployment of narrative features: as the Wikipedia
comments, The British sitcom tends to rely less on quick-fire jokes and quirky
characters than plots, the analysis of the British individual and exaggerated car-
icatures of everyday stereotypes. Perhaps there is more inclination towards the
M*A*S*H style of humour than in the USA; that is, black humour found in a seri-
ously painful situation. The Wikipedia comments on the British sitcom Steptoe
and Son, the rag-and-bone father and son (a dark reversal of the family domes-
tic sitcom): [It] can be heart-breaking as the ambitions of Harry are quashed
by his needy, manipulative father. (For further comparative comments on
the British sitcom, see www.wordiq.com/definition/Britcom; viewed 19 October
2004.)
The sitcom genre: narrative deployment
The group of characters, rather than the individual character, is usually the nar-
rative focus in the sitcom. It is from the interaction of these characters, rather
than the action of one character, that the comedy develops. (In tragic drama, on
the other hand, the focus is more typically on the individual character, especially
the tragic hero.) This gives a social rather than an individual emphasis to the
storyline(s) and a static rather than a dynamic effect to the narrative sequenc-
ing of events. In the sitcom, it is the group of characters and the possibilities of
their interaction that drive the actions in the plot. The sitcom begins with the
characters. (Propps Russian fairy tale, on the other hand, begins with the events;
characters are merely devices to carry out those events.)
This observation is borne out by BBC online instructions to writers want-
ing to submit comedy scripts for possible production. The BBC web site writ-
ersroom gives guidelines for Writing Narrative Comedy for television. Unlike the
panoramic outdoor vistas that film can pan across so well, the more intimate
reception context of television favours the close-up on facial expressions or the
mid-distance shot of two or three people talking together. It is not surprising
therefore that the BBC guidelines centre their suggestions on the characters:
When planning a new idea, the characters should come first and if they are the
right characters they will arrive with their world attached . . . Think about the
people first, give them histories, test them out in different situations where they
are under pressure and see how they react, think about what makes them happy
or scared or angry, write monologues for each character in that characters tone
of voice . . . Make the people authentic, put them in an authentic world and then
find their comic tone.
(www.bbc.co.uk/writersroom/writing/tvcomedy.shtml; 13 October 2004)
In these instructions you note the difference between the synthesis of narrative
asked for from writers and the analysis of narrative that the critical viewer might
offer. The BBC guidelines emphasise authenticity, the right characters bringing
their world (their human Umwelt) with them. A critical stance, on the other hand,
emphasises the mediation of the television experience and the constructedness of
the world (the diegesis) presented in the drama, the artfully chosen mise en scene
and mode of address. What seems authentic to the scriptwriter, and to the BBC
producers if they accept the script and to you or me as compliant viewers
derives from shared ideological perspectives and generic expectations.
Given that each episode in a sitcom series is in some way a repetition of the
previous episodes, and given that the narrative of the sitcom is usually generated
by the nature of the characters (and hence the nature of their interaction), it is not
surprising that the characters in the sitcom usually change little over time. This
also facilitates reruns and repeats in any order. Critics of the sitcom have focused
on this static nature, and linked it to a conservative ideology. For example,
[TVs] repetitive structures/formulas offer ritualistic reassurance but inscribe
a static view: the lack of development (particularly in the series) reinforces
the status quo and, in particular, presents the family as unchanging (www.
brown.edu//Departments/MCM/courses/MC11/outline/TV narrative outline.htm;
14 October 2004). However, a long-lasting sitcom like Friends might show devel-
opments in individual characters and changes in their interrelation, so that the
storyline acquires a direction, a more serial-like sequence, and, in consequence,
more soap opera-like potential. (The British crime series The Bill has suffered a
notable transformation of this type, as mentioned in chapter 12.)
The soap opera genre: ideology
The soap opera remains a more conservative television genre. Its origins mark it as
the domestic genre par excellence. In 1932 the detergent manufacturers Procter
& Gamble sponsored a program, a daytime serial domestic comedy, to advertise
Oxydol, a washing powder. The serials name was The Puddle Family. Hence the
term soap, and hence also the typical emphasis on family, or at least a group,
in these serials. The term opera was added in the late 1930s or early 1940s
and is usually taken to be a reference to the fact that most soap dramas had a
marked tendency to be rather larger than life and often prone to indulge in melo-
dramatic excess (Kilborn 1992: 141). Soaps, unlike sitcoms, are always serials,
but unlike the film serial of a set number of episodes they are never-ending or
at least they continue as long as audience interest, and sponsorship finance,

lasts.
Helena Sheehan, a lecturer in media studies in Ireland, has recorded her own
experiences as a viewer of soap operas:
Television soap operas came into the world and into my own life in America in
the 1950s. It was my mother and not me who was their target audience, but I saw
as much of them as school holidays and parental indulgence would allow. They
were utterly addictive and I have been hooked since then. Women would organise
their days around their stories and they became an essential ritual of everyday
life. These stories were meant to be about ordinary lives of ordinary people
in ordinary towns of the time, although it was extraordinary how many affairs,
surprise appearances and disappearances, exotic diseases, afflictions of amnesia,
murders, kidnappings and frauds befell such a small number of characters in
such small towns.
(www.comms.dcu.ie/sheehanh/itvsoap.htm; viewed 2 September 2002)
Perhaps you recognise some of these storylines from your own viewing. Note
the use of their to signify ownership or identification: women would organise
their days around their stories. We will see that identification with some stories,
but not others, in the accounts of Australian schoolgirls given by Patricia Palmer
Gillard, to be discussed shortly.
Looking back into her own past, Sheehan can see the conservative ideological
audience positioning that she and others then took for granted as natural:
These daytime dramas did take up matters rarely permitted on primetime tele-
vision then, such as marital breakdown, frigidity, extramarital sex, alcoholism,
professional malpractice. They did so, however, within tightly circumscribed
boundaries. Although these serials featured many transgressions of traditional
values, it was unthinkable to question those values. Whatever problems and pit-
falls characters encountered in their pursuit of the American Dream, they never
ceased to believe in it. Their tragedies were due to natural disasters or human
failings, but there was nothing wrong with God, marriage, motherhood, apple
pie or the American way.
That was by and large what most people in this society naively believed. It was
certainly what everyone I knew believed. However, for those who did see beyond
it and would have raised further questions, there was always the black list to
prevent them. It was a conservative form produced by an extremely conservative
and confident society.
The black list referred to is that associated with McCarthyism in the USA dur-
ing the 1950s, when suspected unAmerican activities in the motion picture and
broadcasting industries were rigorously investigated. This Cold War period of
intense scrutiny coincides with the decade of initial growth of the television indus-
try so it is not surprising that the most successful and hence most common nar-
rative genres developed specifically for television, the sitcom and the soap opera,
should be conservative in ideology. Although television was first used commer-
cially in 1941, its rapid expansion came after the end of World War II. From 1948
to 1950 in the USA, there was an especially rapid increase in the number of televi-
sion sets owned: 350,000 by July 1948, 2,000,000 by August 1949 and more than
five million by April 1950 (www.tvhistory.tv; 12 October 2004).
Moving forward to the early 1980s, Patricia Palmer Gillard, a teacher who did
postgraduate work at that time, interviewed Australian schoolgirls between the
ages of thirteen and a half and fourteen and a half (Cranny-Francis & Gillard
1990). The aim of her research was to understand how girls of this age defined
their experience of television viewing: the meaning it had in relationships with
friends and family and its significance to the way they thought about themselves
in the present and the future (p. 172). The following is part-summary and part-
quotation of her major findings.
The girls favourite television programs were soaps, and . . . the reasons they
gave for loyalty to favourite programs were strikingly similar. Girls enjoyed pro-
grams which they felt were true to life, realistic, down to earth, and which
usually concerned people their age and older . . . (p. 172). They usually didnt
like documentaries, the news and nature shows. These were boring (p. 173)
although in the sense of being true to actual experience, these programs could be
described as more realistic. For the girls, real meant real on a personal level, an
experience they could identify with, not real in the sense of factual. Gillard noted:
Whatever the kinds of interests the girls described, the striking finding through-
out the interviews was the association of realistic with an ability to be involved
with the situations and the people in a particular programme. There was not one
girl whose television viewing showed an undifferentiated enjoyment of a wide
range of programmes. Girls were very definite about favourite programmes and
their reasons for choosing them. However, their definition of realistic and true
to life was not that of an outsider making a judgement about the way life is, but
was more an intuitive response to the authenticity of the characters and events
portrayed.
(p. 178)
For example, one girl commented on the portrayal of a marriage in the soap, The
Sullivans: Her wedding wasnt like weddings now, it was different. They looked
like they were really, truly in love. It was more emotional people really felt about
it. Now, people just get married because everyone expects it (p. 175).
However, Gillards comment more an intuitive response (a natural response?)
might efface the girls learning of ideology. Cranny-Francis (the co-author) com-
ments:
. . . an alternative reading might be that the girls are learning the conventions of
the soap opera genre, the genre characterised as womens television (in the same
way that romantic novels are characterised as womens fiction) . . . [Perhaps]
what the girls are concerned with is not so much realism as consistency, that
characters and events are consistent not by reference to reality, but to the
conventions of the genre in which they are operating.
(pp. 1778)
Robyn Warhol, discussed later in this chapter, offers a particularly subtle reading
of learning to be feminine.
When a new soap began, girls in a particular group of friends decided whether
it would be one of their shows to watch (remember Sheehans comments on
womens ownership of and identification with specific soaps). Friends liked to
compare each other with the soap characters, although this comparison might
be put together with traits from different soap characters, even male characters.
However, this applied to talking about themselves in the present. I quote Gillards
important observations and conclusions:
. . . when it came to using television characters to predict their own future, to

represent themselves as adults, the picture was quite different. Diversity and
complexity gave way to uniformity. The girls used a narrow range of qualities
repeatedly to represent their future selves: they aspired to be friendly, under-
standing, and to live in a happy home, married and with children. The models for
this future self-representation were provided by sisters, mothers and female, not
male television characters . . . when it came to representing their adult selves, the
girls were apparently channelled into a narrow range of options which empha-
sised interpersonal skills, homemaker, mother. And they felt unable to appropri-
ate qualities from male characters.
(p. 174)
Since the male characters still typically had the more authoritative occupational
roles in the soaps, this limited the range of imagined futures. The girls responses
give an insight into the effects of ideology what seems culturally natural on
audience positioning, in reinforcing conservative and established values (see also
Fiske & Hartley 2003: 1114, 1578).
The origin of the soap as a daytime serial for women is supposed to per-
sist in the storylines centred on domestic crises, and focusing on the relations
and emotions of characters rather than action. When the soap was transferred
to the evening, the first being Peyton Place in 1964, more action and varied
locations were introduced to cater for the assumed interests of a wider audi-
ence: that is, men. These expanded soaps were sometimes given the genre super-
soap.
The soap opera: narrative deployment
First a caveat (a warning), which is relevant to all the chapters in this book, but
which especially needs to be remembered when studying soap opera. In studying
narrative in a media text we must initially note two features: first, the medium
in which the media text is realised; second, the social practices associated with
the production and reception of that media text. The kind of narrative analysis
that has proved helpful for the study of one medium will not necessarily translate
readily to the study of another. Modern literary theories of narrative typically
derived from the study of prose fiction, especially the novel, with the assumption
of a single author and a private context of reception (reading). The study of film
introduced the necessity to study a media text of image as well as language, with
the contribution of many agencies, commercial and creative, and a public context
of reception (viewing in a cinema). And then television: chapter 12 pointed out
some of the effects that the social practices of production and reception had on
narrative produced for television. Nowhere are these effects more pronounced
than in the genre of soap opera. The caveat reminds us that we must suit the kind
of narrative analysis we do to the genre in its media context, rather than assume
that narrative theories derived from the study of other media can be uncritically
applied.
Two comments are invariably made on the narrative of the soap opera: one, it
is non-linear and, two, it is open-ended. These are statements made about what is
traditionally called plot, the narrative ordering of events. Non-linear sequence of
events can describe any kind of disordering or repetition. Open-ended sequence
of events describes a lack of closure or denouement. What implications do these
observations have for the study of plot in the soap opera? Plot, the causal relation
of a sequence of actions, was the central concern of Aristotles analysis; character
was a secondary concern, although for Aristotle the better plot developed from
the appropriate character traits (such as virtue for a hero). But here in the soap
opera the concept of plot is better replaced by the concept of storyline. What
emerges instead as the central concept for studying the soap opera is character
and the interaction of characters.
In the soap opera genre, what is usually first planned is the setting, the social
context: a small town, a country district, a hospital. This remains relatively con-
stant from episode to episode. It provides continuity for viewers, and the lim-
ited number of sets (typically indoor) reduces production costs. In an analysis
of television programs, it is always worth noting the proportion of in-studio to
outdoor shooting, since it is usually related to the available budget; for example,
in episodes of the soap opera Days of Our Lives, a story of families in the town
of Salem, characters frequently encounter each other in an outdoor shopping
mall, Salem Place, which is patently fake, an indoor set. A serial that airs a one-
hour episode every day obviously has to have relatively low production values (the
amount of time and money spent on the way the show looks on screen).
This setting is populated with characters, typically in groups, such as one or

more extended families or the medical staff, who interact in the various (famil-
iar) sets. Some accounts of soaps speak of social realism, but I consider this a
misnomer. In all soaps, the crises and dramas of everyday life are unrealistically
exaggerated in number, although there are cultural differences in the realistic
social identification of the characters. In US soaps, characters are usually hand-
some, beautiful, rich and generally enviable, by materialist values. In the UK,
soaps have more typically focused on working-class communities, with specific
geographical settings, and with more realistic social concerns. (Robert C. Allen
attributes this to the origin of British soaps in the regional locations of commercial
broadcasting in the UK, in contrast to the centralised and non-commercial BBC.
Coronation Street began in Manchester in 1960. www.museum.tv/archives/etv/
S/htmlS/soapopera/soapopera.htm; viewed 19 October 2004.) In contrast, US
soaps float more freely in an undifferentiated environment of wealth, while the
Australian soaps (that is, their characters) interact in a lifestyle of middle-class
suburban comfort and good weather.
The field (subject matter) of soap opera is overwhelmingly that of interac-
tions between characters, but the storyline developed in those interactions is
subjectively interpreted. In an illuminating article, Feminine intensities: Soap
opera viewing as a technology of gender (1998), Robyn R. Warhol contrasts the
naive viewer, the one who tunes into a soap opera episode for the first time, with
the experienced viewer, a long-term viewer of the serial, who therefore has a
knowledge of the back story; that is, what has happened in previous episodes.
She writes, Occupying the reading position of the experienced viewer means
being able to interpret the unspoken aspects of the soap opera narrative: the long
looks and enigmatic remarks exchanged between characters, the double-takes,
the pauses in dialogue, and the seemingly arbitrary cutting off of scenes upon cer-
tain characters entrances. (www.genders.org/g28/g28 intensities.html; viewed 18
October 2004.)
Warhol speculates explicitly on the different readings of a particular storyline in
As the World Turns that differently experienced viewers might make. (She describes
the storyline as Emilys desperate attempts to interfere with Samanthas affair
with Craig so that she might become romantically involved with Craig herself a
summary that suits the purpose of, for example, a television program schedule.)
These are viewers for six days, for six months, for six years, for sixteen years, for
twenty-six years, for thirty-six years (!), and the plot that these viewers understand
differs considerably according to their knowledge of the back story. (The television
soap As the World Turns began in 1956; it was sponsored by Procter & Gamble,
the same detergent manufacturers who sponsored the first radio soap in 1932.
Obviously at that time the advertiser was satisfied that the genre appealed to its
target demographic.)
Warhol concludes, The current text sometimes drops allusions to details of
back story, so that the more initiated can put together the basics of the long-term
plot, but the experienced viewer who has gone through the feelings of all those
years of story will have a different relation to what is happening on the soap today.
She points out the difficulties this gives the academic who wants to analyse soap
opera plots (over and above the difficulties described by Hernstein Smith, dis-
cussed in chapter 3). In effect there is no single objectively closed plot (whether
as summary or as full narrative), only an open-ended weaving of storylines. View-
ers will subjectively interpret the plot according to their background knowledge
of the characters and their previous interactions, potentially gained not only from
their period of viewing but also from the reading of soap magazines, from inter-
action on soap fan web sites and so on.
Chapter 12 described the agency involved in the sequence of production steps of
a television narrative, but it is helpful to reconsider these matters with particular
reference to the writing of soap opera. In the following paragraph I summarise
these notes from the online article of Robert C. Allen, who writes of the genres
unique mode of production (he uses plot line rather than storyline).
First, the head writer (more usually female than for other television genres)
charts the narrative course for the soap opera over a six-month period and in
doing so determines the immediate (and sometimes permanent) fates of each
character, the nature of each intersecting plot line, and the speed with which
each plot line moves toward some (however tentative) resolution. Second, she
supervises the segmentation of this overall plot outline into weekly and then
daily portions, usually assigning the actual writing of each episode to one of a
team of scriptwriters (dialoguers as they are called in the business). Third, the
scripts return to the head writer for her approval. They then become the basis
for the production of each episode. Fourth, the long-term narrative trajectory
of a soap opera is subject to adjustment as feedback is received from viewers
by way of fan letters, market research, and . . . the weekly Nielsen ratings fig-
ures. (www.museum.tv/archives/etv/S/htmlS/soapopera/soapopera.htm; 19 Octo-
ber 2004.)
The head writer thus has considerable power over the creation and mainte-
nance of each soap opera narrative world (its diegesis), but the storylines she
charts must develop the lives of the existing characters acceptably. Any head
writer brought in to improve the flagging ratings of an ongoing soap is constrained
in her exercise of these options by the fact that many of the shows viewers have
a better sense of who the shows characters are and what is plausible to happen
to them than she does. Again we see the primacy of character over storyline, or
the development of plot, in the soap opera narrative.
The narrative open-endedness of the soap opera means that storylines pro-
liferate and to do this, characters must also proliferate. This means inter-
actions between characters proliferate. As dialogue, rather than action, is the
usual nature of interaction in the soap opera genre (compare the usual inter-
action of violence in the genre of action drama), this means that talk between
characters is the main vehicle of the soap opera narrative. (Note above that
scriptwriters are called dialoguers in the business.) On the pragmatic side, this
structure facilitates the context of reception: the same event is repeatedly dis-
cussed between different characters so that a viewer can leave the room or miss
a complete episode and still catch up on the lives of the characters when she
(producers assume) returns. On the theoretical side, feminist analysis has stud-
ied the proliferation of talk in relation to womens culture and socially assumed
understandings of the feminine. For example, in Fables and endless genealo-
gies: Soap opera and womens culture, Mary Ellen Brown and Linda Barwick
write:
Soap opera characters talk in cliches, they talk to themselves, they talk on the
telephone, they lie, they dissemble, they encourage others to get it off their chests,
to confess, to tell it like it is. Whereas the ideal woman in patriarchal discourse is
silent or silenced through her construction in dominant or masculine discourse
as unproblematic the fulfilled housewife, the selfless mother, the innocent vir-
gin, the happy whore the woman in the soaps embodies the contradictions
inherent in womens lives. In the soaps no one truth is ever allowed to predom-
inate in the multiple story lines that refuse to tie things into neat, unified happy
endings. And they all lived happily ever after is one of the basic masculine myths
challenged by soap operas.
(Continuum: The Australian Journal of Media & Culture, vol. 1,
no. 2 (1987), at wwwmcc.murdoch.edu.au/ReadingRoom/1.2/Brown.html;
19 October 2004)
Taking a feminist analysis further to consider gender rather than woman,

Robyn R. Warhols article, Feminine intensities, analyses the ebb and flow of
soap opera storylines and viewer response. I quote, selectively:
. . . it had been my impression that particular episodes [of As the World Turns] tend
to be unified around the representation of certain sets of emotions . . . anxious
days, angry days, erotic days, joyous days . . . My analysis of all the scenes in [six
weeks of] episodes indicates this is generally true . . . [However] the 26 episodes
are dominated by the expression of Angst, in the forms of worry, concern, tension,
anxiety, dread, suspense, depression, and unsatisfied sexual desire, except for
those episodes that function as the crisis point in a particular storyline, where the
dominant emotions are anger, terror, and erotic gratification. [A footnote here
indicates that this particular configuration of dominant emotions, especially
the emphasis on worry and anxiety, may be peculiar to As the World Turns.]
The emotional wave pattern cuts across the familiar five-day pattern of a mini-
climax on Wednesday and a cliffhanger on Friday . . . After 10 days or two weeks
of tension/worry/suspense/anxiety, one or more of the subplots will culminate in
a crisis day of rage/terror/eros.
(www.genders.org/g28/g28 intensities.html; viewed 18 October 2004)
At the same time, other storylines continue. Warhol adds that some brief scenes
from other storylines (which she calls subplots) reflecting happiness, warmth
or affection will always be present in the crisis episode and in the build-up and
recovery episodes before and after the crisis.
The crisis episode is not a resolution, since the open-endedness of soap opera
narrative does not permit plot closure. Rather, the narrative of soap opera,
described above, tends to a wave pattern. In Warhols words, This wave pat-
tern contributes to the rhythm of suspense in the serial form, and results from
the forms radical resistance of closure: no subplot is ever really resolved, as the
undertow of emotional repercussion after the crisis keeps the pattern of affect
constantly moving. (The pattern of affect is here the viewers emotional response
to the viewing.) Warhols insight, from studying the comments of long-term view-
ers (and being one herself) is that, although viewers responses are certainly not
identical to each other (viewers dont simply take up the emotion evinced by a
character), and are sometimes quite negative (disapproving of the storyline), these
responses nonetheless follow the pattern of intensities set by the soaps plotline:
even the viewers ironic outrage (a negative response) ebbs and flows with the
climaxes of the story. Her subtle conclusion is that Feminine emotional expe-
rience, in this view, does not emanate from the female body or even from any
given womans psychology. It is a process structured by culturally produced and
received intensities. This understanding of feminine gender, as a subject posi-
tion, can be taken up by a viewer of any sex. Any long-term soap opera viewer
whose daily mood tracks with the structure of the series is submitting, therefore,
to a technology of gender, a process that patterns and reinforces what the culture
assumes feminine emotion ought to be.
This feminine wave pattern, with its ebb and flow of affect, stands in
marked contrast to the Aristotelian plot of closure, resolution, denouement (well-
constructed plots must conform to the pattern of a whole . . . which has a begin-
ning, a middle and an end; McQuillan 2000: 41). Certainly, in the conclusion of
his book-length study, N. J. Lowes characterisation of the classical plot could be
called masculine, in Warhols terms: . . . above all, classical plotting is teleologi-
cal: it asserts the deep causality and intelligibility of its world even where it denies
human access to direct apprehension or control. As such, it is a uniquely powerful
system for the narrative articulation of claims about the order of the world (Lowe
2000: 260).
Conclusion
This chapter has focused on the different narrative structures of sitcoms and soap
operas in order to examine their different ideological operations. In chapter 2,
the term metanarratives was used to refer to the stories or myths, through
which a culture tells itself its ideology, its idea of what is natural in its social
order. In the light of this understanding, we could paraphrase Lowes state-

ment above: classical plotting has been a uniquely powerful system for telling
metanarratives; that is, for articulating the dominant ideology. From this per-
spective, the feminine narratives of the soap opera can be read as subversive,
undermining the masculine assumptions of an intelligible and objective world
order.
Part 4
Radio and print journalism
Chapter 14
Structures of radio drama
Anne Dunn
The history of radio drama is to a large extent a history of theorising the radio
medium; it charts the discovery of the nature of radio and its relationship to
the listener. Radio plays began as plays on radio. In the early days of radio, few
writers thought to write specifically for radio. It was considered a good medium
on which to broadcast plays written for the theatre; its distinguishing feature, the
absence of the visual dimension, was not considered a problem. Plays are, after
all, a literary form, and the canon of classical drama was prized for its language,
its use of words, rather than for what you could see happening on stage. Andrew
Crisell, who has written extensively about radio (1994, 1997, 2000), has pointed
out that until the sixteenth century at least people spoke of hearing a play rather
than seeing it, reflecting the relationship of drama to poetry in rhythm and rhyme.
There are examples of this usage in Shakespeares plays: Hamlet says, Follow him
friends; well hear a play tomorrow. The word audience is derived from the Latin
audire, to hear.
Crisell (2000) attributes an increased concentration on visual effects in theatre
to the development over time of new staging technology such as perspective
in scenery at the end of the seventeenth century and artistic innovations, such
as the elaborate machinery, spectacular sets and costumes of the Paris Opera
of the early eighteenth century. The result was that, by the time of Dryden and
Pepys, people were speaking of going to see plays. In the eighteenth century
the term spectators from the Latin spectare, to see, became an acceptable
synonym for audience. The eighteenth and nineteenth centuries saw improve-
ments in stage lighting, making a range of innovative visual effects possible; and
191
192 Radio and print journalism
of course the twentieth century saw the introduction of those quintessentially

visual mass media, film and television, completing our association of drama with
spectacle.
Yet through the twentieth and into the twenty-first century, drama in the blind
medium of radio has developed. It prospered before television and has survived
since, reasonably securely in Europe, more tentatively in Australia and the USA.
In the 1920s drama on radio made no concessions to its lack of vision; in fact,
the BBC behaved as though listeners could somehow tell if the performers were
not appropriately costumed, and when producing variety shows even included
dancers. Until theatre managers were able to prevent their productions being
recorded without authorisation, the BBC simply used to broadcast plays, vari-
ety shows and music hall live, as outside broadcasts directly from the theatres.
During music hall acts such as jugglers or dancers, listeners had to infer what was
happening from the reactions of the audience in the theatre.
By the end of 1925 the BBC had a revue program called Radio Radiance that
consisted entirely of light entertainment material written specifically for radio,
and this program produced the first entertainer whose celebrity was created by
radio, comedian Tommy Handley. In 1933 producers who feared radio would
steal their livelihood excluded the BBC from theatres, so it was forced to set
up its own variety department. It still continued to make few concessions to
the medium, putting actors in costume and make-up and using a live studio
audience.
Over the 1920s and 1930s, as the medium became established and audiences
grew, a growing number of dramatists felt radio was worth writing for among
them J. B. Priestley, Tyrone Guthrie and Dorothy L. Sayers. But the distinctive-
ness of the medium in these very early days of radio was thought to lie not in its
blindness but in a sort of clairvoyance: its ability to enable listeners to visualise
dramas of a kind that would not be possible within the confines of a stage. The
result of this belief was a number of dramatic productions so ambitious in scope
that listeners would have had the greatest difficulty in following them. For exam-
ple, the program notes for a stageless drama called Speed expressed a rather
tentative confidence that the events of the drama would be self-evident: There
is . . . no occasion to give details of scenes for the play is self-contained and
demands no introduction nor any stage directions. If the author has been
successful, this fantasy of the gods on high Olympus and the speed-mad, self-
destructive mortals below will tell its own story in its own way (quoted in Crisell
2000, from Briggs 1981: 120).
By the mid 1930s it was realised that there were limits to the visualising faculty
of listeners. Theorists returned to the centrality of the voice on radio and the
ability of radio to create an autonomous yet intelligible world of pure sound that
required no visualisation at all (Crisell 2000: 467). In other words, the emphasis
was again placed on the ear not the eye.
Structures of radio drama 193
Radio comedy
Comedy on radio had also to make a transition from stage to sound. Many
vaudeville comedians saw great opportunities in radio. The lack of an audience
was, however, a major problem. Radio required projecting a personality through a
box and not via a live audience. These former stage comedians based their humour
and timing on the response of their audience. Now they could not hear their audi-
ence and had to judge how best to deliver their lines. Some succeeded, but others,
despite stage and film successes, failed miserably. One way early radio produc-
ers solved the problem was to bring a live audience into the radio studio. This
worked well on the whole, but the problem again was always that the inevitable
visual elements of an act a shrug, a wink, a grimace might cause gales of studio
audience laughter but leave a listening audience at home completely out of the
joke, an alienating experience for them.
Early radio comedy was nonetheless very much like vaudeville, relying on songs
and banter between comedy teams such as Billy Jones and Ernie Hare in the USA.
Gradually, stand-up routines developed into comedic narratives and continued to
become more sophisticated as radio moved into the 1930s. It was at the begin-
ning of this decade that two of US radios greatest comedians made their broadcast
debuts. Jack Benny and Fred Allen were actually friends, but radio created an on-
air feud between them, effectively making them characters in a story. Early radio
personalities appeared as themselves. Later narrative series contained actors por-
traying characters unlike themselves. Jack Benny was not an actor, but a complex
and detailed life was built up around him and his cast involving not only his pro-
fessional life but also an on-air version of his personal life, with cast members
going over to his house, going shopping or on trips, taking the show on the road
and getting into various scrapes. This has a direct contemporary equivalent in the
TV show Seinfeld (hailed as highly innovative for precisely its integration of the
real Jerry Seinfeld with a fictional life).
The epistemological unreliability of sound
The reason people had such trouble knowing how to use radio is that understand-
ing radio is problematic, because sound is epistemologically unreliable; that is,
we cannot know the true nature of things as reliably through our hearing as
we can through sight. Of course our eyes can deceive us too, but not quite to
the same degree as our ears, when we are listening via the electronic medium
of radio. Erving Goffman used semiotics to identify the sound signification in
the conventions of radio drama and how they are meaningful (Goffman 1974).
Radio the sound exists in time, not space, as visual signs do. Because of
this, radio signs are constantly threatened by silence, because silence portends
non-existence. Moreover, without vision, sounds can be misleading as to what they

represent.
The easiest way to make this clear is to describe sound effects. Sound effects
were originally simulations of actual sound. Before the availability of recorded
real sound effects on CD, studio technicians used to do things like open and
close an umbrella rapidly to evoke the flight of a pigeon, crumple cellophane to
suggest the sound of a fire, bang coconut shells together to create the clop of a
horses hooves, or shake a cardboard box with gravel in it to convey the sound of
marching troops. The fact that these sound effects work so well on radio and yet
are not what we think they are an umbrella is not a pigeon, nor a coconut shell
a horse points up this untrustworthiness of radio sound.
On the other hand, this same unreliability, which can be seen as a disadvantage,
is also a great strength of radio, a dramatic strength. And this was demonstrated
by the very first play ever written for radio, by Richard Hughes in 1924. Called A
Comedy of Danger, it was set in a coal mine in which the lights have failed; in other
words, in total darkness. For the first time in its history, theatre had become some-
thing that could be presented in the dark; or, to put it another way, something that
could portray the invisible. It is partly for this reason that radio has been called
the invisible medium (Lewis & Booth 1989). Another famous play written for
radio in 1954 is Dylan Thomas Under Milkwood, and it too begins in darkness.
The play opens with a single soft voice: To begin at the beginning. It is spring,
moonless night in the small town, starless and bible black, the cobblestreets silent
and the hunched courters-and-rabbiters wood limping invisible down to the
sloe-black, slow, black, crowblack fishing-boat-bobbing sea . . .
The narrators voice breaks the silence and enables the listener to see with the
minds eye the dark and sleeping village. Radio allows us to see in the dark. So
radios unreliability as a means of getting the audience to visualise accurately led
to the creation of wholly original forms of drama, in which much is evoked but
there is nothing to see. These forms of drama consisted not only of plays set in
literal darkness, like A Comedy of Danger or the opening of Under Milkwood, but
also of plays with abstract themes. In such a play, the action might be all internal
to a single character, a debate or crisis in which the mind of a single character is
split into different voices.
The limitations of sound can also be exploited for comedic or psychological
ends. For example, in Harold Pinters A Slight Ache, written in 1959, an elderly
couple take into their home a third character who was selling matches outside
their garden gate. Because they discuss this character and talk to him, we readily
assume he exists. But then we realise that the character never speaks, we never
hear from him, and so because silence on radio suggests non-existence we begin
to wonder whether this character might in fact be a figment of the elderly couples
imagination, a means by which they can communicate to each other thoughts
and feelings that they might find too painful to express directly. But the point is
we dont know and this ontological uncertainty is central to the meaning of the
play. It is an uncertainty that of course would be immediately and damagingly
resolved if the play were to be performed on a conventional stage.
The Pinter play also exemplifies the way in which silence can be powerful
on radio. Correctly used, prepared for, it can be as expressive as words. There
is an important distinction between the use of dramatic silence and dead air.
Dead air is just that the absence of any sound at all. The fade to dead air,
the fade out, is the audio equivalent of cinema or televisions fade to black: it
signifies the end of a scene and heralds a shift forward in time or to another
space. There are lots of such short silences in radio; but if they go on too long
they are disturbing. We look at the radio and wonder: whats happened? Has the
station gone off air? Dead air can cause concern to listeners if it goes on too long;
and they tend to tune to another station to check the problem isnt with their radio.
Dead air must exist only for less time than it takes a listener to reach for the dial or
button.
But the other kind of silence, dramatic silence, is not absolute silence. It is
the silence of a pause for thought, of reaction, of an action that interrupts the
flow of sound. It can be filled with anticipation, expectation, wonder. During this
kind of silence, things happen invisibly, in our minds. When sound speech
is abruptly halted, listeners are immediately alerted to the fact that something
has happened. And while they wait to find out what it is, the mind is filled with
possibilities: is it a kiss, a blow, a gun, a monstrous apparition? In order for the
difference between dead air and dramatic silence to work on radio, it must be
not only structural but also technological. These moments of dramatic silence
are technically not silence at all; they are atmospheric or ambient noise what
broadcasters refer to as atmos. Unless recorded in a space that has been specially
built to create an absence of sound, all spaces and places carry their own audio
atmosphere. Atmos refers to whatever sound is left in the recording environment
when people stop talking: traffic, air conditioning, a computer motor hum, distant
sounds of children playing, the barely perceptible buzz of a fluorescent light or
rustle of clothing. It might be no more than the slightest movement of air across
the microphone, as someone breathes. Atmos is potentially the most subtle noise
we hear on radio.
Acoustics and perspective
Through sound, radio can take us to other places and other times. This flexibility
in the handling of time and space is a distinctive characteristic of radio drama.
As earlier chapters have described, the manipulation of time and space in cinema
required the gradual development of specific visual codes, such as continuity
editing, and the development of audience competence in reading those codes.
Compared to radio, flexibility with time and space is difficult and expensive for
film or television and quite beyond the limitations of the conventional theatre.
On radio, the elements of sound effects, speech and music can move the audience
about in both space and time, not just in the way these audio codes are arranged;
that is, edited and mixed together as cinema and television do with the visual
but also in terms of the technical qualities of the sounds.
In addition, we can distinguish between sound acoustics and sound perspective.
The acoustics of sound refers to the way it is treated technically, such as the
distortion of it for effect. The term perspective refers to the spatial qualities
of sounds, such as whether they are heard close up or as if from a distance.
Experienced radio actors and producers learned to create perspective just by how
close to or far from the microphone the speaker stood. Sound is actually the
movement of air or rather the vibrations in air caused by moving objects, be
it the coil or diaphragm of a microphone or the delicate movements inside the
human ear. But we can hear space, either through the reverberation of sound
on walls and other objects (the bouncing of sound waves off surfaces, with an
effect on the listener similar to an echo) or by the distances between different
sound sources. If there is reverberation, the sense of a large enclosed space, like
a hall or church, is created. If there is no echo, if sound is deadened, then the
sense of a small or open space can be created. In both cases, space is created
acoustically.
What kind of space it is can be created not only by whether there is reverbera-
tion but also by how much reverberation there is and how long that reverberation
lasts. A lot of reverberation over a long duration creates the effect of a large empty
space, whereas no reverberation produces the sense of outdoor space. A large, fur-
nished interior a living room, say is produced by using a little reverberation for
a long duration; that is, longer than the normal reverberation time of 0.2 seconds.
The opposite effect a small but echoey room like a bathroom is created by using
a lot of reverberation for a short duration. Meanwhile, if all the sounds emanate
from the same point, a lack of space is created. But if one sound is foregrounded
against a background of other sounds, more distant ones, then a sense of a larger
or extensive space is created. This is what is meant by audio perspective.
Together, acoustics and perspective indicate the spatial dimension of the envi-
ronment occupied by the sounds. The radio drama studios of the BBC or the
Australian Broadcasting Corporation (ABC) contain different acoustic environ-
ments built into them. The ABC, for example, has a small dead air space inside
the larger one of the studio proper and different floor surfaces, to simulate steps
on pavement or wood. The acoustic properties of sound can convey information
that on screen or stage we could see at a glance (but which might be very expensive
or impossible to create, especially on stage). When radio producers add to the use
of acoustics and perspective additional noises, in the form of sound effects and
music, they can create specific environments that are immediately recognisable
by a listener, such as a busy street, a restaurant or a farm.
Styles of radio drama
Thanks therefore both to the limitations and the evocations of this sound-only
medium, radio has added new dimensions to what drama is. Crisell (2000) argues
that these new dimensions of radio drama have in turn influenced the conven-
tional stage, particularly the theatre of the absurd. He identifies these dimensions
or characteristics as:
1 the substitution of an inner landscape for an exterior one, and the adoption
of a flexible attitude towards time and space, which can expand or contract
according to the requirements of the characters;
2 the creation of a fluid, indeterminate environment in which the distinctions
between fact and fantasy can be and often are blurred;
3 the use of precise, succinct language as a kind of weapon against the over-
whelmingly problematic and disorderly nature of experience (Crisell 2000:
472).
Such British writers as Harold Pinter and Tom Stoppard, as well as John
Mortimer and Samuel Beckett, have been very committed to radio, employing it
as an ideal medium for their considerable skills with the ambiguities and nuances
of the spoken word.
By the 1970s advances in radio technology such as FM stereo led to what is
called acoustic art in radio drama and features. This arouses fierce argument,
with its proponents describing it as a new art form in its own right, and its crit-
ics using such phrases as a well-puffed curiosity, the product of technicians and
producers rather than of writers. At its most extreme, in almost a return to the
very first radio productions, these programs do not use words or recognisable
speech at all but attempt to construct a narrative with a sequence of realistic
recognisable sound effects; not the symbolic evocations of the coconut shells
and cellophane but replications of the everyday sounds of the world around us,
what radio writer Jonathan Raban calls iconic representations, because of their
concern with sounding real.
It can be argued that radio which privileges non-verbal sound sound effects,
music and silence is much more confusing to the listener than radio drama that
acknowledges the fundamental nature of words if communication via the radio
medium is to be successful. In this view, noise, music and silence need to play an
essentially secondary and supportive role in relation to speech. Too many sound
effects can be extremely confusing and seem cluttered to the ear of the listener.
By way of illustration the second part of this chapter examines two excerpts
from different examples of radio drama. The first is from a series on the Radio
National network of the ABC, called Airplay, described as a program of new
Australian radio writing and performance. Weekly half-hour dramatic fiction
experiments with form and explores a wide range of subjects, genres and styles,
aiming to offer innovative and engaging programs. This particular drama was
called Slowianska Street, by Noelle Janaczewska, and was first broadcast in
September 2001. It is described as a requiem for voices and other sounds.

The play explores identity and disappearance across the history of 20th-century
Europe, from the cities of the 1930s and 1940s to the post-Glasnost era (ABC
2004).
The writer was apparently inspired by music from Polish composer Goreckis
Symphony of Sorrowful Songs, which is used throughout the play. The piece relies
heavily on the use of acoustics and perspective as well as the integration of speech
and sound effects. This kind of work is characterised by multi-tracking; that is,
the use of layers of sound, at differing acoustics and perspectives, built up to
create particular effects of complexity and, sometimes, obscurity. It is impossible
in a book chapter to convey fully the effects of what is described below, but some
description and analysis might help to create a sense of how this kind of acoustic
art works, as well as what is possible on radio.
Slowianska Street begins with sound that establishes an exterior perspective,
perhaps a street, almost certainly in a town or city, although not one busy with
motor traffic. We hear a mix of a church bell in the distance, the murmur of con-
versation, walking feet on pavement. Gradually, sound that is unclear yet men-
acing grows in volume, then as it becomes quite loud it gives way to a babble
of unintelligible voices with reverberation, speaking Polish. This is supplanted in
turn by the tramp of marching feet, in time, suggesting we are hearing soldiers.
This fades out and we hear the tolling of bells, mixed with low music (the Gorecki
symphony), over which a number of adult voices, men and women, recite peoples
names and dates (which sound like their birth and death dates so we must assume
they are dead), sometimes with anecdotal descriptions. At intervals, the recita-
tion and the music are abruptly interrupted by a chorus that chants Slowianska
Street.
Since we have heard street sounds at the start of the play, and know (if we
heard the beginning) it is called Slowianska Street, we can deduce we are hearing
the stories of people from the street. We could go further and infer a temporal
and causal sequence, from normal life to military invasion (the interruption of
street sounds by the tramp of marching feet and funereal tolling of the church
bell) to the death of the individuals. The narrative requires concentration and
interpretation on the part of a listener, and far less certainty is possible than if
one were watching a conventional Hollywood film, for example. This is the fluid,
indeterminate environment Crisell speaks of. Indeed, at this point it is impossible
to know whose voice we are hearing. These sounds could as easily represent the
memories of an individual as the documentary evocation of historical events.
Whichever might be the case, the emotional effect of the sequence is moving and
absorbing, an example of the direct appeal of radio to the heart, which is one of
the reasons why Marshall McLuhan (1964) called radio a hot medium.
Compare this now with a play that is abstract, in the sense of its being inter-
ior, about what is happening in the mind of a character. The play is called The
Mermaids Tail, by Lucy Gough, and it was commissioned and broadcast by BBC
Radio 4 in 1999. This production used multi-tracking (more than one source of
sound) in a less complex way, but the meanings and emotional effect created are
no less complex than those of the first example. It begins with a long monologue,
mixed with sound effects, of music and water. The other elements it uses are the
BBC shipping forecast and documentary material on the mythology of mermaids,
written and narrated by Marina Warner. The stage directions, which appear in
the script, have been removed, since a listener would not have the benefit of them.
SFX is a shorthand term for sound effects.
GIRL: (SFX RADIO PLAYING AND WATER RUNNING.) Stupid scales.
(REASSURING HERSELF)
Itd be less with me clothes off.
(DESPAIR)
It should be less than that with all this off!
SFX RADIO ON IN THE BACKGROUND. THE GIRL SINGS TUNELESSLY
BOBBY SHAFTOE. SFX GIRL BRUSHING TEETH, WATER SPLOSHING
AND RUNNING.
Ouch!
SFX RUNNING WATER
GIRL (INT.):
I float.
Float,
Flesh,
Bone,
Hair,
I float.
Lighter than air.
Float in the bath.
Hair draped around me.
I float.
Like the Lady of Shallot.
(SFX: SHE DISTURBS THE WATER)
Or a fish.
(SILENCE)
Skin stretched silver.
Ridged over bone.
I float.
A pale white corpse.
Mountain ranges breaking surface at their tips.
As an underbelly of coral leads to a dark triangle of submerged forest.
(SHE MOVES IN THE WATER)
Sometimes . . .
Suddenly revealed by the tide pull.
Folds and ridges fall either side,
As the sea erodes the edge.
Carving it.
Shaping it.
A long Atlantic ridge merges . . .
Skin turning bone . . .
(SILENCE)
I could disappear,
Float away.
(SFX: THE GIRL SLOSHES SOME WATER OUT OF THE BATH)
Dissolve in the water,
Sink without trace,
Be swallowed up.
Whod care?
(SFX REVERBERATION OF GIRL HOLDING BREATH UNDER THE
WATER, THEN SWOOSH OF WATER AND CHANGE OF ACOUSTIC AS SHE
RESURFACES)
A pale naked corpse . . .
Carving my shape . . .
(UNDER THE WATER SFX AND COMING UP AGAIN)
You think you know who I am.
What I want to be.
What I want to do with my life.
But youre wrong,
completely wrong.
(SILENCE)
I swallow words . . .
Skinning each one as it rises,
Gutting it.
Boning it.
Holding words down,
down deep in my belly.
Sustaining myself on a feast of silence.
On the flesh of unspoken words.
Having to be different.
If I try, if I try and hawk up the words, they lodge in my throat like shells.
Only silence can truly express the hugeness of this.
You dont understand me,
understand what its like, all this changing.
Your words shoal like mackerel,
Darting through the water.
Changing . . .
Changing.
Silently.
Shapeshifting . . .
(DEFIANTLY)
I swim caverns. (Gough 2000)
Later in the play we hear the voice of a mature woman, clearly the young
womans mother, who complains about how long she is being in the bathroom.
The play begins with a well-known pop song. Since music can locate us in time
and space, a listener can infer the time is now or very recent and the place likely
to be Western. That it is England is confirmed almost immediately by the young
English-accented female voice over the sound effects of water running into a bath.
A distant siren of the kind heard on police cars or ambulances suggests were in
a city. The girls words: Stupid scales . . . itd be less with me clothes off , tell us
shes in a bathroom and is running a bath, if we havent already realised that.
The title is not announced until two minutes into the play. The title and the
talk by Marina Warner tell us that the subject is somehow related to mermaids.
However, it is not clear where the commentary is coming from, where it is in the
world of the play. Is it the radio (we have heard the sounds of a radio being tuned
before Warner starts speaking) and therefore diegetic; that is, in the world of the
play, or is it non-diegetic; that is, sound that only the audience, not the characters,
can hear? Despite this ambiguity, listeners might have a pretty good idea what is
happening. For example, the changes in the acoustics convey that the girl has
gone under the water. Words and other sounds work together to create meaning
for the listener, but there is room for more than one interpretation of events and
the play. It might just be about a young woman who wants to be a mermaid, or
it might be about the experience of the eating disorder anorexia nervosa. In fact,
in the script, Gough describes the character as slightly anorexic (Gough 2000).
The difficulty of knowing exactly what we are hearing remains despite the use of
dialogue (between the young woman and her mother); yet we can interpret the
audio codes of sound effects, music and talk to set up and follow the narrative
more easily than is the case with Slowianska Street, which uses few words and
no dialogue. This is highly imaginative use of the radio medium that moves us as
listeners between worlds, exterior and interior.
The great majority of radio drama today, especially on the various BBC net-
works, is more conventionally play-like (that is, using a mode of realism) than
either of these two examples. In listening to these, we draw upon our knowledge
not only of radio but also of theatre and even television; we can visualise what is
happening. Radio plays of this kind privilege words, particularly dialogue, while
using layers of sound to situate listeners in space and time. All words, music,
sound effects are narrative elements and serve to construct and develop the
story.
Conclusion
In an age of multi-channel digital and interactive television, as well as many other

sources of visual mass entertainment and the Internet, it is perhaps remarkable
that radio drama has survived at all. In Australia, original commissioned work is
heard only on ABC Radio National, which has very small ratings, and there it is
constantly at the mercy of budget cuts because, compared to radio talk or music
in flow formats, drama is expensive to produce. Similarly, in the USA, except on
public radio, drama has all but disappeared. In Britain, radio drama is a more
securely established tradition; the radio serial The Archers has been going since
the 1930s and is still regularly listened to by a loyal audience of a respectable
size. The quality UK daily newspapers (such as the Independent or the Guardian)
offer previews and reviews of radio drama, albeit in the context of much more
television coverage. In other parts of Europe Germany and Scandinavia, for
example it is also still a vigorous radio form, although it does not attract large
audiences.
Radio drama requires harder work for contemporary audiences accustomed to
the ubiquitously visual, which is so much easier to read. Yet radio offers unique
dramatic strengths, in its power to create spectacle of the mind and transport the
listener to other worlds.
Chapter 15
Radio news and interviews
Anne Dunn
No matter what the radio station, the news is a distinctive form of radio sound.
It is obviously not music, and it differs from other radio talk in a number of
identifiable ways. News is usually at the top of the clock; that is, the main bulletins
occur on the hour. The fact that news usually starts at the top of the hour is an
important part of the way radio structures time throughout the radio day. News
on the hour is usually announced with an audio call to attention. This could be
as simple as a voice cue from an announcer or the pips of a time signal, or it
could be as elaborate as the appropriately named Majestic Fanfare that heralds
the radio bulletins on the Australian Broadcasting Corporation (ABC), the most
widely recognised news theme in Australia. Whatever it might be, nearly all radio
stations have some kind of aural cue to the listener that the news is about to begin.
Most radio is live to air; part of establishing the credibility and authenticity
of news is that it comes to listeners in the here and now, even though the voice
reports of the journalists might have been pre-recorded. In its distinguishing struc-
ture and sound, news can be called a genre of radio programming. And just as
media theorists and news practitioners distinguish between tabloid and broad-
sheet newspapers, so we can distinguish subgenres and discourses of radio news.
News on radio has a particular, specific mode of speech and register of address.
News writing is sufficiently recognisable as a genre for it to be satirisable. The
way newsreaders speak is also different from the way other announcers on radio
address their audience; it is more formal and less conversational.
The news on commercial music radio, such as the DMG-owned Nova FM in
Australia or on Virgin Radio in London (UK), sounds very different from the news
on Classic FM (there are stations of this name both in Australia, where it is an
203
ABC that is, public service station, and in Britain, where it is commercial).
Listeners recognise all of them as news, and at the same time the differences in
sound are part of the marketing of each station, its positioning. News on radio is
an event within a usually formulaic structure of repetition and rotation of events,
arranged in a sequence in such a way as to disguise the seams or transitions from
one to the next. The aim is a seamless flow of sound, within which there are recog-
nisable punctuation marks, of which news is a regular and important structuring
one. The news is a part of a radio stations credibility with its listeners. As is reit-
erated throughout this book whenever news is mentioned, what is selected to be
in the news is an attempt to interpret the world and its events to listeners. While
it is possible to generalise about what journalists will define as news, the bulletins
are also tailored in content and in style to the assumed or desired audience (the
illocutionary audience, to use Rosemary Huismans term from chapter 12).
Stories in the news and news values
Journalists refer to episodes in the news as stories; in that sense, narrative can
be seen as the professional norm. The professional concept of a news story has
both content and form: the reasons for its being identified as a news story that
is, as newsworthy and the way it is constructed.
The values that identify a person, an event or an issue as newsworthy were set
out in chapter 11. They include:
r Consequence or impact: what effects will this story have on the audience? The
greater and more direct the effects, the more likely it is to be selected as news-
worthy.
r Prominence: important, known people and institutions are more likely to be
heard in the news. Celebrities are more likely to make news because being
considered newsworthy is part of the phenomenon of celebrity.
r Proximity: may be cultural or geographical, and is an aspect of relevance to
the audience. Events close to home are considered more important than ones
that occur far away, unless they happen to people or in places culturally close.
r Unambiguity: stories are more likely to be selected if they can be reduced to
simple levels, in pursuit of clarity and because broadcast news stories are so
short.
r Predictability: stories about or related to known events such as anniversaries,
release of statistics, award presentations or launches.
r Unpredictability: an events rarity or unexpectedness will give it news value.
r Conflict: events are often represented in terms of conflict or oppositions, as an
aspect of unambiguity or for dramatic value.
r Human interest: the tragic, the ironic, the cute and so on.
r Timeliness: freshness, newness, immediacy an overriding concern is to
capture the story as close to the moment of its happening as possible. This
Radio news and interviews 205
is particularly important in radio, which is characterised by its immediacy, its

liveness (Conley 2002: 42).
These news values are some of the reasons why some events, issues or people
are identified as newsworthy and not others.
Radio news structures
Radio news bulletins typically follow a structure that begins with an audio signal
that the news is about to start (the call to attention), sometimes followed by
headlines indicating what stories are to come. Next there is a series of individual
news stories, beginning with a lead or most important story and often ending
with a lighter, so-called colour story and perhaps sports news and weather. This
order varies from station to station, affected by the presumed audience for each.
Stories in radio news normally take one of three forms, the names of which vary
slightly from place to place. The simplest is a straight read, reader or copy read
story; as the titles imply, this is a written typescript read by a newsreader, without
any other sound. The second kind is an intro plus voicer, or voice story/report.
In this, the newsreader has only one or two sentences of introduction to the story,
which conclude with a phrase that introduces the reporter, such as More from . . ..
The journalist is then heard reading the second part of the story, occasionally live
but more often pre-recorded, and the journalists voice is the only one we hear. A
variation on this form is an introduction by the newsreader followed by a grab
(a short piece of audio, usually edited from a longer interview) from a narrator
who is not a reporter, but identified as a significant figure in the story (intro plus
grab).
The final form is the package or intro plus package. It includes a newsreaders
introduction, again usually quite short and concluding with a spoken throw to
the name of the reporter. The second part is a pre-recorded and packaged item,
consisting both of the reporters voice and of the voice or voices (grabs, sound
bites or actuality) of relevant people, speaking for themselves, albeit in edited
versions. An example of a package is given a little later in this chapter, in the
story from the reporter called Luke Lawler about pay television, using a grab
of the Opposition communications spokesman. The length of such grabs, as in
television news, has become shorter and shorter, as little as four or five seconds,
which is really only enough to provide convincing evidence that the person has
been spoken to by a journalist. Sometimes, if the event being reported suggests it,
there will be other actuality; that is, sound recorded at the scene and mixed with
the reporters and any other voices. An example would be a report of a protest or
demonstration, which might begin with the sound of protestors chanting, then the
reporter would come in, describing the scene and usually then linking to grabs of
such people as the relevant government minister and perhaps someone speaking
on behalf of the protestors.
The length of each story type varies but is generally only between fifteen and
twenty seconds for a read and fifty seconds for the longest package. The number
and type of stories in any bulletin varies according to the length of the bulletin and
the particular radio station. Radio stations that play music, especially popular
music for a target audience of younger people, tend to run fewer and shorter
bulletins than weightier talk-based stations such as ABC Radio National, BBC
Radio 4 or National Public Radio (NPR) in the USA. Commercial stations that
are music-based tend not to put resources into news (it is relatively expensive
to produce), so they rely on news agencies (the wires) or syndicated network
news reports and have few reporters of their own. This means that the form
of their news is likely to feature more read-only stories and fewer voicers and
packages.
Radio news and the inverted pyramid
As described in chapter 11, the classic structure for news stories is referred to as
an inverted pyramid. Traditionally, journalists have been (and still are) taught to
begin each story with a lead or introductory paragraph that contains the most
important pieces of information in the story and answers at least two or three key
journalistic questions (the five Ws and the H): Who and What, sometimes also
Where and When; more rarely, Why and How.
Here is an example from an ABC radio news bulletin: Insurance giant AMP
has struck an enterprise deal with its staff where family issues are taken into
account . . . in return for greater flexibility. This opening par gives us the Who
and the What, and summarises the most important information in the story.
Subsequent paragraphs give more information and background.
The inverted pyramid is a newspaper structure, designed to be read by its
audience (see chapter 11 for the history of the inverted pyramid and theo-
ries about why it developed and has persisted). But radio news is written to
be heard. In the same ABC radio bulletin is another story that demonstrates a
different structure; one considered more appropriate to radio news. It begins
with what is sometimes referred to as the tease lead; that is, a lead or intro-
duction that tells listeners what kind of story they are going to hear. The lead
is: Pay TV is causing more embarrassment for the Federal Government. This
lead only gives the Who and a bit of the What, by means of a metaphor: pay TV
and the Federal Government are personalised and individualised, as if they were
able to cause or be caused embarrassment. But listeners do not find out what
the source of embarrassment is until the second and subsequent paragraphs;
the story unfolds in a narrative structure. There is a disruption to equilibrium,
and a character faces change; in this case, the head of the Transport and Com-
munications Department takes the blame and offers to resign over a bungled
tender process. The story then introduces a second narrator in addition to the
newsreader, that is in the form of a reporter, whose voice report tells the story
chronologically.
The newsreader goes on to say: Luke Lawler reports the government has been
forced to abort the tender process for new microwave pay TV licences. And Lawler
is then heard, telling us quite a complicated little saga:
In January this year, when microwave licence holder Steve Cosser threatened
to upstage satellite delivered Pay TV, the Government said it would legislate to
block him until satellite Pay TV was on air. That legislation is now in place. But
back in January, the government also decided to stop issuing any new microwave
licences, terminating the tender process at the last minute. That decision was
overturned in the courts, and the tender process went ahead. Now, due to a
bureaucratic bungle, the process has again been scrapped.
This story moves in time, between what happened in the past (In January this
year, back in January) and the consequences in the present (that legislation is
now in place, Now . . . the process has again been scrapped), but it is essentially
a linear chronology, bringing the listener up to date with the story so far. The
narrative has no resolution, however, no closure. Moreover, it is an episode that
is presented adjacent to another episode in the same overarching story of the
introduction of pay TV. The story that immediately follows this one is a copy
read, with a grab. It refers not only to what it calls the pay TV saga but also to
the department heads offer of resignation:
The Federal Opposition is renewing its push for a Senate inquiry into the pay
TV saga, and is calling for senior Communications Minister Bob Collins to stand
aside.
Opposition Communications spokesman Richard Alston plans to hold talks
with the Democrats today when the Senate resumes sitting.
Senator Alston claims the Prime Ministers refused to accept the Department
Heads offer to stand aside, to protect Senator Collins.
And then we hear Alstons voice, saying that if the department heads resignation
is accepted, then the minister will also have to resign. There is an understood
meanwhile at the start of this story; coming as it does straight after the Luke
Lawler report, we are effectively being told what else is going on at the same time
in another part of the narrative. In its open-ended and fragmentary structure, this
story is not unlike that of soap opera.
The second news item about pay TV does not provide a resolution to the story
but another episode, which is connected to the first by topic, time (it is also in the
present) and conflict. Conflict is a key news value, as is the journalistic require-
ment, especially strong in public service broadcasters such as the ABC, to present
both sides of the story, which is defined as balance and is one of the ways broad-
cast news constructs news as not only real but also true and fair.
Narrative structures and functions in radio news
The examples above illustrate the application of Todorovs circular narrative pro-
cess in news, from equilibrium through disruption (Todorov 1977); but in this
case there is no possibility of a newly restored equilibrium, at least within the one
news story. Levi-Strauss narrative theory of binary oppositions and Propps narra-
tive functions or character roles (discussed by Rosemary Huisman in chapter 3)
can also be applied to the use of conflict in news narratives, in the context of
stories constructed around heroes and villains and around us and them. It has
long been recognised that not everyone has a voice in the news; some people
are represented without being able to speak for themselves they are talked
about whereas others are able to speak. In the example just used, a senior federal
politician, Senator Alston, is heard speaking. It is typical to hear from such people
in the news; it is not typical to hear from members of the general public or mem-
bers of minorities, those characterised as deviant or otherwise marginalised. So
the cast of characters is quite restricted in news as a form, and this is apparent in
radio news in terms of whose voices listeners hear. It is not difficult to find exam-
ples of news depicting people, nations or organisations as heroes or villains.
News stories about dramatic events, such as accidents or natural disasters, as well
as those about salient political issues, such as asylum seekers or acts of violence
(terrorism), provide a rich source of such oppositions.
Notice how the first of the two stories under discussion began: Pay TV is caus-
ing more embarrassment for the Federal Government. This opening sentence
assumes knowledge of a context on the part of the listener; otherwise to use the
word more is meaningless (a listener who has not heard previous stories, or is
unaware of the story so far, can infer from the word more that there is a con-
tinuing story). These two items are part of what journalists call a running story,
one the impact of which lasts for several days or even weeks. Often such a story
will give rise to other, related ones. Currency is the value whereby something is
selected as news because similar issues or events are already in the news.
Because there are so many radio bulletins compared to television news or edi-
tions of newspapers, radio stories usually are updates; they are episodes in a
continuing story. Because each radio news story is so short less than a minute,
sometimes less than thirty seconds and bulletins themselves are short, typi-
cally five minutes or less (with exceptions, especially in public service radio),
radio news has no time to provide a context or background to any story except
in the briefest terms. And the open-ended format of radio news stories means
that there is no end to them either; they both start and finish in the middle
of some larger story. This is also true of radio news bulletins as a whole; they
are a collection of stories, usually without any connection between one and the
next, and this does not constitute a classic narrative in structural terms. In recent
years, however, an increasing use of narrative structures has emerged, and this is
taken up in the section headed Radio news and narrative towards the end of the
chapter.
Modes of speech on radio and broadcast news writing
The mode of address of radio is uniquely direct. Radio works hard to address
each of us personally. Radio presenters talk as if they are talking to one person,
and this is the way they are trained. Radio speech strives to create the illusion of
personal and verbal interaction, the illusion of participation and response, even
though it is essentially a one-way medium, talkback or phone-in radio aside. The
way someone talks to an audience in a hall or conference room, where they are
addressing people as a group they can see in front of them, is quite different
from the way a late-night radio DJ talks to his or her audience. Speakers in a
meeting or at a public talk tend to raise their voice slightly, even if amplified (and
amplification itself is a clearly artificial device), and to speak carefully and clearly.
Very often they will speak from notes.
Radio speech, on the other hand, is intended to sound natural, conversational
and spontaneous, even if it is in fact scripted. The challenge of much writing for
radio is that it must be written in a way that can be read aloud and sound like
spontaneous speech. There is a wide variety of speech forms on radio including
radio drama, considered in chapter 14 and no single one of them could be said
to typify radio talk. But news is quite distinctive, in part because it makes little or
no attempt to disguise that this talk is being read from a script. The reason is to
stress that this is objective speech, not the opinions of the newsreader. It is part of
the claim to truth, which news makes. But even within news bulletins there will
be different kinds of speech that are less formal and institutional, in reports from
the scene, actuality of participants in and eye-witnesses to events.
Talk is one of the codes of radio; the others are music, sound effects and silence,
but words, speech and language constitute the most fundamental code. Even on
a music station, the music is organised around speech events, such as news bul-
letins, but including commercials, weather and announcer talk. Talk is part of the
way radio stations market themselves, part of their branding (Potts 1989: 101).
If you turn on the radio and use the tuner, not presets, to move from station to
station, youll find that not just the music but especially the way each station talks
to you will tell you something about it. There are certainly differences between
stations that might play the same kind of music but are in different sectors of
the industry. The sound, the way the announcers talk to listeners and link the
different items, is quite different on a community station, where the announc-
ers are volunteers, from the sound of a network that is part of the national public
Table 15.1: Triple J news opening.
Audio and comments News script
News begins with a recognisable but Justice for the family of murdered
electronically distorted version of the backpacker David Wilson and green
well-known ABC Radio News theme. groups fearful of big changes to
Newsreader has a youthful male environment laws.
Australian voice. Headlines come Triple J News. Hi, Im Tony Connolly.
before station identification, greeting
and self-identification. Mixture of
formal structures and informal
greeting. Speaks much more slowly
than commercial counterparts.
Content of headline stories selected to
interest target audience.
broadcasting organisation whose announcers have been trained within that struc-
ture. Popular music stations try hard to distinguish the music they play from their
competition; but the importance of the presenters and how they sound can be
gauged by the way a new station will set about poaching successful personalities
from other stations.
The style of language, the vocabulary and the accent of radio talk are all vital
parts of radio programming and positioning; and this has become more the case as
radio stations have come to target particular segments or niches of the audience.
Obviously, different ways of speaking are called for in different kinds of program
as well as on different kinds of radio station. Radio news tends to have a very
distinct mode of speech. Even on music radio stations aimed at people aged, say,
14 to 29, news will be written and spoken generally more formally and be more
carefully enunciated than other kinds of talk on that station, although this is
changing. The manner of the newsreader might be friendly and relaxed compared
to a newsreader on the public service radio stations, but he or she will usually still
try to project the authority and factuality listeners expect of news.
The examples in tables 15.1 and 15.2 are taken from Sydney radio stations,
but have their equivalents in most mature metropolitan radio markets. The first
comparison is between the introduction to the morning news bulletin on two
youth music stations, one run by the ABC (public service), Triple J (table 15.1);
the other commercial (Triple M; table 15.2).
The comments reflect the target audience and what is deemed to interest it.
This young audience, primarily interested in popular music and not in news,
does not want the length and formality of the kind of bulletin presented on seri-
ous talk-based stations. Another network that aims for a young (aged 14 to 29)
audience, the Nova FM network, has taken the process of embedding news in
the overall sound of the station one step further than Triple M. An instrumental
Table 15.2: Triple M news opening.
Triple M station sting and music that Sixteen degrees on Triple M. Kylie
suggests Morse-code like beeps. Baxter checking the triple headlines at
Youthful female voice, standard 12 . . .
Australian accent. Notice it begins with (1) Low-income workers are in for a
the weather. twelve-dollar a week pay rise . . . more
The newsreader introduces herself but than a million workers in New South
does not use the word news or any Wales will get the extra cash approved
greeting words. Layered sound (reader by the State Industrial Relations
speaks over the introductory music) and Commission. It follows a similar
the speed of the speakers delivery create Federal decision a few months back,
a sense of urgency and immediacy. The but the Employers Federation is not
reader does not really draw breath until happy about it, saying itll stop
the first full stop (inserted in companies putting on extra staff and
transcript). force them to lay people off if costs get
Compare story construction and too high.
vocabulary with 2UE bulletin below:
more colloquial.
Second story: another episode in a (2) The never-ending Phil Coles saga has
never-ending . . . saga. taken another turn with the embattled
IOC member struggling to keep his
head above water . . . New allegations
have surfaced with a report by Atlanta
Olympics organisers saying that Coles
was one of six IOC members who
took two or more companions on trips
to Atlanta in 1996.
Importance of sport to listeners: the Triple (3) Updating the Triple M sports net and
M sports net. ultra-marathon runner Pat Farmers
due to arrive in Sydney around 1.15
this afternoon on the fourth leg of his
seven-month historic run . . .
music track with a fast, insistent rhythm plays continuously under the bulletins,
which are very short (two to three minutes), consist almost entirely of copy
reads and always begin with a weather and (if at breakfast or drive time) traffic
update.
The Triple M bulletin repeats the station name twice in quick succession just
after the identifying sting (a brief and distinctive sound that is used repeatedly to
identify the station). It is important that listeners not be allowed to forget which
station they are listening to because they have to identify it if and when they fill
out a ratings booklet.
Table 15.3: 2UE news opening.
Time pips. Burst of fanfare-like music 2UE 954 News . . .

over urgent-sounding, Morse-code-like
beeps . . .
Station identification is delivered by
authoritative, deep male voice over
beeps and music . . .
Morse-code-like beeps continue under Its nine oclock. Good morning, Im Sandy
female reader with mature, educated Alhouisie . . .
Australian voice. Gives the time (aspect
of structure) and greets listener (direct
address) fairly formally.
Throw to male reporter. He speaks his More than a million of the States
voice report at a fast pace. It begins with lowest-paid workers have been awarded
attribution who is responsible as wage increases of between ten and
evidence of its truthful and factual twelve dollars a week. The details from
status. Ian Craven.
[Cravens voice] The NSW Industrial Relations
Commission has granted the
twelve-dollar pay rise for workers
earning less than 510 dollars a week . . .
The Triple J bulletin sound reflects a mix of commercial and public service
imperatives, perhaps signalled by the distorted but recognisable reworking of
the ABCs Majestic Fanfare news theme. It is a very traditional bulletin in its
structure, beginning with headlines, before the reader identifies the station and
himself, but then he greets us by saying Hi, a markedly more casual greeting than
any other station uses and one that acts to undercut the stuffiness the audience
might associate with news. The stories chosen to head the bulletin clearly reflect
the assumed priorities of the Triple J audience. The headline for the first story
suggests the end of a story, or closure: a perpetrator brought to justice almost
the only kind of closure ever heard in broadcast news.
A second comparison between a commercial talk station, 2UE (table 15.3), and
an ABC talk station, 2BL 702 (now called ABC Sydney 702; table 15.4), illustrates
that both have a much older audience than the first two stations (aged 45 and
older) and show more formal characteristics.
The commercial station chooses a local story as its lead whereas the public ser-
vice station chooses international news, and this is a typical example of the way
news is prioritised differently in different industry sectors. News values and beliefs
about the audience drive such decisions, in that so-called hip-pocket stories
Table 15.4: 2BL 702 news opening.
Music and station identification, Up-to-the-minute news and information . . .

including frequency on AM band. Your 2BL 702.
Educated, mature Australian
female voice . . . Music segues to
Morse-code-like signal over time
code pips . . . then ABC News theme,
the Majestic Fanfare.
Educated Australian male voice comes in The collapse of peace talks on Kosovo . . . A
on the back of theme (but not over it). peaceful start to polling day in Indonesia . . .
Begins with headlines before greeting, and a court sequel to the murder of a
identification of ABC News and two-year-old boy.
introduction of reader. No time call. Good morning. ABC News with John Hall.
Talks between NATO and Yugoslav military
commanders in northern Macedonia have
broken down, prompting the Alliance to
announce it will intensify its bombing
campaign until Belgrade gives in.
and local ones both demonstrate the consequence and proximity news values.
Public service broadcasters such as the ABC or BBC, on the other hand, will adopt
different news priorities according to which of the networks or stations the news
is to be broadcast on (compare the 2BL 702 with the Triple J bulletin; both are
ABC stations).
This 2BL 702 bulletin shows a traditionally serious approach. It and Triple J
are the only ones to begin with headlines before the newsreader introduces him-
self. The newsreader identifies the news service (ABC News), not the individual
station, in contrast to the commercial stations. The headlines serve to advise lis-
teners what is of importance in the bulletin and to keep listeners interested. The
priority given to overseas news is characteristic of national public broadcasting
and is in direct contrast with the priorities of commercial radio, which takes the
view that listeners want to hear stories about themselves (about us), not about
what is happening a long way away (about them). The public service broadcast-
ers, on the other hand, have it as part of their remit or duty to contribute to an
informed and educated citizenry. The ABC News theme, the Majestic Fanfare,
is one of the best-known pieces of music in Australia. As such, it makes a very
important contribution to the branding of ABC Radio news; it has come to signify
the authority, impartiality and accuracy associated with ABC news.
Among the four bulletins, differences in story construction are apparent, even
from the short excerpts provided. The 2UE story is much closer to the inverted
pyramid. It begins with a summary lead sentence, given to the newsreader, and the
reporter then provides the detail and the background. The Triple M bulletin uses
a headline-like tease line to introduce each of its stories (Low-income workers
are in for a twelve-dollar a week pay rise), rather than a summary sentence. But
each of the Triple M stories is like a mini-narrative, with conflict at the heart of it.
In the first it is the Employers Federation threatening the loss of jobs; the second
is introduced as another episode in a never-ending . . . saga, while the third
is an update, another continuing story. Never-ending is the key term: none of
these stories has a resolution. The ABC news has a different structure, providing
both summary and narrative in the opening sentence of the story. It not only
summarises what has happened (talks have broken down and the Alliance says
it will intensify its bombing campaign) but also provides a causal link between
the two events (prompting the Alliance to announce), thus setting up a narrative
chain.
Radio news and narrative
I have previously argued (see chapter 11) that one reason for the development of
the inverted pyramid construction of news stories was the rise of objectivity and
neutrality as primary values in the professional ideology of journalism. The lead
identifies the people, events and places essential to an understanding of the story.
It emphasises factuality; that is, there is an emphasis on what are presented as
the facts, and these are in turn supported by attribution: who did and who said
what.
Narratives in fiction do not insist on identification and attribution in this way,
and this is a key difference between fictional radio (or television) forms and the
news genre. Another difference is the role of the speakers of the stories: the news-
reader and the actuality; that is, the audio of the reporter and participants in the
story. For a long time (until the early 1960s in the case of the ABC) public service
broadcasters resisted the use of any voice other than that of a (usually anony-
mous) newsreader in news. The threat to the objectivity of news that actuality
represents is the admission of what in narrative terms are diegetic narrators, the
voices of people who are a part of the story.
The use of the package or wrap, also used in television news, is an aspect of the
use of narrative in radio news. Giving listeners an incentive to keep listening by
means of a tease lead, one that sets up an enigma, is another. The term package
has already been defined as containing different audio elements: the journalist,
grabs of other speakers, and actuality: other speakers or sound from the scene or
story (diegetic sound). The package or wrap are also terms used for the technique
of packaging different stories together as related to one another, or presenting
different aspects of the same story as a wrap, indicating the definitive version of
the story to date (Ericson, Baranek & Chan 1987: 1989). This narrative mode can
come much closer to the classical narrative, offering cause-effect relationships

or even a form of resolution. And this is more problematic for news, because
it introduces explanatory readings of the story, something the audience is not
supposed to be offered but to construct for themselves, based on the true facts.
Radio interviews
It is hard to believe that the interview as a journalistic technique is relatively

recent, yet it appeared in newspapers only in the mid-nineteenth century. It was
met with suspicion in part because it inevitably employs a second narrator, the
interviewee, in addition to the interviewer, the journalist (Schudson 1978). Its
vividness and directness in the right hands, however, produced an irresistible
sense of reality and truth, of hearing from the source, unmediated. This impres-
sion is deceptive. As Bell and van Leeuwen (1994) point out, in most media inter-
views, the interviewer retains power and control over the duration and structure
of the interview, and the audience is provided with the interviewers perspective
on the story. Media interviews have been divided according to the power relation-
ships that characterise them (Bell & van Leeuwen 1994) or to the purpose for
which theyre undertaken (Phillips & Lindgren 2002).
Phillips and Lindgren suggest that there are four main reasons for doing
an interview: to elicit information (get the facts); to comment, justify or inter-
pret (explain the facts); to recount a personal experience (react to an event); or
to explore (and/or enjoy) a personality. The first two purposes are more often
associated with hard news stories, the latter two with soft news or with the
extended feature interview. The analysis offered by Bell and van Leeuwen begins
by considering all the different ways in which interviews are used by a range of
professions, from lawyers and police (interrogation) to priests and counsellors
(confession) and teachers and employers (test). In the media versions of these
interviews, however, there are rarely material consequences: a journalist cannot
fail an interviewees examination paper, offer expert advice or send someone to jail
(although a journalists actions might ultimately lead to such consequences for an
individual).
Whatever the purpose or the power relationship set up by the interview, it cre-
ates a perspective from which the listener understands the events and significance
of the story. Media interviewers establish which answers are valid, interesting or
entertaining, and which are irrelevant, marginal or even deviant. The radio inter-
viewer can establish this by the kinds of questions asked (and not asked) and by his
or her reactions to answers. If the interview is pre-recorded, the intended mean-
ings of the interviewee can be changed through editing. Moreover, in any media
interview, both interviewee and interviewer adopt narrative roles or functions. To
go back to Bell and van Leeuwens typology, the interviewer can adopt the role of
interrogator, counsellor, teacher (or student), interpellator or colleague.
The problem with the interview as a narrative technique is that neither the
interviewee nor the interviewer might be reliable narrators. Interviewees some-
times lie. Interviewers might adopt roles for which they are not qualified, such
as claiming expertise they do not have. A very common role in commercial talk
radio (usually in weekday breakfast or morning talkback programs, the nearest
that commercial radio comes to current affairs programs) is that of interpel-
lator. This means that the interviewer claims to speak for listeners, acting as
a voice, usually for such unproblematised and stereotypical groupings as the
battler, consumers or the general public. The difficulty that can arise is that
the interviewer might not be disinterested but actually self-serving, representing
vested interests. This happened in Sydney in the late 1990s, in a case that came to
be known as cash for comment, in which two high-profile radio presenters were
found to be receiving large and undisclosed financial retainers to convey posi-
tive messages about certain companies and commercial interests (for an account,
see www.aba.gov.au, web site of the regulatory body the Australian Broadcasting
Authority). Despite these difficulties for journalism with the narrative power of
the interview, radio would certainly be the poorer without it.
Conclusion
Narrative modes of storytelling in the classic Hollywood sense are still relatively
rare in radio news, partly because of the constraints on time. In the more extended
reports of radio current affairs programs, they are more commonly found, both
in the form of the reports and through the use of interviews. The advent of info-
tainment in news media has touched radio news bulletins only in such ways as
we have seen in the examples: by leading a bulletin with weather or traffic news
in the breakfast shift on commercial stations with a younger target demographic.
Yet, in terms of the way radio is used by audiences, comprehension and interest
might be better served by such narrative techniques as the tease lead and the use
of diegetic narrators, at least in actuality reports, if not in the character of the
reporter.
The priority assigned to audience retention and interest by commercial radio
helps to explain the greater emphasis in commercial radio news on narrative tech-
niques and structures. The linking of episodes in a package or wrap can be more
problematic, however. The danger is in creating pseudo or spurious narratives.
This is because of the tendency of the package to frame explanations and con-
clusions more explicitly than standard thematic news narratives. They remain
open-ended and episodic, without beginning and without end. Nor do they nec-
essarily overcome the criticism levelled at the inverted pyramid, that it cannot
convey the weight of emotion or subtlety (Ricketson 2000: 152). This is an irony
for radio, the most intimate of media, one still unparalleled among mass media
in the sense of closeness it is able to engender between speaker and hearer, one
reason the interview can be so powerful in this medium. Ricketson describes the
price of the freedom to borrow fictional techniques as keeping faith with the
audience; that is, being faithful to the truth. The problem, as he acknowledges, is
that when the narrative modes of fiction are borrowed, the audience cannot know
for sure they are being told the truth; trust is all there is.
Shingler and Wieringa (1998: 95) have argued that for largely historic and cul-
tural reasons, radio enjoys audience trust to an extent that film and television do
not (although this is not necessarily so of news, as opposed to other genres). News
as a radio genre needs to employ at least some of the techniques of storytelling in
order to keep the audience. Retaining not only the audience but also their trust
in having reliable narrators is the challenge for radio journalism.
Chapter 16
Print news as narrative
Helen Fulton
In his book on American television culture, Amusing Ourselves to Death (1985),

Neil Postman argued that television speaks in only one persistent voice the
voice of entertainment (Postman 1985, chap. 5). In its lack of contextualisation,
analysis and seriousness, he says, television news has become pure entertainment.
This kind of tabloid television, deplored by many commentators (Smith 1992;
Langer 1998), is the visual reflex of a type of narrative news first popularised in
tabloid newspapers and now a staple item of most mainstream newspapers. The
increasing narrativisation of news, both in print and on television and radio, is
seen as an inevitable result of market forces exerting pressure on news outlets to
become substantially more focused on profits and audience size.
This chapter begins by accounting for some of the ways in which news is struc-
tured and circulated as stories at an institutional level. It will then examine and
critique a conventional division between information and narrative models of
print news, suggesting that this division needs to be collapsed and restated as a
generic distinction between (non-narrative) information and (narrative) news.
In setting out the narrative strategies of news stories, I argue that these strategies
undermine journalistic ideals of objectivity. Finally, I review some of the ideolog-
ical consequences of constructing and reading print news as narrative.
News as construct
Although it has become a truism of media studies to assert that news is a con-
struct, it is worth explaining this idea in terms of how news circulates in the
218
Print news as narrative 219
form of deliberately structured stories that people tell to each other. The method-
ologies of news-gathering, which rest on professional and institutional values
and standards, work not only to construct the news but also to create it. News
is brought into being by the practices of making the news. Whatever appears
in a newspaper or TV bulletin is, by definition, the news; news does not exist
somewhere outside the media organisations, waiting to be found and brought
inside. Nor do journalists, by and large, go out looking for it. Events come to
their attention, from sources and from other media, which can then be turned
into news by the application of various linguistic and professional practices.
I look in more detail at the discursive construction of news in chapter 17; here
I briefly outline the most significant professional practices in terms of produc-
ing and defining news, especially print news (although much of what follows
can equally be applied to television and radio news). These practices can be
defined as:
r use of sources
r application of news values
r gate-keeping
r agenda-setting
r economic determinants.
Use of sources
The management of news through the interaction of journalists and sources,

whether as individuals, organisations or agencies, is one of the major factors
in the construction of news as the activities of the powerful (Whitaker 1981: 31
2). Journalists contacts are indicators of their professional standing: the more
prestigious and highly placed their contacts, the more status they have in the
workplace. With the rise of digital media, especially the mobile phone, fax and
Internet, journalism has become an office job, with information pouring in by
phone and fax, and research to confirm or flesh out a story largely being carried
out on the phone or the Internet.
The various sources that supply information to news organisations can be
described under the following headings:
r Sources that are routinely monitored by the media themselves, who assign
journalists to particular rounds where information might be gathered. These
sources are located at the institutional level of society, such as chambers of
government, local councils, police, law courts and emergency services.
r Organisations that have their own press offices or employ public relations (PR)
companies to issue regular bulletins about their activities. These include gov-
ernment departments, public services such as transport and electricity, large
companies, trade unions, political parties, hospitality and entertainment organ-
isations.
r Research organisations that undertake and publish the results of various polls
and studies. These include medical and educational research, political polls and
sociological research, much of it published in standard professional journals
that news journalists access online in order to find stories.
r Elite individuals seeking media attention, such as celebrities or corporate exec-
utives. Such individuals send press releases to the major news organisations,
usually through a press office or PR company.
r Regular events, such as religious festivals, street parades, sporting fixtures and
so on, can be managed in advance, often through a PR company.
r Other media. Increasingly, journalists rely on other media for their information,
picking up the latest developments from the Internet pages of other major news
outlets, both local and international.
If we consider the news stories reprinted in this chapter (figures 16.1,
16.2 , 16.3 and 16.4 ), we can determine fairly easily where these stories came from.
The first, Media will pay for trial collapse, comes from a government department
responsible for constitutional affairs, whose workings are routinely monitored by
journalists specialising in legal issues. The second item, Garcon! Youre slow, surly
and at last youve admitted it, is based on a report published by Frances main hotel
and catering trade association, UMH. The third, Town living in fear over mining
deal, does not specify a source, and although the reporter quite possibly visited
the town to collect information and interview the people concerned, he might well
have been alerted to the story in the first instance by another media representa-
tive or by the police. The fourth story, Roosters claim NRL minor premiership,
represents the work of a specialist journalist, the sports reporter, whose specific
job is to cover important sporting events and to liaise with appropriate sources
of information, such as professional sporting associations and other sports
journalists.
News-gathering is therefore a routine task associated with the regular moni-
toring of specific sources and the reworking of press releases and other informa-
tion supplied by various individuals and organisations. One result of this reliance
on sources is a lack of diversity in the news made available to us as readers
or viewers. The same kinds of people and events crop up in the news all the
time, arranged into predictable templates or storylines. At the same time, the
tradition of investigative journalism, involving the expense of reporters doing
time-consuming interviews, research and fact-checking, has declined because
of the greater availability of ready-made stories supplied by communications
agencies.
Inevitably, those individuals and organisations with access to public relations
agencies, or who are positioned within the same institutional structure as the
media themselves, are more likely to get their story, or their side of the story,
into the newspaper than those left to lobby on their own. The result is a skewing
of news towards those in positions of institutional or economic power and a
reinforcement of existing power relations as the natural order.
Application of news values
A number of studies have shown that stories or events are recognised as news on
the basis of a common set of professional values regarding what is newsworthy.
The most famous of these studies, by Johan Galtung and Mari Ruge, identified
twelve factors by which an item may be judged as suitable to be included in a
newspaper or TV news bulletin (Cohen & Young 1973; Watson 2003: 135). These
include unambiguity, familiarity, predictability, surprise, negativity, eliteness of
people or nations, continuing interest and magnitude.
These news values are often invoked as if they exist outside and before news
texts themselves and can be referred to as an impartial and professionally expert
method of selecting one news item rather than another to be included in the daily
paper or TV bulletin. If we think about news in terms of discourse, however, it is
clear that virtually any utterance on any topic can be restated in the discourse of
news and therefore turned into a news item which demonstrates one or more of
the news values that are supposed to define it.
Information that is restated in a way that foregrounds one or more of these
values is more likely to end up on the news pages of the paper than informa-
tion presented according to different priorities. This means that public relations
agents, and journalists themselves, can turn virtually any event into news by
writing it according to the established news values. In figure 16.1, Media will
pay for trial collapse, the news values of unambiguity, surprise (a change from
current practice), continuing interest (in the role of the media) and magnitude (in
the amount of money that might be paid) are invoked to turn a rather dry legal
decision into a news story about the media and the reporting of crime.
Our expectations of what news is and how we can recognise it are therefore
constantly reinforced by what we read in the paper, a process of naturalisation that
elides the constructedness of news as manufactured stories. The use of conven-
tional story templates based on news values constantly reproduced in the media
determines what can be presented as news and therefore how the real world
is defined. Newspaper readers are unlikely to be surprised by such a headline
as Mother of three awarded honorary doctorate but might well find a similar
statement, Father of three awarded honorary doctorate, a little odd. In the world
of the news media, which is supposed to be the real world, women are more
likely to be defined by their domestic relationships whereas men are defined by
their occupations. These are among the narrative templates that characterise the
discourse of news.
Gate-keeping
The term gate-keeping refers to the process by which some items of information
become news; that is, they are let through the gate into the newspaper or bulletin
Media will pay for trial collapse
Clare Dyer
Legal correspondent
Newspapers and broadcasters who cause a criminal trial to collapse through
prejudicial reporting could face a bill for millions of pounds under rules outlined
yesterday by ministers.
Jurors, witnesses, news organisations and anyone else whose serious miscon-
duct derails a criminal trial could be ordered by a judge or magistrate to pay
prosecution and defence costs.
. . . The constitutional affairs secretary Lord Falconer said: The move fires
a warning shot to anyone who risks causing criminal proceedings to collapse
through serious misconduct, such as witness intimidation, juror impropriety or
prejudicial reporting. A huge amount of time, money and effort is wasted when
a case collapses.
In long and complex cases, the prosecution and defence bill can be millions of
pounds.
The lord chief justice, Lord Woolf, said the power would not be used in an
indiscriminate manner; only a judge could make an order, after hearing the
parties and knowing all the circumstances. There would also be a right of
appeal.
Figure 16.1: Media will pay for trial collapse (Guardian (UK), 16 September 2004, p. 8.)
Columns altered, punctuation and spelling retained.
while others are kept out. Gate-keeping practices, although part of a generalised
culture of professional journalistic practice, vary from one news organisation to
another and help to explain why different newspapers and bulletins run a different
selection of stories on the same day. Each news outlet tells its own stories in its
own way.
The status of sources and the presentation of recognised news values are two
criteria by which an item makes it through the gates. Others are less easy to
define or identify, and are connected to the daily routines of news-gathering, the
availability of material before deadlines, the availability of images to support
written or spoken text, professional standards of technical achievement, and the
institutional and personal preferences of individual owners and editors. Local
cultural factors also determine what kinds of information will be let in through the
news gate. It is unlikely that the story in figure 16.1 , Media will pay, would have
made it through the gates of an Australian newspaper because of its specifically
British application, although it would almost certainly have come to the attention
of the Australian media via British media sources.
Whether overtly acknowledged or taken for granted, workplace practices of
this kind result in a news that is highly selective and only partially representative
of the stories that might have been available on any given day.
Agenda-setting
The selection of certain kinds of events as news presupposes an implicit agenda

on the part of a news institution. Stories about national politics are likely to
feature in the front pages of wide-circulation daily papers such as the Australian,
the Guardian or the New York Times, whereas popular tabloid papers are more
likely to lead with human interest stories involving high-profile public figures.
Choices of this kind suggest an agenda of newsworthy events, ranked in order of
importance from the front page to the middle of the newspaper. Each paper itself
constructs a narrative of the days events.
More significantly, it can be argued that the selection of news constructs for
readers or viewers an agenda of what is happening in the world that needs to be
noticed. By covering some events or issues (and omitting others), the news media
put these events on the public agenda, drawing them to our attention as issues of
importance that need to be debated (OShaughnessy & Stadler 2002: 15; Schulz
1998: 1545). Reportage of national politics as conducted in the chamber of gov-
ernment constructs an agenda in which the democratic process is taken seriously
as a matter of concern to all citizens, and should therefore be constantly under
review by a scrutinising media. Reportage of allegations of sexual misdemeanours
by national politicians, on the other hand, constructs an agenda in which the
personal behaviour of individuals needs to be scrutinised and monitored more
assiduously than their public role in managing the democratic process.
In the news items included in this chapter, a number of agendas are implicitly
set. In figure 16.1, Media will pay, the focus is not on the ruling itself, which
applies to anyone who causes a trial to collapse, but on the implied restriction
of the medias freedom of speech to report the facts about criminal trials. The
agenda here is to assert that media freedom, a taken-for-granted value to which we
are all assumed to subscribe, must not be compromised by government pressure.
In figure 16.2, Garcon!, a number of prejudices about the French hospitality
industry, including its supposedly poor service and lack of hygiene, are stated
more or less without comment or qualification, suggesting that these ideas are
part of a commonsense British attitude towards the French certainly one that
has an ancient and venerable position on the British news agenda. In figure 16.3,
Town living in fear, a number of concerns to do with rural instability, Aboriginal
populations, land ownership and mining rights form an uneasy background to
the story. It suggests an agenda of confirming the uncivilised nature of Aborig-
inal culture, compared to white culture, which works to justify white Australias
continued exploitation of Aboriginal people.
The news agenda, then, sets out the issues for debate and concern, but also con-
firms the myths and stories that we already believe to be true or obvious. Clearly,
different newspapers will have different agendas, largely implicit, often controlled
by owners and senior editors. News consumers will not only be attracted to those
news products whose agendas align with theirs but are also likely to model their
personal agendas of significant issues on those of the papers they read. If some
newspapers and TV bulletins regularly feature agenda items such as terrorism,
refugees, football violence, drug-related crime and youth suicide, these are likely
to be salient issues in public debate, however far removed from the personal
experience of most readers or viewers. A spate of fatal car accidents involving
very young drivers, or the potential dangers of poorly maintained public roads or
railways, might feature on the news agenda only briefly but long enough to culti-
vate a general sense that something needs to be done. In this way, the news media
set the agenda of what is important, an agenda that is sometimes very different
from those of such decision-makers as politicians, local government, the police
or the judiciary, leading to further media claims of incompetence or indifference
on the part of those in public office.
Economic determinants
Since the largest sector of the news media in most Western countries is com-
mercial and profit-driven, economic factors are among the most significant deter-
minants in the collection, construction and presentation of news. Even in the
non-commercial sector, such as the state-owned ABC in Australia or the BBC in
Britain, where expenditure has to be fully justified to government and taxpayers
(and licence-holders in the case of the BBC), economic imperatives tend to drive
the selection and presentation of news. Both the ABC and BBC regard themselves
as exemplars of public service broadcasting (Garnham 1990: 12830), with a
commitment to socially responsible news journalism that includes a diversity of
viewpoints, an attention to minority issues and the fostering of citizenship and
nationhood.
Commercial media organisations commodify their news services in order to
attract the advertisers who support them. Television news bulletins are less about
news as a public service than about attracting and retaining a diverse demo-
graphic that can be sold to advertisers. Similarly, newspapers arrange their stor-
ies in the news hole left after all the advertisements have been arranged on the
page (Turow 2003: 303). In an effort to retain readership and advertising in the
face of increased competition from television and the Internet, newspapers have
moved to a higher ratio of lifestyle journalism, often in the form of lift-outs
and magazines whose content largely comprises advertisements, advertorials
and product-oriented reports. Topic-specific lift-outs, featuring careers, property,
information technology, home decorating, food and wine, and so on, target spe-
cific demographics and provide opportunities for advertisers to reach receptive
audiences.
It can be argued, then, that the core business of newspapers is less about provid-
ing news than about attracting advertising (both commercial and classified) via a
promised mass market of demographically diverse readers. In order to bring this
mass market into being, newspapers need to provide news that has salience for
the largest possible readership, is couched in language understood by the major-
ity of the population, is politically uncontroversial and which promotes hege-
monic consensus through a shared recognition of the way things are. This kind
of mass-market and market-driven news characteristically conforms to existing
conventions of news values and agendas, with the result that minority issues and
alternative viewpoints are marginalised, and the public interest is subordinated
to commercial imperatives.
Economic factors also account for the heavy reliance on readily available inex-
pensive sources of news, such as agencies, press releases and published research
studies, as opposed to the more expensive option of investigative journalism. The
privileging of some news values, such as elite persons or places, depends on their
economic connection with the newspaper itself, with the corporate and institu-
tional structure to which the newspaper also belongs, or with the region in which
it is published. The selection and reporting of news and sport is arranged to fit the
economic agenda of the newspaper in terms of the kinds of audiences and adver-
tisers being addressed. Just as one-day cricket was invented to suit commercial
televisions demand for self-contained events, the predominance of mass-appeal
male-dominated sports in newspaper coverage, such as football, golf and racing,
guarantees a regular audience of people who might not read the front sections of
the paper at all but can be targeted by the advertising in the sports section.
Such strategies as the selection of stories, the organisation and layout of the
newspaper, the inclusion of specialist and lifestyle features, and the provision of
service information, for example, television schedules and weather forecasts, all
help to maximise audiences and therefore to attract advertising. The promotion of
celebrity columnists and reporters helps to establish a regular readership, while
references to other media, through book and film reviews, stories about media
celebrities, and references to relevant web sites, work to suggest the relevance of
newspapers to audiences engaged with a wide range of media products.
In their pursuit of mass audiences, newspapers therefore have similar preoccu-
pations to those of commercial television channels. As with television programs,
newspapers rely on standardised products that audiences can immediately recog-
nise from a headline or photograph, and know at once if they are being presented
with a political story, a human interest story, a celebrity feature, an opinion col-
umn and so on. The economic imperative of the mass market has determined that
formulaic stories packaged into recognisable genres are the easiest to sell to both
audiences and advertisers.
Information and narrative
What kinds of stories are preferred by newspapers, and how are they packaged
into standardised formats? Is it even viable to claim that a news story is also a
narrative? We can all perceive a difference between the kind of news item that
provides factual information, such as figure 16.1, and the kind that tells us a story
about specific individuals caught up in a human drama, such as figure 16.3. Are
both types of story narratives? Critical opinion is divided on this issue, with some
arguing for a clear distinction between information and narrative as types of
news, and others claiming that narrative is a basic structuring principle found in
all news stories.
The distinction between news as information and news as narrative was first
made in 1926 by George Herbert Mead, who was claiming for professional jour-
nalists a clear divide between facts and story (Mead 1926). Since then, the validity
of this distinction has been upheld by text-type theorists, who argue that narrative
is one way, but not the only way, of organising facts into a coherent text (Ytreberg
2001: 359), and by media professionals themselves whose credibility depends in
part on being able to demonstrate a difference between factual information and
opinion-based reporting (Turow 2003: 4550).
There is some overlap between the information and narrative models of news
and the concepts of hard and soft news, and with the overarching journalis-
tic ideal of objectivity (see Anne Dunns discussion of this in chapter 11). John
Hartley has defined six major topics of news politics, the economy, foreign
affairs, domestic news, occasional stories and sport and separates hard news,
characterised by conflict, from soft news, including humorous and human inter-
est stories, within the category of domestic news (Hartley 1982: 389). How-
ever, this distinction prevails across all six topics. Hard news is the most recent
news, involving politics, economics, industrial relations, public-sector organisa-
tions and private-sector corporations, events that have just happened and there-
fore need to be reported at once. Hard news is the newspapers idea of what the
public needs to know in order to continue to act as effective and well-informed
citizens; it conventionally appears in the first few pages of the newspaper and has
the largest amount of column inches devoted to it. Figures 16.1 and 16.3 both qual-
ify as domestic hard news stories, although their respective positions towards the
back of the news section indicates their relatively low priority in the news agenda
for those particular days. The journalists who cover hard news stories tend to
have a higher professional status than other journalists, because they are seen as
doing a more cutting-edge and demanding job (Tunstall 1971).
Soft news, on the other hand, refers to news items that are not necessarily
specific to a particular day, but provide background or a human interest angle
relating to current events, including political and economic issues. The item in
figure 16.2 is a classic soft news story, not tied to events of that particular day,
but useful to fill up a news hole on the front page, providing some light relief
to counterbalance the more sober political happenings of the previous day. Soft
news stories appear to be more obviously structured as narratives, with many
of the features of fictional narratives. Individuals are represented as characters,
often stereotyped and brought into being by direct speech. A specific setting or
Garcon! Youre slow, surly and at last youve admitted it
Jon Henley in Paris
In a mea culpa as welcome as it was unexpected, the owners of Frances 60,000
bars, brasseries and cafes admitted yesterday that all too often their staff are
surly, service slow and hygiene horrendous.
Customers are right to complain of a poor or non-existent welcome, an exces-
sively long wait and a lack of basic courtesy and reactivity, said Andre Daguin,
president of the French hotel and catering industrys main trade association,
UMH.
. . . The neighbourhood cafe, with its trademark counter of zinc and assort-
ment of variously voluble or lugubrious Gallic drinkers, is suffering from social
change. The French today have less time, do not drink as much and are increas-
ingly inclined to favour cheap chain restaurants, fast-food joints and sandwich
bars.
But the legendary (if largely exaggerated) rudeness of French waiters, par-
ticularly in Paris, has not done much to help the cafes cause. Nor has an at
times limited grasp of the concept of cleanliness, most often evident in the
toilets.
In Le Firmament near the Place de lOpera in central Paris yesterday, cus-
tomers were naturally reluctant to condemn their regular watering hole. This
place is fine, said Jean-Pierre Mangin, a printer. Its spotless, and the staff are
genuinely pleasant. But its true many places make you feel like youve got a
disease.
. . . The industry plans to draw up 100 criteria by which bars and cafes should be
judged, and to hire independent inspectors to visit thousands of establishments
a year. Those that comply a targeted 2,000 within three years will be awarded
a seal of French cafe quality, Mr Daguin said. The project will be presented to
the tourism minister next month.
Figure 16.2: Garcon! Youre slow, surly and at last youve admitted it (Guardian (UK),
16 September 2004, p. 1.) Columns altered, punctuation and spelling retained.
location is invoked, recognisable even to readers who have never been there from
existing intertextual references (central Paris, the Hollywood Hills, the West
Bank, Sydneys western suburbs). There is a development of events over time,
marked by deictics such as yesterday, then, back at home and so on. Finally,
there is some kind of conflict, which might or might not be resolved but which
serves as a parable illustrating a moral position.
It would seem that a distinction can be made between hard news stories con-
structed according to an information model and soft news stories constructed as
narratives. Contemporary work in discourse and cultural theory, however, starts
from the assumption that both hard and soft news stories are types of narrative,
although they are likely to be structured in different ways (Hartley 1982; Sperry
1981). As Allan Bell says, Journalists do not write articles, they write stories with
structure, order, viewpoint and values (Bell & Garrett 1998: 64). The apparently
factual and objective hard news story that reports information without overt
commentary exemplifies a specific kind of narrative in which the narrative voice
is deliberately elided.
Objectivity in the news
The distinctive structure of hard news stories is that of the inverted pyramid,
in which the most relevant information who, what, where, when is placed
first, followed by supporting detail, quotations from involved parties, alternative
viewpoints and additional comments. The inverted pyramid therefore moves from
the most general account of the event to a limited number of specific details, and
it also implies a ranking of details in descending order of importance. Selection
of the opening sentence, which is normally the first paragraph of a news story,
directs readers to the angle of the story, the aspect of it that the reporter deems to
be the most newsworthy in terms of the conventional news values of unusualness,
conflict, proximity, unambiguity, elite persons and so on. The opening sentence of
figure 16.1, Newspapers and broadcasters who cause a criminal trial to collapse
through prejudicial reporting could face a bill for millions of pounds under rules
outlined yesterday by ministers, draws our attention to the centrality of the media
to the issue being reported and implicitly asks us to think about how the new ruling
will affect the way the media do their job.
This structure of the inverted pyramid is usually assumed to be a characteristic
of objective news reporting (Turow 2003: 46), whereby objectivity is privileged
as a defining aspect of a hard news story, as opposed to the evaluative nature
of most soft news stories. Ideals of objectivity in news reporting, particularly
in print news, are among the most pervasive of journalistic professional values,
and form the standard by which the performance of news journalism is judged
(McQuail 1992: 1837). If readers cannot trust newspapers to give factual infor-
mation, the unwritten contract between them that the media are a credible
source of knowledge about the world is broken.
The concept of objectivity as an achievable ideal has taken a battering under the
onslaught of post-structuralist theories in philosophy and semiotics. If objectivity
is defined as the extra-ideological reporting of absolute or universal truths, then it
is clearly unachievable, since external reality can be accessed only through prac-
tices of visual or linguistic representation that are always already ideologically
positioned. Yet, as Judith Lichtenberg has argued, even the critics of objectivity
on theoretical grounds cannot quite bring themselves to abandon the idea of it,
and she herself concludes that we cannot get along without assuming both the
possibility and value of objectivity (Lichtenberg 2000: 252).
In his consideration of objectivity as a professional value and a normative
measure of performance, McQuail cites a research report on those aspects of
reporting that many journalists identify as hallmarks of objectivity (McQuail 1992:

1845). They can be restated as:
r balance, presenting different sides of an issue;
r accuracy, ensuring a report corresponds to verifiable reality;
r completeness, the presentation of all main relevant points;
r factuality, distinguishing fact from opinion or comment;
r neutrality, or impartiality, suppressing the writers own attitude or opinion.
This list could just as well serve as a description of the mode of hard news
reporting as it is conventionally recognised by both journalists and readers. But,
as Kevin Williams has observed, each of these attempts to operationalise objectiv-
ity is problematic (Williams 2003: 125). Balance appears to be a straightforward
matter of giving both sides of an issue and allowing them equal space. The prob-
lems here are: how to identify the sides in the first place; deciding how many and
which viewpoints should be represented; and the context and evaluation framed
for each viewpoint. Most news stories focus on two sides, with quotes from repre-
sentatives of both sides, but this approach tends to set up a simple binary conflict,
often represented as a conflict between two individuals, which elides complexity
and institutional structuring of problems. Moreover, as Stuart Hall has argued,
the setting up of a topic in terms of a debate within which there are opposi-
tions and conflicts is also one way of dramatising an event so as to enhance its
newsworthiness (Hall et al. 1978: 59).
The goal of accuracy implies that factually correct information is reported,
that facts should be checked with sources, and that information received should
be compared with other reliable versions of the same information. However, the
sources of particular facts are often other media, public relations agencies or
people with a particular agenda or social positioning, such as heads of compa-
nies or government departments. Checking information against external evidence
is time-consuming and expensive, and reliable evidence is not always available.
There is also the perennial difficulty of matching perceptions of accuracy: a report
might have been verified by a journalist but could still strike someone involved in
the event as a misrepresentation of what really happened.
Attempts to achieve completeness in the coverage of a specific event are usually
aligned to the inverted pyramid structure as a way of alluding, in rank order of
importance, to as many aspects of the story as possible within a limited space. The
movement from the general to the particular works to orient the reader within
the world of the story and implies that we are in possession of all that we need
to know to make sense of the story. Other aspects of completeness include giv-
ing a full coverage of all the significant events of the day within one newspaper
or TV bulletin, and giving an adequate cumulative coverage of continuing stor-
ies that develop over days or weeks. All these attempts to achieve completeness
are constrained by news-gathering routines, what is available on any given day,
the selection and gate-keeping practices of particular media organisations, the
amount of space available after the paid advertisements are included in the page
layout, and the economic constraints on how much news can actually be fitted
into the paper or bulletin.
Establishing the factuality of a news report, and separating fact from opinion, is
achieved through references to named sources with direct quotes and references
to the real world of places, countries, historical events and so on. Most news-
papers distinguish between the news section at the front of the paper and the
op-ed (opinion and editorial) section towards the middle, where regular colum-
nists, often promoted as celebrities, write first-person opinion-based accounts
of topical events. The spatial separation of the two kinds of journalism, hard
news reporting and opinion columns, suggests that there is a measurable differ-
ence between them in terms of factuality and objectivity. However, separating fact
from opinion is by no means a simple matter. Physical facts about the external
world can be retrieved only through linguistic or iconic signs that are themselves
wholly connotative and open to interpretation.
Similarly, in figure 16.1, the hard news story, the claim that in long and com-
plex cases, the prosecution and defence bill can be millions of pounds appears to
be factual, whereas the statement in figure 16.2that the neighbourhood cafe, with
its trademark counter of zinc and assortment of variously voluble or lugubrious
Gallic drinkers, is suffering from social change suggests the writers own opin-
ion. Neither statement is verifiably factual; the difference in their status as truth
claims is an effect of their different registers: formal in the first, informal and
slightly humorous in the second. The confident separation of fact from opinion,
normalised in journalistic practice, is an example of hegemony at work, whereby
the opinion of the hegemonic order becomes the fact, which is presented as
natural, absolute and unchanging.
Finally, the goal of neutrality or impartiality, in which all opinion or evaluation is
elided from a piece of reportage, is as hard to achieve as the others. A third-person
perspective, sticking to the facts of names, dates, places and other empirical
data, a lack of accompanying commentary or evaluation, can all contribute to
an impression of impartiality. Once again, however, we come back to the issues
of news-gathering routines, which privilege the selection of some information
and sources over others, thereby positioning the news story within an ideological
framework, and of language itself as entirely connotative, since what appears to
be denotative or neutral to one user of the language might well appear connotative
to another. Even the omission of information or comment can reveal a discursive
positioning: an objective account tends to leave out any material that directly
challenges the dominant view of the way things [really] are.
The impartiality of the news media is seriously compromised by their relation-
ship with other areas of institutional power. The prevailing viewpoint of this sector
is the result of what Stuart Hall has termed a structured preference given in the
media to the opinions of the powerful, who then become the primary definers
of news topics and issues:
The important point about the structured relationship between the media and
the primary institutional definers is that it permits the institutional definers to
establish the initial definition or primary interpretation of the topic in question.
This interpretation then commands the field in all subsequent treatment and
sets the terms of reference within which all further coverage or debate takes
place . . . [T]he media are frequently not the primary definers of news events at
all; but their structured relationship to power has the effect of making them play
a crucial but secondary role in reproducing the definitions of those who have
privileged access, as of right, to the media.
(Hall et al. 1978: 5860)
The problems with objectivity in news reporting are conventionally grouped

under the headings of impossibility and undesirability (McQuail 1992: 1878;
Williams 2003: 1278). While Lichtenberg finds an essential contradiction
between these two claims (Lichtenberg 2000: 238), they in fact presuppose slightly
different meanings of the term objectivity. If we accept that a totally objective
(that is, extra-ideological) view of the world cannot be retrieved through rep-
resentation, we can then argue that attempting to construct a simulacrum of
objective reality, which is the aim of objective reporting, is in itself an undesir-
able goal for news journalists. These sets of objections can be summarised as
follows.
Objectivity (as the retrieval of reality) is impossible because:
r no account of reality is outside ideology; all accounts of real-world events must
be structured through sign systems, such as language, which are inseparable
from ideology;
r no account of reality is complete or completely correct on its own; we all have
different impressions and interpretations of what we experience;
r factuality is always subjective determining what the facts are, and what they
mean, is not an absolute process;
r all events have to be contextualised, or placed in a wider frame of reference,
which immediately imposes evaluative meanings on them;
r news is produced within a system of internal and external determinants eco-
nomic, organisational, technical, professional that structures and commodi-
fies news stories;
r the institutional practices of news-gathering, gate-keeping, selection and
agenda-setting involve subjective judgements and evaluations, however uncon-
scious;
r omissions and elisions, as much as selection and inclusion, construct implicit
value judgements about social reality, commonsense and the way things are.
Objectivity (as a discursive practice of journalism) is undesirable because:
r the objective view of events is the dominant or commonsense view, promoting
a version of reality that elides and naturalises systems of power;
r the lack of an overt critical perspective allows truth claims to be presented

without challenge, so that ideology becomes normalised as fact;
r objective reporting discourages journalists from taking responsibility for what
is reported, and encourages them to focus on high-prestige sources;
r the role of investigative, issue-based and advocacy journalism is reduced;
r the association between objectivity and fact works to privilege objective report-
ing over other kinds of news stories, such as human interest and socially respon-
sible journalism, which can be equally valuable sources of information.
If there are so many objections to objectivity as a goal of news reporting, are
there any reasons to support it? I think it can be supported on the grounds of
diversity. What we think of as objective reporting in hard news stories changes
in the law, election results in another country, the outcomes of a trade summit,
movements in the stock market is in fact an effect of discourse. Objectivity is
a style, a set of linguistic practices that we have learned to recognise as signi-
fiers of factuality and impartiality. As such, it provides an alternative to other
styles of reporting in newspapers or TV bulletins, including opinion columns,
advocacy journalism, editorials, human interest, entertainment and advertising.
Among these varieties of journalism, many of them explicitly positioned in eval-
uation and ideology, objective news reporting offers a different kind of voice and
access to a different kind of information, which helps us to interpret and rank
other styles of journalism. As long as the ideological role of language and of other
social and professional practices that produce hard news is not overlooked, this
style of reporting helps to maintain a much-needed diversity in the range of news
and current affairs offered to us.
News as narrative
Hard news is marked as objective through a number of discursive practices.

These include a third-person narration, in which the narrative voice is externalised
and elided from the account; a high proportion of empirical information regard-
ing dates, places, times, amounts of money and so on; and a lack of modality,
that is, an absence of adjectives, adverbs and phrases indicating evaluation or
opinion, and a preponderance of declarative (that is, not conditional) verbs indi-
cating certainty. This low level of modality tends to result in a bland and rather
dry account, as in figure 16.1, although the use of modal verbs in that news item,
such as could, can and would, indicates that the writer has a contingent atti-
tude towards the truth claims she is making. Similarly, the use of metaphor to
describe trials that collapse or are derailed introduces an element of modality or
appraisal that enlivens (and ideologically positions) an otherwise bald account.
Soft news, on the other hand, is marked by its more engaged narration, infor-
mal register, foregrounding of individuals and their personal experiences, and
interpersonal approach to the reader that implicitly asks us to respond emotively

to the story.
These modes of news discourse, both hard and soft, are realised through the
same set of narrative strategies. Information and events are turned into news by
means of a standardised set of professional practices and procedures that have the
effect of sorting stories into different types on the basis of discourse rather than
content. Hard news is therefore distinguished from soft news not by content or
by the nature of the event itself, but by the format and discourse in which the
content is reported. An earthquake occurring the day before might be reported
in the format of the front-page hard news story in the newspaper, but it might
also (or only) be reported in the format of a soft news background piece (the
increasing number of earthquakes in certain parts of the world; the heroes who
saved lives) in the inner pages of the paper. The same event could be the lead
story in one paper and not be reported at all in another. There is nothing intrinsic
to an event that predetermines its quality as news, either hard or soft. How it
is reported, and whether it is reported at all, is a matter of professional process,
selection, availability, space and so on.
The narrative strategies of journalism work to turn information into news. All
news is narrative, I would argue, but information is not necessarily structured
as narrative, although it can be. Meads early distinction between an informa-
tion model and a narrative model of news therefore works only to support an
argument for the special place of objective news reporting, and as a means of
claiming a generic distinction between hard and soft news. The privileging of
some types of news over others is part of a larger scheme of institutional privilege
directed towards perceived standards of objectivity.
There are a number of narrative strategies typical of news discourse in its
broadest form, which can be discussed under the following headings:
r angle
r point of closure
r individualisation
r focalisation
r chronology.
Angle
The various modes of news discourse are realised through a number of angles
that determine the narrative template. These templates can be compared to nar-
rative plots in fictional works. They seem to be generic, almost universal, ways of
ordering our world and yet are distinctive to specific media, in this case the news
media, where they enable seamless transitions between news, information, enter-
tainment and advertising. The headline or first paragraph of a story the lead that
comes before the body of the story in the inverted pyramid structure establishes
the angle and therefore the general outline of the plot or format, cueing us in to
expect a particular type of narrative. I have already mentioned the headline and
opening sentence of the news story in figure 16.1, which alerts us to the plot of
this particular story, as a narrative about media performance and their position
as a fourth estate outside legal or government sanctions.
One format or angle that has been the subject of considerable research is the
moral panic, in which an event is reported as a perceived threat to the social
and/or moral order, with a view to invoking public concern (Cohen 1972; Goode
et al. 1994; Thompson 1998). The narrative structure of the moral panic is that
the social fabric is under stress in some way, implying that this threat needs to
be resolved by various rescues or official interventions, such as higher levels of
policing, lower levels of migration, more regulation of young people and so on.
The news item in figure 16.3 is a typical example of the moral panic, starting with
the headline Town living in fear. The article constructs a view of Condobolin, in
rural New South Wales, Australia, as a frontier town where competing interests of
whites, Aboriginals and large mining companies constantly threaten to provoke
serious violence. Fears of Aboriginals as the other, marked by tribal lore and
traditional garb, are also invoked to assign blame for the social instability of the
town, implying that the solution lies with restricting Aboriginal access to land
claims and to corporate work structures.
Other narrative formats are based on different propositions and outcomes,
which can be negative or positive. Information about the education sector, par-
ticularly primary and secondary education, has a high news value (since most
newspaper readers have first-hand experience and many have children at school)
and is easily sourced from professional bodies and research teams. To turn this
information into news, journalists might make use of the moral panic (One in ten
teenagers unable to read), the industrial relations angle (Teachers underpaid
and underperforming), the scare story (Literacy rates plummet), the piece of folk
wisdom (Early reading damages under-fives), the research-led discovery (New
hope for dyslexics), the political or policy issue (Education minister under fire)
or the eccentric event (Robot dolls used to teach sex education). The news story
in figure 16.2 combines existing British folk myths about the French (as rude,
dirty, inefficient and so on) with a report on a new policy initiative to reinvigorate
the French cafe industy, surprising us with a new twist on what seems to be an
old story.
Point of closure
The various angles, selected by journalists as a way of presenting different kinds

of information, are like plot summaries, telling us what the story is about. Unlike
most fictional narratives, however, the point of closure in a news story generally
comes right at the beginning, either in the headline or in the lead paragraph, at
the top of the inverted pyramid. The lead is in fact the point of closure in the
Town living in fear over mining deal
By RHETT WATSON
TWO houses have been attacked with spears and death threats delivered in a
dispute over a gold mine in western NSW.
The town of Condobolin has been divided by the construction of the mine, at
Lake Cowal, on land that was the subject of a two-year court dispute over native
title.
Spears were thrown at the doors of the homes of two directors of the Wiradjuri
Condobolin Corporation, which won the native title claim which has led to
more jobs, training and money.
The left leg of a kangaroo was left on the porch of each house, signifying a
death threat in Aboriginal lore. Police suspect the incidents may be linked to
one earlier in the evening at the Condobolin Hotel made famous as Australian
Idol contestant Shannon Nolls local when men briefly entered the pub wearing
traditional garb and armed with spears.
The door of the corporations office was also smeared with kangaroo intestines.
The attacks have frightened many in the towns Aboriginal community but it
has also stirred talk of violent reprisals.
If they come back here, they wont walk out, corporation chairman Dawn
Johnson, whose front door was pierced, said.
We thought someone might attack our office, but this has gone too far.
Christie Brandy and Shae Smyth, both 16, had left the home they share with
their uncle, John Daley, and his wife, Valerie both corporation directors a few
minutes before their front door was pierced at 10.30pm.
. . . Talk has spread it was the work of a tribe called the Feather Feet, who, so
the rumour goes, enforce tribal lore and warned the corporation to pull out of
the Native Title agreement signed with Barrick Gold in 2002.
There is no evidence that the rumours are true. However, locals from both
sides of the court battle and the police say it is the work of outsiders trying to
stir trouble. Three of the people police suspect live in Sydney or on the central
coast [of NSW].
Betty Atkinson, one of the five people fighting the claim through the courts,
said the out-of-towners should be ashamed of themselves. Theyre making a
mockery of our culture, she said.
Figure 16.3: Town living in fear over mining deal (Sunday Telegraph (Sydney), 29 August
2004, p. 31.) Columns altered, punctuation and spelling retained.
narrative of the news story. The whole point of the lead is to tell us everything
we need to know about the story, including its outcome. In a fictional narrative,
this information is normally withheld until near the end of the text. In a news
story we are given the information up front, and can then choose whether or not
to read the details of how this point of closure was reached.
Roosters Claim NRL Minor Premiership
All hail Freddy
For years Sydney Roosters fans have chanted Freddy Fittler walks on water.
Yesterday, conditions were right for a miracle but Fittler settled for an out-
standing farewell performance instead.
Lightning, driving rain and hail combined to make the last regular season
match of Fittlers career a dramatic occasion at Aussie Stadium.
The Roosters thumping 4810 defeat of the Parramatta Eels ensured the club
won the minor premiership for the first time in 23 years.
And, after a 333-match career, Freddy now has plans for a bigger farewell
Grand Final day.
Figure 16.4: Roosters Claim NRL Minor Premiership (Daily Telegraph (Sydney), 6
September 2004, p. 1.) Columns altered, punctuation and spelling retained.
It is conventional for news stories to be structured as inverted pyramids,

opening with a point of closure, or a lead, which enables us to reconstruct
most of the narrative, or at least to place the narrative within a recognisable
format. Figures 16.1 and 16.3 use the language and narrative structure of the hard
news story, reporting events of the immediate past from an external viewpoint. In
figure 16.2, the lead paragraph, In a mea culpa as welcome as it was unexpected,
the owners of Frances 60,000 bars, brasseries and cafes admitted yesterday that
all too often their staff are surly, service slow and hygiene horrendous, cues us
in to expect a funny story about how strange the French are, and this is more
or less what we get. The structure of the inverted pyramid, the empirical data
(60,000 bars, brasseries and cafes), and the deictic reference to immediate time
(yesterday) discursively construct a hard news story, something that is relevant
to that days news. Yet the informal register (youre slow, surly and at last youve
admitted it), the internal narrator (the neighbourhood cafe . . . is suffering from
social change) and high levels of modality (variously voluble or lugubrious Gallic
drinkers) are all characteristic of soft news reporting, indicating that the bound-
ary between the two is merely discursive.
Generally speaking, the nearer the point of closure is located to the end of the
news item, the softer the story. In other words, a news item in which the point of
closure comes virtually at the end of the story, as in a fictional narration, is barely
news at all, but rather an opinion piece or a profile, review or commentary. The
brief front-page sports story in Sydneys Daily Telegraph (figure 16.4 ) cannot claim
to be news since few readers would be unaware of the outcome of the game, so
instead it situates the Roosters win in a familiar sporting template of dramatic
conflict, individual heroism and the triumph of the underdog. There is no lead
at the beginning but rather a narrative hook, which leaves us expecting further
elucidation. The angle suggested by this opening, focusing on one of the players,
Freddy Fittler, foreshadows the plot of a heroic narrative. The point of closure, in
the paragraph beginning The Roosters thumping 4810 defeat, comes almost at
the end of the piece, followed by the footnote that returns us to the main subject
of the article, the hero Freddy Fittler. If this paragraph had been placed at the
beginning, as the lead, the story would have been constructed as an inverted
pyramid news story about the Roosters surprise win rather than as a post-game
profile of a single player.
Individualisation
News stories typically associate events with specific individuals. In the sports story
in figure 16.4, an unexpected win is attributed not to a whole team, or to their
corporate aspirations and tactics, but to a named individual who is constructed as
a hero within a conventional story template of triumph over adversity. The player
becomes a leading character in a larger narrative.
Even news items composed in an objective style, such as the item in figure
16.1, make use of individuals as reference points and spokespeople, and in so
doing attribute qualities, actions and words to them, effectively creating them
as fictional characters. The constitutional affairs secretary Lord Falconer and
the lord chief justice, Lord Woolf, speak directly or indirectly about their role as
upholders of justice, arbitrators on matters of national significance and exercisers
of extraordinary power and judgement. They are constructed as powerful agents
in the continuing drama of the criminal justice system and its articulation with
other layers of society.
Real individuals who form part of news stories therefore have their characters
constituted from the same kinds of discursive material as fictional characters. We
can compare these two law lords, for example, with the character of the judge in
Brian Friels play, The Freedom of the City (1973). In this play, loosely based on the
events of Bloody Sunday in Derry, Northern Ireland, on 30 January 1972, when a
number of civil rights marchers were shot dead by British troops, a judge presides
over an enquiry into a similar tragedy played out on the stage. His measured
language Our only function is to form an objective view of the events which
occurred in the City of Londonderry (Friel 1984: 109) and repeated references
to facts and to aspects of the law and legal practice are drawn from a discourse of
professionalism that Friel has imitated from the real world of the law as reported
in court documents and in the media. Although it is part of the fiction of the play
that Friels judge is not impartial in his handling of the enquiry, a flaw that certainly
does not apply to judges in general, his discourse as a character nonetheless marks
him out as belonging to much the same kind of professional context as Lords
Falconer and Woolf in the news story. Just as Friel borrowed from the language
of the media, so the news media model their characters on those of fiction.
More informal news stories come even closer to fiction in their construction of
real individuals as characters, such as the voluble or lugubrious Gallic drinkers
in figure 16.2 or corporation chairman Dawn Johnson whose front door was
pierced in figure 16.3. These individuals are attributed with social roles, personal
qualities and actual utterances that convey their feelings and intentions, and with
grammatical functions of agency or goal (being acted upon by others) that affect
the way we perceive them as representatives of a particular class or gender, as
more or less empowered and capable of effective action. The reductive nature of
news reporting encourages the shorthand of stereotyping, so that a brief phrase
or reference, such as tribal lore or Freddy Fittler walks on water, can suggest an
entire social and cultural context. Stereotyping is itself an effect of intertextuality,
whereby signifiers are constantly cross-referenced from one text to another, and
the stereotypes of news reporting become meaningful with reference not only to
other news stories but to fiction and film as well, each mode in dialogue with the
others.
News reporting does not merely incorporate characters into a story but also
actively aims to associate events with individuals rather than with institutions.
The story in figure 16.2 is not simply about the French hospitality industry but
about the consumers of that industry, represented by the views of Jean-Pierre
Mangin, a printer. This strategy of individualisation has a significant ideological
consequence, which is to affirm the view that the social order is actively enabled
and determined by individuals, rather than by corporate or institutional struc-
tures. In the story of the town living in fear (figure 16.3), the events are narrated
as a series of transactions between groups of individual characters: the corpo-
rate directors, their children, the locals, the out-of-towners. Problems are caused
by one or more of these individuals, and solutions have to be found by other
individuals. Presenting the story in this way not only oversimplifies the issues
to the point where the dispute is almost incomprehensible, it also elides those
political and economic factors the relationship between Aboriginals and white
Australians, the impact of mining on rural Australia that would enable us to
contextualise the events and therefore to analyse them separately from the people
involved.
The strategy of individualisation is therefore a marker of news discourse, partic-
ularly soft news and human interest stories, which invites us to understand events
in the news through the perspective of individuals affected by those events. But
this strategy also works to assert the ideology of the individual as self-determining
actor, ultimately responsible for problems and their solutions, while eliding the
role of institutions, government and big business in social transactions.
Focalisation
The narrative concept of focalisation, referring to the viewpoint from which events
are described or shown to the audience, has been discussed in earlier chapters
in relation to film (see chapters 7 and 8). Fictional narratives employ a variety of
perspectives, including first-person and third-person narrators, located internally
or externally to the story, and the viewpoints of individual characters expressed
through direct speech.
A similar range of focalising positions is available to news reporters, and the

choice of focalisation is one of the ways in which different genres of journalism
can be distinguished. The objective style of hard news reporting typically relies
on an external third-person narrator who claims no privileged knowledge of how
events came about, what motivated individual participants or what the various
characters might be thinking or feeling. Individual responses are made accessible
to the reader only via the actual words of the people concerned, either quoted
directly or given to us indirectly, as in figure 16.1 (Lord Falconer said: The move
fires a warning shot . . . direct speech; Lord Woolf said the power would not
be used . . . indirect speech). During direct or indirect speech, the focalisation
appears to shift from the narrator to the speaker, further distancing the journalist
from the events being recounted. This use of external focalisation is therefore
one of the key strategies for creating the effect of objectivity, in the sense of an
impartial account of what happened, uninfluenced by the personal views of the
journalist.
However, the point of view constructed by the external narrative voice, repre-
senting an assumed commonsense position, is inevitably that of the dominant
ideologies and institutional interests within the social order. The legal correspon-
dent in figure 16.1 speaks not only on behalf of the legal profession, tacitly sup-
porting the power of judges within a court of law, but also to and about the
institution of the media and how its interests are potentially threatened by the
ruling. Other sectors of the community who are similarly affected by the change,
such as witnesses and jurors, do not have their interests represented in the story
or their views canvassed. The choice of quotes is also confined to members of
the political elite. This selectivity of information and authority reminds us that
an apparently commonsense account is already positioned within ideology and
therefore directs us to dominant or preferred meanings.
Human interest and soft news stories tend to be focalised by an internal third-
person narrator, one who seems to be present within the event and directs our
understanding of the event by means of evaluative statements. The narrator of
the French story in figure 16.2 writes from a viewpoint located where the story is
happening (in central Paris yesterday) and positions us within his own perspec-
tive (an at times limited grasp of the concept of cleanliness), as if writing a travel
guide. Similarly, the sports writer in figure 16.4 shows us the match from within
Aussie Stadium, directing us to share his view of it, and of Fittlers performance,
as dramatic, outstanding and a thumping 4810 defeat. This type of internal
focalisation is a powerful way of creating an audience of us, a community of
readers who are assumed to share the same opinions and commonsense view of
the way things are with the journalist.
Taking the range of possible focalisations found in fictional narratives, the
most striking omission in the discourse of hard news is that of the omniscient
voice that characterises many third-person narratives. The journalist, as focaliser,
is like the camera in a film, showing us what actually happened without overt
commentary or opinion except via other characters acting as focalisers. Even

the internal narrators in figures 16.2 and 16.4, who make evaluations, do not
presume to have privileged knowledge of what the other characters (the printer,
the footballer) might be thinking or feeling. This lack of any claim to narrative
omniscience is another aspect of journalistic objectivity as a discursive construct.
Whether positioned outside or inside the narrative event, the journalist focaliser
appears to be merely acting on our behalf by reporting what happened.
Chronology
The time frame within which reported events occur is one of the main struc-
tural elements of narrative. In chapter 2, Rosemary Huisman identified three
temporalities governing our experience of the world and how it is represented:
sociotemporality (a cultures understanding of its history and being over time);
human mental temporality (the personal present, which includes memory of the
past and a prediction of what will happen next), which includes the plot or tem-
poral order in a narrative; and organic (living) temporality of the real world, which
corresponds to the structuralist concept of story. In many fictional narratives,
the linear chronology of story, the order of events in real time, is subverted by
the technical and aesthetic demands of plot, which use such strategies as flash-
back and multiple focalisation for the purposes of drama, suspense and other
effects.
In the discourse of news reporting, the linear chronology of events is typically
obscured in order to emphasise the immediacy of what has happened to make it
seem more like news as it happens. The story reported in figure 16.3 gives us very
little sense of the actual order of events. Were the spears thrown before or after the
kangaroo leg was left on the porch and the intestines spread on the office door?
Temporal phrases, such as earlier in the evening, give us some orientation, but
the general impression is of a number of events happening in random order over
a relatively short period of time. The range of verbal tenses, from present perfect
(two houses have been attacked) to present (police suspect, so the rumour goes)
to past (said), work to avoid a statement of completed actions in the past, apart
from what people actually said, creating an endless time of continuing actions
that never reach a resolution.
The lack of a specific temporal order also results in a minimising of causation.
Because one action or event is not specifically linked to another temporally, there
is very little sense that one action has caused a particular reaction or resulted in
another event occurring. In the story reported in figure 16.2, there is no direct
causative relationship between the admission made in the opening paragraph
that French bar staff are often surly and slow and the plans announced by the
industry body to draw up a hundred criteria by which bar performance will be
judged. We might assume a connection, but it is not clear which event preceded the
other or whether one caused the other. Similarly, in figure 16.1, no causative event
is explicitly identified, although we can assume it lies in the statement: In long

and complex cases, the prosecution and defence bill can be millions of pounds,
hence the perceived need to fine anyone who disrupts the judicial process. The
causative statement, coming towards the end of the story, inverts the chronology
of the event, so that the lead paragraph recounts a consequence rather than an
initiating action.
Obscuring the temporal order and the nature of causation is a characteristic
feature of modern news reporting, since it enables stories to be edited down to a
specific length without impairing the meaning to any great extent. Since the nub of
the story, the lead, is given in the opening paragraph, all subsequent paragraphs
are to some extent redundant, a mere restating or glossing of what has already
been told. News stories are subedited from the bottom upwards, with one or
more paragraphs trimmed off if the story is too long to fit the space available. This
explains why news stories often seem to end rather abruptly (as in figures 16.1and
16.3) and why journalists tend to refrain from making one event dependent on
another that might be subedited out of the story.
The effect of this kind of obscured chronology is to support the veracity of a
news story as a slice of life. As in real life, events are presented as they occur,
with no overt massaging of the story into a plot of choreographed actions forming
a cause-and-effect chain that leads to an inevitable resolution. News stories tell
us that in real life, there is no resolution events continue to unfold in such
a way that one ending merely becomes another beginning. Such a world view
has the effect of decontextualising agency. Individuals appear to act completely
independently of the sociotemporality, which is itself obscured by news discourse.
The events recounted in figure 16.3 appear to belong to a time period no longer
than two years, the longest period specified in the story, and the actions of the
individuals therefore belong only to this time frame. The sociotemporal context of
the relations between Aboriginal and white Australians, a context stretching back
well before 1788, is rendered invisible, and is therefore unavailable as a means of
explaining the events of yesterday.
Where temporality and causation are foregrounded in news stories, the purpose
is normally to apportion individual blame or responsibility. Political or corporate
scandals are often documented in minute detail by media analysts, who provide
moment-by-moment accounts of individual actions and how these precipitated
further disasters and cover-ups. This temporal detail, typically including specific
times and dates, not only helps us to follow the course of events as they unfolded
but also works to assure us of their factuality. In terms of ideology, the emphasis
on organic temporality, at the expense of sociotemporality, positions individuals
as sole agents working to an immutable timetable, with exclusive responsibility
for their own actions.
Finally, it is worth remembering that contemporary news discourse, and its
handling of temporality, is itself positioned in the sociotemporal context of
modern Anglo-American cultures. Allan Bell, noting that perceived news value
overturns temporal sequence and imposes an order completely at odds with linear
narrative (Bell & Garrett 1998: 96), points out that this style of reporting is
quite at odds with most nineteenth-century news journalism, in which events
were related in strict chronological order. The economics of sensationalist and
issue-driven reporting dictate that a news story should lead not with the chrono-
logically prior event but with the news value that effectively determines the
angle.
Consequences of news as narrative
Information comes to journalists in a variety of ways, usually by means of insti-

tutionalised pathways, such as press offices and public relations companies. The
journalists job is to spin information into narrative, and I have been arguing that
both hard and soft news are forms of narratives, although with different discur-
sive techniques. News narratives also differ from fictional narratives in a number
of ways, such as the typically disordered or disconnected chronological structure
and comparative lack of causation, but they are distinctively narratives in the
sense of being shaped into stories or myths about the way things are.
What is seen as a growing trend towards the narrativisation (or tabloidisation)
of news is in fact an increasing tendency to present information about current
events in the form of soft news, particularly human interest stories. Although the
story in figure 16.2 about the French cafe industry might have been represented
in the discourse of industrial relations, it has instead been spun into a humorous
story about national stereotypes, tourism and individual perceptions of French
cafes. The genre of infotainment, produced by the economic imperatives of media
advertising and realised in the commodification of news stories, is marked by the
use of popular narrative formats that foreground conflictual and dramatic plots
involving characters representative of media-specific categories. The more the
newspapers are filled with infotainment, the less actual information and overview
of world events are made available to us.
There are a number of other consequences of presenting news as narrative, all
with ideological implications. The first is individualisation, which I have already
discussed as an aspect of news narrative. By presenting events as the work of
individual people, constructed as characters by reference to their names, ages,
occupations and often stereotyped or conventional attributes, news stories sug-
gest that most events are the result of individual human agency and that their
impact is to be perceived mainly through individual experience. At the same
time, institutional factors, political relations or environmental consequences are
often elided or minimised as social actors, except where blame or responsibility
needs to be diverted from particular individuals and spread across an organisa-
tion or institution. In figure 16.1, the article expresses concerns about newspapers,
broadcasters and news organisations as potential disrupters of court trials, terms
referring to organisations rather than to individual journalists; on the other hand,

the other possible sources of disruption jurors and witnesses are represented as
groups of individuals, members of the public who might behave inappropriately.
Members of the media are therefore protected by their institutional affiliation:
their individuality, and therefore their personal responsibility, is subordinated to
a broader corporate identity.
Another consequence of framing news as narrative is that it enables complex
material to be conveyed in the form of accessible and comprehensible formats.
Rather than spend time explaining the political, historical and cultural factors
that have led to war, journalists tend to write about individual battles and the
people involved in them as examples of heroic endeavour, tragic outcomes and
triumph over adversity. The drama of military ritual, acted out in a thousand war
movies, provides an accessible template for war reporting in the news. For some
critics, this accessibility of news by means of narrative templates is an important
aspect of the democratisation of information in the public arena.
While the media undoubtedly play a crucial role in informing the public and
helping them to understand the workings of the world around them, the formulaic
narrativisation of news inevitably leads to a diminution of the information func-
tion of news. The public might be informed in a mode that is easily comprehended,
but it is also routinely denied access to the complexities of political, economic and
cultural negotiation that generate many news events. This in turn leads to public
perceptions that politicians are not doing their job, that poor outcomes in terms
of economic success or job rates can be attributed to the incompetence of single
individuals (whether government ministers or job-seekers), and that social issues
identified as problems, such as immigration or unemployment, could easily be
solved if only the relevant people would change their behaviour or could be voted
out of office.
Narrativisation of news also works against the unfolding of continuing stories
over time or the analysis of the longer-term consequences of particular events.
None of the examples of news stories in this chapter is likely to be followed
up with specific reference to these events and their outcomes or consequences.
Other stories might appear that relate to these events perhaps an account of a
fine imposed under the new regulations, or another outbreak of violence in Con-
dobolin or some other rural town but the chances of a long-term consideration
of the effects of these events are slim. Because the narratives of news are focused
on what has happened just recently and on the immediate outcomes of a single
chain of events, audiences perceive events as disjointed and seemingly random
occurrences appear to be almost devoid of context or explanation. In some cases,
comforting if short-term resolutions are offered, such as the right of appeal in
figure 16.1 or the 100 criteria in figure 16.2, giving the impression that the matter
is under control and the problem will be fixed. In other cases, however, such as
the violence described in figure 16.3, there appears to be no solution but only a
sense of inevitability that the same story will be repeated on future occasions. Very
rarely are readers provided with any kind of social or historical context within
which events can be located and assessed.
The ultimate consequence of narrativisation of the news is that audiences
are often left feeling helpless and disempowered. The stories they read in the
newspapers, or hear on the news bulletins, seem to have no easy resolutions, no
answers to intractable problems, but instead repeat the same stories over and over
again, stories of unnecessary bureaucracy, political incompetence or corruption,
sudden violence, social breakdown and medical breakthroughs that never seem
to cure anyone they know. Only the human interest stories of love rediscovered,
unexpected wealth from the lottery or triumph after disaster provide some clo-
sure which reassures us that happy endings are possible and indeed desirable.
This limited range of news templates, of stories that are defined as news, oper-
ates to erode our sense of citizenship, our sense that we are socially empowered
to influence the world around us, not simply by one-off events such as winning
the lottery, but through the slower and less newsworthy processes of political
democracy, economic moderation and socially responsible behaviour.
Conclusion
The operations of print news production as both professional and industrial prac-
tices tend to work against any stated aims of objectivity and impartiality. In turn-
ing information into news, a specialised kind of narrative with its own recog-
nisable genres, the news industry translates the world of experience into a very
specific set of impressions presented as universal truths. News stories constantly
reconfirm the ideology of randomness, of the inexplicability of events and of the
need for charismatic individuals politicians, movie stars, ordinary heroes or
military leaders to restore order in an otherwise chaotic world. It is possible to
tell other kinds of stories and construct other kinds of ideologies about the world
but such stories are not generally told in the newspapers that we read.
Chapter 17
Analysing the discourse of news
Helen Fulton
In the last chapter, I described some of the main features of print news construc-
tion that work to bring the genre of news into the broader textual category of
narrative. The chapter also raised some of the ideological consequences of the
production and consumption of news as narrative.
In this chapter, I outline some strategies for analysing the discourse of print
news. Like any kind of critical text analysis, interpretation of news discourse needs
to be grounded in an understanding of how language choices in a given context
construct particular meanings. This is in fact what discourse means: language
choices related to a specific social context, or, as Norman Fairclough defines it,
language as a form of social practice (Fairclough 1989: 20).
Although most of us can describe in general terms the difference between an
objective news story and a sensationalised human interest story, accounting for
those differences requires a reasonably sophisticated toolbox of linguistic and
interpretive concepts that can be applied to different kinds of texts. A semiotic
methodology of critical analysis enables us to show how meanings are made and
ideologies are reiterated. Systematically identifying specific linguistic choices and
their semiotic potential is also effective for calibrating the differences between
various genres of news narratives.
Some basic tools for text analysis, based on the work of Michael Halliday and
his theory of language as a social semiotic, have already been introduced and
applied in this book (see especially chapters 8 and 12). To start with the big
picture view of texts, we can regard a piece of text, such as a news story, as
becoming meaningful because of the various functions performed by the language
245
choices. Words, phrases and clauses can perform one or more of the following
semantic functions:
r ideational: expressing the field or content of what the text is about;
r interpersonal: expressing the tenor of the social relationships between
the participants in the text, and the relationship between narrator and
audience;
r textual: expressing the mode or style of the text, how it is put together and the
medium by which it is conveyed to an audience.
The discourse of news can be analysed in more detail using these three meta-
functions of language as starting points for a closer look at the linguistic choices
that characterise news as a social practice. I have reprinted two examples of news
texts in this chapter, figures 17.1 and 17.2, and my discussion draws mainly on
these examples. I also consider some aspects of image analysis, using figure 17.3
as an example.
Public idiom
Daily newspapers published in the same country or city invariably speak in differ-
ent voices, addressing a range of imagined audiences distinguished by location,
socioeconomic groupings, political viewpoints and other factors. In the UK the
Guardian addresses urbanised professionals in the public service, educational,
creative and media sectors, who share a high level of interest in and knowledge of
contemporary politics viewed from a centre-left perspective. The Daily Telegraph
in the UK, on the other hand, addresses the business sector, including corpo-
rate professionals, small-business owners and the self-employed, whose interest
in current affairs, from a largely right-of-centre viewpoint, is shaped by financial
concerns ahead of party-political issues.
In Sydney, the Sydney Morning Herald and its sister Sunday paper, the Sun-
Herald, address a politically centrist middle-class audience with a wide age demo-
graphic, drawn from the public service (especially health and education sec-
tors), small business and the rural sector, as well as urban professionals. Both
papers are committed to watchdog journalism, providing elements of public
education while informing readers of what is going on in their city, region and
state. The Australian newspaper is more akin to the British Daily Telegraph, con-
structing a nationwide conservative audience focused on business-related issues
and economic power-broking placed in the context of national and interna-
tional movements of share markets and business fluctuations. In Sydney and
London, tabloid newspapers such as the British Sun and the Sydney-based Daily
Telegraph (both owned by Rupert Murdoch, as are The Times (London) and the
Australian) target a range of demographics, focusing mainly on non-professional
workers and marginal groups such as the unemployed, students and home-based
workers.
Analysing the discourse of news 247
Aligned to a greater or lesser extent with their actual readers (the perlocu-
tionary audience) in terms of class, occupation and demographic, newspapers
(like TV channels and magazines) have a broad understanding of their intended
or illocutionary audience, the one constructed by the language of the text. The
discourse of news calls these illocutionary audiences into being by addressing
them, or interpellating them, to use Althussers term, in a language that they are
assumed to recognise as their own (Easthope & McGowan 1992: 55). The news
does not seem to speak to them in a special voice, like a teacher or actor, but in
more or less the same voice as their families, their friends and themselves. By
invoking this shared discourse, and along with it a set of shared values and beliefs
about the world, a news outlet attempts to secure the kind of perlocutionary audi-
ence it needs to sell to advertisers.
This concept of a shared discourse is what Stuart Hall has called a public
idiom, and which Roger Fowler describes as a discursive norm . . . a sense of
a neutral language embodying normal values (Fowler 1991: 47). What this
means is that news products address their audiences in a language that seems
familiar to them, something they can recognise as belonging to their own world
of everyday interaction and experience, and which therefore helps to define them
and their sense of reality. A public idiom not only creates a comforting sense of
identity and belonging, a sense that the newspaper (or newsreader) is speaking
directly to oneself, but is also an affirmation of the rightness of shared opinions
and values. The stories told in the newspaper are the stories that its audience
recognise as fundamentally meaningful to them.
In using a range of public idioms to inform the public of current events, newspa-
pers work to reinforce ideological consensus, a general agreement that the status
quo is, if not perfect, the way things should be. Economic and power relations
between different sectors of society are implicitly confirmed as part of the natural
order of things. The story in figure 17.1, from the Weekly Telegraph, the weekly ver-
sion of the British Daily Telegraph available to international readers, conveys the
results of a poll in judicious terms which still manage to suggest that George
W. Bush, despite a resounding election win, is in trouble with his electorate. The
headline and the lead paragraph provide the point of closure that sums up the
plot, leaving little room for disagreement or alternative interpretations of the poll
results. Written as if to contribute to dinner-party conversations about the future
of Bushs administration, the article asks our consent to marginalise the war in
Iraq and regard it merely as a test of Bushs authority.
The language of different news outlets whether newspapers, TV bulletins,
radio news or web sites therefore constructs a particular kind of subject position,
inviting us to respond to the text as credible, common sense and more or less true
in the sense that it conforms to our understanding of reality. The various public
idioms of news media exert a powerful ideological pressure that reinforces the
consumers sense of identity and continuously rebuilds consensus to the prevailing
social order.
Americans see war as mistake
By Alec Russell
President Bushs post-election honeymoon came to an abrupt end last week when
it emerged that, for the first time since last years invasion of Iraq, a clear majority
of Americans believe the war is a mistake.
Before the news broke of the devastating attack on a US military base in Mosul,
a Washington Post/ABC News opinion poll found that 56 per cent thought that,
given the cost in American lives, the war was not worth fighting.
A slender majority think the invasion of Iraq has contributed to the future
security of the USA but 70 per cent believe that the 1,300 dead soldiers are an
unacceptable price.
The growing disillusionment is not leading to pressure to pull out the 150,000
troops in Iraq. Nearly 60 per cent of Americans support keeping them there until
civil order is restored.
But the findings puncture the mood of invulnerability and triumphalism in
Republican circles since Mr Bushs election victory last month . . .
Figure 17.1: Americans see war as mistake (Weekly Telegraph (UK), 29 December4 Jan-
uary 2005, p. 18, headed Iraq.) First five paragraphs of a longer story; columns altered,
spelling and punctuation retained.
Constructing a public idiom
Ideational function defining the field
Linguistic choices that perform a primarily ideational function construct the field
of discourse, telling us what the story is about. This headline, for example, from
a tabloid newspaper article reporting on a book about George W. Bush, contains
all the main ideational references: New Book claims Bush took drugs (Daily Tele-
graph (Sydney), 6 September 2004: 7). Each nominal item in the headline book,
Bush, drugs could potentially attract to itself a collocation of related items that
would expand its field to provide more detail and information. Phrases occurring
in the body of the article, such as took cocaine, experimented with drugs and
coke-taking, form a collocational set that expands the field suggested by drugs
in the headline. However, the largest collocation is connected not to Bush or his
alleged drug-taking but to the new book: the book, to be published next week . . .,
the 700-page biography, huge and controversial bestseller. The main point of
the article, then, is to advertise the forthcoming book by creating interest in its
contents, author, subject and the controversy it is likely to create. This kind of
field suggests an audience more interested in consumerism and celebrity rather
than in global politics and the future of nations.
Field is also defined by the participants, the kinds of people involved in the
action and how they are described or categorised. Categories of people are ideo-
logically significant and culturally produced groupings that reveal authorial posi-
tioning and assumptions of consensus or normality in relation to such social
structures as gender, class and power (Fowler 1991: 92; Fairclough 1995: 11314).
In figure 17.2, the category of pregnant women is set against the official might
of the Royal Australasian College of Obstetricians and Gynaecologists and the
World Health Organisation. The only spokesperson is given a full list of titles:
Australian Centre for the Control of Iodine Deficiency Disorders chairman Pro-
fessor Creswell Eastman, locating this person as part of a category of medical
professionals. Pregnant and lactating women, however, are defined entirely in
terms of their fertility, with no mention of their possible professional roles, creat-
ing an imbalance of gender and power that is naturalised in the article under the
guise of public information and education.
News reporting makes a distinction between the categories associated with
hard news (politicians, experts, government representatives, business leaders) and
those with soft news (celebrities, ordinary people, occupational groups, minor-
ity groups), implying a hierarchy of social positioning. At the same time, some
categories are overrepresented in the news compared to others. Groups associ-
ated with political, economic and cultural power tend to be overrepresented as
significant participants in and producers of the events of the day; groups defined
as marginal or minority in terms of age, gender, class or ethnicity barely appear
in hard news except as victims or criminals, but are overrepresented in human
interest stories of ordinary life. Categorisation is therefore a powerful way of
naturalising social divisions and hierarchies that are the effects of cultural and
economic factors, including the institutional conventions of media reporting.
This article also illustrates the grammatical roles played by different partic-
ipants in clauses, a phenomenon known as transitivity. In the clause Iodine
deficiency can damage the developing brain of a foetus, the verbal part, or process,
can damage, functions as a transitive material process that links the active par-
ticipant (actor) with the receiving participant (goal). The medical condition of
iodine deficiency is therefore positioned powerfully in this clause as one that has
material consequences. In figure 17.1, the phrase the news broke is intransitive
since there is an actor (news) but no goal. Furthermore, in this combination of
actor and process, the two are not functionally linked as in the phrase the cup
broke, the process appears to have no agent at all but to have come about sponta-
neously. (This grammatical feature is known as ergativity. See Thompson 1996:
11215.) Such a construction is very useful in journalistic writing as a means of
conveying events while eliding the agency of those events.
Returning to figure 17.2, the article (like the headline) begins with a passive
construction, Pregnant women will be instructed to boost their intake of iodine,
which positions pregnant women as the goal but elides the actor (they will be
instructed by whom?). Already disempowered grammatically, the goal is further
objectified by the absence of an explicit actor. In the next paragraph, the actor is
revealed as the Royal Australasian College, a depersonalised institutional author-
ity acting upon a group of individuals, which articulates a very unequal relation-
ship between actor and goal. Pregnant and lactating women, regardless of their
state of health, are grammatically and semantically constructed as patients under
Pregnant women urged to take iodine
By Miranda Wood
Pregnant women will be instructed to boost their intake of iodine to reduce the
risk of miscarriage and foetal abnormalities.
The Royal Australasian College of Obstetricians and Gynaecologists will rec-
ommend early next year that women consume more iodine when planning to
have a baby or as soon [as] they become pregnant.
Iodine deficiency can damage the developing brain of a foetus and lower a
childs IQ by 10 to 15 points.
The World Health Organisation, which recognises iodine deficiency as the
worlds most common cause of brain damage, will also meet in January to discuss
the poor intake of iodine.
Australian Centre for the Control of Iodine Deficiency Disorders chairman
Professor Creswell Eastman said Australias consumption of iodine was very
low and had created a significant health problem.
Its a serious concern, particularly for pregnant women and lactating women,
he said.
They should be supplementing their diet with iodine.
Figure 17.2: Pregnant women urged to take iodine (Sun-Herald (Sydney), 5 December
2004, p. 4. Columns altered, spelling and punctuation retained.)
instruction from the medical profession. The transitivity patterns therefore exert
a very persuasive ideological pressure on women, categorised as a single homo-
geneous group, to see themselves as patients when they become pregnant and
to obey without question the commands of medical authorities. In addition, the
transitivity patterns of actor and goal inscribe our consent to the commonsense
idea that women, pregnant or otherwise, should be treated as the passive objects
of institutional decision-making.
This commonsense idea (or ideology) is reinforced by the angle chosen by
the journalist, which focuses on pregnant women even though iodine deficiency
affects both men and women and Australias consumption of iodine [is] very
low. Calling on the common category of pregnant women, with its intertextual
connotations of helplessness, vulnerability, health problems and unpredictable
behaviour, the article reinforces a familiar ideological message that women,
not men, are entirely responsible for the health and well-being of embryos,
babies, children and the family in general, including men. Terms such as urged,
instructed, recommend and should be supplementing, belonging to a category
of didactic verbal processes, signify that it is a pregnant womans duty and obli-
gation to take iodine supplements and that she needs to be instructed to do so.
Faced with this barrage of ideological pressure from all sides, individual women
reading this article would have to be made of strong stuff indeed to ignore its
message quite apart from the accuracy or otherwise of the report, the advice of
their own doctors or indeed their own preferences. The public idiom of the article
is that of the concerned journalist engaged in socially responsible reporting with

the primary aim of informing but also instructing the public regarding such
matters of importance as health and the welfare of babies.
Categorisation and transitivity construct not only the field of discourse but also
the ideological significance of the message. A further aspect of field that also has
ideological meaning is nominalisation, whereby actions are expressed not by
verbal processes but by noun phrases. In figure 17.1, the nominals invasion of
Iraq, devastating attack on a US military base, the cost in American lives and
the growing disillusionment have been selected instead of corresponding verbal
forms: America invaded Iraq, Iraqi soldiers attacked a military base, American
lives have been spent and Americans are disillusioned. One of the most strik-
ing effects of nominalisation, as we can see in the above examples, is to remove
agency. References to invasion and attack omit the people or nation responsible,
while the semantic difference between these two concepts (invasion suggesting
something inevitable and liberationist, attack suggesting something aggressive
and unprovoked), together with the addition of the modal adjective devastating
in relation to the Iraqi attack, implies a qualitative difference between the good
Americans and the bad Iraqis.
The lack of actors helps to suggest that events are in some way inevitable,
such as the cost in American lives, as if this is an expense for which nobody
budgeted but it occurred anyway. Another effect of nominalisation is to remove
or minimise the causal relationship between events. Nominalised events, such as
invasion, attack, disillusionment, pressure, election victory and so on, express
completed actions that can then be positioned in time as part of a constructed
reality: last years invasion, Bushs election victory last month. These events seem
to have happened inevitably and ahistorically, as milestones simply occurring as
time goes past rather than as the products and consequences of a whole series of
choices, happenings and human agency. They are effects with no apparent causes.
Finally, nominalisation is one of the main stylistic features of the objective
form of news reporting, which, as I described in the previous chapter, is an
effect of discourse rather than a retrieval of facts. In both stories, figure 17.1 and
figure 17.2, nominalised forms help to construct the mode of objectivity and fac-
tuality. The mood of invulnerability and triumphalism (figure 17.1), although
highly evaluative in its assessment of post-election Republican USA, suggests a
proper distance between narrator and the events being narrated. References to
poor intake of iodine and consumption of iodine in figure 17.2, eliding the indi-
viduals who might or might not take it, help to medicalise the problem by iden-
tifying behavioural phenomena associated with health. The medical discourse of
the article not only constructs us as actual or potential patients who need urgent
treatment but also works to distance the journalist from the content. Using nom-
inalisation rather than assigning agency assures us that the story is factual and
objective and that it comes from a reputable professional source.
The field of discourse locates us within a particular construct of the real world,
with its boundaries and contours mapped out, together with the roads along which
we may travel, and those that are closed to us because of our gender, class or
other kind of social determination. Relations of power, concepts of appropriate
behaviour and a consensus as to what are facts and what are opinions are nat-
uralised as common sense through the ideologies articulated in the ideational
metafunction of journalistic discourse.
Interpersonal function defining the tenor
The tenor of discourse refers to the social relations between participants in the
text, including the narrator and audience. It includes the idea of voice: whether
we are addressed in the third or first person, and the idea of register: how for-
mally or informally the participants speak to each other. One of the simplest ways
to assess the tenor of a text is to look at the forms of address, or the ways in
which participants name each other. In figure 17.1 George Bush is referred to
as President Bush, and later as Mr Bush, using his titles rather than his first
and second names, as I have done. This creates a more formal tenor than such
titles as George W. Bush or the President, which both imply a popular media-led
familiarity. These two forms of address are frequently used in tabloid newspaper
stories, such as the Daily Telegraph (Sydney) article reporting on a book about
the Bush dynasty (6 September 2004: 7). Headlined New book claims Bush
took drugs, the article reports on allegations about Mr Bushs coke-taking . . .
from his former sister-in-law Sharon Bush, who divorced his brother Neil Bush.
The opening reference to George W. Bush serves to distinguish the son from his
father, a former US President also called George Bush, and therefore to locate
us in the world of family dynamics that is the subject of the book, called The
Family: The Real Story of the Bush Dynasty. We are reminded that the President
is just one of us really, part of a big family (the Bush dynasty, former sister-in-law
Sharon Bush, his brother Neil Bush) that has its own dysfunctional aspects
like our own. This domestication of George Bush provides the context for
the plug for Kitty Kelleys book about the Bush family, but it also expresses
the ambivalence of the disempowered towards those in power the desire to
reduce them to ordinary levels, so that we can understand them coupled with a
desire that they should be positioned beyond our sphere of experience and there-
fore unknowable.
The kinds of colloquialisms and metaphors used in journalistic discourse also
help to construct tenor, particularly the relationship between narrator and reader.
The reference to coke-taking in the tabloid article belongs to the same register
of popular speech as the President did coke at Camp David, an actual quotation
from a speaking subject. This juxtaposition unites us all narrator, interviewees
and readers in an informal register of popular colloquial speech, creating a
Table 17.1: Constructing a public idiom in news journalism
Field Tenor Mode

(Ideational function) (Interpersonal function) (Textual function)
collocations voice thematisation

categories register cohesion
transitivity metaphor repetition
nominalisation modality ellipsis
appraisal conjunction
graphology
public idiom that we are assumed to recognise as our own kind of language. It
also normalises drug use as a recreational pastime among the public at large,
not an activity confined to the criminal underworld. This further confirms the
ambivalence towards George Bush who is supposed to be one of us and therefore
at liberty to indulge in recreational drug use, but who is also supposed to be an
exemplar of morally correct behaviour, powerful enough to resist the temptations
of illegal activities.
The range of metaphors used in figure 17.1 constructs a somewhat patronising
and superior tenor between the narrator and the main participant, Americans.
Starting with post-election honeymoon and finishing with the findings punc-
ture the mood of invulnerability and triumphalism, the article suggests a certain
amount of satisfaction at the outcome of the poll, an expression of attitude that
undermines the empirical factuality of the report. The reader is invited to share
the narrators attitude, drawing us all into a language of British superiority to
American folly, a public idiom redolent of the competitive corporate marketplace.
The poll is interpreted (and was perhaps originally worded) as if the war in Iraq is
a failed business venture: Americans see war as mistake, cost in American lives,
not worth fighting, unacceptable price and future security of the USA. We are
positioned as the subjects of a global capitalist discourse in which economic out-
comes are the primary standard by which events are judged and in which Britain
and the USA compete for economic and political power.
One of the most significant ways of constructing tenor is the use of modality.
Modal forms processes, adjuncts and some phrases or clauses enable the nar-
rator to convey varying levels of commitment to the truth, desirability, necessity
or likelihood of particular events. Whereas figure 17.1 uses mainly declarative
statements came to an end, a majority of Americans believe that enable us to
attach a high truth value to what is being said, modal verbs such as can or may
(as in can damage in figure 17.2) qualify the truth claim and make it more contin-
gent. Modal adjuncts such as perhaps, possibly and almost certainly similarly
express a low modality, or a relative lack of faith in a truth claim, which is why they
are not often used in journalism, where the aim is to convey truth and factuality.
We can compare a different kind of modal adjunct used in figure 17.1, for the first
time, which signifies a high modality, a complete commitment to the truth of the
statement, adding to the assertive tenor of the whole piece. Modality is therefore
one of the main discursive strategies for making a distinction between fact and
opinion in journalistic writing.
Modal forms can also distinguish between different viewpoints or focalisa-
tions in the narration. When the narration in figure 17.2 changes from the high
modality of declarative verbs, such as will recommend, to the lower modality
of can damage, this indicates a shift in the viewpoint of the narrator to that of
her source. The whole paragraph beginning Iodine deficiency echoes the voice
of the report or press release issued by the medical college that clearly formed
the source for this article. The quoted spokesperson also uses a modal form
They should be supplementing their diet indicating a strong opinion regard-
ing desirability or necessity, and this provides yet another focalisation, explicitly
positioned. Although this opinion is clearly marked off as separate from that of
the newspaper, the voice of the college is merely implied through the change from
a higher to lower modality, so that the medical information is appropriated by the
newspaper rather than attributed to its source. By suppressing this alternative
focalisation, the newspaper can support its image as one committed to public
education.
Closely related to modality, as another aspect of tenor, is evaluation or
appraisal (Butt et al. 2000: 120). Serious journalism written in an objective
style is marked by its relative lack of both modality and appraisal, with evalu-
ative comment clearly assigned to named sources or marked off as opinion pieces
(Thompson 1996: 64). This creates a public idiom marked by impartiality, detach-
ment and a concern with facts rather than opinions. Such a discourse implicitly
realises the ideology that the world is amenable to this kind of objective study, as
in figure 17.2, where the relative lack of appraisal, or subjective comment, helps
to assert the factuality of what is reported and the authority and credibility of the
source.
High levels of appraisal are a feature of the public idiom associated with tabloid
journalism, based on conversational speech patterns and the rhetoric of market-
ing and consumption. People, objects and events are appraised in relation to
levels of graduation (on a scale of negative to positive) and force (on a scale of
hardly to very, or low-impact to high-impact), which associate them with the
language of advertising and therefore commodify them. Terms expressing force,
such as sensational allegations, controversial new book and huge and contro-
versial bestseller (where bestseller is also an example of graduation), construct
the tenor of marketing, where the relationship between narrator and reader is that
of advertiser and consumer. Highly evaluative journalism constructs an informal
register in which the narrator appears to be engaging us in animated conversation
while assuming that we all share the same appraisal about the topics under
discussion.
At the same time, any level of appraisal introduces an element of persuasion
and positioning, evidenced particularly in the rhetoric of urgency, outrage, mock-
ery, drama or triumph that inevitably accompanies tabloid journalism. With this
style of highly evaluative narrative, we are rhetorically coerced by the force of
the appraisal into the confrontational subject position of advertising, where our
only options are to submit to the overdetermined narration of need and desire
hotly disputed, eagerly awaited or to resist with equal force our subjection to
commodification.
Appraisal is not always explicitly realised through adjectives, adverbial expres-
sions and metaphors, but can be implicitly coded in lexical items, such as verbs
and noun phrases. The series of verbs at the beginning of figure 17.2 urged,
instructed, will recommend suggests a graduation of appraisal of the risks
from highly urgent to not immediately pressing. The low-risk appraisal contin-
ues during the body of the article, rising again towards the end, with the quoted
comments of serious concern and should be supplementing. This shifting in the
terms of appraisal actually makes it quite difficult for the reader to assess the
situation, undermining the newspapers implied aim of informing and educating
its readers on matters of public health and safety.
Forms and levels of appraisal are therefore an important part of the public
idiom of newspapers, positioning us to view people and events as more or less
important, significant, urgent, threatening, humorous, quirky or typical of partic-
ular social and cultural groups. Implicit discrimination against some groups, and
the privileging of others, can be conveyed by terms suggesting a scale of evalua-
tions. In figure 17.1 Bushs post-election honeymoon not only came to an end,
it also came to an abrupt end, and the majority of Americans who believe the
war is a mistake, according to the poll, are a clear majority, while those who
support the war are merely a slender majority. This careful calibration of gradu-
ating appraisal works to emphasise the extent and significance of Bushs apparent
decline in popularity.
There is of course a variety of public idioms available within the discourse of
journalism, and most newspapers regularly employ more than one, while main-
taining a dominant idiom throughout, much as radio channels cultivate their
own distinctive sound (see Anne Dunn in chapter 15). The idiom of objective
hard news reporting suggests an impartial narrator, authorised by institutional
affiliations, whose function is to inform and educate a diverse but willing commu-
nity in order to encourage citizenship and socially responsible behaviour (as in
figure 17.2). A more informal idiom, conveying the opinions of a single reporter
(institutionally positioned) through an evaluation of the facts, addresses us as
participants in a conversation of the informed electorate, weighing up together
the significance of the latest events (as in figure 17.1). The clamorous and emo-
tionally charged idiom of tabloid journalism subordinates information to the
demands of commodification and interpellates us into the text as subjects of the

marketplace.
Variations of tenor and interpersonal meanings distinguish most clearly
between different versions of the public idiom. How we are addressed, who is
hailing us and in what register position us in relation to the narrator in such a
way that we are ready to receive the message being sent to us, whether it contains
information, opinion, education, a moral lesson or advertising.
Textual function defining the mode
The mode of a news text is closely related to the narrative aspect of news since
it refers to the way in which a text is assembled and delivered as a meaningful
whole. Such words and phrases as yesterday, before, because and also perform
a textual function by indicating the relationship between one clause and another
and the way each clause fits in with the others to convey a complete event. Among
the most significant aspects of mode distinctively realised in news journalism are
thematisation, cohesion and graphology.
Thematisation refers to the choice of theme in each clause; that is, the part
of the clause (participant, process or circumstance) that occurs first (Thompson
1996: 118). Whatever is mentioned first positions us to receive the rest of the clause
in a particular order and with more or less emphasis on particular elements. An
unmarked or unemphasised theme is normally the grammatical subject, which
regularly occurs first in most English declarative sentences. In the tabloid article
about the Kitty Kelley book, the themes include George W. Bush, the book,
Laura Bush, the presidents wife, the claims, the allegations, the President and
Kelley. These themes, along with the headline and lead paragraph, indicate those
parts of the story considered to be the most significant and cue us in to what
the article is really about: promoting a book based on sensational allegations.
The pattern of thematisation throughout the article isolates the book and the
people connected with it as the main news event, with the issue of drug-taking
grammatically and semantically moved into second place.
Thematic patterns also highlight differences of power and hierarchies of sig-
nificance. In figure 17.2 the themes of the headline and opening sentence are the
same, pregnant women, while many of the subsequent themes refer to institu-
tional organisations (Royal Australasian College, World Health Organisation) or
nominalised abstractions (iodine deficiency, Australias consumption of iodine).
These themes indicate the national and international importance of the issue and
the role of Australia in world affairs, while identifying a single group of people as
the ones most affected by the issue. This group is therefore ranked thematically
as less empowered since they are excluded from any comparable institutional
structure and are positioned at the level of local and personal conditions rather
than at the level of international policy debate.
A particular feature of journalistic writing is the very long nominal groups
that most often form the grammatical subject, and therefore the theme, of many
clauses. This example from figure 17.2, Australian Centre for the Control of Iodine
Deficiency Disorders chairman Professor Creswell Eastman, forms a single nom-
inal group standing as the subject (or, in functional terms, the sayer) of the verbal
process said. Such extended themes facilitate the incorporation of several layers
of information (status, title, institutional affiliation, occupation, often age, gender
and family role as well) into a single constituent of the clause, saving space in the
news story and creating a unit that cannot easily be edited out by a subeditor. They
also contribute to the factuality of the story by positioning individuals in a recog-
nisable and verifiable social order. But they also work ideologically by categorising
individuals according to conventional descriptors that, by being frequently the-
matised, become naturalised. Thus chairman or professor function as normal
designations for a man, whereas full-time parent of three young children is more
likely to occur as a normal way to describe a woman.
Thematisation therefore draws our attention to the main topic of a news item
and helps us to identify the angle, including the plot and characters. In addi-
tion, the opening section of a clause or sentence contributes to the cohesion
of a continuous piece of text by indicating how each clause is linked to the one
before. This is usually achieved by various kinds of repetition, either of a complete
word or phrase, or by substituting one item for a similar or synonymous item,
as in this clause from figure 17.2, they should be supplementing their diet with
iodine, where the pronoun they clearly refers to pregnant and lactating women
in the previous clause. Similarly, in figure 17.1, the use of the adverb there in
the clause 60 per cent of Americans support keeping them there provides a deic-
tic reference to Iraq in the previous clause. Clearly marked linguistic repetitions
such as these help us to work our way through a text and understand what is
going on.
Cohesion can also be achieved by ellipsis, or by omitting an item that has
already occurred earlier in the text, requiring the reader to make the connec-
tion. In figure 17.1, the theme a slender majority refers to the respondents of
the poll that forms the main topic of the news item, linking this new paragraph
with the one before and reassuring us that we are still reading within the same
semantic context. It also forms part of a collocational set referring to opinion
polls: majority, 56 per cent thought that, nearly 60 per cent of Americans and
so on. The regular distribution of such terms throughout the article reminds us
that the main topic is not the war itself but the results of a poll about US atti-
tudes to the war. In addition, the repeated use of Americans rather than respon-
dents works not only cohesively but also ideologically, moving us from the dis-
course of opinion polling to the discourse of nationalism in a context of nations
at war.
Whereas repetition, ellipsis and collocations signal to us that clauses are related
semantically, conjunction indicates the ways in which they are related temporally
or causally. Figure 17.1 contains two significant conjunctive forms, before and
but, both positioned as marked themes at the beginning of clauses. The first
explains the chronology of the poll and provides an opportunity to mention and
appraise the devastating attack on a US military base. The second indicates a

dependent and contrastive link on the pattern of not one thing but another, imply-
ing that the findings of the poll are a growing disillusionment that is directly
causing Bushs popularity to decline. Other common conjunctive prepositions and
adjuncts include after, because, so, nevertheless and although.
We can also include deictics words or phrases indicating relations of time and
place among conjunctive devices since they link one event to another temporally
or spatially. The first few lines of figure 17.1 contain a succession of temporal
deictics and conjunctions that locate us fairly precisely in a specific time frame,
relating the poll results of last week to the invasion of last year and before the
news of an attack. Conjunction and deixis are working here to overdetermine the
significance of the poll results. The poll is positioned as a definitive turning point
in a continuing chain of events, one that marks a major shift in Bushs popularity
and Republican confidence. Yet there is no real evidence for such a causative
connection, which has been constructed by cohesive strategies of the discourse.
The results of the poll have been inflated into a hard news story, given urgency and
drama, by being grammatically and semantically linked to the large-scale events
of the war in Iraq and the recent presidential elections in the USA.
The mode of a text the way in which it is unfolded step by step creates a
textual logic that enables us to recognise generic styles and narratives and under-
stand what is going on in a text. The choice of mode, however, also precludes and
elides other possible ways of presenting events. By looking at textual meanings,
realised in choices of cohesive strategies, theme and conjunction, we can see how
information has been turned into a narrative, given a particular sequence, set of
major players, location and causation, in such a way as to appear natural and
seamless.
What is striking about the mode of news reporting as a form of narrative is the
relative lack of cohesion. Apart from a few locating deictics such as yesterday,
early next week and last year, which are necessary to define the immediacy of
news, most news stories represent events without clear causative or conjunctive
links, although these are sometimes implied. In figure 17.2, pregnant women are
being urged to take iodine because Australias consumption of iodine is low and
because iodine deficiency has serious health consequences. But these causative
links are not made explicit in the text. The information rolls out as a series of
unconnected utterances as if this is the way reality really happens.
In general, news stories proceed from one paragraph to the next as a series
of statements whose logical connections are suggested by a certain amount of
repetition and ellipsis, but are otherwise implicit. Abbreviated headlines and one-
sentence paragraphs, highly typical of the mode of journalism, enable nuggets of
information to be released one at a time in easily digestible portions. This mode
not only promotes oversimplification of the issues being reported, it also assists
the subediting process, which lops off one paragraph at a time, starting at the
bottom of the column. The fewer causative or logical links expressed between
the paragraphs, the easier it is to lose a few of them without compromising the
meaning of the story. Here again, we can see how the institutional practices of
journalism the need to carve up text into specific sizes and shapes to fit the page
determine the way in which news is presented to us.
Most significantly, however, journalisms lack of cohesion helps to construct a
style of objectivity and detachment. Without conjunctions, such as because, so
that, since, on the other hand and so on, the story appears to be told to us as
a series of factual happenings unmediated by the writers own interpretation or
gloss. The narrative voice is elided, and only the time frame is important, as part
of the factuality of the report. The thematised conjunction but in figure 17.1 not
only performs a textual function in linking two paragraphs, it also performs an
interpersonal function in suggesting the narrators evaluation of the relative sig-
nificance of events. Journalistic writing that displays the highest levels of explicit
cohesion tends to be opinion pieces or commentary articles in which a specific line
is being argued, evaluations are being made and the narrative voice deliberately
identifies itself, claims our attention and assumes our agreement.
Finally, the physical appearance and layout of news stories form part of its
distinctive mode. The graphology of text, the way it looks visually on the page,
contributes to its textual meaning by setting up expectations of genre, function
and content. Print advertisements typically announce themselves graphologically
by their mise en page, their distinctive mixture of image and text, use of colour,
range of fonts and font sizes, and prominent placement of a distinctive logo or
brand name. The aim of their graphological devices is both to separate advertising
material from the editorial content of the newspaper and magazine and to imitate
the appearance and public idiom of the particular publication in which it appears,
so that the readers movement from editorial to advertisement and back again is
as seamless as possible.
Similarly, print news as a genre is instantly recognisable by its distinc-
tive graphological signs, including headlines in large bold font, small-font text
arranged in columns with justified margins, broadsheet or tabloid page-size,
and a variety of text, image, news and advertisements combined on each page.
Our attention is drawn to particularly significant news items by variations in
the standard graphology, such as banner-sized headlines or break-out boxes
containing quotes or background information, or graphics, such as maps and
diagrams. This graphological variety serves a textual function by presenting the
news text in a conventional way and giving us the same information in a vari-
ety of forms, such as words and graphics. We are also given visual prompts
about how to manage the different items on the page and whether they are
related or separated. In addition, graphology serves an ideological function in
presenting information multimodally, through both text and image, and an inter-
personal function by speaking to us loudly or softly (through larger or smaller
fonts) or positioning us to respond emotively to a photographic image or boxed
quotation.
Analysing visual images in the news
Although early newspapers contained very few images, the availability of relatively
cheap photography and rapid processing in the 1950s and 1960s encouraged the
emergence of photojournalism as an essential component of newspapers (Hartley
1996: 196). With the rise of a heavily image-based advertising industry, and as
television news became more widely accessible to mass audiences, offering the
iconic veracity of film footage and actuality, newspapers had to compete for
authority and credibility by providing more images to support written text. Since
the development of digital technology, newspaper layout has made even greater
use of photographic images, in colour as well as black and white, exchanging
graphological formats with its newest competitor, the Internet.
Changes in technology have been accompanied by a change in the relationship
between written text and printed image. Until the latter part of the twentieth cen-
tury, written text commanded an authority of meaning. Important messages were
(and to some extent still are) printed in books or journals without any pictures,
or accompanied by images whose function was clearly subordinate to that of the
written text. The use of predominant images was associated with childrens books,
comics or simplified information, such as instruction manuals. According to this
old model of visual literacy, images were subservient to language and not the
other way round (Kress & van Leeuwen 1996: 21).
Spurred on by the rise of visual technology, particularly the Internet, the bal-
ance of authority has shifted in favour of images. Although written text is still
important, it is images that often drive or dominate a printed message and mark
it out as important. In news journalism, the front-page lead story is selected not
only on the basis of news values but also on the basis of having an arresting image
that can be placed centrally on the page. Single colour images, supported only by
a brief line of explanatory text, regularly form complete news items on their own,
devoid of any other text. Truth and factuality, once encoded primarily in written
language, are increasingly associated with pictures rather than words, even as we
all become more familiar with the processes by which pictures can be digitally
created and altered. The prestige of technology, in which images and multimodal
messages outrank written text on its own, comprises an ideology that increasingly
locates authority of meaning and the power to communicate with the producers
and manipulators of image.
Analysing images in newspapers is therefore an important aspect of media lit-
eracy, enabling us to explain how news narratives are constructed in image as
well as text, and how both modes of delivery are often in dialogue with each
other. While printed text uses the semiotic signs of language, punctuation and
graphology, images become meaningful through a combination of technical and
visual codes (in the sense of sign systems). Most of these signifiers have a nar-
rative function, directing us to the setting, participants and basic plot of what is
Figure 17.3: Moving forward . . . riot police charge pro-independence demonstrators

outside the Basque parliament (Sydney Morning Herald, 12 January 2005).
happening while also indicating the narrative point of view. Using the example of
a newspaper photograph that appeared in the Sydney Morning Herald in January
2005 (figure 17.3), we can see how these semiotic codes work together to produce
visual meaning.
Technical code
Signifiers operating within the technical code are those produced by the photo-
graphic hardware camera, lenses, lighting, processing and by the processes of
production and editing. They can be summarised as follows:
r Content: what is actually shown in the shot, the combination of participants
and locations. Collocations such as the riot gear shown in figure 17.3 construct
a specific context within which we read the event. The appearance of two
photographers in the shot introduces another field of activity, which suggests
the ritualistic nature of the demonstration, as a public spectacle to be watched
by others.
r Composition: how participants are arranged in the frame and where the focal
point of the camera is located. In figure 17.3 the demonstrator is clearly the
focal point, occupying the central spot where the camera is pointing while other
participants are arranged around him.
r Perspective: the spatial relationship between the participants, with some located
closer to the camera than others. Constructed by effects of lighting and focus,
perspective can create an image that appears either two-dimensional (where the
participants appear to occupy the same plane of action) or three-dimensional,
as in figure 17.3, where the ground slopes away towards the back of the shot,
giving some depth, and there are additional figures in both the foreground
and the background. Typically in sports photos, the perspective is particularly
deep, demarcating the different areas of activity occupied by players and spec-
tators, so that the players appear to loom large against the background of a vast
stadium packed with tiny people. Perspective also enhances or minimises the
significance of foreground and background and the relationship between them.
An image that is mostly foreground, with an obscured or indiscernible back-
ground, as in figure 17.3, conveys a sense of the importance and seriousness
of what is occurring by decontextualising it and therefore removing it from a
larger series of events.
r Point of view, or focalisation, the relationship between the camera and its sub-
ject. I have already summarised the conventional meanings associated with
camera angles and distance (see chapter 9), which work to motivate the way in
which the viewer perceives the subject. Seen only in the distance, a participant
appears insignificant and disempowered; a big close-up, on the other hand,
encourages empathy and recognition of a shared humanity.
r Colour, on a scale from black and white to full colour saturation. Shades of
colour can be used to draw attention to specific items in the frame, to create a
perspective and to rank participants as of greater or lesser importance in the
story of the image.
r Focus, from sharp to blurred. Advertising and film tend to use soft focus to
convey mood, but news images use focus primarily to distinguish between
foreground and background, and therefore to indicate who are the main pro-
tagonists or what is the main point of interest in the shot.
r Lighting, from bright to shadowy. In outdoor shots, lighting simply indicates
when the shot was taken, by daylight or at night. A well-lit shot constructs factu-
ality and objectivity, whereas contrasts of light and shadow suggest authorial
evaluation of participants. The fairly high-key lighting in figure 17.3 creates
a flat, unemphatic look that reduces the modality, as if we are merely being
offered a snapshot of what really happened without any mediation by the
camera.
r Body language: the gestures, posture and clothing of the participants all have
a semiotic salience that invokes conventional codes of meaning. In figure 17.3
the raised arm of the demonstrator and outstretched arms of the police officer
behind him suggest aggression, while the pose of the photographers shown
in the photo, in the act of filming, indicates their detachment from the main
scene and engagement in a completely different field of activity. All the police
depicted have some kind of weapon, while the demonstrator is clearly unarmed,
problematising the implied validation of the police as authority figures applying

the force of law.
r Framing and editing: the way in which the image is cropped or edited to fit the
space available, and how it is framed, whether by a box, caption, columns of
text, advertisement or other kind of text. In figure 17.3 there are signs of other
participants in the outer edges of the photo who have been almost edited out of
the shot, creating more emphasis on the demonstrator and his interaction with
the riot police as the main event of the image. The accompanying headline,
Basque nationalists issue challenge to Madrid, runs across both the story on
the left-hand half of the page and the image on the right, visually joining them
together and directing us to read them as part of the same story. In addition,
the single-line caption under the photo directs us to the dominant reading,
limiting the potentially polysemous nature of the image.
Visual code
Most of the technical signifiers listed above contribute to the visual semiotic of
photography in terms of how we read images and make meanings from them. In
other words, they contribute to the three Hallidayan metafunctions ideational,
interpersonal and textual that visual signs perform in order to realise various
meanings. The narrative elements of still photos, such as character, location, plot
and causation, are all conveyed through these metafunctions, as they are in verbal
texts.
The signifiers of visual image can be distinguished from those of written text
by reference to Peirces typology of signs as iconic, indexical and symbolic (see
Rosemary Huisman, chapter 2). While linguistic signifiers are largely symbolic,
because the link between a sign and the object to which it refers is entirely arbi-
trary, visual signifiers can be all three: iconic because they look like the objects
they represent, indexical because they can stand metonymically for something
else, and symbolic because they can represent an idea or association that is arbi-
trary rather than literal. However, it is the iconic role of visual images their
direct likeness to reality that makes them appear more truthful than written
text and enables them to play a formidable role in constructing the factuality of
news (Cottle 1998: 201)
Kress and van Leeuwen (1996) have provided a detailed reading of images in
terms of Hallidays three metafunctions, and much of what follows is derived
from their analysis. The work of the art historian Michael OToole (1994), who
has reconfigured Hallidays metafunctions as the representational (field), modal
(tenor) and compositional (mode) functions, provides an analytical approach to
still images from the context of the creative arts that also has relevance for news
photos.
Looking first at the field, ideational meaning in images is constructed by the
participants and the setting conveyed in the composition and content of the shot.
As in written text, collocations and categories help to define the field. Clothing
and props (such as the rifle and the cameras in figure 17.3) indicate different
fields of activity as well as the categories to which participants can be assigned.
We do not need the caption in figure 17.3 to tell us who are the riot police and
who are the demonstrators. The clothing and props are not merely iconic but
have also taken on a symbolic value as signifiers by virtue of frequent repetition
in media stories about social disturbance. The helmets, rifles and batons of the
riot police symbolise state violence legitimated as the only appropriate response
to the serious threat posed by civil disorder. The only visible face is that of the
demonstrator, making him appear more vulnerable compared to the masked faces
of both the police and the photographers, obscured by their cameras. His lack of
any symbols of authority like the weapons, uniforms and cameras also marks
him out as standing outside the authorised social order, without an identifiable
social role or occupation other than that of demonstrator.
More significantly, the composition of an image can also indicate the transitivity
roles played by the various participants. Where material processes are shown, as
in figure 17.3, we can literally see which participant is the actor and which is the
goal: the riot police are acting on the demonstrator, and so are the photographers.
Similarly, in a photo showing people talking, we can usually see who is the sayer
and who is the receiver (of the message). Kress and van Leeuwen suggest that
actor and goal are invariably linked by some kind of visual or implied line, called
a vector, which is always present in narrative (as opposed to conceptual) images
(Kress & van Leeuwen 1996: 57). There are two such vectors in figure 17.3: the
baton pointed towards the demonstrator and the outstretched arms touching him,
so that the demonstrator is caught between these two actions as the goal of both
of them. At the same time, invisible vector lines connect the demonstrator with
the two cameras pointing at him, objectifying him as a media construct. His
subordination to the forces of authority is therefore doubly imposed.
Turning next to the tenor of an image, interpersonal meanings involving the
participants, the producer of the image and the consumer of the image can all be in
play. Body language and facial expressions form iconic signs that indicate attitude
or emotion. Symbolic relationships can also be indicated by eye-line vectors, the
line of sight between two participants who are looking at each other or at some-
thing else. Participants who look out of the photo straight at the viewer are solic-
iting a response from us, whether compassion, empathy, admiration, revulsion
(as in the mug shots of alleged criminals) or merely indifference. In figure 17.3
there is an eye-line vector between the photographers, behind their cameras,
and the demonstrator, who is looking not at the cameras but ahead at the riot
police. The vector from the stills photographer on the right continues through and
beyond the demonstrator, forming a single line from photographer to policeman.
Such a link emphasises the professional role of both photographers, who are there
at the scene but apparently not part of it, capturing both demonstrator and police
with equal detachment. This vector gives the viewer permission to regard the
demonstrator in the same way, as a media event rather than as a person. Posi-
tioned as voyeurs, we dispassionately regard an objectified person who cannot
see us and whose needs or thoughts are unaccounted for.
The modality of an image the attitude towards truth and certainty expressed
by the participants and producer of the image is conveyed through such techni-
cal signs as colour, focus, lighting and the position of the camera (focalisation).
Variations in these elements can indicate a higher or lower modality, which is
connected to the effect of naturalism the more naturalistic the shot, the more it
looks as if the camera caught the action just as it happened, without any coding
or mediation, the higher the certainty that we are seeing reality. Naturalism, like
objectivity, is a semiotic effect constructed by conventional signs of discourse or
visuality. A high modality of truth and factuality is constructed by evenly lit colour
shots which suggest some depth of perspective, and which convey a naturalistic
view of reality (Kress & van Leeuwen 1996: 135). Black-and-white photos tend to
have a lower modality: as obviously stylised representations of reality, using the
codes of black-and-white photography, particularly light and shadow, they suggest
a more contingent relationship to reality, an acknowledgment that one version of
events rather than another has been chosen.
Point of view where and how the camera is placed also serves an interper-
sonal function since it brings us in to the narrative at a specific point and positions
us relative to the participants so that we can evaluate their behaviour. The distance
between the viewer and the participants is a measure of both social and emotional
distance, while camera angles construct power relations. A camera held up high,
as in figure 17.3, reduces the height of the portrayed subject, suggesting disem-
powerment. We are placed among the spectators and positioned so that we can
see the unarmed demonstrator subdued by the heavily armed authorities.
Shades of light and focus also suggest shades of opinion and appraisal, often by
adding a symbolic or indexical aspect to the sign: the demonstrator is very sharply
focused and therefore picked out for scrutiny as the index of a more widespread
civil disorder. The equally sharp focus of the figure of the photographer on the
right implicates him in the action, despite his apparent detachment, and therefore
implicates us since we are also looking at the action through the lens of another
(invisible) camera positioned on the other side of the scene. The use of black
and white emphasises the uneasy juxtaposition of state-sanctioned violence and
an apparently detached media, which, by its very presence in the scene, fails to
provide the objective and unmediated view of reality that it promises.
Finally, the mode of a photographic image is determined partly by its com-
position the way the information is organised into a visually coherent reality.
Photography textbooks refer to the rule of thirds, by which a shot is divided into
three roughly equal sections within the frame, either from left to right, or from
top to bottom, with the focal point directed at one or other of these sectors. Such
a division serves a textual function of helping us to make sense of several layers of
information at once, organised into distinctive areas of the shot. Figure 17.3 can
be divided into thirds both horizontally and vertically to show that the police and
demonstrators occupy separate sections of the frame and are connected mainly
by weapons. The figure of the photographer on the right cuts across these imag-
inary lines of division, intruding into the space occupied by the demonstrator
and the space occupied by one of the police officers, suggesting his ambivalent
position in relation to the two sides of the conflict. Moreover, the presence of the
two photographers suggests a ring of people surrounding the demonstrator on all
sides, containing the potential threat posed to social stability.
Textual meaning in images can also be produced by the thematisation of par-
ticular elements, usually placed on the left of the image, or in the top half of the
image, since in Western cultures texts are read from left to right and top to bottom.
In advertising images, a shot of the product is normally prominently thematised
by its position in the frame. The theme, normally on the left of the frame, presents
something familiar and already known or agreed on by the viewer, while the rest
of the shot contains something new or not yet fully understood that has to be
made sense of and incorporated into a commonsense world view. With its circu-
lar composition contained within the square of the frame, figure 17.3 is not clearly
divided into left and right, but rather problematises the distinction between what
is given (the theme) and what is new (the rest) (Kress & van Leeuwen 1996:
186). The image contains only a theme, only what is already known, understood
and accepted as unproblematic; namely the submission of social protest to the
force of law and the economic imperatives of the media.
This image itself appeared on the right-hand side of a broadsheet page, with
the left-hand side occupied by three columns of print about Basque nationalist
activities. Its framing, by headline above, story at the side and caption below,
is part of its mode the way in which it is presented to us and how we make
it meaningful. In terms of thematisation, the written story is the theme while
the image is the new information that has to be assimilated in relation to what
has already been given. Since the angle of the story focuses on agreement and
cooperation among rival factions of Basque nationalists, the photo seems to be
telling a different version of the story that has to be reconciled with the first. This
is done by adding a combative headline running across the top of both written
text and image, Basque nationalists issue challenge to Madrid, and by placing
a caption under the photo that anchors its meaning: Moving forward . . . riot
police charge pro-independence demonstrators outside the Basque parliament.
The new information of the photo, supported by the caption, enables us to get a
fuller or complete version of the story: there was some agreement among rival
groups but there was also protest from others.
The way in which images are framed by text, headlines, captions and other
parts of the newspaper page, including advertisements, therefore constructs tex-
tual meaning that enables us to assimilate new information into an existing under-
standing of how the world works. Dominant ideologies are naturalised through
the processes of thematisation and anchorage that link events and ideas into
a seamless whole. The caption in figure 17.3 mentions the riot police and the
pro-independence demonstrators but fails to include the photographers in the
list of participants in the photo, naturalising our view of the scene as a typical
violent encounter between good authorities and bad demonstrators. Yet it is
the presence of the photographers which destabilises that reading of the image,
adding a problematic element that is reinforced by the binary opposition of armed
police and unarmed demonstrator. Within an apparently conventional iconogra-
phy, symbolic of fears about social disorder, an uneasiness prevails that suggests
our fears are at least in part connected to the riot police whom we have delegated
to act on our behalf and the ethical role of the media.
Conclusion
It is impossible to analyse media texts in any meaningful way without recourse

to some kind of linguistic terminology. Semiotics, a term often bandied about by
media studies commentators but seldom applied systematically, is in essence a
theory of language and signification that becomes an effective analytical tool only
when combined with a detailed articulation of linguistic structures and choices.
The system offered here, based on Michael Hallidays concepts of ideational, inter-
personal and textual metafunctions of language, has the advantage of being a self-
contained system that can be applied to texts in any medium, whether written,
visual or multimodal. Using this approach, such ideas as Stuart Halls concept
of public idiom in news journalism can be systematically explored and defined,
while claims of ideological positioning, of one kind or another, can be matched
against the range of linguistic choices and their socially constructed meanings.
Part 5
Popular print culture
Chapter 18
Magazine genres
Rosemary Huisman
Print culture is a term used to describe the social practices associated with the
use of print. The printing press was invented in the late fifteenth century, but print
culture did not develop overnight. Early practitioners understood the value of the
printing press as a reproductive tool, compared to the laborious and inaccurate
practices of copying manuscripts by hand. However, they did not immediately
change their practices of layout and text organisation; that is, the earliest printed
books look like manuscripts. But over time, from the new possibilities that print
offered a new authorial control of the physical appearance of the text, a new
mode of economic organisation for the distribution of large print runs an early
print culture began to emerge.
This culture continues to change and develop in changing social contexts. It
meant and means the social recognition of new textual objects, associated with
new modes of production and interpretation of meaning. The study of narrative
in print culture has in most cases focused on the textual object, the novel, as part
of the study of literature, or literary discourse, which typically includes those
uses of language classified as having a high social value. In contrast, the study
of the media has focused attention on the phenomenon of the mass audience,
and hence pointed to those textual objects that are popular; that is, have wide
distribution and consumption. In this and the next chapter we will look at two
aspects of popular print culture: the popular text object known as the magazine,
and the discourse of advertising, as it is realised in print.
271
272 Popular print culture
General definitions
What is this known object, the magazine, generally understood to be? Here is one
dictionary definition (Collins 1979): a periodic paperback publication containing
articles, fiction, photographs etc.
The words paperback publication confirm that the magazine is a known object
(the Peircean term) within print culture. The prefix e has come to signify com-
puter use of terms derived from print culture; thus we note the recent e-magazine
for online publications.
The word paperback tells us that this publication is given a less formal status,
in its physical materiality, than the book. Although today many books are initially
issued in paperback, because of the high production cost of hard cover books,
originally in print culture the more ephemeral publications, intended for imme-
diate consumption rather than long-term conservation, were issued in paperback.
The word periodic tells us that the magazine is both a single known object and
the collective series of similar objects, issued over time. Thus I can say, Have you
seen the Womens Weekly? and mean, Have you seen this months single issue?,
or I can say, Do you read the Womens Weekly? and mean, Do you read any of
the issues of that magazine? (The Womens Weekly more accurately referred to
as the Australian Womens Weekly is a long-lasting magazine. It is a paradox,
derived from its publication history, that this magazine retains its original title of
weekly but is actually published monthly.)
Several words of print culture circle around this notion of periodic. The noun
periodical is given a dictionary meaning similar to that of magazine (a peri-
odical meaning 1: a publication issued at regular intervals, usually monthly or
weekly), but often keeps more formal or less frequent company, say as an aca-
demic publication four times a year rather than a popular weekly or monthly
issue. Similarly, the word journal appears in the title of many academic period-
icals (dictionary definition: a newspaper or periodical). Different libraries have
different habits of cataloguing a text object depending on whether it is known
to them as a periodical or a magazine, or even a journal. If you are doing
any research into magazines in library catalogues, you are likely to find yourself
searching for material under any of these words.
The definition for magazine, already quoted (a periodic paperback publication
containing articles, fiction, photographs etc.) is given as the first of seven mean-
ings. The other six meanings listed are to do with various containers for weapons
(for example, a magazine that holds cartridges) and then with the extension of
the container meanings to photography. What is common to all the meanings
of magazine is the notion of container. Its etymology is illuminating. The word
magazine came into English in the sixteenth century via French from Italian; the
Italians derived it from Arabic; and in Arabic it was a noun, meaning storehouse,
which was derived from the verb meaning to store away. The semantic extension
Magazine genres 273
is plain. A magazine as a known object of print culture is a storehouse of articles,

fiction, photographs and so on; that is, a collection of such items brought together.
This immediately tells us that we will not expect to make one generic generalisa-
tion about a magazine, because it is of its nature to store together items of various
genres: that is, to store together different types of texts, such as editorials, factual
articles, fiction, letters to the editor and so on.
Now, laboriously, we have a general understanding of the word magazine in
popular culture: it signifies a known object in the institutional discursive con-
text of print culture, which stores together texts of different genres and is issued
periodically in paperback format.
Classification categories of magazines
Rather than try to go on making generalisations about magazines such as what

types of genre are possible I think it is more helpful to make some basic empirical
observations. There are a lot of different kinds of magazines. These different kinds
of will be the labels used in different social contexts because they are useful in
that context. These labels are the classification categories for a particular social
purpose, so that magazines will be classified differently depending on the context
and purpose of the classification.
Two of the different social contexts that I have investigated are, first, the maga-
zine stands in a general newsagency (in the Holme Building, which houses student
union facilities at the University of Sydney), and, second, the AustLit Database,
accessed through the University of Sydney Library, on which publications rele-
vant to Australian literature are listed. Each place classifies magazines in ways
relevant to its social purposes.
First, the Holme Building. At the time of investigation, magazines were
arranged on a parallel pair of facing shelves (referred to here as east and west) and
a shorter display on the southern end of the shop. The classification categories
listed in bold italics are the written labels actually fixed to the shelves.
Holme Building south end display
Comics
Business and current affairs
West side display, from left
Gardening
Home living
Architecture and the arts
History and literature
Politics, essays and philosophy
Lifestyle and music
Cooking
Children and pregnancy

New age
Fitness and health
Sport
East side display, from left
Unlabelled: Who magazine box display
East side centre display
Top shelves, unlabelled mixed: Womans Day, NW, Australian Womens Weekly,
Readers Digest (these appear to be the highest circulation items) plus SMH
Good Food Guide and Good Schools Guide (annual publications)
Lower shelves, unlabelled: football magazines (relevant to a recent event, a foot-
ball final)
Lowest shelf: newspapers
East side display, shelves on right
Travel
Fashion male, female and mixed (many; includes glossies like Vogue)
Queer press
Animals and nature
Computer (many)
Science
Camera, hi-fi, technology and electronics
Motor
It is evident that the Holme newsagency classification has been made by two
criteria. The first is the field of the magazine: that is, the primary subject matter of
its content. This classification derives from the internal contents of the magazine.
The second criterion is external: the circulation figures of the magazine. This
derives from its institutional context in print culture, in studies of consumption.
The display above the newspapers, on the east side centre display, appears to group
the most popular magazines, the ones with the highest circulation. No doubt
marketing studies have suggested two principal types of magazine consumer (the
one person may be either at different times). First, there is the actual consumer
who dashes in, grabs a well-known item (newspaper and/or magazine), and dashes
out again. Second, there is the potential consumer who likes to browse, spending
more time looking through the magazines of his or her personal interest, before
deciding whether to buy. The dashing-in consumer can look quickly at the central
shelves of most popular items, while the browser can idle through the magazines
in the favoured classification categories.
We can contrast the general newsagencys classification of magazines with that
in the AustLit Database. A search on the word magazines yielded 520 entries.
In the first hundred of those entries, the following classification categories, using
the word magazines, appeared (this list is in the order in which the terms first
appear):
Magazine genres 275
r magazines
r literary magazines
r Canberra literary magazines
r little magazines
r Australian literary magazines
r poetry magazines
r fashion magazines
r womens magazines.
The first category, magazines, is obviously the broadest classification. The next
five terms, down to poetry magazines, all refer to literary magazines; this is a
more refined subdivision of the category appearing in the newsagency as history
and literature. The criteria for subclassification vary, however. The geographical
subclassification of place of publication is clear enough: Australian, Canberra
(the capital city of Australia). The discursive subclassification is also clear: the
discourse of poetry is a subcategory of the discourse of literature.
However, the term little magazines is not so clearly distinguished. Little maga-
zines typically refers to those hopeful but often brief efforts at private or university
publication in the literary sphere: a few issues, and the money or the energy or
both run out. Yet some publications, initially little magazines, go on to survive as
mainstream literary periodicals, as, for example, the Australian literary magazine
Meanjin, initially published in 1939. (Unsurprisingly, the term little magazines is
sometimes used as if synonymous with literary magazines.)
The last two categories are unremarkable at the newsagency but some-
what anomalous in the database. Given the Australian Literature focus of this
database, the last two classifications, fashion magazines and womens maga-
zines, enter the database only because some item in a particular magazine issue
has been judged a literary text object perhaps a poem or short story or has been
judged relevant to literary subject matter, for example, an article on an Australian
author. Fashion magazines corresponds to one of the newsagents content cate-
gories, fashion male, female and mixed. The last category, womens magazines,
is not found among the newsagents categories.
Considering why this is so reminds us of ideological changes in society, repro-
duced in marketing, since the 1980s or longer. Once, for example, the Thursday
Sydney Morning Herald (a daily newspaper) had a regular section entitled the
Womens Pages. This was on the assumption that women could be grouped
together as a homogeneous cluster of readers, who shared an interest in certain
subjects that were outside the matters of general (male?) interest (there was no
part of the paper headed Mens Pages!). Feminist critiques had a lot to say about
this marginalisation of issues regarded as of interest only to women, and so
modern newspapers have dropped such labelling. While the physical grouping
together of categories at the newsagency might suggest some related areas of
interest that have traditionally been regarded as female or male cooking next
to children and pregnancy, or camera, hi-fi, technology and electronics next to

motor the categories label the subject matter, not the reader. However, as we
can see, the AustLit Database preserves here the ideological mode of classification
of an earlier period. (The reference, incidentally, is to the topic of a satirical verse
in the magazine, the Bulletin, on horoscopes in womens magazines.)
These details, contrasting the classification categories of the newsagency and
the academic database, illustrate a basic point: the way types of magazines (what
are sometimes referred to inaccurately as genres of magazines) are differentiated
(that is, classified) will depend on the purposes of the classifier. It is important
to identify the subjective basis of classification in any study of the media: who
has promulgated the criteria of classification? What social purpose does the clas-
sification serve? What ideological commitment do you infer? In answering such
questions, we can begin to describe our understanding of the social practices that
characterise media culture.
To continue such study, once the classification criteria have been identified,
we can then turn to the genres in magazines. If we were to look at magazines
classified as the same, we would then need to ask what types of text (that is, what
genres) are characteristic of those magazines in that classification. Similarly, we
could compare the types of text, the genres, in magazines classified as different
to see whether they also have genres in common. From such work it would be
possible to draw general conclusions about genres in magazines. But here, to
begin the identification of genres, I will look at one issue of a particular magazine
the Australian Womens Weekly, October 2001 in order to describe its contents. I
have chosen this particular magazine because it has a long history in Australian
print culture and, as a well-established, widely distributed publication, its generic
features are likely to be comparable with those of other mainstream magazines.
Narration through language and image
The first generalisation we can make is that, as the Australian Womens Weekly
is a known object (a magazine) of print culture, and hence a text we interpret
visually, it can offer texts realised in both graphic language and image. Its pages
are designed to appeal to the sense of sight. (Occasionally you might find an appeal
to the sense of smell, as in an advertisement for scent with a folded margin infused
with the advertised perfume, or even of touch, as in raised or embossed lettering.)
Thus it is a rare page that is all language there is at least one small image. In fact,
in this particular issue I did not find one page that is exclusively language. (The
continuation pages of Barry Humphries aka Dame Ednas story, Hook, Line and
Sinker, from page 302, are anomalous in having no illustrations related to the
text, but half of each of those continuation pages has an advertisement with its
own images.) This immediately means that earlier theories of narration, typically
in structuralist narratology produced to explain traditional fiction (the oral fairy
Magazine genres 277
tale, like Propp, the oral myth, like Levi-Strauss, or the printed short story or
novel, like Todorov), are inadequate. Any narratives we read in magazines are
being told through both language and image, and it will be up to us to decide on
the possible relations between the two for any one text type, or genre.
For example, the genre of authorised column, as for three regulars on page
307, 308 and 310, has the authority of its named author indicated both by the
verbal byline (with Lee Tulloch in New York, with William McInnes, with Pat
McDermott) and in a small image of the face of each author above the byline.
The three texts, being the same genre of authorised column, are unified in both
visual layout (each has three columns on the one page) and font choice (the same
fonts are used for the main text heading and subheadings for each columnist).
Similarly, the whimsical idiosyncrasy permitted an individual who is a named
columnist (a possible feature of the authorised column) is emphasised in the
same way for each author, with a mildly witty or colloquial title, and a cartoon
illustration for each page.
So before we read the language of the text, the images have already oriented
our generic expectations. When we read the language of the texts, we find our
expectations confirmed: the pronoun I is used frequently, there is an informal
emphasis on personal history and experience in everyday life, along with the
occasional sententious pronouncement. Thus McInnes ends his column with a
little piece of autobiography worthy of an eighteenth-century novelist, the kind
whose narration came to be dominated by the specific time and social space of
the individuals experience, leading to the moment of universal reflection:
Tonight, as the current ring announcer calls for the fireworks to begin, I remem-
ber so many things from all the Redcliffe shows I have attended. I feel sad,
because Im afraid that nobody thinks the show is important any more.
I wander over to join the crowd. We watch the fireworks soar and dazzle in the
sky. A brilliant flare explodes and, as one, the crowd sighs. The show has always
been about community, joy, fun and being together. Surely, as long as people feel
the need to come together and share those moments, there will always be a place
for the Redcliffe Show.
(Australian Womens Weekly, October 2001, p. 308)
Because magazines can offer texts realised in both graphic language and image,
it is appropriate for a text analysis to comment on every detail, to whatever degree
of delicacy seems relevant. For example, magazines can differ in the level of self-
conscious coherence between image and language. From my investigation, the
Australian Womens Weekly appears tightly edited, constructing high levels of cohe-
sion. The use of colour for the three authorised columns links them visually: each
byline uses shades of pale green, each text begins with a small square of pale green.
As in the other repeated visual details, already described, the generic identity of
the three texts has been visually emphasised.
Agency: editorial and advertising
Before continuing to identify different text types or genres, we need to make a

major division of texts in the magazine in terms of their origin of production,
their agency. Is a text, in its composition of language and image, produced by
advertising staff, or is it produced by the editorial team of the magazine? An
advertising company (the creative agency) produces an advertisement for a client
(the corporate agency), who pays the advertising company and pays the magazine
company for the placement of the advertisement in the magazine. The editorial
agency is also complex: the publishers, employers of the editorial team of journal-
ists, have at least the social purpose of marketing the magazine. The owners of the
magazine might also have other ideological purposes, such as a greater support
for one political party or system over another, or a concern with promoting par-
ticular social values. These last are not necessarily sectarian: they might include
maintaining a reputation of credibility through social responsibility.
This distinction between the advertising and editorial origin of texts is initially
useful, yet no sooner does one hypothesise a dichotomy, a two-part division, than
empirical data suggests its limitations, its deconstruction. The purposes of the
advertisers and editors might overlap to such an extent that it can be difficult to
distinguish between texts presented as editorial and texts presented as advertise-
ment.
For example, the October 2001 issue of the Australian Womens Weekly con-
tains an editorial article entitled Susie ONeill, new horizons. (Susie ONeill, an
Australian, won a gold medal for swimming at the 2000 Olympics.) Page 96 has
a full-page picture. The facing page (p. 97) is divided into two columns, the left
being one-third of a page width containing the language text and the remain-
ing two-thirds to the right showing another picture. Both pictures are of ONeill
in different swimsuits. The article tells the story of ONeills post-Olympics life,
foregrounding in the opening paragraphs her new venture into her own fashion
label. The full-page picture of the swimmer in a swimsuit (p. 96) has the small
caption, The Susie swimwear range, priced from around $50, is available from
selected Target stores nationally from October. On these two pages, the edito-
rial text on page 97 purports to belong to the editorial genre magazine article,
but the photo caption clearly belongs to the genre advertising image caption.
Thus the marketing aims of advertising and editorial content converge into the
advertorial.
The opposite convergence is also possible; that is, an advertisement might
appropriate the discourse of editorial text. This can be seen in the advertisement
for Prescription Medicines THE FACTS (Australian Womens Weekly, October
2001, pp. 945). The text appears to be motivated by an ideology of social respon-
sibility, albeit allied with a positive positioning of certain products: it is full
of information, apparently for the public good. In general, editorial text has
more language than contemporary advertising, and in this respect this particular
Magazine genres 279
advertisement is more editorial-like. On page 94, the lower half of the page has
a large image of finger and thumb holding a capsule, the upper half language.
Page 95, facing, is almost entirely language, printed in three columns. The first
sentence (p. 94) has the subject we Earlier this year we commissioned indepen-
dent research to discover what Australians knew about prescription medicines
but it is not at all clear who this we refers to. The first two columns of page 95 are
structured as a series of questions and answers, derived from the commissioned
research, on generic prescription medicines. This structure mirrors the question/
answer interview in which an authority figure gives information objectively (for
example, patient and doctor), although accumulatively, so that the generic pre-
scription medicine is given a positive spin. (The last answer concludes with the
comment: Of course, you can pay a premium and ask for the originator drug
to be dispensed if you prefer. Of course a customer always likes to pay more!)
At last, at the top of column 3, we read a trademark (the name of a company)
and, at the bottom of that column, we see a trade logo and address and discover
these two pages have been inserted by a company that is proud to be a major
sponsor of National Braille Week. And finally, at the very bottom of column 3,
in minute letters barely legible to the naked eye, we see that this trademark is
one of Faulding Healthcare Pty Ltd. Overall the corporate agency (the company
client) appears to have instructed the creative agency (the advertising company)
to produce an advertisement that looks like an editorial article. At the same time,
without advertising any specific product, the advertisement has a more general
marketing function: promoting a positive attitude to a class of products associated
with the client (that is, the client as a producer of generic or unbranded
prescription drugs).
Certainly the editorial staff of the Australian Womens Weekly want to repre-
sent themselves as having an ideology committed to social values, one that is
not subservient to the demands of advertisers. The outcome of any ideological
difference between editors and advertisers is that editorial comment might tell a
different story, a narrative with different social values, from that told by particular
advertisers. This is explicit in a response to a letter to the editor in the October
2001 issue, on a page of editorially chosen content (p. 13), most texts being of the
genre letters to the editor. Each letter has an editorially chosen heading, in the
same colour and font, creating a cohesive and recognisable space in which read-
ers letters are clearly marked off from editorial material while implicitly being
subject to editorial decision-making. This letter indicates reader awareness of the
intertextual meanings that inevitably cross the conventional boundaries between
editorial and advertising:
Poor placement
I have just reread your latest magazine and would like to say it is a very infor-
mative and fabulous read. However, one thing concerning me is the article en-
titled Survival of the thinnest (AWW Sept). I am one of the women who thinks
this body image is very damaging to our younger generation. After an article
like this, how can your magazine condone turning the page for a Jenny Craig
advertisement and on the next page a Roche promotion for weight loss? Seems
hypocritical to me!
Concerned Reader etc.
This is the only letter to which the editor makes a response in the October issue.
She (or they) replies: The Weekly apologises for any insensitivity in the placement
of these advertisements. There was a breakdown in communication between our
editorial and advertising staff. However, it does reinforce that we are a magazine
that will not be compromised by advertisers.
So there you have it. A clear division between the editorial and advertising
staff, which needs to communicate about the appropriate social values for place-
ment in the magazine. The first two sentences make a pragmatic admission: there
should have been more pages between the editorial criticism of the ideal of thin-
ness and the advertising promotion of the ideal of thinness. So the magazine will
tolerate ideological contradictions, at an appropriately paginated distance. The
last sentence then makes a virtue of its misplacement: if we were a magazine
whose editorial values had to be subservient to the values of our advertisers (says
the editorial team), then we would take care not to juxtapose such a contradiction
of values, for fear of alienating our advertisers which proves that editorially we
are independent!
Narration in contemporary magazines
How would we go about looking at narration in the magazine? The magazines of

the 1950s and 1960s, like the UK Ladies Home Journal (its first issue was in 1932),
contained many fictional stories, both short stories and extracts from soon-to-
be-published books, often by famous authors. Obviously the narrative structure
of these stories could be studied with all the terminology of structuralist narra-
tology, while a post-structuralist concern would remind you to consider cultural
metanarratives and their possible influence both on the author and the editor of
the journal (who chose to include the narrative) and on your own interpretation.
But contemporary magazines?
Recent magazines have very little overt fiction, but are filled with stories of
real people. The cult of celebrity, or the commodification of the individual (such
that the name of a person becomes instead a recognised sign, the brand, whose
interpretant of celebrity status can be associated with any product, including
the product a magazine) gives our society the characters the narrative exis-
tents through whom dominant social myths can be told: stories of individual
success, failure, romance, feud, tragedy (although rarely comedy). The stories
Magazine genres 281
remain much the same, but the characters are now understood to be real. What
kind of reality is that?
For example, the cover of the Australian Who magazine, 8 October 2001 (see
figure 18.1), has a head-and-shoulders picture of Victoria Beckham (a singer for-
merly known as Posh Spice, currently married to an international football player,
David Beckham). Her face is centred on the page, her head slightly inclined down,
looking straight up at you, the magazine reader, as if you were looking into a mir-
ror an identity of you as speaking subject (who interprets) and Beckham as sub-
ject of speech (the first-person pronoun in the language text, but here the iconic
image), if you are a compliant reader who values celebrity. Above her head, in
large upper-case letters, is POSH: MY STORY. Posh is of course the brand here,
and my signifies that this story has a first-person narrator. To the left of her head
are third-person summaries of individual storylines in the story: Victoria Beck-
ham on those food problems, Geris shock Spice Girls exit and the secret romance
that led to marriage. As in Propps fairy tale (and in the nineteenth-century novel),
marriage realises the final plot function.
Posh refers to a real person, but in this narration she is like a character in a
first-person narrative. How factual are such stories? To what extent have they been
moulded, by the teller or the editorial staff, to conform to narrative expectations
of prose fiction centred on the individual, but given a familiar subject positioning
in traditional storylines?
A second example: on the cover of the Australian New Idea, 6 October 2001
(see figure 18.2), the upper two-thirds of the page is devoted to Nicole Kidman
(an Australian actress with a high profile in the Hollywood movie industry). On
the left side, we see a waist-length image of Nicole, looking to the right (like a
third-person pronoun in language, she is not directly engaged with us, the reader,
but is already as the result of the editorial mise en page (layout) in some relation
with others in an observed scene). On the right side, to which she is looking, four
lines of large type read: Nicole V Penelope/The quest for/revenge/begins, with
revenge in noticeably larger type. And below this, we see a smaller picture of the
actors Tom Cruise and Penelope Cruz, with the rubric: The court battle starts this
week and Penelope is caught in the middle.
First, note that these people are such brands that there is no need for surnames.
Like the orally transmitted stories of traditional Germanic culture (Cinderella,
Snow-White and Rose-Red), or the televisually transmitted stories of contempo-
rary soap operas, the magazine story traverses a shared field, or subject matter, in
which characters are already established and recognised. Second, note the vener-
able storyline into which these modern characters have been written: the revenge
story. The archaic language intertextually, quest is a word that collocates with
knight, oath, vigil and so on signifies the traditional nature of this (hyper-
bolic) storyline, updated with more recent intertextual references to fantasy
films such as Lord of the Rings and Van Helsing, which also draw on the narrative of
Figure 18.1: Cover of Who Weekly, 8 October 2001.

Magazine genres 283
Figure 18.2: Cover of New Idea, 6 October 2001.

quest. The Hollywood characters are placed in the same discursive context as
the movie plots from which they make their living.
H. Porter Abbott raises interesting questions about types of characters and the
inevitable flattening that takes place in narrative, fictional or real:
All cultures and subcultures include numerous types that circulate through all
the various narrative modes: the hypocrite, the flirt, the evil child, the Pollyanna,
the strong mother, the stern father, the cheat, the shrew, the good Samaritan, the
wimp, the nerd, the vixen, the stud, the schlemiel, the prostitute with a heart of
gold, the guy with a chip on his shoulder, the orphan, the yuppie, the Uncle Tom,
the rebel. These are just a tiny selection of a vast multitude of current types in
western English-speaking culture that migrate freely back and forth across the
line between fiction and non-fiction and between literary art and other narrative
venues.
(Abbott 2002: 129)
And after pointing out the real dangers of stereotyping (the terrible consequences
of branding (the word is apt) human beings as types Gypsies, Jews . . .) he asks,
But . . . are human beings capable of characterizing without the use of types?
This is a question that we all need to think about for ourselves.
Conclusion
This chapter has raised some general issues about magazines in terms of their
classifications and genres, the concept of agency and the relation between edito-
rial and advertising content. The last of these, in particular, is a complex interac-
tion common to all forms of commercial media that rely on advertising for their
main or sole source of income. Narrative stories that form the bulk of editorial
content in magazines are deeply implicated in the presentation of advertising,
providing not only the framework for the ads but also a carefully constructed cast
of characters who function to reinforce the consumer ideology of the imagined
audience.
Chapter 19
Advertising narratives
Rosemary Huisman
In chapter 3 of this book it was pointed out that structuralist studies of narration
typically study the text as object, looking for structures and relations within the
text. In contrast, post-structuralist studies of narration typically focus on the text
in relation to the subject, the subjectivity of the one who is interpreting or produc-
ing the text. Thus post-structuralist studies are usually concerned with ideology,
with the assumptions of what is natural and normal to the subject in producing
meaning. Post-structuralist studies of narration, then, focus on the ideological
orientation of narrative. What stories are told? What stories are repressed? In
whose interests is it to tell particular stories, or to repress them? And so on.
In this chapter I bring a post-structuralist perspective to bear on narration in
print-culture advertising. Again, I illustrate my general remarks with examples
from the October 2001 issue of Australian Womens Weekly.
Magic and information
The collection Media Studies: A Reader, edited by Paul Marris and Sue Thornham,
includes seven extracts in the section Advertising. The first extract is by Raymond
Williams, Advertising: The magic system, written in 1960 but published in 1980 in
his book, Problems in Materialism and Culture (Marris & Thornham 1996: 4615).
This is a much-quoted article. For example, it is one of only two articles included
under the heading Consumption and the market in The Cultural Studies Reader,
edited by Simon During (1993: 32036). I will first describe Williams account in
some detail, then suggest some modifications.
285
Williams begins with a paradoxical statement:
It is often said that our society is too materialist, and that advertising reflects this.
We are in the phase of a relatively rapid distribution of what are called consumer
goods, and advertising, with its emphasis on bringing the good things of life,
is taken as central for this reason. But it seems to me that in this respect our
society is quite evidently not materialist enough, and that this, paradoxically, is
the result of a failure in social meanings, values and ideals.
(Marris & Thornham 1996: 461; my italics)
Williams point here is that the material object being sold is never enough. He
writes that, if we were sensibly materialist, beer would be enough for us, without
the additional promise that in drinking it we would show ourselves to be manly,
young in heart, or neighbourly. A washing machine would be a useful machine to
wash clothes, rather than an indication that we are forward-looking or an object
of envy to our neighbours. Here is the relevance of narrative: you can see Williams
is suggesting that advertising writes stories which link products or objects with
subject positions of desired attributes, such as those of being manly, neighbourly,
adventurous and so on. The purchaser, by associating him- or herself with the
beer or washing machine, takes up the subject position in the story, thus gaining
access to the desired attributes.
Williams calls this need for narrative excess in our culture magic. He writes, as
a sort of paraphrase of Marxs concepts of use value and exchange value,
if these associations sell beer and washing-machines, as some of the evidence

suggests, it is clear that we have a cultural pattern in which the objects are not
enough but must be validated, if only in fantasy, by association with social and
personal meanings which in a different cultural pattern might be more directly
available. The short description of the pattern we have is magic, a highly organ-
ised and professional system of magical inducements and satisfactions, function-
ally very similar to magical systems in simpler societies, but rather strangely
coexistent with a highly developed scientific technology.
To reiterate, Williams calls modern advertising a system of organised magic

and claims its primary importance is that of obscuring a fundamental choice in
Western industrial society: that between man as consumer and man as user. This
is a choice between two metaphors for the human subject in relation to objects,
and concurrently a choice between two metaphors for the object, as that which
is consumed or that which is used. The subject as user and the object as used will
be written into different stories from the subject as consumer and the object as
consumed.
Users, writes Williams, ask for more than consumers: Users ask for the sat-
isfaction of human needs which consumption, as such, can never really supply.
Since many of these needs are social roads, hospitals, schools, quiet they are
Advertising narratives 287
not only not covered by the consumer ideal: they are even denied by it, because
consumption tends always to materialize as individual activity . . . Note the con-
trast Williams draws between the individual needs of the consumer and the social
needs of the user.
Williams goes on to suggest how this magic works: we know our social needs,
our real sources of general satisfaction, from experience, yet advertising encour-
ages us to believe that satisfaction is possible as consuming individuals. He
writes:
Advertising, in its modern forms, then operates to preserve the consumption

ideal from the criticism inexorably made of it by experience. [This is similar to
Levi-Strausss explanation of myth: that it enables the contradictions of experi-
ence and belief to be reconciled. See chapter 3.] If the consumption of individual
goods leaves that whole area of human need unsatisfied, the attempt is made, by
magic, to associate this consumption with human desires to which it has no real
reference. You do not only buy an object: you buy social respect, discrimination,
health, beauty, success, power to control your environment. The magic obscures
the real sources of general satisfaction because their discovery would involve
radical change in the whole common way of life.
Overall, Williams view of advertising is a pessimistic one of individual manip-

ulation and social loss. It suggests an earlier view of ideology as false conscious-
ness in its dichotomy of consumer and user, whereby the consumer has a false
understanding of self-gratification, the user a true understanding. But in a post-
structuralist understanding, the individual is not a constant: subjectivity is always
performed or, in other words, the subject is always interpreting or producing
meaning from one ideological perspective or another (this perspective not neces-
sarily remaining constant for any one person), always taking up or performing in
some social story. Discrimination, rather than rejection, is a more helpful response
to advertising.
Still, Williams notion of magic is very useful. I would argue that what Williams
is describing as magic is the extreme node, the more sophisticated node, at one
end of a continuum that we can use to describe the communicative intent of
advertising. The other extreme node is that of information. The minimal social
function of advertising is that of information think of those ill-lettered notices,
stuck to telegraph poles, that one sees in suburbs: Garage Sale, 36 Hereford St,
Sat. 104.
All advertisements, in one way or another, share the social purpose of promot-
ing a product, an event, a policy or idea, but an advertisement can be described
as situated anywhere on the continuum from information to magic. The informa-
tion node is associated with an object-oriented story; that is, one with information
about the product, event, policy, itself. The magic node is associated with a subject-
oriented story, one telling a story of attributes, like manly or neighbourly. A par-
ticular advertisement, situated somewhere between these two extremes, enables
the telling both of an object-oriented story with information about the product
and the telling of a subject-oriented story of attributes. The latter story, the subject-
oriented story, merely by juxtaposition with the object-information story becomes
part of the complex narrative of the object, a complex weaving of the two threads
(storylines seems appropriate) of information and magic, a narrative in which
the compliant reader could become the subject by associating themselves with
the object.
Figure 19.1 offers an extreme and self-consciously over-the-top example: the
object is the perfume in the lower right side; the subject-centred story includes the
stretch limo and chauffeur and the words Glam it up at Giorgios 20th anniversary
in Beverly Hills. The imperative mood of this clause offers a subject position (the
spoken subject) of you to the reader, and directly connects the you to the object
mentioned, Giorgio. The last line of the ad spells out the fantasy story explicitly:
spray on some Giorgio and imagine yourself in the back of the stretch limo
(p. 93). (It must be admitted that this advertisement, also offering a competition,
allowed the faint possibility of fantasy becoming reality!)
For any student of modernism in twentieth-century literature, this model of
advertising is reminiscent of one particular theory of poetry. This account of jux-
taposition in advertising, of placing subject-desired situation or attributes adja-
cent to consumer object, sounds rather like Ezra Pounds theory of the ideogram.
Pounds ideogramic theory is one of juxtaposition: the poet puts two verbal images
adjacent to each other in a poem, and the reader synthesises a related meaning.
The theory assumes that what the eye sees together, the brain relates in meaning.
This theory is still one of the foundation insights of contemporary poetry.
It is not gratuitous to mention Pound, since many of the techniques of modern
advertising have been transferred from the institutional practices of high culture,
both literature and art and indeed transference takes place in the opposite direc-
tion too, from advertising to poetry. The American literary critic Marjorie Perloff
has particularly specialised in these areas, for example, in her book Radical Arti-
fice: Writing Poetry in the Age of Media. One detail Perloff has tracked is that,
during the twentieth century, there was a considerable reduction in language text
in advertisements what we could refer to as explicit verbal narrative and there
was a corresponding increase in the role of the image in advertisements (Perloff
1991). In short, modern advertisements tend to have fewer words than they did
in the early twentieth century.
From my own consideration of magazines I suggest a hypothesis here: that
the more significance an advertisement gives to the image, in comparison to
the words, the more the advertisement moves towards the magic end of the
continuum. (Magic is almost an anagram of image!) Some story books designed
for very young children, before they can read, have pictures only, so that the child
can tell a story from the pictures, or the parent can make one up to tell the child.
Similarly, in an advertisement that consists primarily of an image, the things
pictured in the ad (the mise en scene, the iconography) and the setting (the physical
Figure 19.1: Advertisement: Giorgio perfume (Australian Womens Weekly, October 2001,
p. 93).
and social location, if any, in which the things are placed) more readily allow the
subject-oriented story to be read. This subject-oriented story is the story in which
the values of the reader associated with that iconography and that setting become
dominant over the object-oriented story, the one in which the advertisement gives
more specific information about the object. Of course language can also be used
to tell a subject-oriented story but, in general, I suggest that the verbally sparse
story allows a more open reader-oriented space for narratives of personal desire
and wishful thinking.
A second generalisation to bear in mind here is the typical reading direction
for English language: from left to right of page, and from top to bottom. In the
examples that follow, we will see that the arrangement of magic and information
in an advertisement typically makes use of one or both of these dynamic vec-
tors of reading. (Arrangement on the page is sometimes called layout or some-
times referred to by the French term mise en page.) The general rule is that the
hook of the magic story is encountered before that of the information. In the
Giorgio advertisement, the movement is from top to bottom. In the other exam-
ples below, we see a left to right movement. It is no accident that this layout
repeats the written or printed appearance of the English clause, which is struc-
tured with already known themes at the beginning of the clause and, usually,
new information positioned towards the end of the clause: that is, to the right
when written or printed. The magic subject-oriented story attempts to invoke
the desires and fantasies the reader is assumed already to have, or at least ready
to accept, in contrast to the new information of the object-oriented story. Thus,
the established habits of interpreting when reading any printed English language
can be activated for interpreting the advertising text of image and language. (Not
every advertisement will follow this conventional layout; when one does not, it is
worth considering the effect.)
Examples of the magic/information continuum
In the October 2001 issue of the Australian Womens Weekly (320 pages in all),
the following objects are the most extensively advertised in terms of numbers of
pages. (The classification of subject matter is devised by me; one advertisement
might take up two facing pages, one whole page or part of a page.)
r food (thirty pages)
r health (twenty-one pages)
r skincare (fifteen pages)
r clothes (ten pages)
r hair care (ten pages)
r cosmetics (ten pages)
r cars (eight pages)
r other (four pages or fewer).
The advertisements in which image is noticeably dominant are those for hair
care, cosmetics and cars. All three categories feature some two-page spreads,
which suggests a large advertising budget for those products. An online site for
Magazine Publishers of Australia claims that double page spreads perform better
than single pages; that is, double-page spreads achieve consistently higher reader-
ship scores than single-page units (www.magazines.org.au, link MPA QuickFacts
viewed 5 October 2004. The research was carried out for the Australian Womens
Weekly.) Whether or not this is necessarily true, it is clear the advertising agency
given the creative task of designing these advertisements will give them consider-
able professional attention.
The designers of the double-page hair care and cosmetics advertisements know-
ingly exploit the usual English reading direction in the layout. Typically, on the left
page, the reader sees a large perfect female face and hair, with no background of
social location. Thus the magic, the possible subject identification in a story with
the already desired attribute of beauty, is encountered first, as the theme. Now,
looking from the left page to the facing page on the right, the reader meets an
image of the object (the product) and some language about it. So in the layout of
the advertisement, the reader encounters the object-oriented (possibly new) infor-
mation after he/she has seen the subject-oriented magic. The advertiser hopes
that the more object-oriented information is communicated to a reader already
magically positioned to respond. The same left/magic: right/information layout
can be seen on single-page advertisements see figure 19.2.
I mentioned that there is usually no social setting or location on the left page
image in the typical hair/cosmetic advertisement. The beautiful faces swim in
space any setting, with its associated iconography, has been blocked out. Thus
the image focuses on the individual, with the associations (the iconography) that
inevitably accompany the setting quite repressed. I interpret the magic of these
advertising texts as telling a story of the encompassing availability and satisfaction
of the possession of beauty: it doesnt matter where you are or what your social
role is, beauty is available to you for the price of a product; your world will be
centred on your own wonderful presence, a being fully satisfied in its attribute of
beauty.
In contrast, the advertisements for cars typically place the object in a specific
setting. This setting is often a wild landscape, which facilitates stories of escape
or adventure, with a subject position of one with a free spirit, an adventurer. The
image of the car can be read in both the magical and the informative story
(I desire freedom of movement/this is what I could buy), so the car might be
the only object in the location, as in figure 19.3. Three of the car advertisements
in this issue of the Australian Womens Weekly are two-page spreads, and this
extra space and the inclusion of location allows them to tell more varied and
socially imaginative stories than the static floating heads of the hair/cosmetics
advertisements, and to elaborate on the freedom stories of the one-page car
advertisements.
Figure 19.2: Advertisement: Schwarzkopf Extra Care (Australian Womens Weekly, October
2001, p. 75).
Figure 19.3: Advertisement: Chrysler car (Australian Womens Weekly, October 2001, p. 9).
Two of these three conform, in varying degrees, to the magic/information

pattern of layout already established, but differ in their position on the
magic/information continuum. In one, that closer to the magic node (pp. 767),
an urban streetscape (shot in Australia, but vaguely European) runs across both
pages. On the left, a young man in a (very wet) dinner suit (it is light, so presum-
ably the next morning) climbs out of a fountain (vaguely reminiscent of La Dolce
Vita, a famous film of Italian cafe society); on the right page, we see a gleaming
image of a lengthy red car. In the second advertisement (pp. 11011), on the top
half of the left page a young woman styled as a newsreader or successful female
executive (white trouser-suit, blonde hair, discreet jewellery, professional smile
towards the reader) leans against a small grey car, with a background of night-lit
city skyscrapers. On the top half of the right page, six small images show another
young woman (or two almost identical young women) doing practical things to
her (or their) car (changing a wheel, inspecting a tool kit and so on). These cap-
able women (on the information right side) contrast with the glamorous female
on the left: they have long dark hair and wear casual, mostly dark, clothes.
I describe this advertisement as located more towards the information node, as
the bottom half of both pages is filled with language text that explains the narra-
tive of the images. Women are afraid of their cars breaking down at night: hence
the city nightscape on the left. Under the headline Maintaining your indepen-
dence, the language text exhorts women to learn some basic car-maintenance:
hence the six images on the right. The name, logo and (at that time) advertis-
ing slogan of the car manufacturer appear in the dominant information position,
the bottom right of the right-hand page. As in the generic prescription medicine
advertisement (discussed in chapter 18), this text (images and language) adver-
tises the companys ethics (social responsibility and reliability) rather than a par-
ticular product of the company.
It is also possible to reverse the magic: minus () magic, if you like. In the
third double-page car advertisement (pp. 23), on the left page a man slumps (on
a sofa?) while a young boy bounces above his head. On the right page we see a
car-escape image, the car on an isolated country road, characteristic of one-page
advertisements. The subject-oriented story that this minus-magic image invites is
one of the readers real social situation: tied to one place with a family. Contrast it
with the subject-oriented story that the first plus-magic image invited (the young
man in the fountain): the fantasy of wild late-night partying in a wealthy social
milieu. However, in comparison to the female-centred advertisement, both these
male-centred advertisements are similar in giving comparatively little information
in language. These advertisements are placed well towards the magic end of
the advertising continuum, designed primarily to arouse desire rather than give
information.
These observations are always context dependent; that is, they depend on the
magazine context in which the advertisement is placed. In a magazine of the
field Motor, as classified by a general newsagency (outlined in chapter 18), you
would expect to find car advertisements that gave more object information, since
a reader subject with more specific interest in the field (subject matter) could
be assumed. At the same time, the Australian Womens Weekly is divided into
two editorial sections. The first section, approximately a third of the total (say
to page 113), appears to assume a reader with general interests; the second,
to assume a reader with more domestic concerns (subheadings like Food are
used). The placement of advertisements correlates with this editorial division.
Thus all the advertisements for cars appear in the early pages of the magazine
(although the female-oriented one appears just before the more domestic section)
while all but three of the thirty pages of food advertisements are in the second
section.
Editorial and advertising
In chapter 18 I made the point that, although we can theorise a dichotomy in

the magazine between those parts originating from the editorial team and those
parts originating from advertising staff, a clear division between the two in terms
of their ideological goals is not always possible. I used the examples of the editorial
article on Susie ONeill and the advertisement for generic prescription medicines.
This means that studies and theories of advertising could offer insights that are
as relevant to editorial copy as to advertising copy, so that the concerns of this
chapter might be extended more generally.
James Currans discussion in his article, The impact of advertising on the
British mass media (Marris & Thornham 1996: 26679), is relevant to this issue:
that it is an artificial distinction to keep editorial copy and advertising copy in
the one magazine strictly apart in any analysis. His comments also give more
insight into the demographic and psychographic study of audiences, mentioned
in chapter 18.
Curran points out that advertisers do not generally want to communicate about
their object with all members of the public; rather they want to reach particular
segments of the market, and they will pay more to those media outlets which
give them greater access to that segment. Conversely, he points out, media outlets
like popular magazines do not cover production costs with sales of the magazine,
but must rely on advertising revenue to subsidise those costs. The implication is
clear: to ensure adequate funds, there is pressure on the editorial staff to produce
editorial material aimed at market segments to which advertisers want to appeal.
Just as in commercial television, where program-makers are selling audiences to
advertisers, there is a symbiotic relationship between editors and advertisers in
magazine publishing, whereby each needs the other to be effective.
The whole business discipline of marketing has developed the identification
and analysis of market segments for effective targeting in advertising. The results
of such market research might then be displaced from advertising staff to editorial
staff so that, driven by the perceived market segments, the magazine as a whole
tends towards a homogeneous ideology: that is, one which will be read as natu-
ral by the subject readers in that market segment. In her article, Understanding
advertisers, Kathy Myers describes this convergence of editorial and advertising
copy as particularly noticeable in womens magazines, because of their consid-
erable financial reliance on advertising (Marris & Thornham 1996: 4808).
One result of these attempts to appeal to one specific market segment is what
Curran calls inequalities of cultural provision. Womens magazines, he says, tend
to be oriented towards the middle class: This is a consequence of the much
higher advertising subsidies that middle-class women readers generate by com-
parison with working-class readers. Most womens magazines sell at cover prices
that do not cover costs. Therefore, revenue must be made up from advertisers,
who will place their advertisements in magazines that are oriented towards the
most likely consumers of their products. So, as already pointed out, the editorial
staff are under pressure to produce advertising-friendly copy that draws on the
same discursive practices as the advertisements themselves, creating a magazine
apparently seamless in its textual cohesion.
Curran comments, . . . this gravitational pull towards the middle class, exerted
by advertising, has contributed to the remarkable conservatism of much womens
journalism. Currans article was originally published in 1981, and he was writing
about the British media and reading public. There have certainly been changes
in the magazine industry since then, but his remarks still seem relevant to some
publications, both in the UK and in Australia. A content survey of the October 2001
issue of the Australian Womens Weekly suggests the kind of audience targeted by
advertisers and brought together by the editorial content.
As mentioned previously, the first general section (that is, not a specific section
like Food or Health) runs until page 113, approximately a third of the magazine.
By page 104, twelve feature articles are completed. Ten of those articles are centred
on celebrities from various fields, mostly Australian:
r John and Janette Howard (Australian politics; the prime minister and his wife)
r Elle Macpherson (Australian; beauty and business)
r Barry Humphries, aka Dame Edna (Australian; theatre)
r John Eales (Australian; sport)
r Princesses Caroline and Stephanie of Monaco (foreign royalty)
r Gai Waterhouse (Australian; horse racing)
r Prince William (British and still Australian royalty)
r Tom Cruise (American; films)
r Susie ONeill (Australian; sport and business).
This list seems remarkably conservative in terms of the areas of social activ-
ity represented compared to what is absent. Consider for example the absence of
serious cultural, intellectual and professional achievement (there are no scientists,
novelists, doctors, musicians, engineers, artists . . .). The areas of social activity
that are represented particularly foreground those social worlds that, in contem-
porary society, are more compatible with an advertising ideology of aspirational
consumerism: the worlds of celebrity, fashion, movies, sport, business initiative

and political success.
Raymond Williams commented that consumerism tends always to material-
ize as an individual activity; that is, the metaphor of people as consumers, as in
the discourse of advertising, places an emphasis on individual gratification. The
editorial articles in the magazine conform very closely to this ideology of individ-
ualism: they focus on achievement or experience as an individual activity, centred
on the named person. The eleventh feature article, of the twelve, is on the late
Gianni Versaces grand mansion. The mansion story is still centred on an indi-
viduals possession, and in that sense it could be included with the previous ten,
centred on celebrity. Only the twelfth feature article resists such inclusion. It is
on the terrorist attack in New York on September 11, 2001, the month before this
issue of the Weekly. This last item corresponds with what is judged high by news
values, such as are used by newspapers, and it is the only item in the magazine
centred more generally on social experience. The sheer scale of this awful event
has forced its way into the otherwise bland sequence of individual achievement.
Demographic and psychographic variables
I have already outlined some of the issues relating to these variables in chapter
12, but they now need to be considered in the context of advertising. It is not
inevitable that all readers will read the same narrative as that promoted in the
magic text, the image and language created by the advertising company from
the instructions of the client company. Social associations will vary with different
ideological positionings in society; the marketing section of business corporations
tries to identify large groups of people with similar positionings as market seg-
ments so that advertisers can choose images and language that are likely to be
read with the advertisers intended story.
A comparatively structuralist account of the study of advertising, which yet
acknowledges the inevitable post-structuralist, or ideological, aspects of its prac-
tice, is given in chapter 2 of Selby and Cowderys book, How to Study Television
(1995). That chapter describes a billboard advertisement, using concepts or cate-
gories that they call construction, audience, narrative, categorisation and agency.
The questions and terminology they include for discussing the category Audience
(pp. 2230) are particularly pertinent to understanding the theoretical ambiguities
in studying advertising. Initially they gloss the category Audience from a post-
structuralist perspective: it is necessary to include this category because of the
idea that a media text cannot be reduced to a single, fixed and coherent meaning,
but will instead be open to various interpretations by its various audiences. How-
ever, they then go on to describe the objective structuralist categories through
which advertisers try to categorise and segment their target audience, even though
the identification of and discrimination between these categories is necessarily a
subjective activity.
These include the paradigms of demographic or psychographic types. Demo-

graphic categories are differentiated by factors externally perceived, both objec-
tive (assumed income of occupation) and social (the status assumed given to an
occupation); this English publication describes the external criterion as class.
Psychographic categories, in contrast, describe the internal perceptions of the
audience. They attempt to divide audiences in terms of their needs, aspirations,
attitudes, motivations and lifestyle. A dozen such categories are given for the
younger audience, such as Trendies, those who crave the admiration of their
peers and Egoists, those who seek pleasure. (The advertising researchers per-
haps admit defeat with the category of Drifters, Those who are not sure what they
want!) A psychographic approach assumes that consumers will want a product
(which could be a thing, service or even idea, as in political or religious adver-
tising) that confirms or enables their own sense of identity. In other words, the
story promoted by the magic of the advertisement should require a subject posi-
tion confirming such an identity. Thus advertisers will try to give their product a
meaning, a brand identity, that conforms to the psychographic target audience.
(The term brand has now moved into more general parlance as a synonym for
recognised identity, such that a university or a political party can refer to itself
as a brand. A brand with no strongly recognised identity has no pulling power,
as one politician remarked of one political party in 2004.)
Of course one can always have resistant readers: in Discriminating or duped?
Young people as consumers of advertising/art, Mica and Orson Nava claim that
young people are now more media savvy than previous generations, that items of
popular culture, including advertisements, can be enjoyed, just as high culture,
such as art, was enjoyed by previous generations, but that young people dont
necessarily rush out and buy the object so the good (that is, entertaining)
advertisement can be appreciated as an art object, a story external to the viewers
own subjectivity (Marris & Thornham 1996: 5039).
Others are less convinced. Alan Tomlinson, in Consumer culture and the aura
of the commodity (Marris & Thornham 1996: 51014) remains more sceptical
of claims of individual resistance to advertising (since individuals are socially
produced by their environment). He reinforces Raymond Williams observations
in a more pessimistic way, concluding: Our personal identity is created by others
and marketed aggressively and seductively.
Conclusion
Raymond Williams concept of magic in advertising refers to the transformative

powers attributed to material objects by advertisers: the magic power of a particu-
lar product to make us more beautiful, manly, successful, rich and so on. Products
are sold to us not merely as useful or desirable items but on the basis of these
magic powers that they seem to possess. While acknowledging the usefulness
of Williams concept, this chapter also critiques, from a post-structuralist view-

point, the notion of a coherent and consistent subjectivity, which is implied by
the idea of magic and its effect on an individual consumer.
Instead, we can posit a continuum of signification in advertising, from magic
at one end, where the attributes of the product are transferred to the consumer, to
information at the other end, focusing on the object product itself, more or less
detached from a consumer. We can go further and suggest that advertisements in
which image is more dominant than written text are closer to the magic end of
the continuum, since image creates a more dynamic space in which individual
desires and fantasies can be located.
Finally, the chapter argues that industry categorisations of target audience into
specific socioeconomic groupings determine the format and content of the adver-
tisements themselves. Market segments are first defined, then targeted by adver-
tisements that offer the magic powers desired by particular segments. Given
the unstable nature of subjectivity, the result is an uneasy balance between con-
sumer willingness to adopt the subject position constructed by the advertisement
(and therefore to buy the product) and consumer resistance to a subject position
carefully crafted on the basis of market research and an imagined demographic.
The extent to which individual consumers can step outside socially constructed
subjectivities remains debatable.
Chapter 20
Conclusion: postmodern narrative and media
Helen Fulton
At the beginning of Tom Tykwers film Run, Lola, Run (1999), the voice-over says:
Countless questions in search of an answer . . . an answer that will give rise to a
new question, and the next question will give rise to a second question, and so on.
This announcement calls attention to the instability of meaning, which is a
central concept of post-structuralist theory and lies at the heart of postmodern
representation. The content and structure of the film challenge the conventions of
causality, temporality, motivation and closure that characterise realist narrative
and offer instead something closer to a postmodern narrative based on uncer-
tainty, repetition with variation, multimodalism and a constant disruption of the
movement from signifier to signified that stabilises meaning. Yet the idea of a
postmodern narrative appears to be something of an oxymoron, since postmod-
ernism explicitly rejects totalising narratives with their neat explanations and
carefully signposted points of closure. Is such a concept possible?
There is no doubt that contemporary media texts, and their narrative modes,
continue to locate themselves comfortably in the aesthetic of classic realism.
Emerging at the same time as the rise of industrial capitalism, in the late nine-
teenth century, the mode of realism enacts a specific ideological agenda, not only
in its representation of a world of consistent subjects who are the origin of mean-
ing, knowledge and action, but also in offering the reader, as the position from
which the text is most readily intelligible, the position of subject as the origin both
of understanding and of action in accordance with that understanding (Belsey
1980: 67). So empowered are we as the subjects of media texts that it is no wonder
we continue to consume them in ever-increasing quantities.
300
Postmodern narrative and media 301
The most significant methodology for analysing realist texts in the last half cen-
tury has undoubtedly been structuralism. Born from what seemed like a brilliant
alliance between linguistics and anthropology, structuralist theory and its appli-
cation to text (in all modes and genres) has dominated the study of narrative.
With its strategies of identifying key elements interrelated as a complete system,
such as binary oppositions and syntagmatic combinations, the goal of structural-
ism is effectively to identify the shape of an underlying model (the langue), which
pre-existed and accounted for each semiotic realisation of it (the parole). As post-
structuralist approaches have subsequently demonstrated, the apparent distinc-
tion between model and text, langue and parole, is no more sustainable than that
between denotation and connotation. Models are reconstituted from existing texts
or signifying practices, and not the other way about. Moreover, identifying the key
structural elements that comprise an underlying model is itself an ideological and
discursive practice (see chapter 3 by Rosemary Huisman). Despite Propps heroic
efforts, there is no single inevitable model to be discovered from a group of texts
any more than there are single absolute meanings.
Eschewing linguistic analysis, and in default of any other systematic strategy
of textual analysis, many media critics have found it hard to let go of structural-
ism. Textbooks on media studies regularly begin their accounts of narrative with
Vladimir Propp and end with Roland Barthes, still in his structuralist phase, as
if there is no other kind of narrative theory. Structuralist analysis can be useful
in identifying sites of signification, but the limitations of its methodologies are
rarely examined. Propps system of functions, for example, provides a framework
for comparing character roles, stereotypes and gender roles, but without a theory
of discourse or of representation it cannot account for specific relations between
characters or for narrative voice.
There is another reason why structuralist approaches to media as narrative
continue to prevail, and that is because media texts exemplify the modes of realism
and modernism that are most conducive to structuralist analysis. Divided into
well-marked genres in order to maximise their commercial potential, most media
texts can easily be reduced to an essential model or template, which the text
itself then appears to embody. When we identify the binary oppositions common
to action movies, or the basic story of romantic comedies, realised in different
plots, we are performing a satisfying game of matching the pieces in a puzzle,
oblivious of our own ideological positioning and the partiality with which we
recognise some structural elements and ignore others. Already positioned as the
empowered and coherent subjects of realist texts, we remain in the same subject
position as structuralist analysts of those texts.
The winds of post-structuralism, blowing most strongly in the 1970s and 1980s,
revealed the theoretical problems inherent in structuralism. The impossibility
of distinguishing in any practical way between langue and parole, denotation
and connotation, model and text, story and plot, dismantled the certainties of
302 Conclusion
structuralist analysis and led to a greater concern with signification and sub-
jectivity as aspects of discourse. More than structuralism, post-structuralism is
closely concerned with language, and such critics as Althusser, Foucault and Der-
rida based their theories on the discursive construction of subjectivity and power
(Poster 1989: 109).
In particular, analytical approaches based on post-structural theories of mean-
ing concern themselves with ways in which the stable subjectivity of most realist
texts, including media texts, can be destabilised and decentred. When a text makes
us aware that we need to do some work to interpret it, when it fails to offer a trans-
parent window into a coherent reality, our subjectivity is exposed as fragile and
contingent. We are no longer coherent and stable subjects, moving effortlessly
from text to meaning, from sign to referent. Our sense of who we are, or what
Angela McRobbie calls the real me, is threatened by our inability to process and
respond to the text without conscious effort. This inability itself lays bare the fic-
tive unity of the self and the essentialism entailed in the search for such a person
(McRobbie 1985: 62).
This type of unstable subjectivity is constructed by difficult or non-commercial
texts, such as James Joyces Ulysses (1922). Most readers of this text need some
kind of external assistance, from a teacher or critical handbook, in order to make
any sense of it, and are therefore produced by the text as incomplete subjects,
needy rather than self-contained. Similarly, texts that demand a conscious act of
interpretation split the subject into reader and interpreter. By challenging the
conventions of realist narrative, such films as Pierrot le Fou (1965) (Lacey 2000:
1226) and Mulholland Drive (2001) disturb the unconscious movement from sign
to referent. The reading position is destabilised, and the viewer has to supply his
or her own meanings without authorial or authoritative direction towards a sin-
gle right meaning. The possibility of multiple meanings threatens the stability
and coherence of the subject. This partly explains why news images, in newspa-
pers and on television, are so clearly captioned and explained, to direct us to a
single obvious meaning and therefore to avoid the fragmentation of the subject-
as-consumer. Concealing the contingent and fragile nature of our identities in
order to position us as freely choosing consumers is the main function of media
texts.
Post-structuralism is a significant theory in relation to the study of media nar-
rative since it offers a way of understanding subjectivity, and because it dismantles
the boundaries between the object of study and the subject who studies it. In
its emphasis on language and discourse, it provides a platform for the analy-
sis of power relations, the construction of genres and the interplay of different
narrative modes. Its relationship to postmodernism is understood differently by
various critics. For Angela McRobbie, postmodernism is a concept for under-
standing social change (McRobbie 1985: 62). Steven Best and Douglas Kellner
argue that postmodernism is a matrix that includes post-structuralism within its
brief: postmodern theory appropriates the post-structuralist critique of modern
theory, radicalises it, and extends it to new theoretical fields (Best & Kellner 1991:
256).
Although the term post-structuralism has undeniably been appropriated, and
subsequently ignored, by many postmodern critics, it has its own functional
identity, which resists assimilation into the postmodern matrix of ideas. Post-
structuralism is a theory of meaning. Postmodernism is, in terms of representa-
tion, a type of aesthetic or style, as modernism is, and therefore a legitimate object
of study based on post-structuralist understandings of discourse and signification.
The term postmodernism has two major inflections, signifying both a form
of representation and a complete cultural system. Fredric Jameson identifies it
as a cultural dominant that is inseparable from, and symptomatic of, the eco-
nomic system of late capital (Jameson 1984: 56). Terry Eagleton distinguishes
between postmodernism as a form of contemporary culture and postmodernity
as a specific historical period, which he also calls a style of thought, returning to
the essential idea of postmodernism as an aesthetic of representation (Eagleton
1996: vii). This distinction helps to explain why the postmodern aesthetic seems
to appear in the past (as in James Joyces Ulysses, for example) yet is also specific
to our own period.
Post-structuralism is a way of talking about how postmodernist texts (including
those of the plastic and visual arts) signify and how they position the reading or
viewing subject. Baudrillards concept of hyperreality, as the distinctive mode of
postmodern culture (Baudrillard 1983: 2), depends on a post-structuralist under-
standing of the relationship between sign and referent, text and reality. As part
of popular culture, the media work at the level of hyperreality, constantly repro-
ducing not the real but simulations of the real. When Baudrillard says: It is no
longer a question of a false representation of reality (ideology), but of concealing
the fact that the real is no longer real (Baudrillard 1983: 23), he is drawing on the
post-structuralist theory that reality is available to us only through the mediation
of discourse, whether linguistic, visual, auditory or multimodal. It follows that
postmodern texts (like all texts) are not precisely a symptom of postmodernity
but are representations of an idea of a cultural condition that is itself available
only through textual mediations.
Similarly, Lyotards claim that the postmodern condition is characterised by an
incredulity towards metanarratives depends on post-structuralist theories relat-
ing to truth claims and how these are ideologically validated (Lyotard 1984: xxiv).
The concept of a metanarrative as a totalising and homogenising force is given
substance by Foucaults post-structuralist approach to the relationship between
discourse and power and Lacans theory of the subject emerging at the symbolic
level of language. Slavoj Zizek asserts, somewhat hyperbolically, It is only with
Lacan that the postmodernist break occurs . . . the only poststructuralist is
Lacan (Zizek 1999: 41).
The postmodern aesthetic and its political and semantic interpretations are
unknowable without the analytical strategies made possible by post-structuralist
304 Conclusion
thought. To return to the example of the film, Run, Lola, Run, its temporal con-
fusions, parallel stories and juxtapositions of the modes of realism, surrealism
and animation, proclaim it to be a notable example of a postmodernist text. Yet
its opening voice-over, telling us in effect that every decoding is another encod-
ing, that meaning exists only in an endless chain of signifiers, directs us to a
post-structuralist reading of the film. The fashionable label of postmodernism
tends to eclipse the films self-awareness of a post-structuralist reading of its
textuality.
To say that we live in a period of postmodernity, then, is to say little more than
that we live in a time when postmodern modes of representation are dominant.
This period might well be associated with the economics of global capitalism, as
Jameson has argued, but there is nothing postmodern about global capitalism
except its success in promoting the postmodern aesthetic. Postmodern politics,
the politics of this so-called postmodern age, remain conservatively capitalistic.
When cultural historians try to describe the characteristics of postmodernism as
a period of history one marked by pluralism, absence of metanarratives, denat-
uralisation, rejection of authorised meanings and so on they tend to accept the
economic structures of capitalism as authoritative givens, the real that cannot
be simulated, the natural that automatically resists denaturalisation. Postmod-
ernism is offered as a radical break with past cultures but is in fact as politically
conservative as most of them.
This conservatism is replicated in the analysis of postmodern texts, which is
invariably structuralist in its orientation. The postmodern aesthetic is defined in
terms of a model, or a set of defining characteristics, such as fragmentation, pas-
tiche, juxtaposition, absence of closure and so on, all structural features that can
be identified by a process of empirical observation and content analysis. Roland
Barthes introduced the idea of a simulacrum as the model or underlying struc-
ture that comprises the rules of a text and brings out something that remained
invisible, or, if you like, unintelligible in the natural object (Barthes 1964: 213).
This concept effectively prefigures Baudrillards simulation in which models and
codes become the primary determinants of social experience (Best & Kellner
1991: 119).
A postmodernist text, then, is one that displays certain features typical of the
aesthetic, and which can be interpreted using structuralist analysis and/or post-
structuralist theories of signification. It represents an alternative aesthetic of
representation, coexisting with realist, naturalist, modernist and other styles of
textual representation. Most media texts rely on realist narratives; the question is
whether postmodern narratives exist in the media, or indeed at all. If we accept
that postmodernity is our current cultural condition, all texts produced in this
period can be called postmodern. But in the sense of conforming to a particular
aesthetic or model of expected stylistic norms, we can distinguish between post-
modern norms of representation and other norms that utilise different logics of
representation.
Some critics argue that postmodern texts, in this latter sense, are innately non-
narrative, such as Ihab Hassans binary opposition between modernist narrative
and postmodernist anti-narrative (Swingewood 1998: 164). Such an opposition
assumes, however, that narrative automatically means realist narrative, the kind
that has a cause-and-effect progression, a consistency of space and time, and an
identifiable point of closure. If that is taken as the normative definition of narra-
tive, then postmodern texts tell a different kind of story. Within the postmodern
mode of representation, the linguistic signifiers of realist narrative are typically
replaced with image, eroding the boundaries between high and popular cultures.
Yet image is also a powerful mode of representation and a fertile source of narra-
tive of all kinds.
Television sitcoms such as Seinfeld and The Simpsons can be regarded as post-
modern representations of a postmodern condition, fetishising consumption and
the commodification of popular culture, including celebrity. Episodes of Seinfeld
seem to emerge as part of a continuum of lived experience, lacking resolution
or closure, resisting progression or character development, returning again and
again to consumption, commodity fetishism and exchange value. Some of the
major trademarks of The Simpsons are associated with postmodernist style, such
as its playful pastiche of different genres, its high levels of intertextuality and self-
referencing, its self-conscious embrace of celebrity as both risible and seductive.
Yet each episode of both these sitcoms is highly structured using the framework of
realist narrative, featuring actions that later have consequences, characters who
are stereotypical in their consistency of performance and resolutions that might
be no more than the intervention of theme music and credits but still serve to
mark off a narrative event.
Much vaunted for its innovation as a television genre, reality TV can also be
regarded as postmodern in terms of its status as simulation or hyperreality. The
participants or contestants in reality TV shows enact not reality but a simula-
tion of reality determined by intertextual readings of other TV shows, media-
generated concepts of celebrity, and the professional practices of producers and
editors involved in making the shows. Even here, however, framing the statements
of both postmodernism pastiche, lack of closure, elision of authorial voices
and postmodernity commodity capitalism, product placement, consumption of
celebrity the principles of realist narrative organise this simulated reality into
the manufactured peaks and troughs of television fiction. The Internet, with its
postmodern array of hyperlinks and infinite pathways, invites us to construct a
coherent narrative in which we are the hero and our point of closure is the end
of a quest, marked by the consumption of knowledge or the actual purchase of a
commodity.
Postmodern media narratives, then, have their own structuring principles, a
normative array of narrative strategies that overlap with those of realism. In the
process of subverting the principles of realism, by rejecting closure or author-
ity of genre, postmodernism still invokes a palimpsest of that which it subverts.
306 Conclusion
Narrative itself is the mode of representation; realism and postmodernism are

different voices within it. Despite being heavily implicated in postmodernity as a
cultural condition, the media tend not to generate many postmodern narratives.
Apart from self-conscious realisations of postmodern style in film or television
drama, the media tend to move entirely in the direction of realist narrative. Even
the news is shaped into stories, which are provided with a logic of time and space
and a resolution manufactured from the materials to hand. The role of the media
is to produce the subjects of consumerism. We have to be continually reproduced
as single coherent subjects through our consumption of media texts, and this
subject position is most efficiently reinforced by narrative in its realist aesthetic.
The postmodernist style of narrative, on the other hand, draws attention to
commodification. It strips away the illusions of advertising and threatens the
power of advertisers to interpellate us as subjects of capitalism. It can be con-
fronting and destabilising and, like many episodes of Seinfeld, can disturb the
consuming subject by parodying its commodity fetishism. Watching television,
with its combination of genres, we engage in a constant cycle of fragmentation
followed by the reintegration of the self through the familiar narrative models of
sitcoms, police dramas and soap operas. Themselves the inventions of modernity,
the popular media remain committed to the modernist project of narrative while
constructing the hyperreality of the postmodern condition.
Processing reality and experience through the narrative strategies of consumer
capitalism, the media seem to represent a site of struggle between postmodernity
and postmodernism. As fast as postmodernism attempts to collapse the generic
boundaries of media narrative, the economic logic of the media demands that they
be re-erected, since they are needed for marketing and audience segmentation.
Such television programs as Big Brother and The Simpsons, innovative in terms
of genre and narrative when they first appeared, have been assimilated into the
kind of totalising genres reality TV and animated sitcom from which they had
sought to escape. Imagined as a democracy of information liberated from the
metanarratives of modernism, the Internet has instead become incorporated into
the postmodernist metanarrative of commodification and the illusion of choice.
Yet this apparent struggle between the economics of postmodern culture and
the aesthetics of postmodernism, enacted on the terrain of the mass media, is
itself a narrative construct. The aesthetics of postmodernism, whether articu-
lated in art, architecture, literature or the media, are powerfully entwined with
the economics of commodity capitalism, shaping themselves into the very com-
modities that postmodern texts claim to deconstruct. Media texts that might be
described as postmodern in their narrative strategies are in the end complicit in
the media agenda of positioning audiences as sovereign consumers, the coherent
subjects of capitalism.
Glossary
agency At the level of text, agency refers to the sender(s) of a communicative message,
who control its form and content and who project an interpretive position into the text.
Most media texts have a complex system of agency, since they are normally produced
by more than one person, including writers, editors, producers and other media pro-
fessionals. Agency is responsible for the subject positions constructed by a text; that is,
the way subjects are positioned in relation to the text. In accepting or resisting these
subject positions, readers or viewers are engaging with the agency of the text. At the
level of individual clauses within a larger text, agency can also refer to the participant
who carries out or controls the action of the clause.
appraisal See modality.
audience The audience for media texts can be theorised as comprising both an illocution-
ary and a perlocutionary audience. The illocutionary or virtual audience is projected by
the producers of a text or interpellated by the text. It is a discursive construct brought
into being by the language of the text, and is more or less the same as the target or
assumed audience that underlies commercial media production and which is sold to
advertisers. The perlocutionary audience refers to the actual viewers and consumers of
media texts, who do not necessarily coincide with the illocutionary audience. Because of
the size and nature of media audiences, both kinds of audience are almost impossible to
know empirically who they are, how many of them, what demographics they belong
to despite the existence of such measuring tools as television ratings, market research
questionnaires and focus groups.
closure The point in a narrative at which only one ending is possible. This point might
come right at the end, towards the end or nearer the beginning, as in a romance text
where it is obvious almost from the beginning that a particular pair of characters will
end up as a couple. Not all narratives have a point of closure but may be open-ended,
leaving a variety of potential resolutions for the reader or audience to consider.
cohesion This is an aspect of the mode of a text (see field, tenor, mode); that is, how a
text is organised so that its elements combine to form a coherent and complete event (or
not). Different genres are distinguished by their different levels of cohesion.
context of situation This refers to the immediate context in which a text is produced
and received, and which influences the ways in which the text is constructed and inter-
preted. Movie dialogue is unlike natural conversation because of its context of situation,
constructed to fit a specific scene in the film while also directed at a watching audience
307
308 Glossary
in a cinema. Different registers and genres define, and are defined by, different contexts
of situation.
diegesis and mimesis (1) Two ways of presenting a narrative: telling it in the narrators
own words (diegesis) or showing it through the words and actions of different characters
(mimesis). (2) With regard to film and television, diegesis refers to the filmic world of
the narrative, the reality constructed within the film or TV program.
discourse Most generally, discourse is language in use. It is typically described in terms
of the language practices of its institutional or social context: thus, legal discourse,
literary discourse, family discourse. Discourses are distinguished by classifications
that are not absolute but are historically and socially produced. A discourse is associ-
ated with particular conventions of interpretation and production: for example, televi-
sion discourse assumes a private context of reception, film discourse a public context.
A discourse can have a limited or extensive context of use: the discourse of advertising
is realised in many media, from billboard to radio to email spam. In traditional liter-
ary studies, the term genre has been conflated with discourse, but it is helpful to use
discourse to refer to the conventional literary divisions: poetry, drama and prose fiction.
The term genre can then refer to specific text types for each discourse. (See genre.)
duration One of Genettes concepts, to do with the speed of a narrative. It compares how
long a narrator or a film dwells on events when telling them in the narrative (that is, plot
time and screen time) with how long those events might take if actually experienced.
The latter is often misleadingly called story time, but a story is already a mediated
telling of the experience. This sleight of hand by which story is equated with experience
contributes to the structuralist dichotomy of story and plot. Direct speech, quoted as it
would be said, is taken as a duration of 1:1. Different media facilitate different durations.
For example, prose fiction lends itself to summary (perhaps achieved by a voice-over in a
film) whereas film and television can elongate the narrative with a slow motion sequence
of shots or with the real time of dialogue.
field, tenor, mode These terms are used in systemic functional grammar, associated par-
ticularly with the linguist M. A. K. Halliday. They refer to the three aspects of the context
of situation in which a message is produced or interpreted. Field refers both to the
social action (for narrative, the act of telling) and to the subject matter (what is told).
Field is realised in choices of ideational meaning, which includes experiential meaning
(for example, in language, agency or goal for a participant, or mental rather than verbal
meaning for a process) and logical meaning (in language, the meanings of connectors
like but, although). Tenor refers to the social relations between people in the context
of situation, and their attitude to the message this includes the context of telling (the
producer of the message and its audience) and the context of what is told (the diegetic
characters in the narrated world). Tenor is realised in choices of interpersonal meaning,
(in language, choices of mood and modality; see below). Mode refers to the medium
of delivery (written, spoken, visual and their subcategories) and the organisation of the
message into a more or less coherent unit in relation to its context of situation. Mode is
realised in choices of textual meaning.
focalisation A category of Genettes mood: the perspective from which the narrative is
told, the one who sees, as opposed to the one who tells (the narrator). A refinement of
the traditional narrative concept point of view. For a helpful discussion see Rimmon-
Kenan (1983, chapter 6).
genre A type or category of text, serving a particular social purpose. Texts identified as
belonging to the same genre typically share some structural and/or linguistic features.
Glossary 309
Different media discourses can make use of the same genres (for example, the interview
in radio and television). Particular genres might nonetheless be primarily associated
with a particular discourse; for example, the novel is a genre of the discourse of prose
fiction, the sitcom is a genre of the discourse of television.
heteroglossia The variety of meanings that can be made by different consumers of a
text, depending on their own previous experience of other texts.
ideology Ideology orients interpretative habits that appear natural, common sense, not
open to debate or questioning. Typically, we become aware of ideology only through dif-
ferences in ideology (consider the narratives purveyed by different political parties before
an election). To the extent that its instantiations are universal in a particular culture,
it is invisible to its practitioners. Post-structuralist critiques of institutional practices
(discourses, genres, texts) usually focus on ideology.
institution The site of power relations in a culture, with subject positions and/or roles of
varying power within it, and associated social practices, verbal or non-verbal. Examples
of institutions include the law, different religions, the family, sport, literature, advertising
and print-culture publishing.
intertextuality The semiotic links between texts that draw on similar linguistic and ref-
erential conventions. Each text draws on meanings that have been established in other
texts and which enable audiences to recognise particular genres and meanings.
langue and parole These French terms were used by Saussure to distinguish between
a whole system, such as a language, or langue, and individual examples of that system
put into practice a parole, or a specific text or utterance. This distinction is associated
with structuralist analysis, whereby a specific narrative, such as a film version of the
Robin Hood legend, is analysed as a parole in relation to a pre-existing langue, in this
case a perceived generic form of the Robin Hood legend. The model of langue and parole
has been undermined by post-structuralist critiques which suggest that all apparent
examples of langue are in fact themselves paroles. In attempting to recount the generic
form of the Robin Hood legend, for example, a narrator simply constructs his or her
own version of it; that is, a parole. See also story and plot.
metalanguage Refers to any interpretive discourse used to explain and analyse a prior
level of signification. A film, for example, can be analysed using the metalanguage of
narrative criticism.
metanarrative or myth Metanarratives, or myths to use the structuralist term, are the
persistent cultural stories, especially those of power relations (such as stories of gender,
ethnicity and class), epistemology (ways of knowing) and ontology (ways of being), which
people in that culture receive and transmit. By their habitual retelling of metanarratives
in their social practices, people confirm and reconfirm the ideology of the culture. For
the anthropologist Levi-Strauss, the function of myth among particular cultural groups
was to reconcile contradictions between experience and belief. For Lyotard, the major
metanarrative of Western culture has been that of science (as he described it); that
is, the elevation of the rational and objective, with a repression of the subjectivity of
interpretation. (Gender studies would identify the subject of that myth to be white and
masculine.)
mimesis See diegesis.
mise en page Refers to what is put on the page in a printed or manuscript text, and the
way the page is visually organised. Combinations of words and images, various fonts
and headings and other graphological signs form a particular layout that itself generates
meanings.
310 Glossary
mise en scene Literally the setting of a narrative, but also the collocation of particular
items or natural objects that conventionally signify a context. In film analysis, the term
refers to the visual realisation of a setting, the composition of an image within a given
shot or sequence, providing a site of signification (a place where meanings are made).
modality Refers to the attitude of the speaker or narrative voice in relation to the truth,
certainty, obligation, possibility and value of what is being narrated. A high modality,
such as that found in the declarative statements of news reporting, suggests truth, cer-
tainty, factuality. Lower levels of modality, identified by the use of auxiliary verbs such
as might or could, and by modal expressions such as perhaps or I think, suggest
that the speaker or narrator is less certain of the truth of what is being claimed. Evalu-
ative expressions, or appraisal, indicating positive or negative attitudes, are part of the
modality of a text.
mode The means by which a text is delivered. The basic division is between the spoken
mode and the written mode. However, complex modes are associated with different
genres. For a theatre drama, the mode is written to be performed as speech; for a radio
drama, written to be spoken as speech; for a story in a political speech, written to be
spoken or performed (depending on the media) as if not-written (that is, simulating
spontaneous speech); for the novel, in the twentieth century, written to be read silently;
for Chaucers narrative poetry in the fourteenth century, written to be read aloud. See
also field, tenor, mode.
montage A set of conventions relating to film editing; the ways in which different shots,
taken at different times, are selected and spliced together to make a single narrative
sequence.
myth See metanarrative.
narrative/narrator In the speech function choices of systemic functional linguistics one
can give information (tell) or give goods and services (offer), and one can ask for infor-
mation (question) or ask for goods and services (command or, more politely, request).
The mood structures realise these different meanings: the declarative mood to tell, the
interrogative mood to question, the imperative mood to request and various formulations
to offer. The narrator gives information so the usual narrative mood is the declarative,
making statements. The full range of mood choices appears only in the speech of char-
acters (or usually do so marked is the choice of the interrogative mood by a narrator
that it is called a rhetorical question). See also voice.
nominalisation At the level of the clause within a larger piece of text, actions expressed
by noun phrases instead of by verbs are said to be nominalised. Thus in the clause
Outbursts of gunfire began at daylight, the noun phrase outbursts of gunfire replaces
a verbal expression, such as Soldiers began firing at daylight. The main effect of nomi-
nalisation, which is a defining characteristic of news reporting, is to elide agency who
is performing the action and causality, the reasons why an action takes place. Nomi-
nalisation is therefore an effect device in the construction of an objective tenor in news
reporting.
order One of Genettes three categories of tense: the order of events in the narrative
compared to the chronological order of events.
pacing Changes of narrative speed produced by adjusting the relationship between the
time occupied by particular events in a narrative and the amount of narrative space
devoted to those events. See also duration.
point of view See focalisation.
plot See story.
Glossary 311
register A somewhat contentious term in discourse analysis, referring to the relationship

between language choices and the context of situation. A text that seems believable and
transparent, enabling its audience to interpret it without effort, uses a register that is
entirely compatible with its context. The register of hard news reporting is characterised
by formality, objectivity and an emphasis on empirical facts. The register of soap opera,
on the other hand, is characterised by informal conversation and domestic references.
Control of register, so that language choices are appropriate to context, is one of the
ways in which genre is established.
representation A useful term to use loosely, but it carries theoretical baggage. The pre-
fix re means do again, as in rewind. Thus represent is re-present: the experience is
already present, and in a text it can be presented again, but this time in language. But
language always mediates the experience; it is more accurate to say language signifies
the experience than that it represents it. A second, more subtle, problem is that if the pro-
cess of re-presenting suggests the experience is already present, it effaces the Umwelt,
the recognition that all experience is perceived, even initially, through a sign system and
therefore through ideological glasses.
semiotics and semiosis While semiotics is the science of signs, semiosis refers to the
process of signification by which signs become meaningful. Saussure and Barthes pre-
ferred the term semiology, but following the usage of the American theorist Charles
Peirce, semiotics has become standard. Structuralist semiotics studies signs and sign-
systems (being); post-structuralist semiotics studies processes of signification, the prac-
tices of interpreting or producing meaning (becoming). Narrative study is a species of
semiotic study; for different purposes, a structuralist or post-structuralist method of
study, or both, can be found relevant.
simulacrum For Barthes, a simulacrum was a copy that revealed the model or underly-
ing structure of the original. Postmodernists, particularly Baudrillard, have retheorised
the simulacrum as a copy that has no original, referring particularly to media and mar-
keting texts (such as theme parks) that construct their own reality while claiming to
reflect reality. According to this theory, the process of simulation means that audiences
increasingly experience reality only through the signs and codes of commercialism and
the mass media.
story and plot These terms express a structuralist view of narrative as comprising a
langue, or pre-existing set of events happening in chronological order (the story), and a
parole, the specific instance of this set of events (the plot) as organised and elaborated
in one particular text. The story is therefore regarded as existing before the plot, as if it
were an unmediated account of real experience compared with the artificially produced
plot.
subject (1) Grammatical subject: derived from Aristotles logic of the proposition: the
subject is that of which the proposition is asserted (the predicate). (2) Speaking subject:
from Benveniste, the subject of the enunciation, the one who speaks the text. (3) Subject
of speech: from Benveniste, the enounced subject, the one who speaks in the text (the
first person pronouns in the text). (4) Spoken subject: an interpretative position projected
into the text that the audience is invited to occupy. In film theory, the position and angle
of the camera constructs the position offered to the spoken subject. For example, an
advertiser would try to project a spoken subject position thought to be attractive (by
market research) to the target audience. A resistant reader might refuse to take up that
position (for example, a feminist response to a traditional fairy tale in which a passive
princess waits while the prince acts and acts . . .).
312 Glossary
temporality The way in which narrative events in a text are related to each other in terms
of time. Different kinds of temporality are associated with different media genres, such
as the parallel storylines of soap opera, in which simultaneous events are necessarily
shown in a linear sequence.
tenor See field, tenor, mode.
text A text is a semantic unit, usually identified by its genre as a coherent known media
object: a conversation, a letter, a novel, a film. The medium is sometimes explicit in its
generic naming; for example, a radio play. The segmented texts of television are more
problematic. One episode of a series could be described as one text, but one episode of
a soap opera, with its juxtaposition of different storylines in each segment, is scarcely
a text in the sense of a semantic unit, although it is a text in the sense of a finite media
object.
transitivity In narrative study, transitivity analysis is particularly relevant to understand-
ing the power relations assumed in the text. Transitivity is the system of choices of
experiential meaning in the clause (see field, tenor, mode) by which participants take
up particular meanings in relation to the process, meanings such as who does what to
whom, who has agency, who is acted upon and so on.
Umwelt The semiotic world of the interpreter; that is, the extent of experiential reality
that has meaning for an individual. Umwelt also includes the range of signifying practices
available to an individual that enables him or her to recognise genres and interpret
linguistic conventions.
vector An actual or imaginary line, often diagonal, connecting participants (both people
and objects) in an image or shot. The term is used by Kress and van Leeuwen (1996) to
analyse meaning and transitivity in visual texts.
virtual audience See audience.
voice Generally refers to the presence of the narrator in a text, the constructed conscious-
ness of the narrator who is telling the story as opposed to the literal author of the text.
Voice can broadly be subdivided into first person (the narrative I of a first-hand account,
which implies a second-person you who is being addressed) and third person, where
the narrative voice represents participants in the text. The way in which voice is con-
structed in particular texts has ideological implications since the narrative voice has the
power to determine how participants and actions are represented. Voice can therefore
be gendered or given similar kinds of social positioning.
Bibliography
Abbott, H. Porter, Cambridge Introduction to Narrative, Cambridge: Cambridge University

Press, 2002.
Alasuutari, Pertti (ed.), Rethinking the Media Audience, London: Sage Publications, 1999.
Allen, S., News Culture, Buckingham, UK: Open University Press, 1999.
Andrew, Dudley, Adaptation, in James Naremore (ed.), Film Adaptation, London: Athlone
Press, 2000, pp. 2837.
Bal, Mieke, The narrating and the focalising: A theory of agents in narrative, Style 17
(1983), 23469.
Narratology: Introduction to the Theory of Narrative, 2nd edn, Toronto and Buffalo:
Toronto University Press, 1997 (1st edn, 1985).
Baker, R., Will the media be the end of us?, Harvard International Journal of Press/Politics
4.3 (1999), 98105.
Barnard, S., Studying Radio, London and New York: Arnold, 2000.
Barthes, Roland, Essais Critiques, Paris: Editions du Seuil, 1964.
S/Z, New York: Hill & Wang, 1974.
Image-Music-Text, London: Fontana, 1977.
Baudrillard, Jean, Simulations, New York: Semiotext(e), 1983.
Baym, G., Packaging reality: Structures of form in US network news coverage of Watergate
and the Clinton impeachment, Journalism: Theory, Practice and Criticism 5.3 (2004),
27999.
Bell, Allan, and Peter Garrett (eds), Approaches to Media Discourse, Oxford: Blackwell,
1998.
Bell, P., and Theo van Leeuwen, The Media Interview: Confession, Contest, Conversation,
Sydney: UNSW Press, 1994.
Belsey, Catherine, Critical Practice, London: Methuen, 1980.
Benjamin, Walter, Illuminations, ed. Hannah Arendt, New York: Schocken, 1969.
Bennett, T., S. Boyd-Bowman, C. Mercer and J. Woollacott (eds), Popular Film and Televi-
sion, London: British Film Institute, 1981.
Best, Steven, and Douglas Kellner, Postmodern Theory: Critical Interrogations, London:
Macmillan, 1991.
Bignell, Jonathan, Media Semiotics: An Introduction, Manchester: Manchester University
Press, 1997.
313
314 Bibliography
Bordwell, David, and Kristin Thompson, Film Art: An Introduction, Reading, MA: Addison-
Wesley Publishing Co., 1979.
Bordwell, David, J. Staiger and Kristin Thompson, The Classical Hollywood Cinema: Film
Style and Mode of Production to 1960, London: Routledge, 1985.
Bourdieu, Pierre, Distinction, trans. Richard Nice, London and New York: Routledge &
Kegan Paul, 1986 (first published 1979).
Branigan, E., Narrative Comprehension and Film, London: Routledge, 1992.
Briggs, S., Those Radio Times, London: Weidenfeld & Nicolson, 1981.
Brooks, P., Reading for the Plot: Design and Intention in Narrative, Cambridge MA: Harvard
University Press, 1992.
Butt, David et al., Using Functional Grammar: An Explorers Guide, 2nd edn, Macquarie
University, Sydney: National Centre for English Language Teaching and Research, 2000.
Campbell, Joseph, The Hero with a Thousand Faces, New York: Pantheon, 1949.
Cartmell, Deborah, and Imelda Whelehan, Adaptations: From Text to Screen, Screen to Text,
London and New York: Routledge, 1999.
Chandler, Daniel, Semiotics: The Basics, London: Routledge, 2002.
Chatman, Seymour, The structure of narrative transmission, in Roger Fowler (ed.), Style
and Structure in Literature, Oxford: Blackwell, 1975, pp. 21357.
What novels can do that films cant (and vice versa), Critical Inquiry 7 (1980), 12140.
Story and Discourse, Ithaca and London: Cornell University Press, 1978.
Clark, Katerina, and Michael Holquist, Mikhail Bakhtin, Cambridge, Mass.: Belknap Press
of Harvard University Press, 1984.
Clarke, Patricia, and Dale Spender, Life Lines, Australian Womens Letters and Diaries 1788
to 1840, Sydney: Allen & Unwin, 1992.
Cobley, Paul, Narrative, London: Routledge, 2001.
Cohen, Stanley, Folk Devils and Moral Panics: The Creation of the Mods and Rockers, London:
MacGibbon & Kee, 1972.
Cohen, Stanley, and Jock Young (eds), The Manufacture of News: Social Problems, Deviance
and Mass Media, London: Constable, 1973.
Collins Dictionary of the English Language, Sydney: Collins, 1979.
Conley, D., The Daily Miracle: An Introduction to Journalism, 2nd edn, Melbourne: Oxford
Cook, David A., A History of Narrative Film, 3rd edn, New York and London: W. W. Norton
& Co., 1996.
Cooke, L., The police series, in G. Creeber (ed.), The Television Genre Book, pp. 1923.
Cooper, James Fenimore, Last of the Mohicans, A Narrative of 1757, rev. edn, Paris: Baudrys
European Library, 1835.
The Pioneers (first published 1822), New York: Airmont, 1964.
Cortazzi, Martin, Narrative Analysis, London: Falmer, 1993.
Cottle, Simon, Analysing visuals: Still and moving images in Anders Hansen et al., Mass
Communication Research Methods, pp. 189224.
Cranny-Francis, Anne, and Patricia Palmer Gillard, Soap opera as gender training: Teenage
girls and TV, in Terry Threadgold and Anne Cranny-Francis (eds), Feminine, Masculine
and Representation, Sydney: Allen & Unwin, 1990, pp. 17189.
Creeber, G. (ed.), The Television Genre Book, London: British Film Institute, 2001.
Crisell, Andrew, Understanding Radio, 2nd edn, London and New York: Routledge, 1994.
An Introductory History of British Broadcasting, London and New York: Routledge,
1997.
Bibliography 315
Better than Magritte: How drama on the radio became radio drama, Journal of Radio
Studies 7.2 (2000), 46473.
Culler, Jonathan, Saussure, Glasgow: Fontana, 1976.
Deely, John, Basics of Semiotics, Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1990.
Dorsch, T. S., Classical Literary Criticism, Aristotle, Horace, Longinus, Harmondsworth:
Penguin, 1965.
During, Simon (ed.), The Cultural Studies Reader, London: Routledge, 1993.
Dyer, R., Kill and kill again, in Sight and Sound 7.9 (1997), 1417.
Eagleton, Terry, The Illusions of Postmodernism, Oxford: Blackwell, 1996.
Easthope, Antony, and Kate McGowan (eds), A Critical and Cultural Theory Reader, London:
Allen & Unwin, 1992.
Eco, Umberto, Semiotics and the Philosophy of Language, London: Macmillan, 1984.
Ellis, John, Visible Fictions: Cinema, Television, Video, rev. edn, London and New York:
Routledge, 1992.
Epstein, E. J., Between Fact and Fiction: The Problem of Journalism, New York: Random
House, 1975.
News from Nowhere: Television and the News, 2nd edn, New York: Random House, 2000.
Ericson, R., P. Baranek and J. Chan, Visualizing Deviance: A Study of News Organization,
Milton Keynes: Open University Press, 1987.
Fairclough, Norman, Language and Power, London and New York: Longman, 1989.
Media Discourse, London and New York: Edward Arnold, 1995.
Fiske, John, Television Culture, London: Methuen, 1987.
and Hartley, John, Reading Television, 2nd edn, London: Routledge, 2003.
Fowler, Roger, Language in the News: Discourse and Ideology in the Press, London and New
York: Routledge, 1991.
Linguistic Criticism, 2nd edn, Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1996.
Fraser, J. T., Time, Conflict, and Human Values, Urbana: Illinois University Press, 1999.
Friel, Brian, Selected Plays, London: Faber, 1984.
Gans, H., Deciding Whats News, New York: Pantheon, 1979.
Garnham, Nicholas, Capitalism and Communication, London: Sage Publications, 1990.
Genette, Gerard, Narrative Discourse: An Essay in Method, trans. Jane E. Lewin, Ithaca,
NY: Cornell University Press, 1980 (first published in French in 1972).
Goatly, Andrew, Critical Reading and Writing: An Introductory Coursebook, London and
New York: Routledge, 2000.
Goffman, E., Frame Analysis, New York: Harper & Row, 1974.
Gordon, Lyndall, A Private Life of Henry James, New York and London: W. W. Norton,
1999.
Griffith, James, Adaptations as Imitations: Films from Novels, Newark: University of
Delaware Press, 1997.
Hall, Stuart, The narrative construction of news, Context: A Forum for Literary Arts and
Culture 10 (1983), online edition, www.centerforbookculture.org/context/no10/hall.html;
viewed 12 October 2004.
Hall, Stuart et al., Policing the Crisis: Mugging, the State, and Law and Order, Basingstoke:
Macmillan, 1978.
Halliday, M. A. K., Language as Social Semiotic: The Social Interpretation of Language and
Meaning, London and New York: Edward Arnold, 1978.
and Hasan, Ruqaiya, Language, Context and Text: Aspects of Language in a Social-Semiotic
Perspective, Waurn Ponds, Vic.: Deakin University Press, 1985.
316 Bibliography
Hallin, D., We Keep America on Top of the World: Television Journalism and the Public Sphere,
Hansen, Anders, Simon Cottle, Ralph Negrine and Chris Newbold, Mass Communication
Research Methods, London: Macmillan, 1998.
Hartley, John, Understanding News, London: Routledge, 1982.
Popular Reality: Journalism, Modernity, Popular Culture, London and New York: Arnold,
1996.
Hawthorn, Jeremy (ed.), Narrative: From Malory to Motion Pictures, London: Edward
Arnold, 1985.
Hodge, Robert, and Gunther Kress, Rereading as exorcism: Semiotics and the ghost of
Saussure, Southern Review 19 (1986), 3852.
Hurd, G., The television presentation of the police, in T. Bennett et al. (eds), Popular Film
and Television.
Innis, Robert E. (ed.), Semiotics: An Introductory Reader, Bloomington: Indiana University
Press, 1985, and as Semiotics: An Introductory Anthology, London: Hutchinson, 1986.
Jameson, Fredric, Postmodernism, or the cultural logic of late capitalism, New Left Review
146 (JulyAugust 1984), 5392.
Signatures of the Visible, London: Routledge, 1992.
Kilborn, Richard, Television Soaps, London: Batsford, 1992.
Kress, Gunther, and Theo van Leeuwen, Reading Images: The Grammar of Visual Design,
Labov, William, Language in the Inner City, Philadelphia: Pennsylvania University Press,
1972.
Lacey, Nick, Image and Representation: Key Concepts in Media Studies, London: Macmillan,
1998.
Narrative and Genre: Key Concepts in Media Studies, London: Macmillan, 2000.
Langer, John, Tabloid Television: Popular Journalism and the Other News, London and New
York: Routledge, 1998.
Levi-Strauss, Claude, The structural study of myth, in Structural Anthropology,
Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1977, pp. 20631 (first published in French in 1958).
Lewis, P., and J. Booth, The Invisible Medium, Basingstoke and London: Macmillan, 1989.
Lichtenberg, Judith, In defence of objectivity revisited, in J. Curran and M. Gurevitch
(eds), Mass Media and Society, 3rd edn, London: Arnold, 2000, pp. 23854.
Livingstone, Sonia M. (1990a), Making Sense of Television: The Psychology of Audience
Interpretation, Oxford: Pergamon, 1990.
(1990b), Interpreting a television narrative: How different viewers see a story, Journal
of Communication 40 (1990), 7285.
The rise and fall of audience research: An old story with a new ending, in Mark R.
Levy and Michael Gurevitch (eds), Defining Media Studies: Reflections on the Future of
the Field, New York: Oxford University Press, 1994, pp. 24754.
Lowe, N. J., The Classical Plot and the Invention of Western Narrative, Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press, 2000.
Lumby, Catharine, and J. ONeil, Tabloid television, in J. Schulz (ed.), Not Just Another
Business, Sydney: Pluto Press, 1994, pp. 14966.
Lyotard, Jean-Francois, The Postmodern Condition: A Report on Knowledge, Manchester:
Manchester University Press; Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1984.
Marris, Paul, and Sue Thornham (eds), Media Studies, A Reader, Edinburgh: Edinburgh
Bibliography 317
McFarlane, Brian, Novel to Film: An Introduction to the Theory of Adaptation, Oxford:

Clarendon Press, 1996.
McGilligan, Patrick, Alfred Hitchcock, A Life In Darkness and Light, Chichester, UK: Wiley,
2003.
McKnight, David, Facts versus stories: From objective to interpretive reporting, Media
International Australia 99 (2001), 4958.
McLuhan, Marshall, Understanding Media: The Extensions of Man, New York: Routledge
& Kegan Paul, 1964.
McQuail, Denis, Media Performance: Mass Communication and the Public Interest, London:
Sage Publications, 1992.
McQuillan, Martin (ed.), The Narrative Reader, London and New York: Routledge, 2000.
McRobbie, Angela, Postmodernism and Popular Culture, London and New York: Routledge,
1985.
Mead, George Herbert, The nature of aesthetic experience, International Journal of Ethics
36 (1926), 38293.
Metz, C., The Imaginary Signifier: Psychoanalysis and the Cinema, trans. Celia Britten et al.,
Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1982.
Moi, Toril (ed.), The Kristeva Reader, New York: Columbia University Press, 1986.
Mulvey, Laura, Visual pleasure and narrative cinema, in Charles Harrison and Paul
Wood (eds), Art in Theory 19001990: An Anthology of Changing Ideas, Oxford: Blackwell,
1992.
Neale, S.,Studying genre in G. Creeber (ed.), The Television Genre Book, pp. 13.
Nelmes, Jill (ed.), An Introduction to Film Studies, London and New York: Routledge, 1996.
OShaughnessy, Michael, and Jane Stadler, Media and Society: An Introduction, 2nd edn,
Melbourne: Oxford University Press, 2002.
OSullivan, T., J. Hartley, D. Saunders, M. Montgomery and J. Fiske, Key Concepts in Com-
munication and Cultural Studies, London: Routledge, 1994.
OToole, Michael, The Language of Displayed Art, London: Leicester University Press, 1994.
Perloff, Marjorie, Radical Artifice: Writing Poetry in the Age of Media, Chicago: University
of Chicago Press, 1991.
Phillips, G., and M. Lindgren (eds), The Australian Broadcast Journalism Manual,
Melbourne: Oxford University Press, 2002.
Poster, Mark, Critical Theory and Poststructuralism: In Search of a Context, Ithaca and
London: Cornell University Press, 1989.
Postman, Neil, Amusing Ourselves to Death, New York: Viking, 1985.
Pottker, H., News and its communicative quality: The inverted pyramid when and why
did it appear?, Journalism Series 4.4 (2003), 50111.
Potts, James, Radio in Australia, Sydney: Allen & Unwin, 1989.
Propp, Vladimir, Morphology of the Folktale, 2nd edn, Austin: Texas University Press,
1968.
Putnis, P., Displaced, Recut and Recycled: File-tape in Television News, Centre for Journalism
Research and Education, Bond University, Qld, 1994.
Pynchon, Thomas, The Crying of Lot 49, New York: Harper & Row, 1986.
Ray, Robert B., The field of literature and film , in James Naremore (ed.), Film Adaptation,
London: Athlone Press, 2000, pp. 3853.
Reddy, Michael, The conduit metaphor A case of frame conflict in our language about
language, in Andrew Ortony (ed.), Metaphor and Thought, Cambridge: Cambridge Uni-
versity Press, 1979, pp. 284324.
318 Bibliography
Ricketson, M., True stories: The power and the pitfalls of literary journalism, in S. Tapsall
and C. Varley (eds), Journalism Theory in Practice, Melbourne: Oxford University Press,
2000.
Ricoeur, Paul, Time and Narrative, 3 vols, Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 198488.
Rimmon-Kenan, Shlomith, Narrative Fiction: Contemporary Poetics, London and New
York: Methuen, 1983.
Salinger, J. D., The Catcher in the Rye, London: Penguin, 1994.
Saussure, Ferdinand, Course in General Linguistics, New York: McGraw-Hill, 1966.
Schudson, Michael, Discovering the News: A Social History of American Newspapers, Basic
Books: New York, 1978.
Schulz, Julianne, Reviving the Fourth Estate: Democracy, Accountability and the Media,
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1998.
Selby, Keith, and Ron Cowdery, How to Study Television, London: Macmillan, 1995.
Shingler, M., and C. Wieringa, On Air: Methods and Meanings of Radio, London and New
York: Arnold, 1998.
Silverman, Kaja, The Subject of Semiotics, New York and Oxford: Oxford University Press,
1983.
Smith, Barbara Hernstein, Narrative versions, narrative theories, Critical Inquiry 7 (1980),
20918.
Smith, Jen, Tabloid television, Polemic 3.2 (1992), 1203.
Sperry, Sharon, Television News as Narrative, in R. Adler (ed.), Understanding Television:
Essays on Television as a Social and Cultural Force, New York: Praeger, 1981.
Spivak, Gayatri Chakravorty, Translators preface, in Jacques Derrida, Of Grammatology,
Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1976.
Swingewood, Alan, Cultural Theory and the Problem of Modernity, London: Macmillan,
1998.
Tarkovsky, A., Sculpting in Time: Reflections on the Cinema, trans. Kitty Hunter Blair,
London: Bodley Head, 1986.
Thomas, Bronwen, Piecing together a mirage: Adapting The English Patient for the
screen, in Robert Giddings and Erica Sheen (eds), The Classic Novel: From Page to Screen,
Manchester and New York: Manchester University Press, 2000, pp. 197232.
Thompson, Geoff, Introducing Functional Grammar, London and New York: Edward
Arnold, 1996.
Todorov, T., The Poetics of Prose, trans. Richard Howard, Ithaca, NY: Cornell University
Press, 1977.
Toolan, Michael, Narrative: A Critical Linguistic Introduction, London and New York:
Routledge, 1991 (first published 1988).
Truffaut, Francois, Hitchcock, rev. edn, New York: Touchstone, 1985.
Tulloch, J., Watching Television Audiences: Cultural Theories and Methods, London: Arnold,
2000.
Tunstall, Jeremy, Journalists at Work, London: Constable, 1971.
Turner, G., The uses and limitations of genre, Genre, hybridity and mutations,
Genre, format and live television, in G. Creeber (ed.), The Television Genre Book,
pp. 47.
Turow, Joseph, Media Today: An Introduction to Mass Communication, Boston and New
York: Houghton Mifflin, 2003.
Uspensky, Boris, A Poetics of Composition, The Structure of the Artistic Text and Typology of
a Compositional Form, Berkeley: University of California Press, 1973.
Bibliography 319
Vertov, D., Kino-Eye: The Writings of Dziga Vertov, ed. Annette Michelson, trans. Kevin
OBrien, London and Sydney: Pluto Press, 1984.
Vinaver, Eugene (ed.), Malory: Works, 2nd edn, London: Oxford University Press, 1977.
Watson, James, Media Communication: An Introduction to Theory and Process, 2nd edn,
Basingstoke and New York: Palgrave Macmillan, 2003.
Whitaker, Brian, News Limited, London: Minority Press Group, 1981.
Wilkes, G. A., A Dictionary of Australian Colloquialisms, Sydney: Sydney University Press,
1978.
Williams, Kevin, Understanding Media Theory, London: Arnold, 2003.
Williams, Raymond, Problems in Materialism and Culture: Selected Essays, London: Verso,
1980.
Television: Technology and Cultural Form, 2nd edn, London: Routledge, 1990.
Ytreberg, Espen, Moving out of the inverted pyramid: Narratives and descriptions in
television news, Journalism Studies 2.3 (2001), 35771.
Zizek, Slavoj, The obscene object of postmodernity, in Elizabeth Wright and Edmond
Wright (eds), The Zizek Reader, Oxford: Blackwell, 1999, pp. 3752.
Websites
Archival Moving Image Materials of the United States Library of Congress:
www.itsmarc.com/crs/arch0391.htm; viewed 6 November 2004.
Australian Broadcasting Corporation, Radio National: www.abc.net.au/rn/arts/airplay/
s350575.htm; viewed 9 November 2004.
British Broadcasting Corporation: www.bbc.co.uk/writersroom/writing/tvcomedy.shtml;
British sit-coms: www.wordiq.com/definition/Britcom; viewed 19 October 2004.
Brown, Mary Ellen and Barwick, Linda, Fables and endless genealogies: Soap opera and
womens culture, Continuum: The Australian Journal of Media and Culture 1.2 (1987),
wwwmcc.murdoch.edu.au/ReadingRoom/1.2/Brown.html; viewed 19 October 2004.
Brown University media courses: www.brown.edu/Departments/MCM/courses/MC11/
outline/TV narrative outline.htm; viewed 14 October 2004.
Chandler, Daniel: www.aber.ac.uk/media/modules/TF33120; viewed 4 September 2002.
Gough, L. (2000). The Mermaids Tail: www.lucy.gough.care4free.net/
TheMermaidsMonologue.htm; viewed 9 November 2004.
Grossberg, Josh: http://primetimetv.about.com; viewed 26 October 2004.
Massachusetts Institute of Technology: http://web.mit.edu/mr mole/www/seinfeld.pdf;
Playwriting: www.vcu.edu/artweb/playwriting; viewed 6 September 2002.
Sheehan, Helena: www.comms.dcu.ie/sheehanh/itvsoap.htm; viewed 2 September 2002.
Taflinger, Richard F.: www.wsu.edu:8080/taflinge/sitcom.html; viewed 19 October 2004.
Television history: www.tvhistory.tv; viewed 12 October 2004; www.museum.tv/archives/
etv/S/htmlS/soapopera/soapopera.htm; viewed 19 October 2004.
Warhol, Robyn R., Feminine intensities: Soap-opera viewing as a technology of gender,
Genders 28 (1998); www.genders.org/g28/g28 intensities.html; viewed 18 October 2004.
Wikipedia: http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Television series; viewed 12 October 2004;
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Situation comedy; viewed 12 September 2004.
Index
Note that film and book titles starting with A or The are filed under their second word;
i.e. Godfather, The
24 (TV show) 154, 160, 162, 168 agenda-setting by print news media 2234
2BL radio 210, 21213 Airplay (radio series) 197
2UE radio 210, 21213 Almasy (character) 113
30-degree rule 120 ambient noise, on radio 195
180-degree rule 120 Americans see war as mistake (article) 248,
2001: A Space Odyssey (film) 66 253
Amusing Ourselves to Death (book) 218
Abbott, H. Porter 42, 49, 281 anachrony in film-making 6971
ABC 161, 196, 210, 21213 analepsis 70
aberrant decoding 173 and, clauses joined by 43
Aboriginals, depiction in news 223, 2245, angles for news stories 2334, 250, 257
234 anisochronic film texts 64
abstract of narrative 14 anterior tense, in film 78
accuracy of news reporting 229 appraisal in print news 254
acoustics on radio 195, 197 Aragorn (character) 103, 111
action movies 102 Aristotle 1819, 2930, 42
actuality pieces (news stories) 149, 151, 205, 214 Arrive dun train en gare (film) 48
adaptation of novels to film 96107, 110 As the World Turns (soap opera) 183
advertising associative focalisation 91
audiences for 4, 162 assumed audience, see illocutionary audience
in magazines 27880, 2957 asymmetrical compositions 104
narratives in 28599 atemporality 24
in print 4, 224, 259 atmospheric noise, on radio 195
as problem-solving 5 audience
on television 131, 160 in communication theory 155
advertorials 278 construction of 56
affective response to film 43, 68, 91 for magazines 296, 2978
Age of Innocence (film) 80 segmentation for advertising 4
agency for TV shows 139, 160, 174
choice of genre and 168 AustLit Database 274
in communication theory 155 Australia
in magazines 27880 public broadcasters 161
removed by nominalisation 251 TV programming 162
in TV shows 15660 TV watching habits 180
320
Index 321
Australian Broadcasting Corporation 161, 196, characters, see also stereotyped characters
210, 21213 in film 10911
Australian (newspaper) 246 knowledge held by 73
Australian Womens Weekly, see Womens Weekly in print news 237, 248
(magazine) in radio news 208
auteur theory 84, 98 in sitcoms 1778
authenticity in comedy 176, 178 in soap operas 184
authorised columns 277 on TV, aspirations based on 181
authors, filmic equivalents of 835 in TV news 148
Chatman, Seymour 257, 99
back stories 101 chronology, see temporality
Bakhtin, Mikhail 20, 30 Cider House Rules (film) 96
Bal, Mieke 37, 3841 cinema, see film-making
balanced presentation of news 228 Citizen Kane (film)
Bambi (film) 52 authorial voice 84
Barthes, Roland 67, 40, 304 descriptive pauses 68
battle scenes, in film 102 ellipsis in 66
Battleship Potemkin (film) 66 modernism of 56
Baudrillard, Jean 303, 304 montage in 67
BBC, writing for 1778, 192 order in 6971
Beckham, Victoria 280 temporality 65
Benjamin, Walter 30 variable focalisation 89
Benny, Jack 193 Clansman, The (film) 54
Bill, The (TV show) 1338, 154 class, see demographics of magazine readers
binary oppositions in news 145 Classical narrative, see Hollywood realism
Birth of a Nation (film) 535 classification of magazines 2736
Blade Runner (film) 90 Clinton presidency, news coverage 150
Blue Velvet (film) 889 close-ups 68, 902
body language in news images 262 closure 102, 129, 2346
Bonfire of the Vanities (film) 81 coherence in TV series 158
Boromir (character) 110 cohesion 11719, 257, 258
Bourdieu, Pierre 97 collocational sets 257
branding 176, 281, 298 colour, use in composition 169, 262
Britain, sitcoms in 176 Comedy of Danger (radio play) 194
broadcast news, see radio; television comedy, on radio 192, 193; see also sitcoms
bundles of relation 34 commercial film-making 3
commercial print media 223, 2245
call to attention 203 commercial radio 203, 206, 209, 210, 21213
Calvin Klein, product placement 3 commercial television 4, 131
camera techniques 11416, 168, 182, 2613; see commodification 3, 306
also technical codes commonsense stance, news reporting 239
capitalism, economics of 304 communication, models of 1556
Caravaggio (character) 112 communication tradition, in news 144
cars, advertising for 2914 completeness of news coverage 229
Casablanca (film) 71 composition of printed news images 261, 264,
cash for comment scandal 216 265
Catcher in the Rye (book) 86 conduit model 1556
categorisation conflict, news value of 207
expectations derived from 167, 248 conjunction, in print news 257
of magazines 2736 connotation and denotation 6, 301
cause and effect 240, 251; see also post hoc ergo construction of print news 218
propter hoc construction of TV series 16971
celebrities 204, 280, 296 consumerism, role of the media in 286, 305
centred biography 134 contacts, see sources of news
Channel 10, genres supported by 138 continuity editing, see editing
322 Index
Conversation, The (film) 72 for television 129

Cooper, James Fenimore 12, 15, 1617 of TV series 16971
Cooper, William 1617 editorial content in magazines 27880,
Coppola, Francis 72, 76 2957
copy reads, see reads (news stories) education sector, news value 234
Coronation Street (TV show) 173 Eisenstein, Sergei 66, 82
Cracker (TV show) 136 ellipsis 66, 257
creative activity 1568; see also agency Empire (film) 62
crime, individualist explanation for 138 engaged journalism 144
Crisell, Andrew 191, 197201 English Patient, The (novel and film) 100, 103
critical analysis of texts, genres in 127 cohesion in 118
cross-over films 4 film editing 121
cultural theory 2, 34, 296 focalisation 11214
cut in the real 55 music in 109
cuts (film) 502, 121, 122; see also ellipsis settings 1067
shot composition in 105
Daily Telegraph (UK newspaper) 246 epic, as a genre 19
Das Kabinett des Doktor Caligari (film) 79, 153 epistemological unreliability of sound 1935
deconstruction 38 ergativity 249
dead air 195 establishing shots 68, 119
decentred biography 134 European modernism 56, 153
deictics, in print news 258 evaluation in print news 254
Deleuze, Gilles 22 ex-nominating process 173
demographics of magazine readers 2978 expectations for TV genres 1678
denotation and connotation 6, 301 experience, structuring of 1518
Derrida, Jacques 38 extradiegetic narration 89, 11214
descriptive pauses in film-making 67 eye-line matching 91, 121
Desperate Housewives (TV show) 176, 178
diegesis 1819, see also story fabula, see story
diegetic sounds 1089 facial close-ups 68, 902
in film 523, 98 factuality of news reports 230
location of 7981 fade-out and fade-in 122
in TV news 150 fairy stories, events in 31, 97
in TV series 166 false consciousness 287
directors, authorial role of 835, 97 Far Away (play) 22
discourse 36, 24567; see also narrative fashion magazines 275
discursive norms, see public idiom of fictive we, in TV news 148
newspapers field 99104, 165
dissolve (film) 122 Fight Club (film) 78, 79
documentary genre 125 figures of speech 16, 23, 252
domestic comedy genre 175 film-making
Dr Strangelove, or How I Learned to Stop adapting novels 96107
Worrying and Love the Bomb (film) 80 commercial basis 3
drama, on radio 191202 juxtaposition in 43
dramatic comedy genre 175 narrative time in 6072
dramatists, see writing narrative voice in 7385
du Maurier, Daphne 74; see also Rebecca stories and plots in 4759
dumbing down, see tabloidisation of news visual cohesion in 10822
duration 13, 41, 649 film noir 80
first-person narration 77, 90
easy figures 16, 23, 252 fixed focalisation 89
economic function of media 34, 223, flashbacks 70
2245 flow, on television 130
editing focalisation, see also points of view
for film 47, 11922 in adapting novels to film 98
printed news images 263 in film 8990, 11115
Index 323
in letter-writing 13 Hero With a Thousand Faces, The

in print news 23840, 254 (book) 101
focus of news images 262 heterodiegetic narration 11214
focused chain of events 145, 146 heteroglossia 20
folk tales 31, 97 histoire, see story
Formalism 302 Hitchcock, Alfred, see also Rebecca
format, on television 129 demonstrates use of shot sequence
fragmentation, in postmodernism 153 43
framing the event 49, 263 interview with Truffaut 94
freedom, concept in media narratives 6 Rope (film) 64
Freedom of the City (play) 237 Hollywood realism
freeze frame 63 of adapted novels 115, 118
frequency, in film-making 71 classical narration 535
Friends (TV show) 176 editing for 119
Frodo (character) 102, 109 in news coverage 1457
front-page lead stories 260 vs. television narrative 129
Full Metal Jacket (film) 63 Holme Building newsagency 273
Home and Away (TV show) 162
Garcon! Youre slow, surly and at last youve Homer 70
admitted it (article) 220, 223, 2245, 227 homodiegetic narration 79,
gate-keeping, in print news media 221 11214
gaze, oral interaction versus 166 horror films 82
gender differences How to Study Television (book) 297
in film watching 87 human interest stories 141, 244; see also
in news coverage 250 soft news
in soap opera watching 181, 183, 186 humanising element of narration 76
Genette, Gerard 257 humanist theories 29
on anachrony 6971 hyperreality 303
on duration 13
on film 64 icon, index and symbol 21, 263
narrative theory 40 iconography 22
on stories within stories 19 on radio 197
genres 2, 3 on television 126
in magazines 27184 of visual images 263
of print news stories 225 ideal type of genre 127
of radio drama 197201 ideational function 245
of sitcoms 175 identification 87, 179
in television 12539, 1658 ideogram theory of poetry 288
Giorgio, advertising for 288 ideology
Godfather, The (film) 76 determines authenticity 176,
grab (news) 205 178
grand master stories 15 as false consciousness 287
graphology of print news 259 focus on 29
Great Gatsby, The (book) 79 in newspapers 247
Griffith, D.W. 535 of print news media 230
Groundhog Day (film) 72 in soap operas and sitcoms 1727,
Guardian (UK newspaper) 246 17881
Guide to the Wilderness (book) 17 spoken subject and 162
of television genre 133
habitus 97 of television news 141
handwritten letters 11 illocutionary audience 155
hard news ideology and 162
modes of 228 for newspapers 247
as narrative 232 for radio news 204
narrative style 239 tenor aimed at 166
vs. soft 143, 226 for TV series 1614
324 Index
images lens type, effect of 169

in advertising 288 Les Quatre cent coups (film) 64
in magazines 276 letter, as medium 11
in print news 2607 letters to the editor 279
in TV news 150, 151 Levi-Strauss, Claude 335, 208
Impact of advertising on the British mass lhistoire, see story
media (article) 2957 Life Lines 15
impartiality in news reporting 230 lifestyle journalism 147, 224; see also soft news
implied authors 83 lighting, of printed news images 262
in-studio shots 182 limitation, in Rebecca 935
index, icon and symbol 21, 263 linguistic theory 25, 323
individuality little magazines 275
emphasis on 129, 242 live crosses (news stories) 149
links with consumerism 297 live voice-overs (news stories) 149
in print news 2378 location, see iconography
inequalities of cultural provision 296 Lord of the Rings: The Fellowship of the Ring
information tradition 144, 2258, (book and film) 1013
287 cohesion in 118
infotainment genre 242 editing in 119
Internet 305 settings 105
interpellators 216, 247 shot composition in 105
interpersonal function 245, 2526 sound in 108
intertextuality 20 Lost (TV show) 176, 178
interviews on radio 215 Lowe, N.J. 156, 186
intro plus voicer (news story) 205 LVOs in news stories 149
inverted pyramid approach Lyotard, Jean-Francois 15, 39, 303
in print news media 228, 236
radio news and 2068 Macbeth (play) 78
TV news and 1425 magazines 4, 27184
Ironside (TV show) 172 magic in advertising 28590
isochronic film texts 64 male gaze 87
Ivan the Terrible, Part One (film) 82 Man With a Movie Camera (film) 51
marketing 295, 297
journalistic criteria for news 141 mass audience 5
journals, see magazines Matrix, The (film) 78, 119
McCarthyism 179
Kidman, Nicole 281 McQuillan, Martin 28, 32
Kill Bill: Vol. 1 (film) 76 Mead, George Herbert 226
King of Comedy (film) 63 meaning, instability of 300
knowledge held by characters 73 mechanical process of film 86
Koyaanisqatsi (film) 63 media myths 7
Kubrik, Stanley 66, 80 media structure narrative, see structural
Kuleshov, Lev 43, 91 analysis
Kurosawa, Akira 71, 83, 89 Media Studies: A Reader (book) 28590
media texts, see texts
La Passion de Jeanne dArc (film) 95 media theory 2
La Region Centrale (film) 86 Media will pay for trial collapse (article) 220,
La Regle du Jeu (film) 65 222, 223, 2245
Lady in the Lake (film) 92 Memento (film) 578, 89
language 25, 323 men, see gender differences; male gaze
language-based narrative, see texts Mermaids Tail (radio play) 198201
langue 32; see also story metafunctions in visual images 2637
LArrive dun train en gare (film) 48 metalanguages, myths as 67
layout 259, 290, 291 metanarratives 15, 132, 303
lead-and-body structure 143, 233, 234 metaphor 23
Index 325
metonymy 23, 173 Narrative Discourse: An Essay in Method

mimesis 1819 (book) 40
vs. diegesis, in adapting novels to film 98 narrativisation of news, see tabloidisation of
images in TV news 150, 151 news
mini-series 132; see also serials vs. series narratology 32, 35
mise en page, see layout Narratology (book) 3841
mise en scene 47, 1047; see also iconography narrators 13, 111, 239
modality naturalism, in printed news images 265
and print news 253, 256, 265 neutrality in news reporting 230
in The English Patient 114 New book claims Bush took drugs (article) 248,
mode 2526
in adapting novels to film 99104 New Idea (magazine) 281
cohesion in 11719 news
for hard news 233 in print media 218, 221
ideology and 162 on radio 20317
for letter-writing 12 on television 14052
for radio news 20914 newspapers
on television 126 advertising in 4
modernist narration of film 557 history of 143
Monsters, Inc (film) 95 lifestyle supplements 147
montage 47, 67, 82 narrative in 218
Monty Python and the Holy Grail (film) 66 Nixon presidency, news coverage 150
moral panic news stories 234 nominal groups 256
movies, see film-making nominalisation, in print news 251
Mulholland Drive (film) 302 non-commercial radio and TV, see public
multi-tracking, in radio drama 198, broadcasters
198201 non-fiction genres 140
multiple focalisation 89 non-linearity of soap operas 182
music (see also sound) non-realistic texts, see postmodernism
in film 82, 109 Nova FM radio 210, 21213
in radio news 213, 214 novels
in TV news 148 adapting to film 96107
My Own Private Idaho (film) 71 description in, vs. films 68
mythos, see plot early, narrative in 29
myths 67, 138 voices in 747
NRK Television news 144
narration 37
narrative 17; see also segmentation; structural object-oriented stories 287
analysis; voice objectivity
cinematic revolution in 49 markers of 232
concepts in 1127 nominalisation and 251
existents in 280 in print news media 22832
in film 6072 in TV news 1425
grammar of 35 occupation, audience segmented by 161
in magazines 2804 Oedipus myth 34, 65
narrative presence 813 omniscient narrators 80, 239
in news stories 1457 open-ended formats 130, 146, 182
in police shows 137 optical point of view 92, 94
in print news 218, 23242 oral interaction versus gaze 166
in radio news 213, 214 order, in film-making 6971
in sitcoms 1778 orientation in film, see focalisation; points of
in soap operas 1826 view
on television 12830, 14051,
152 pacing, in letter-writing 13
theory of 2930 packages (news stories) 149, 205, 214
326 Index
paradigms 34 POV shots 92, 94

parallel alternate montage 54 Powaqqatsi (film) 63
parataxis 43 power relations
parole 32; see also discourse; texts determine ideology of print news
Parry, Isabella 1115, 16 media 230
Passion de Jeanne dArc (film) 95 portrayed on TV 163
pay TV licence story (radio news) 207 in print news 256
Peirce, Charles Sanders 201 shown in media interviews 215
Pennies from Heaven (TV show) 127 Pregnant women urged to take iodine (article)
periodicals, see magazines 249
perlocutionary audience 155; see also speaking Prescription Medicines THE FACTS
subject (advertisement) 278
for newspapers 247 presence, narrative 813
tenor aimed at 166 press, see newspapers
for TV series 160 press offices 219
permeable diegetic boundaries of TV 166 primary definers of news 230
person (of voice) 779 print culture 271
perspective 195, 261 print media, see magazines; newspapers
photographs, see images prior tense 78
picaresque novels 29 Private Life of Henry James, A (book) 17
pieces to camera (news stories) 149 Problems in Materialism and Culture (book)
Pierrot le Fou (film) 302 28590
pilot TV shows 159 product placement 3
Player, The (film) 119 production of shows, see agency
playwrights, see writing projected audience, see illocutionary audience
plot, see also story projection of self on to film 87
in Aristotle 2930 prolepsis 6970
in film 4753, 59, 613 Propp, Vladimir 2932, 33, 208
in soap operas 182 proto-narratives, shots as 489
vs. story 36, 99 pseudo-narratives 216
Poetics (Aristotle) 2930 psychographic analysis 162, 2978
poetry theory, use in advertising 288 public broadcasters
points of view, see also focalisation in Australia 161
in film 50, 8695 balanced presentation by 207
in print news 254, 262, 265 dont interrupt narratives 160
police series genre 1338 economic determinants 223, 2245
polysemy of genre 128 news priorities 213
popular entertainment genre 125 public idiom of newspapers 24652, 256
post hoc ergo propter hoc 424, 129; see also public relations companies 219
cause and effect Pulp Fiction (film) 52
post-human perspective of film 51
post-structuralism 302 Quatre cent coups (film) 64
in advertising 28599
defined 2 Radical Artifice: Writing Poetry in the Age of
transition to 2844, 301 Media (book) 288
view of film narrative 98 radio 128, 191202, 20317; see also commercial
Postman, Neil 218 radio; public broadcasters
Postmodern Condition, The (book) 39 Radio Radiance (radio show) 192, 193
postmodernism 3006 Rashomon (film) 71, 89
in film narration 578 re-establishing shots 120
fragmentation in 153 reading directions for English 290, 291
in novels 19 Reading Television (book) 35, 172
realism in texts 117 reads (news stories) 149, 205
in TV series 166 realism in texts 65, 117, 140, 180
Pound, Ezra 288 reality, see Umwelt
Index 327
reality TV 305 silence, on radio 195

Rebecca (book and film) 74, 79 simulacrum 38, 304
close-ups 91 simulation 304
fixed focalisation 89 simultaneous tense 78
optical POV shots 924 Singing Detective (TV show) 127, 129
synthesis and limitation 935 sitcoms (situation comedies) 17287, 305
recit, see narrative sjuzet, see narrative
Region Centrale (film) 86 Sleep (film) 62
register, in print news 2526 slice of life news stories 241
Regle du Jeu (film) 65 Slight Ache, A (radio play) 194
representamen 201, 2637 slow-motion shots 634
research organisations, news from 219 Slowianska Street (radio play) 197
Return, The (film) 82 soap operas
reverberation of sound, on radio 196 back stories in 135
rhetorical figures 16, 23, 252 normal duration of 41
rhizome of unlimited semiosis 22 as serials 132
Ring and the Book, The (poem) 89 on TV 17287
Roosters claim minor ARL Premiership social action 165
(article) 220, 236 social realism 183
Rope (film) 64 social semiotics 245
rounds for journalists 219 sociotemporality 24
Royle Family, The (TV show) 167 Socrates 18
Run, Lola, Run (film) 300, 304 soft focus 169
running (news) stories 208 soft news
Russian Ark (film) 94 vs. hard 143, 226
human interest stories 147, 224
S/Z (book) 40 modes of address 233
Saussure, Ferdinand de 202, 323 point of closure 236
SBS shows 161 structures used in 145
scene filming, for TV 170 Sophocles 65
schoolgirls, soap operas watched by 180 sound 1089, 146, 1935
scopophilic nature of film 889 sound bites, see actuality pieces (news stories)
Scorsese, Martin 63, 80 sources of news 21920, 224, 229
screen time 613 sovereign consumers 5
scriptwriters, see writing Soviet avant-garde film 51
segmentation speaking subject 13, 39, 155; see also agency;
of magazine readers 297 perlocutionary audience
in news 146 speech modes 257, 37, 20914
of TV audiences 161 spheres of action 31
of TV shows 130, 164, 170 spoken subject, see illocutionary audience
Seinfeld (TV show) 1568, 175 spurious narratives 216
semiology 202 stand ups (news stories) 149
semiotics 2, 20, 193 star power (films) 52, 126
serials vs. series 131 stereotyped characters
settings 1047, 126; see also iconography in film 110
Sex and the City (TV show) 162, 176 in news stories 149
shots (film and TV) in print news 223, 2245, 238
constructing a narrative from 502 in soap operas 185
in early cinema 502 stories (news) 204, 221, 243
as proto-narratives 489 story
shot/reverse shot 121 in film 52, 4753, 59, 613
size of 169 vs. plot 36, 99
in TV series 170 in soap operas 182
showing, see mimesis straight reads (news stories) 149, 205
sign, triadic model of 201, 2637 Strike (film) 82
328 Index
structural analysis 1, 301 in print news stories 2401

of adapting novels to film 99104 of voice 779
of Ironside 173 tenor
of police shows 134 in adapting novels to film 99104
postmodern approach 3006 camera techniques in 114
of radio news 205, 208 characters contribute to 109
transition to post-structuralism 2844 focalisation as an aspect of 11115
of TV series 1657 in print news 2526, 264
styles, see genres in TV series 166, 169
subject matter 165 tense (grammar) 77
subject of speech 13 texts
subject-oriented stories 287, 290 of fairy stories 31
subject, speaking 13, 39, 155; see also agency; genre identifiers in 125
perlocutionary audience mode of printed news 256
subjectivity, unstable 302 in print news 245
subsequent narration 78 realism in 65, 117, 140, 180
summary, in film-making 67 of series and serials 164
Sunset Boulevard (film) 79 of TV programs 155
Susie ONeill, new horizons (article) 278 voices in 75
Sydney Morning Herald (newspaper) 246, 275 thematisation of printed news 256, 266
symbol, icon and index 21, 263 third-person narrative 77
symbolic representation 150 thirty-degree rule 120
symmetrical compositions 104, 169 Through the Looking-Glass 36
synecdoche 16, 23 time, see temporality
synthesis in Rebecca 935 Titanic (film) 76
to-be-looked-at-ness 87
tabloidisation of news 146 Todorov, Tsvetan 35, 208
appraisal in 254 Town living in fear over mining deal (article)
journalistic concern over 147 220, 223, 2245, 234, 238
News Limited 246 Toy Story (film) 86
soft news predominating 242 transitivity 105, 249
on television 218 triadic model of the sign 201, 2637
talk, see speech modes Triple J radio 21012
talkback radio 216 Triple M radio 21012
target audiences, see illocutionary audience Tristram Shandy 29
Teachers (TV show) 131 tropes 23
tease leads (news stories) 206 Truffaut, Francois 64, 94
technical codes 168, 2613; see also camera truth-telling, news associated with 140
techniques types of characters, see stereotyped characters
technological changes typographic paradigm 151
effect on television 138
more use of images 2607 Ulysses (book) 302
in TV viewing habits 160 Umwelt 19, 22, 1724
television, see also commercial television; public Under Milkwood (radio play) 194
broadcasters unique speeds, in film 63
genres in 12539 unlimited semiosis 22
history of 128, 179 unstable subjectivity 302
news on 14052 USA, see also Hollywood realism
reality TV 305 film-making 51, 55, 102
series and serials 15371 radio drama disappears in 202
temporality 24 users vs. consumers 286
in adapting novels to film 99 Usual Suspects, The (film) 53, 73
in film 6072
in letter-writing 13 vectors of narrative 105, 264
narrative and time 424 Vertov, Dziga 51
Index 329
video narratives 146 Warhol, Robyn 181, 183, 185

viewpoint, see points of view watchdog journalism 246
violence on television, ideology of 163 wave patterns, in soap operas 186
virtual audience 5 Welles, Orson, see Citizen Kane (film)
Visible Fictions (book) 130 when, clauses joined by 43
visual codes 142, 191, 2637 Who (magazine) 280
visual cohesion 10822 Williams, Raymond 28590, 297
visual cuts (film) 502, 121, 122; see also wipe (film) 122
ellipsis women, see gender differences
voice 257; see also speech modes womens magazines 275
in film 7385, 111 Womens Weekly (magazine) 272, 276, 28595,
in print news 2468, 2526 299
voice-overs writersroom (website) 170, 1778
in film 68 writing
in Lord of the Rings 108 for radio 192
narration by 79, 90 for radio news 20914
in TV news 146, 149 for soap operas 184
voice story (news) 205 for TV series 158, 159
Vozvrashcheniye (film) 82 written narrative, see novels
war on terrorism 141 Ying xiong (film) 82

Warhol, Andy 62 young people, more discriminating 298

Narrative and Media PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Narrative and Media PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Narrative and Media PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

This page intentionally left blank

Narrative and Media

Cambridge University Press

This publication is in copyright. Subject to statutory exception and to the provision of

First published in print format 2005

isbn-13 978-0-511-13240-7 eBook (EBL)

isbn-13 978-0-521-61742-0 paperback

Figures and tables viii

1 Introduction: the power of narrative

Part 1 The basics of narrative theory 9

3 From structuralism to post-structuralism

Part 2 Film as narrative and visual mode 45

9 Film narrative and visual cohesion

Part 3 Television: narratives and ideology 123

11 Television news as narrative

12 Aspects of narrative in series and serials

13 Soap operas and sitcoms

Part 4 Radio and print journalism 189

15 Radio news and interviews

16 Print news as narrative

17 Analysing the discourse of news

Part 5 Popular print culture 269

20 Conclusion: postmodern narrative and media

Limited 2004; Ben Sills/Reuters for Basque nationalists issue challenge to

Narrative as cultural production

Constructing the audience

to interpellate the audience as coherent and unified individuals empowered to

Roland Barthes articulated the importance of language in the formation of ideol-

Narrative is realised in many different media. In this book we look at narratives

Introducing some concepts of narrative

We have lately experienced another disadvantage of a newly cultivated coun-

Narrative and the structuring of experience

master stories (I use the patriarchal term deliberately) dominant in a culture.

Diegesis and mimesis

a representation of an action that is worth serious attention, complete in itself

least, to the effaced speaking subjects of playwright/narrator in telling the story

This use of diegesis/diegetic ultimately derives from Platos category of the

The concept of intertextuality/heteroglossia was first described by the Russian

We can distinguish two main usages of this term:

Peirces triadic understanding of the sign

for something to something

(KNOWN) OBJECT INTERPRETANT

Saussures dyadic understanding of the sign

Narrative structure and linguistics

Table 2.1: Cortazzis transcription of the most typical

Abstract What was this about?

Figure 2.2: Differences of voice

that are impersonations of written factual texts (such as a novel written as a

Histories of narrative theory tend to follow a familiar pattern . . . The story

In this Darwinian account, McQuillan parodies the oversimplification of the

The beginnings of narrative theory

The development of structuralism

initial misfortune or lack is liquidated. Each function is a meaning abstracted by

Table 3.1: Levi-Strauss: paradigm and syntagm in the myth of Oedipus.

Paradigm 1 Paradigm 2 Paradigm 3 Paradigm 4

Cadmos seeks his

a state of equilibrium at the outset situation 1

r story/lhistoire/fabula/(Aristotle logos meaning 1) (Bal fabula) the events in

Table 3.2: Storyline and plotline.